HP Latex 3000 Printer SM

Latex 3000 Printer
Service Manual
version 05/12/2013
Edition 2 Legal notices Warranty
© 2013 Hewlett-Packard Development This document contains proprietary The information contained in this document is
Company, L.P. information that is protected by copyright. All subject to change without notice.
rights are reserved. No part of this document
may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty of any
to another language without the prior written kind with regard to this material, including,
consent of Hewlett-Packard Company. but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular
purpose.
Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for errors

contained herein or for incidental or
consequential damages in connection with the
furnishing, performance, or use of this
material.
Safety
The Warning symbol calls attention to a

procedure, practice, or the like, which, if not
correctly performed or adhered to, could result
in personal injury. Do not proceed beyond a
Warning symbol until the indicated conditions
are fully understood and met.
The Caution symbol calls attention to an

operating procedure, practice, or the like,
which, if not correctly performed or adhered
to, could result in damage to or destruction of
part or all of the printer. Do not proceed
beyond a Caution symbol until the indicated
conditions are fully understood and met.
Table of contents
1 Using this manual .......................................................................................................................................... 1

Purpose .................................................................................................................................................................. 1
Chapters ................................................................................................................................................................. 1
Readership ............................................................................................................................................................. 2
2 Printer systems ............................................................................................................................................. 3

Electrical system: E-cabinet .................................................................................................................................. 4
E-box .................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Substrate path ..................................................................................................................................................... 25
Impelling system ................................................................................................................................................. 31
Print to Paper Space (PPS) .................................................................................................................................. 34
Ink system ............................................................................................................................................................ 37
Carriage ................................................................................................................................................................ 40
Service station: capping and drop detection ...................................................................................................... 46
Printhead cleaning system .................................................................................................................................. 50
Drying ................................................................................................................................................................... 52
Curing ................................................................................................................................................................... 55
Vapor removal ..................................................................................................................................................... 58
Subsystem block diagrams ................................................................................................................................. 61
3 Safety requirements .................................................................................................................................... 76

Printer safety features ........................................................................................................................................ 77
Hazards ................................................................................................................................................................ 80
Safety Check ........................................................................................................................................................ 84
4 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................................... 85
Troubleshooting with Print Care ......................................................................................................................... 85
Print Care login and boot modes ......................................................................................................................... 86
Troubleshooting system error codes .................................................................................................................. 87
Troubleshooting without system errors ........................................................................................................... 265
Print-quality troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................... 311
How to extract and read the service plot .......................................................................................................... 325
Troubleshoot non-HP ink usage ....................................................................................................................... 336
ENWW v
5 Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................................... 340
General diagnostics ........................................................................................................................................... 340
How to run a diagnostic test ............................................................................................................................. 341
Boot mode permissions .................................................................................................................................... 343
Phone support ................................................................................................................................................... 344
Service tests, diagnostics, and calibrations ..................................................................................................... 349
6 Service parts and diagrams ........................................................................................................................ 378

Rear left covers ................................................................................................................................................. 380
Front left covers ................................................................................................................................................ 381
Front right covers .............................................................................................................................................. 382
Rear right covers ............................................................................................................................................... 383
Center covers ..................................................................................................................................................... 384
Covers (structure) .............................................................................................................................................. 385
Vapor removal (1) .............................................................................................................................................. 386
Vapor removal (2) .............................................................................................................................................. 387
Drying ................................................................................................................................................................. 388
Aerosol ............................................................................................................................................................... 389
E-cabinet general .............................................................................................................................................. 390
E-cabinet left (1) ................................................................................................................................................ 391
E-cabinet left (2) ................................................................................................................................................ 392
E-cabinet center ................................................................................................................................................ 393
E-cabinet right ................................................................................................................................................... 394
E-box .................................................................................................................................................................. 395
Printhead cleaning system (1) .......................................................................................................................... 396
Printhead cleaning system (2) .......................................................................................................................... 397
Tube Routing System (TRS) ............................................................................................................................... 398
Print to Paper Space (PPS) ................................................................................................................................ 399
Ink system module (1) ....................................................................................................................................... 400
Impelling ............................................................................................................................................................ 403
Service station ................................................................................................................................................... 404
Substrate path (1) ............................................................................................................................................. 405
Substrate path (2) ............................................................................................................................................. 406
Substrate path (3) ............................................................................................................................................. 407
Substrate path (4) ............................................................................................................................................. 408
Substrate path (5) ............................................................................................................................................. 409
Substrate path (6) ............................................................................................................................................. 410
Substrate path (7) ............................................................................................................................................. 411
Substrate path (8) ............................................................................................................................................. 412
Curing (1) ........................................................................................................................................................... 413
Curing (2) ........................................................................................................................................................... 414
Carriage (1) ........................................................................................................................................................ 415
vi ENWW
Carriage (2) ........................................................................................................................................................ 416
Human-machine interface ................................................................................................................................ 417
Miscellaneous parts ........................................................................................................................................... 418
7 Removal and installation ........................................................................................................................... 419

Required tools ................................................................................................................................................... 420
Aerosol removal ................................................................................................................................................ 421
Carriage .............................................................................................................................................................. 428
Curing ................................................................................................................................................................. 468
Drying ................................................................................................................................................................. 496
E-box .................................................................................................................................................................. 524
E-cabinet ............................................................................................................................................................ 545
Human-Machine Interface ................................................................................................................................. 586
Impelling ............................................................................................................................................................ 589
Industrial design covers .................................................................................................................................... 614
Ink system module ............................................................................................................................................ 659
Internal Print Server computer installation and setup ..................................................................................... 690
Print to Paper Space (PPS) ................................................................................................................................ 716
Printhead cleaning system ................................................................................................................................ 735
Service station: capping and drop detector ...................................................................................................... 770
Substrate path ................................................................................................................................................... 795
Tube Routing System (TRS) ............................................................................................................................... 869
Vapor removal ................................................................................................................................................... 874
8 Call Me @HP .............................................................................................................................................. 905

Using Call Me @HP ............................................................................................................................................. 905
Troubleshooting Call Me @HP ........................................................................................................................... 906
9 Moving the printer ..................................................................................................................................... 909

Introduction ....................................................................................................................................................... 909
Manpower required ........................................................................................................................................... 910
Tools required for repacking ............................................................................................................................. 910
A: Move the printer to a new site (transport temperature below 5°C/41°F) .................................................... 911
B. Move the printer to a new site (transport temperature above 5°C/41°F) .................................................... 935
C. Move the printer to the same site (with ramps or steps) ............................................................................. 936
D. Move the printer to the same site (no ramps, no steps) .............................................................................. 937
Appendix A Cables ........................................................................................................................................ 938
Index ........................................................................................................................................................... 939
ENWW vii
1 Using this manual
● Purpose
● Chapters
● Readership
Purpose
This service manual provides the procedures and information necessary to troubleshoot mechanical faults
and print-quality problems, perform diagnostic tests and calibrations, and service the HP Latex 3000 printer.
For information about using the printer, see the user’s guide.
Chapters
1: Using this manual
This chapter.
2: Printer systems
Use this chapter as a reference for technical information about the subsystems, components, and how they
work together.
Of particular importance are the diagrams included for each subsystem of the printer. They can be useful for
both troubleshooting and disassembly.
3: Safety requirements
This is an industrial printer with high voltages, and it can be hazardous to service. This chapter explains how
to service the printer safely.
4: Troubleshooting
This chapter explains how to respond to various kinds of printer problems that you may encounter.
5: Diagnostics
Use this chapter whenever you need to perform a diagnostic test, service utility, or service calibration. This
chapter is meant to provide procedures and relevant information, not troubleshooting information, which is
in the troubleshooting chapters.
The procedures are described in full, so that you know any relevant values for the test, as well as information
about what the printer is actually doing during the test.
ENWW Purpose 1
The goal of diagnostic tests is to locate the root cause of the problem and the corresponding system error
code or message that will provide you with the logical steps to resolution.
Some diagnostic tests or calibrations must be performed after removing a component.
6: Service parts and diagrams

The purpose of this chapter is to detail all of the available service parts of the printer. This information is
presented in tables, organized by subsystem, and includes the following:
● Official service part names
● Part numbers
● Illustrations of the service parts
Use this chapter whenever you need to order a service part.
7: Removal and installation

This chapter provides procedures for removing and installing service parts. Each service part has a removal
procedure detailed in this chapter, and installation procedures and notes are included as needed.
Useful information such as access notes and screw types (head sizes) are provided to help you work
efficiently.
Whenever you remove or replace a component, check the Service Calibration Matrix at the beginning of the
chapter, which tells you the tests, utilities, and calibrations that must be performed after removing or
replacing a component, and in what order.
8: Call Me @HP
Call Me @HP is a remote troubleshooting tool embedded in the Print Care software, by which customers can
obtain support remotely without the need of a service visit. This chapter describes how to troubleshoot
issues related to this tool.
9: Move the printer

The printer is large and, depending on the scenario, will require special care if you wish to move it. This
chapter covers the four primary moving scenarios:
● Within the same site, over flat ground
● Within the same site, over ramps or stairs (the printer must be lifted)
● To a different site, with no possibility of freezing
● To a different site, with possibility of freezing, which can damage the tubes, causing ink leakages (the
ink must be removed, as it is water-based and can freeze).
Readership
The primary readers of this service manual are HP service engineers, although secondary readership may
include resellers. All procedures must be performed by HP service engineers, except those clearly marked
otherwise.
2 Chapter 1 Using this manual ENWW

2 Printer systems
● Electrical system: E-cabinet
● E-box
● Substrate path
● Impelling system
● Print to Paper Space (PPS)
● Ink system
● Carriage
● Service station: capping and drop detection
● Printhead cleaning system
● Drying
● Curing
● Vapor removal
● Subsystem block diagrams
ENWW 3
Electrical system: E-cabinet
Functionality
The e-cabinet is the power distribution centre for the whole printer. It is an enclosure located on the right
side of the printer where all the power electrical components are located.
The e-cabinet has 2 input AC power lines:
● The IPS power line (single phase)
NOTE: This line is optional; the printer can be configured with a single power cord.
● The main power line to power the rest of the machine (three phase or high current single phase); e-box,
heaters, DC and AC power supplies.
NOTE: To power the printer, a 240 V single-phase or bi-phase high-current connection can be used.
There is no support for powering the printer in single- or bi-phase at other nominal voltages. See the
installation guide and site preparation guide for details and specifications.
The main power is switched on or off through the main switch SW-1, and the IPS power is switched on or off
through ACB-9.
All the AC loads are single phase rated for 200–240 V AC. The main power line is separated inside the e-
cabinet into three single-phase lines. The following power input configurations are supported:
● High line voltage: a 380–415 V line-to-line system (220–240 V line-to-neutral) separated into:
L1-N, L2-N, L3-N
● Low line voltage: a 200–240 V line-to-line system separated into:
L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1
● High current single- or bi-phase at 240 V line-to-line separated into:
L1-L2, L1-L2, L1-L2
The separation into three single-phase lines is done through the configuration cross-connectors in TB-1. For
high line voltage mains a neutral is required, for low line voltage a neutral wire is not needed (and should
never be installed).
Through the TB-1 and the configuration cross-connectors, one of the phases of the main power can be
connected to the single-phase input, so that the printer can be powered by a single power cord. See the
installation guide and site preparation guide for details and specifications.
The picture below shows an example of the terminal block configured:
4 Chapter 2 Printer systems ENWW

Simplified diagram and general electrical explanation
The following simplified block diagram shows an electrical overview of the e-cabinet components and the
link with the external subsystems.
ENWW Electrical system: E-cabinet 5

6
L1 L2 L3
F1..6 AC PSU Drying

RCD-1 K-1
ACB-1 LF-1 DS-1 PCAs
25A
20A 20A
30mA
TB-1
12
11
AC-L3 RCD-2
AC PSU
ACB-2 LF2
9
10
Mains 3 or 2 25A DS-2 Curing
20A 20A
7
30mA
AC-L2 PCAs
5
Phase
RCD-3
4
K-2
3
ACB-3 LF-3
25A
20A 20A
1
AC-L1 30mA
AC
CURING
Chapter 2 Printer systems

MAIN SWITCH
63A RCD-4 POWER Vacuum
ACB-4 LF-4 POWER
25A TRANSFORM
20A 20A JUMPER pump
ACB-9 AC-L0 30mA ER
240V
10A 230V
VACUUM
220V F7 F9
Mains 2 RCD-5 K-3 210V
ACB-5 LF-5 Vapor
Phase (Opt) 25A 200V
20A 20A
TB-1 30mA removal
VAPOR
F8
IPS Screen 0V TF-1
IEC
DC PSU-5
ACB-6 LF-6 Carriage
42V 13V
10A 20A
24V PCAs
IPS 24V
IEC 24V
K-4
42V ISS PCAs
ACB-7 LF-7
32V
10A 20A 24V
DC PSU-3
IEC
42V
DC PSU-1
32V SVS PCAs
ACB-8 24V eCabinet

IEC DC PSU-7
10A 32V
Webwipe
13V PCA
DC PSU-4 PCAs
Interlock
Interlock PPS
32V
DC PSU-6 24V
SAFETY PCAs
RELAY 32V
DC PSU-2
X-1 42V
24V
ENABLE POWER
BUTTON ENABLED TUR PCA
42V
eStops x4 24V
24V
SAX Motor
eCabinet FAN
Media Axis
eBox Motors (x4)
I2C
ENWW
The printer’s loads are all single phase, therefore a three-phase line is not strictly required. However in many
cases the mains line available for the required power level is a three-phase line.
Through the installation and configuration terminal blocks (TB-1), the e-cabinet splits the input line into
three 200–240 V single-phase lines. There is a pilot light on each of these lines (L-1, L-2, and L-3) to provide
visual feedback. The configuration is done by the installation cross-connectors; see the installation guide for
further information on how to connect and configure the e-cabinet for each supported power system.
As a result of all the loads being single phase, the printer is an unbalanced three-phase load when connected
to a three-phase power line. The average power consumption is distributed as evenly as possible among the
three phases, but it will never be perfectly balanced.
Main switch and PC switch

Whether there is an independent single-phase line for the IPS or only the main power line, the main switch
will not switch the IPS on or off; the IPS AC power is switched on or off through the PC ACB (ACB-9).
NOTE: Note that the IPS is a standard PC and should be turned off through the operating system, not by
switching off the AC power.
AC protections: ACBs and RCDs (GFIs)

Through the AC protections, the three single-phase lines coming from TB-1 and through the main switch are
further split into a total of 8 protected lines:
● 3 lines for the curing system, with ACB and RCD (GFI) protection on each line
● 2 lines for the drying system, with ACB and RCD (GFI) protection on each line
● 2 lines for the AC/DC PSUs and the power transformer, with ACB protection on each line
● 1 line for the e-box, with ACB protection
This separation of the AC lines allows us to identify better where a problem with the AC part comes from.
Safety circuit and contacts

There are 4 contacts that switch the AC power of several systems. They are controlled through the safety
relay, see Safety relay activation and safety elements on page 19 for further information.
Power jumper and power transformer

The power autotransformer TF-1 is used to adapt the 200–240 V power input to a 230 V power output. The
power jumper selects the appropriate contacts of the autotransformer and must be chosen depending on the
mains nominal voltage (see the installation guide for more information). The transformer powers the vacuum
and vapor removal pumps. Its output has 3 fuses for protection. On one of the lines there is a fuse for each
pump to identify the problem better if one of the pumps fails, on the other line there is a common fuse of a
higher value.
AC power supplies
There are two AC power supplies (DS-1 and DS-2) to power the IR lamps in the drying system (one for each
lamp module). These power supplies convert the AC input voltage to a lower AC voltage controlled by the
firmware and allow a fine control of the lamps output power and independence from the AC input variations.
DC power and the e-cabinet PCA

There are 7 AC/DC power supplies that supply power to most of the electrical components of the machine
(motors, valves, fans, solenoids, electronics.

The DC power coming out of the AC/DC power supplies is connected to the e-cabinet PCA which has a power
input for each PSU. The e-cabinet PCA’s main role is to distribute and monitor the DC power to the printer
subsystems; it also provides power and monitors the safety circuit.
Detailed electrical diagram

The following is a complete wiring diagram of the e-cabinet.

AC-12AWG AC-12AWG
AC-12AWG AC-12AWG
AC-6AWG [4mm2] [4mm2]
TB-1 [4mm2] [4mm2]
N0
[16mm2]
8x WDU35 N0 N3000 N-LF1 1 2 N-DS1
Delta Sinewave DS-1
L0 1/2 2/1 Line DS1
2xWDU6 L0 N-LF1 L-LF1
3 4 L-DS1 IN AC_IN
N30 N300 3/4 4/3 Filter 5 6
L-LF1 N-LF2 N-DS2
3
L3 L30
L3000 7 8 AC_OUT
11
L3 L31 20A L-LF2 L-DS2
NOT N30 L30 L300
USED N3 33 34 8
K1-33 K1-34
9
2
1
N31 21 22 PWM_CTRL
3 Phase 4 Wires 380-415V L2 L2 L20 RCD-1 LF-1
12 10 8
7
L21
ACB-1 A1 A2
AC-12AWG
ENWW
OR NOT
AC-12AWG K1-A2
N2 N20 N20
USED [4mm2]
5
6
N21 20A [4mm2]
3 Phase 3 Wires 200-240V N2000 Line
1/2 2/1
K1-A1
L1 L10 N200 K-1
L1 N-LF2
4
4
3
3
L11
L20
M8 PE STUD N1 N10
3/4 4/3 Filter L-LF2 Delta Sinewave Curing
N L200 DS-2
1
N11 L2000
NOT
1
L0
20A 1 2 DS2
AC_IN
USED N-LF3 N3-CUR IN
NOT ACB-2 L-LF3 3 4 L3-CUR

N0
USED LF-2 AC_OUT
RCD-2 5 o
SW-1 N-LF4 6 N2-CUR t
1 Phase 100- 20A 8 Curing
63A L-LF4 7 8 L2-CUR PWM_CTRL
240V N31 N310 N3100
AC-12AWG Line K2-33
33 34 K2-34 PCA #6
4
2/1
3
1/2
N-LF3 21 22
L31
[4mm2] 3/4 4/3 Filter
M4 PE STUD L310 L-LF3 AC-12AWG o
A1 A2 t
K2-A2
1
2 L3100
N3 20A
L32
[4mm2]
K2-A1
ACB-3 K-2 Curing
LF-3 AC
20A RCD-3
o
1 2 t
N-LF5 N1-CUR
Curing
N2100 L-LF5 3 4 L1-CUR
N21 N210
1/2 2/1 Line PCA #5
N-LF4
N-LF60
5 6 N-PSU5
3
L21
AC-12AWG 3/4 4/3 Filter L-LF4 7 8
L-LF60 L-PSU5
[4mm2] L210 L2100 o
33 34 t
2 K3-33 K3-34
1
N2 20A 21 22
L01
N01
L22 TB-4
ACB-4 A1 A2 AC-12AWG
RCD-4 LF-4 K3-A2 4x WDU4
20A [4mm2]
o
N10 N100 4x WPE4 t
K3-A1
L10
K-3
3
1 3 N1000 Line Curing
1/2 2/1 2x ZQV4N/2
ACB-9 N-LF5
L100 Filter
3/4 4/3 PCA #4
1
L-LF5
2 3
10A 4 N1
L1000 20A
L13 ACB-5 AC-14AWG t
o
N-LF70
1 2 N-LF700 [2,5mm2]
AC-AWG16 20A LF-5 N-LF700 N-PSU1
RCD-5 L-LF70 3 4 L-LF700
[1.5mm2] AC-14AWG
L010
N010
N11 N110 N-LF61
5 6 N-TF1 N-PSU3
3
L11 [2,5mm2] 7 8 o
Line L-LF61 L-TF1 t
L110 N-LF6
K4-33
33 34 K4-34
Curing
L-PSU3
1
AC-14AWG Filter 21 22 L-LF700
L-LF6 PCA #3
N12
L12
[2,5mm2] A1 A2 L-PSU1
20A N-LF6 N-LF60
ACB-6 K4-A2
o
t
N-PSU2 N-PSU6
10A LF-6
K4-A1
N120
K-4
AC-14AWG
3
N-LF61
N14
L32
N32
L22
N22
[2,5mm2] N14 Line N-LF7
L14 L14 L-LF6 L-LF60
L120
o
1
Filter L-LF7 t
L-PSU2 L-PSU6 Curing

FH-6 FH-5 FH-4 FH-3 FH-2 FH-1 20A
ACB-7 L-LF61 PCA #2
F6 1A
F5 1A
F4 1A
F3 1A
F2 1A
F1 1A
10A LF-7
N-LF7 o
AC-AWG16 N-LF70 DC-22AWG [0.34mm2] t
PE- PSU4
TB-1 AC-14AWG 4x TWISTED PAIRS
[1.5mm2] N-PSU4
PE- PSU6
PE- PSU5
PE- PSU7
6x ASK1 [2,5mm2]
L3-X2
L3-X1
L2-X2
L2-X1
L1-X2
L1-X1
L-LF70
L-LF7
PE- PSU1
PE- PSU2
o
L-PSU4 t
PE- TF1
PE- PSU-3
AC-14AWG Curing
X1
X1
X1
L-3 L-2 L-1 PCA #1
[2,5mm2]
Contactors
TB-3
L010
N010
L-IEC3
N-IEC3
PE-LF1
TB-2
PE-LF7
o
X2
X2
X2
AC-12AWG
10x WDU4 t
N-PSU7
PE-LF2
4x WDU 4
PE-IEC1
[4mm2] 2x ZQV4N/2 AC-14AWG
PE-LF6 DC-10AWG [6mm2]
2x ZQV 4N/2 [2.5mm2]
PE-IEC4
2x ZQV4N/3
L-PSU7
PE-LF3
TWISTED PAIR
2x WPE 4
L 24V PSU
PE-LF5 PE-LF4
PSU-6 PSU-6 N
PE PSU6 +
Ferrite Ferrite PSU6
24V PSU6 -
L-IEC2
N-IEC1
N-IEC2
L-IEC1
PE-IEC3
PE-IEC2
TB-2 GND
4x WPE4 24VDC – PSU#6
IPS
CN2
CTRL PSU6
PSU6
24VDC – PSU#7
CN3
L13
N13
IEC-1
PSU-6
PSU-5 Scan Axis
AC-14AWG DC-22AWG [0.34mm2]
[2.5mm2] TWISTED PAIRS
1 3 DC-10AWG [6mm2] Brushless
0-175 VAC
0-175 VAC
IPS L
24V PSU 42VDC – PSU#5 3R3 SCAN
ACB-8 N
TWISTED PAIR
PSU-7 PSU-7
Screen 2 4 PSU7 + motor
PE 24V Ferrite Ferrite PSU7
PSU7 -
10A GND
IEC-2
42VDC - PSU#1
N-IEC4
L-IEC4
CN2
CTRL PSU7
PSU7
Spare Carriage
CN3
PSU-7
PSU-6
AC-14AWG DC-22AWG [0.34mm2] Carriage
o
o
t
IEC-3 [2.5mm2] TWISTED PAIRS Interconnect

24V PSU DC-10AWG [6mm2]
L PCA #1
PSU-2 PSU-2 N
TWISTED PAIR Carriage
PE
AC-14AWG 24V PSU2 + Drying Interconnect Drying
PSU2 -
GND
PE- TF1
[2,5mm2]
L-TF1
PCA #1 PCA #2 PCA #2
TF-1 Slinky PCA
CN2
TF1-240V PSU2
240V CTRL PSU2

TF1-230V
L-PUMPS
CN3
230V PSU-2
TF1-220V
220V AC-14AWG AC-14AWG DC-22AWG [0.34mm2]
TF1-210V 13VDC 13VDC
210V [2.5mm2] [2.5mm2] TWISTED PAIRS
TF1-200V 32V PSU 13VDC
200V L 13VDC – PSU#4
PSU-3 PSU-3 N
eBox PE
36V PSU3 +
Ferrite Ferrite PSU3 Media Axis
PSU3 -
IEC-4
GND
F1
N-T
Brushless
0V N-PUMPS
42VDC – PSU#1 3R3 MI
N-VR
L-VR
L-VAC
L-PUMPS
N-VAC
PE-VR
DC-12AWG [4mm2] motor
TWISTED PAIR
FH-7 FH-8 FH-9 PSU-3 Brushless
TB-7 AC-14AWG
42VDC – PSU#1 MA
F7 4A
[2.5mm2]
F8 2A
F9 2A
2x WDU4
motor
1x WPE4 AC-14AWG L 42V PSU
PSU-1 PSU-1 N
[2.5mm2] PE-VAC
1x ZQV4N/2 L-FH8 PE Brushless
42V PSU1 +
L-FH9
N-FH7
PSU1 - 42VDC – PSU#1
3x ASK1 GND 3R3 MO
eCabinet PCA
DC-12AWG [4mm2] motor

TWISTED PAIR AC
CN2
PSU1 Brushless Brushless

CTRL PSU1 42VDC – PSU#1 3R3 MF Vacuum
CN3
Safety Relay subassembly PSU-1 motor

AC-14AWG DC-22AWG [0.34mm2]
[2.5mm2] TWISTED PAIRS
L5-X1 X2 X1
L 42V PSU
PSU-5 PSU-5 N ISS
3 X1 24VDC – PSU#2
L5-3
L-5 PE 42V PSU5 +
PSU5 -
L4-X1
L-4 X2
L-4 GND
TB-5 DC-22AWG DC-22AWG DC-12AWG [4mm2]

[0.34mm2] [0.34mm2] TWISTED PAIR ISS ISS
7x WDU 2.5
CN2
TWISTED DC-22AWG [0.34mm2] PSU5 PCA #1 PCA #2

1x ZQV 2.5N/2 PSU5
4 X2 TWISTED PAIRS CTRL
CN3
1x ZQV 2.5N/4 L5-X2

PSU-5
eStop DC-22AWG [0.34mm2] PPS
TWISTED PAIRS
L5-4
32VDC – PSU#3
eSTOP- EN
K4-A2 BUTTON
eSTOP+
Luna Luna Luna Luna
K1-A2
K2-A2
X1-A1
32VDC – PSU#3
K3-A2 AC-14AWG PCA PCA PCA PCA
32VDC – PSU#3
L4-X2 [2.5mm2] DC-22AWG [0.34mm2]
13V PSU 32VDC – PSU#3 #1 #2 #3 #4
L
TWISTED
PSU-4 PSU-4 N
PE
13V PSU4 +
Ferrite Ferrite PSU4 Webwipe
X1-A1
K4-A1
PSU4 -
X1-13
L4-X1
AUX+
GND
TB-6
24V
GND
X1-14
L4-X2
X1-A2
K1-A1
K2-A1
Interlock-
X1-13
Interlock+
DC-10AWG [6mm2]
ESTOP_FB
5x WDU 2.5
TWISTED PAIR Luna Luna Luna Luna
A1 Y1 Y2 13 23 33 41 1x ZQV 2.5N/2
1x ZQV 2.5N/3 PSU-4 PCA PCA PCA PCA
#1 #2 #3 #4
Safety Relay PNOZX1 BY1-3 SAFETY
ASSY
DC-22AWG AC-4AWG
IL_FB
DC-AWG22 [0.34mm2]
BY1-2
BY1-1
K3-A1
[0.34mm2] A2 14 24 34 42 1 3 SVS
[25mm2]
TWISTED BUNDLE
X-1
PE-LEFT PE-LEFT
X1-A2 Luna Luna
2 4
AUX-
X1-14
X1-24
X1-34
BY-1
PCA PCA
24VDC – PSU#2
#1 #2
DC-22AWG
BY1-4
PCA-1 FAN
[0.34mm2] M8 M8 M8 M8
TUR Sensor
M8 PE STUD M8 PE STUD M8 PE STUD M8 PE STUD
DC-22AWG [0.34mm2] LEFT DOOR MAIN BOX RIGHT DOOR MAIN BOX DC-22AWG
FAN_FB
FAN_24V
FAN_0V
TWISTED BUNDLE [0.34mm2]

Luna
Interlock chain PCA
Front door
Vapor removal
Curing
FAN-1 AC PCA
Brushless
Vacuum
Loading table
Sinewave #1 ctrl
Sinewave #2 ctrl
AC-14AWG
[2.5mm2]
VAPOR
PUMP
VACUUM
PUMP
eCabinet
LAN cable
All parts must have UL, CSA and CE marking

Altamiro PPA
HP Latex3000 eCabinet 3 Phase AC
Electrical Connection Diagram Formater + INSTALLATION MATERIAL:
Ferrule or Tongue crimp terminal Tokaheart + ELA - TB-1 CROSS CONNECTORS 1 TO 10 (SEE PAGE 3)
Rev. 1.12 1 Phase AC Spade tongue crimp terminal - ACB9 LOCKING DEVICE + PADLOCK
February 2013 - PADLOCK FOR SW-1
Safety ground Ring crimp terminal - POWER JUMPERS: 200V, 208V, 220V, 230V and 240V
- INTERLOCK BYPASS SWITCH KEYS
Insulated Faston crimp terminal - PG 13 SEALING RING
Electrical system: E-cabinet

eBox - PG 36 SEALING RING
- 2x ECABINET DOOR KEYS
- HP Confidential - INST
9
Internal Components
The interior of the e-cabinet contains the following components:
● Installation and configuration terminal block (TB-1)
● Main switch (SW-1)
● Automatic and residual circuit breakers (ACB-1 to ACB-9)
● 7 single-phase line filters (LF-1 to LF-7)
● Contactors (K-1 to K-4, activation through safety relay)
● Safety relay (X-1, controlled by the emergency stops and enable button)
● 7 AC/DC power supplies (PSU-1 to PSU-7)
● 2 AC/AC power converters (DS-1 to DS-2, power for the drying lamps)
● E-cabinet PCA
● 1 power transformer (TF-1, powers the vacuum fans)
● Fan (FAN-1)
General view
AC and DC areas
This is a general view of the AC and DC power spatial distribution. Inevitably, some AC and DC cables share a
stretch of their routing, but in general they are as separated as possible.

AC input

AC power supplies, contacts, and distribution blocks

Safety circuit, power transformer, and PCA

DC power supplies
Terminal block cabling details

E-cabinet exterior and user interface
Figure 2-1 IPS PC side
The side nearest to the IPS PC provides the user interface and the AC in/out interface

Figure 2-2 AC protections detail

Figure 2-3 Rear details (AC I/O interface)

Figure 2-4 E-box side
The side nearest to the e-box is the DC power output and signals interface.
In case of a blown fuse, an alert will be shown by the Internal Print Server indicating which fuse needs to be
replaced.
PSU configuration
There are seven AC/DC power supplies that supply power to most of the electrical components of the
machine (motors, valves, fans, solenoids, electronics…).
These power supplies have various output voltages and are powered on/off in different moments. Here is a
summary of the PSUs:
PSU# Power Voltage Subsystems ON/OFF status
1 1000W 42V Substrate path motors Safety relay control
Printheads

2 600W 24V e-cabinet Always ON
ISM
Vapor removal fans
3 300W 32V Print to Paper Space (PPS) Safety relay control
Printhead cleaning system
Service station
Take-up reel PCA
4 300W 13V Carriage electronics: Always ON
● Carriage interconnect PCAs
● Drying PCAs
● Fiber-optics PCA
5 1000W 42V Scan motor Safety relay and safety interlocks control
6 600W 24V Curing electronics (Curing PCAs# 4 to 6) Always ON
7 600W 24V Curing electronics (Curing PCAs# 1 to 3) Always ON
Safety relay activation and safety elements

When the printer is turned on, the potentially dangerous systems (heaters and motors) are not powered up.
To enable power to these systems there is a safety circuit controlled by a safety relay.
The systems whose power is controlled by the safety circuit are:
● Substrate axis motors
● Printhead PCAs
● Service station
● TUR PCA
● Scan-axis motor
● Drying AC power (lamps)
● Curing AC power (heaters)
● Vacuum pumps
In order to enable the safety relay, three conditions must be satisfied:
● None of the 4 emergency stop buttons must be pressed.
● The printer firmware must be active and must allow enabling the power (indicated by blinking the
Enable button).
● The user must press the blue Enable button on the side of the e-cabinet.
The power-up sequence is as follows:

● The printer starts booting up by switching on the main switch or starting up the e-box through the
Internal Print Server.
● Among other checks, while starting up the printer checks the status of the emergency stop buttons. If
one or more buttons are pressed, it waits for the user to release them (a message is displayed by the
Internal Print Server).
● When all the initial checks have been passed, the printer waits for the user to press the Enable button
(the button blinks and the Internal Print Server displays a message).
● Once the Enable button has been pressed, the safety relay activates the power to all systems, and the
printer continues its start-up sequence until it is ready to print.
Emergency stop
If one or more emergency stop buttons are pressed, the safety relay will deactivate and cut power to all the
potentially dangerous systems. Once it has been deactivated, the safety relay can only be reactivated with
user intervention, and the three conditions stated above must be satisfied again.
Safety interlocks
There are two safety interlock switches located one at the front door and the other at the loading table.
Those switches control the power of the carriage motor and the heaters in the curing and drying systems. If
either of those interlocks is activated by opening a door, the power to those systems will be cut off. However,
the safety relay will not be deactivated, so when the door is closed the systems will be powered on again
without further user intervention.

E-box
Functionality
The e-box is the main processing and control system in the printer. It is a metal enclosure located at the rear
left of the printer where main electronics are located.
Components
The interior of the e-box contains the following components:
● Formatter: The formatter is the motherboard of the printer, similar to a PC motherboard. Its main
functions are the processing (formatting) of printing data coming from the Internal Print Server and the
coordination of printer subsystems. The formatter provides a SATA connector to the hard disk drive, PCI
express connections to the four engine PCAs, and a network interface to the Internal Print Server PC.
● Hard disk: The hard disk holds most of the printer’s data, including the firmware. However, key data
such as product number, serial number, and calibration values are also replicated in an internal memory
of the ISS PCA 1 in order to have redundancy protection. Therefore, if the hard disk drive fails, it can be
replaced by a new one, and key data are automatically copied from the ISS PCA 1 to the new hard disk.
Similarly, if the ISS PCA 1 breaks, it can be replaced by a new one, and key data are automatically copied
from the hard disk to the ISS PCA 1.
It is important to understand what this means in practical terms: the hard disk and IDS cannot be
replaced simultaneously and can be replaced only by new ones. If hard disk or IDS are not new (e.g. they
come from another printer), the appropriate service procedures must be followed, otherwise data may
be inconsistent.
● ATX power supply: The power supply for the e-box is a standard ATX unit, similar to a PC ATX power
supply.
● E-box fan: In order to prevent the e-box from overheating, there is a fan located on the lid of the
enclosure, electrically connected to the formatter board.
● Engine PCAs: The engine boards control the real-time routines, namely:
◦ Converting the image format to data compatible with the printheads
◦ Sending the above information to the printheads at the correct speed
◦ Running the real-time servo controls for the position and speed of the mechanical actuators
◦ Communicating with other electronics boards that control delegated actuators and sensors
There are four identical engine boards directly connected to the hard disk drive. The following
functionality map summarizes each board controlling tasks:
ENWW E-box 21
Engine PCA 1
◦ Carriage motor
◦ Drying modules
◦ Spectrophotometer
◦ Line sensor
◦ Printhead cleaning motors
◦ Service station motors
◦ Cyan/black printheads
◦ Drop detection for cyan/black printheads
Engine PCA 2
◦ Curing modules
◦ PPS motors
◦ Ink Delivery System
◦ Vapor removal fans
◦ Light cyan/light magenta printheads
◦ Drop detection for light cyan/light magenta printheads
◦ Printhead priming for lower array of color printheads
Engine PCA 3
◦ Substrate path motors (substrate input, substrate output, substrate advance, substrate floor)
◦ Substrate advance sensor (also known as OMAS)
◦ E-cabinet PCA
◦ Printer sensors, such as pinchwheel lever, window sensor, take-up reel control
◦ Print zone vacuum
◦ Yellow/magenta printheads
◦ Drop detection for yellow/magenta printheads
◦ Printhead priming for upper array of color and optimizer printheads
Engine PCA 4
◦ Vapor removal vacuum
◦ Buzzer
◦ Take-up reel sensor power
◦ Optimizer printhead
◦ Drop detection for optimizer printhead
● Engine adaptor PCAs: The engine adaptor boards are responsible for:

◦ Converting the electrical signals coming from/going to the engine boards to suitable voltage levels
required by the machine.
◦ Sourcing/controlling and measuring the logic power needed by the subsystems.
◦ Monitoring signals for enhanced machine diagnosis.
There are four identical engine adaptor PCAs connected to each of the engine boards via flat cables and
to the e-box interconnect via board-to-board connections.
● E-box interconnect PCA: The e-box interconnect PCA centralizes the connectors for the cables going to
all the subsystems (except the printheads). It also has LEDs that enable visual diagnosis without
accessing the interior of the e-box enclosure.
See Troubleshooting without system errors on page 265 for details about connections and diagnostic
LED’s.
● Fiber-optics PCA: The fiber-optics PCA multiplexes the image information generated by the four engine
boards and sends it to the printheads through a single optical fiber.
General block diagram

The following diagram shows a general overview of the electronic interconnections between the printer
subsystems. For detailed subsystem diagrams, see the end of this chapter.
ENWW E-box 23
24
GENERAL EE BLOCK DIAGRAM
mK Enc
Gbe Engine PCA#1 PH int PCA Y Carriage:
Formatter mK Line Pen mgmt +
PH int PCA Y
Fiber Fiber M Sensor drying +
Engine PCA#2 PH int PCA C
Optics Optics M aerosol removal +
PCA PCA PH int PCA C sensors
Engine PCA#3 lm
P2P Gbe
PH int PCA lc
lm
Printheads
PH int PCA lc
Engine PCA#4 Opt
CANB PH int PCA OPT
ELA2
Opt
Scan Axis – Media Path

SA ATX Sensors
Pinch PWM
HDD
Carriage Spectrophotomtr
Pinch Brushless PSU Engine Adaptor
wheel Resistor interconnect
wheel Interconnect
switches
switches #1 .. 4
Dig MI PWM + Enc
eBox Aerosol Aerosol
Resistor DRYING Fans DRYING
1x TUR 2x MF
Enc Brushless Ebox Interconnect PCA Fans
sensor switches Media crash
Ana MA PWM
Media crash
Drying Drying sensor
Enc Brushless Resistor 12V sensor
Swing x8 PCA PCA x8
PCA Dig MO PWM + Enc Lamps AR Press Lamps
Lamps AR Press Lamps
Motor DRV Enc Brushless Resistor sensor
CAN
sensor
PCA Dig MF PWM + Enc
Enc Brushless Resistor
OMAS
Cartridge
Vaccum 5V & 24V
OMAS Acumen 2.x
I2C + CAN
Cartridge
Ctler PCA Acumen 2.x
I2C ISS PCA Cartridge
MICCI2
Acumen 2.x ISS PCA
Cartridge
InkPresSen InkPresSen Cartridge InkPresSen Acumen 2.x
CAN PCA PCA
Enc
PCA
RS485 PCA I2C+CAN
Acumen 2.x Cartridge
Motor DRV
MOTOR MICCI2 PWM
CAN UI PCAx4 Cartridge UI PCAx3 Acumen 2.x
PCA I2C
Enc
Motor DRV 5V
Acumen 2.x
MOTOR RS485 PCA
&
PCA 24V
Window Enc
Intermediate tanks PCA(x2) Intermediate tanks PCA(x2) IDS
switch MOTOR RS485 PCA Motor DRV
PCA
Enc
RS485 PCA Motor DRV
PPS MOTOR
PCA DD Drop Mux DD
Drop Mux
MICCI2 SPI+ENC+5V+12V PCA DD PCA DD
Curing Drop Mux DD Drop Mux DD
CURING PCA DD PCA
CURING Curing PCA1
MODULE Enc Switch
MODULE
DD
CURING Enc
Curing PCA2 MOTOR Switch
Heaterx1 MODULE Enc
Enc
Heaterx1 CURING MOTOR
Curing PCA3 LUNA
LUNA MOTOR LUNA
MODULE eCabinet PCA SINEWAVE LUNA
PCA
Motor
Motor Enc
AC/AC PCA Enc PCA
DRV
CURING PCA
DRV MOTOR MOTOR
Curing PCA4 Converters PCA
MODULE PCA Enc
Pt1000 MOTOR Capping
CURING Curing PCA5
Pt1000 MODULE PSU Web Wipe
DC
DC
DCPSU
CURING DCPSU
PSU
Curing PCA6
SR
MODULE SVS
Interlock
Interlock
Vaccum AC
PCA 24V DC
Transformer 42V DC
eCabinet 32V DC
FAN
Curing(&VR) PCA 13V DC
Array
ATX rails
Vapour removal Data
ENWW
Substrate path
Functionality
The substrate path includes all the elements responsible for providing a smooth and accurate motion of the
substrate, and therefore ensuring a consistent and controlled substrate advance.
Components (roll-to-roll configuration)

The components included in the substrate path are:
● Input spindle, transmission, and motor (rear)
● Drive roller, transmission, substrate advance motor, encoder disc, and encoder PCA
● Pinch mechanism
● Print platen and substrate advance sensor
● Diverters and bottom plate
● Output spindle, transmission, and motor (front)
NOTE: Substrate input, output, and floor motors include a resistor in the electrical line used to dissipate
energy during the braking process and ensure the integrity of the electrical components.
Theory of operation (roll-to-roll configuration)
ENWW Substrate path 25

● The substrate roll is mounted on the rear spindle and is collected on the front spindle. Each of the
spindles has its own transmission and motor.
● The substrate goes from the rear spindle over the drive roller, over the print platen, over the diverter,
and onto the front spindle. The print platen is designed for minimal resistance against the substrate’s
advance, and includes suction holes for the vacuum.
● Vacuum is applied to keep the substrate flat on the print platen. There are different vacuum levels
depending on the substrate used. The vacuum level is determined automatically during the loading of
the substrate.
● The substrate is advanced by the motor of the drive roller. The drive roller system advances the
substrate under control. The encoder disc and encoder PCA provide feedback on the substrate advance.
● There is a pinch mechanism to prevent the substrate from slipping against the drive roller. The pinch
mechanism is composed of 22 covered pinch submodules, assembled along a beam also known as the
loading table.
This beam is articulated to the side walls of the bottom structure and is manually actuated. The
movement is assisted by a pair of torsion springs and two clamps fix the beam in the top position.

● The substrate-advance sensor is an optical sensor, located underneath the print platen. It takes
pictures of the back of the substrate as it moves across the platen. These pictures evaluate the
precision of the substrate movement. The evaluations result in a set of values that describe the
substrate advance error and are used to make automatic precision adjustments while the substrate is
being printed.
NOTE: The substrate-advance sensor cannot see the fibers on certain substrates, such as transparent
substrate or very dark substrates. In these cases, the sensor is disabled automatically.
The image from the sensor is deformed under high temperature conditions and the relative distances
measured are inexact, producing wrong substrate advances and print-quality problems such as banding
or graininess.
The sensor’s field of view is a rectangle of 5 × 1 mm aligned with the direction of substrate movement.
The area of the picture used to perform image recognition on paper fibers is in the central 4 mm, so two
identical fiducials are marked at the extremes of the field of view without impacting in the images used
to recognize the substrate.
The glass on which the fiducials are printed has almost no thermal expansion and the fiducials keep
their relative position.
By comparing the current fiducial distance with the initial one, the optics system thermal deformation is
compensated.

● There are 2 diverters: the upper and the lower diverter. The bottom plate is supported between both
diverters. Diverters are composed of small plastic wheels that create a rolling surface effect. The
diverters create an angle in the substrate path after the print zone. This bends the substrate and thus
isolates possible wrinkles in the curing area from the print zone.
Roll-to-free-fall configurations
The roll-to-free-fall configuration allows the user to cut and collect the substrate as the printer prints
dynamically. In this configuration, the substrate goes behind the roll-to-free-fall roller after passing the
lower diverter (up to the diverter, the substrate path is exactly the same as in the roll-to-roll configuration).
The roll-to-free-fall roller has its own pinch mechanism to keep the substrate under tension and to allow
dynamic cutting.
The drive plate of the roll-to-free-fall system is located on the right side of the printer, besides the output
side plate. The motor transmits the torque directly to the roll-to-free-fall roller via a transmission belt.
In addition to this, the output spindle can be used as a substrate collector. This is the roll-to-free-fall-to-
collector configuration. There is a distance-detecting sensor that controls the output motor when the output
spindle is working as a collector. It keeps the substrate loop within defined limits by means of an infrared
measurement system.
The loop shaper is part of the substrate collection system and gives shape to the loop of substrate that
hangs down from the substrate path. The length of the loop shaper can be changed by removing or adding
sections in order to work with various substrate widths.
The roll-to-free-fall and roll-to-free-fall-to-collector configurations can be chosen in the Internal Print
Server during the substrate loading process.

Dual roll
The use of dual-roll spindles enables the printer to print on two different rolls of substrate at the same time,
significantly improving the productivity of the printer.
An integrated differential system is used to keep the same tension in both rolls of substrate mounted on the
same spindle, regardless of the width or diameter of each roll.
However, for optimum results, it is recommended that both rolls have the same width and diameter.
To fix both cores to the spindle, two independent air cameras need to be pressurized via two air valves
located at both ends of the spindle. For more information on dual-roll usage, see the user’s guide.
NOTE: Differential cannot be replaced independently!
NOTE: For Optimum IQ, the dual roll must be used in Roll to Roll Configuration Dual Roll in Roll to Free Fall
configuration may not work (Output tensions cannot be compensated)
Subsystem power and control

Substrate path motors are brushless motors powered with 42 V coming directly from the dedicated
connectors in the e-cabinet PCA.
There are also four dedicated data cables coming from the e-box interconnect PCA, one for each of the
motors (Media Input, Media Output, Media Advance, Media Floor). Encoder cables go from the MI, MO and MF
motors to the e-box interconnect PCA. The MA motor has a separate analog encoder disc and PCA to process
the motor position. This analog encoder PCA is connected to the OMAS & VACUUM controller PCA.
See Figure 2-6 SAXmiMAmoMF block diagram on page 63.
The platen vacuum pump is powered with AC power coming from the e-cabinet PCA. Note that the AC power
is not distributed through the e-cabinet PCA so the power cable comes from a connector in the e-cabinet back
panel. The pump is controlled by the Vacuum PCA.

Power and data cables for the Vacuum Ctrl PCA come from the e-box interconnect PCA. The vaccum PCA and
the OMAS PCA are connected with a power cable, and data cable and the Substrate Advance encoder signal.
The OMAS sensor is connected to the OMAS PCA.
Note that although the OMAS & Vacuum PCA are 2 different boards, the service part is the same assembly.
See Figure 2-7 OMAS-Vacuum platen block diagram on page 64.

Impelling system
Functionality
The scan-axis impelling system is responsible for providing controlled motion to the carriage across the scan
axis, for the purposes of printing and moving the printheads into a position where they can be serviced and
maintained.
It also includes the delivery system, which is composed of the ink tubes and cables going through the chain to
the carriage.
Components
● The scan-axis motor, located on the right side of the printer, drives the belt that moves the carriage.
Like the substrate-path motors, the scan-axis motor includes a resistor in the electrical line used to
dissipate energy during the braking process and ensure integrity of the electrical components.
● The scan-axis impelling belt is connected to the carriage on both sides, and runs from the scan-axis
motor to the scan-axis belt tensioner. The motor drives the belt, which in turn moves the carriage back
and forth.
ENWW Impelling system 31

● The scan-axis belt tensioner, located on the left side of the printer, acts as a pulley for the scan-axis
impelling belt opposite the motor. Two springs mounted between the pulley and scan-axis sideplate
maintain tension on the belt. When the tensioner and belt length are correctly adjusted, two marks on
the tensioner pins should be visible.
● The scan-axis encoder strip is a metal strip running the length of the scan axis. As the carriage is
moved back and forth by the scan-axis impelling system, an encoder sensor mounted on the carriage
reads the encoder to determine the speed and position of the carriage. This feedback is then used to
control the scan-axis motor movements.
● The carriage chain assembly contains the 7 ink tubes and power and data cables that go to the
carriage, including the fiber-optics cable to control the printheads. It is designed to allow a controlled
bending ratio while the carriage moves back and forth and also protects the ink tubes and power/data
lines housed inside. The following pictures show the cables/tubes distribution inside the chain and in
the carriage clamp. Note that the fiber-optics cable is routed independently through the lower side of
the clamp.

Theory of operation
Carriage movement
A belt is attached to each side of the carriage. The belt is driven by the scan-axis motor mounted on the right
side of the printer. On the left side of the printer, the scan-axis belt tensioner acts as a pulley for the belt,
using a simple spring mechanism to maintain tension on the belt.
Belt tension
Force is applied to the belt by springs on the left side of the printer.

The scan-axis motor is a brushless motor powered with 42 V coming directly from a dedicated connector in
the e-cabinet PCA.
There is also a dedicated data cable coming from the e-box interconnect PCA. The scan axis encoder signal is
connected to the printhead interconnect board 6, and then passes through other printhead boards until
reaching the drying PCA. See Carriage on page 40 and Figure 2-6 SAXmiMAmoMF block diagram
on page 63 for details.
ENWW Impelling system 33

Print to Paper Space (PPS)
Functionality
The scan-axis PPS system raises and lowers the complete top scan structure (including carriage, service
station, and printhead cleaning system) in order to place it at different heights, keeping the correct
alignment between the scan axis and the bottom structure before, during, and after these movements. When
the scan structure is higher than the normal printing position, the PPS has to withstand its weight.
This changes the distance between the substrate path and the carriage assembly, allowing the user to load
substrate and print on substrates of different thicknesses.
The PPS selectable positions are as follows:
● Normal printing position is the nominal printing position and is calibrated and set at the manufacturing
line at 2.3 mm (0.09 in). When the scan axis is in this position, the complete assembly is set onto the
side walls.
● Custom position is used to print on the thicker substrate types. It is a customer-selectable setting.
● Loading position is the highest selectable position; it is used to load substrate. The default setting is
120 mm (4.7 in). This movement can be cancelled.
Components
The PPS system is composed of four independent assemblies, which work together in order to raise and
lower the scan axis of the printer.
● Each motor and transmission assembly is composed of the following parts:

● The PPS limiter is a sheet metal part used as a mechanical limit to the PPS movement. If a problem
appears regarding the PPS displacement, this part ensures that the system location will be inside a
certain range, not allowing the PPS to move to an unsupported position. Thus, this part is attached to
the bottom structure, and limits the lower movement of the PPS using the feature marked below, which
interferes with the PPS motor mount before the system reaches an unsafe position.
● The PPS home position switch detects when its PPS unit has reached its lowest position, also known as
the homing position. The switches are attached to the four side walls of the printer.
Theory of operation
The movement is transferred to the PPS nut; which, rotating around the PPS screw, raises and lowers the top
structure of the machine. The transmission system of the PPS is formed by a helical gear, a pinion, and the
PPS gear.
The homing of the system (homing sensors activated) is the movement that releases the system modules
from the scan-axis structure load. It is made to allow the system to pass through all the backlash distance
downwards.
When the PPS system raises the system from homing position, it travels through the backlash area without
touching the top scan structure. It starts to move the module without load but with the backlash eliminated.
Then there is a contact between each module and the PPS link plate (scan bottom area). This is the engage
position, which represents the absolute zero for the motor encoder and fixes the zero of the Z map for every
module.
The engage position is the normal printing position. Upwards movements to the higher printing positions can
be performed accurately. Downwards movements from custom or loading position to a lower printing
position first need to do a system rehoming to align the system and to eliminate backslash uncertainties.

Each PPS motor has its own Motor Drive PCA. The subsystem is powered with 32 V coming from the e-cabinet
PCA.
ENWW Print to Paper Space (PPS) 35

The power cable coming from the e-cabinet PCA is then split into different branches to feed the four
subassemblies. There is a data cable coming from the e-box Interconnect PCA to control the motors
movement. This cable arrives to the first Motor Drive PCA and the rest of the PCAs are connected in series.
Each motor encoder signal is sent to a Linear to Differential encoder PCA, all of them connected to its
corresponding Motor Drive PCA. The aim of the linear to differential encoder PCA is to increase the encoder
signal robustness and eliminate the electrical noise.
See Figure 2-6 SAXmiMAmoMF block diagram on page 63.

Ink system
Functionality
The Ink Supply Module (ISM) is located on the left side of the printer and delivers a continuous supply of ink
to the printheads. It tracks and determines when an ink cartridge needs to be replaced. The system is
designed to allow ink cartridge replacement while printing (hot swap).
Components
● Ink cartridges
● Printheads
● TRS
● The fourteen intermediate ink tanks (two for each color), located at the front side of the ink system
compartment.
● The air circuit module, located on the first tray from the top, provides the air pressure needed to
pressurize the intermediate ink tanks and send ink to the printheads.
● The two air pressure bottles prevent cross-contamination of ink when a broken bag occurs inside an
intermediate ink tank. Each bottle also works as a cushion device for the air pressurization system.
● The ink circuit module, located on the lower tray, manages the flow of ink using a complex set of
valves.
● There are three ink sensor boards, each with three ink pressure sensors. Each board comes calibrated
from the factory with unique values. New service parts require a service procedure to enter calibration
values manually.
● The ink cartridge connector set connects the ink system to the ink cartridges. The ink connectors also
read the acumen data from the cartridges, and can detect whether the connector is correctly inserted.
● There are two ISS main boards controllling the entire ink system.
● Two ink leakage sensors, located in the lower tray.
Theory of operation
Ink supply hot swap
The printer allows the user to change the ink cartridge while the printer is printing, as it is actually using the
ink stored in the intermediate tanks.
ENWW Ink system 37

Intermediate tank set swap
While one of the intermediate tanks is refilling, the other intermediate tank is pressurized to provide the
correct ink flow to the printheads.
Once the quantity of ink falls below a certain threshold, the printer calculates the amount of ink fired from
the printheads and resupplies the intermediate tank with ink, while at the same time swapping the amount of
pressurization supplying ink from the other set of intermediate tanks.
Low ink cartridge detection

The pressure sensor detects the pressure of the column of ink above. When the column is low (empty
cartridge), the sensor triggers the empty condition. The pressure of a fluid mainly depends on the height of
the column of fluid.
Control of ink to the intermediate tanks

Once the main electrovalves open, the ink falls into the intermediate tanks by gravity. When an intermediate
tank is full, the ink flow stops, which generates a pressure difference that is detected by the pressure sensor.

Air system functionality: the intermediate tanks push the ink to the printheads
The system has two air pumps for each set of intermediate tanks (four in total). The air pressure is
distributed using an air bottle (one for each tank set) with air tubes going out to the tanks.
Each tank has a bag inside that holds the ink. In order to send the ink to the printheads, the air pumps push
air into the enclosed space of the tanks around the bags to pressurize them and force ink out. While one tank
sends ink to the printheads, the other is being refilled. In this way, continuous printing is possible while
changing ink cartridges.
The air pressure is constantly monitored by an air pressure sensor located on the ISS PCAs. The system is
able to depressurize with the relief valves located in the air system.
Intermediate tank broken bag detection

In the event of a broken bag in an intermediate ink tank, the ink system uses the air pressure bottle to
prevent cross-contamination of inks.
When a broken bag is detected by the sensor located inside the intermediate ink tank, the relief valve opens
to release the air pressure of the system. The ink goes at maximum flow and falls into the bottom of the
bottle, preventing cross-contamination of colors.
ENWW Ink system 39

Ink cartridge LED indicators
● Red: Connector connected to the cartridge, but communication problem with the Acumen. Cannot use
the cartridge.
● Yellow blinking: Ink cartridge empty.
● Green blinking: Filling intermediate ink tank or reading Acumen. Do not disconnect!
● Green: Functioning correctly, no problem.
● No LED: Connector not connected.

The ISM is powered with 24 V coming from the e-cabinet PCA. The power cables arrives at the ISM connection
panel, from which the power cable is split into two branches going to the two different ISM PCA boards. The
data cable comes from the e-box, interconnect PCA to the ISM connection panel, and then a LAN cable goes to
the ISM PCA 1. From there, both PCAs are connected in series.
See Figure 2-9 ISM block diagram on page 66.
Carriage
Functionality
The carriage performs the actual printing on the substrate. It contains the printheads, together with the
printhead control electronics, the printhead primer system, two arrays of aerosol fans, the SAX encoder, the
line sensor, the spectrophotometer, and the crash sensor. The drying modules are also assembled at both
sides of the carriage. For more details about the drying system, see Drying on page 52.

Components
The picture below shows a top view of the carriage with its components. Note how the printheads are
numbered by the printer firmware. All related system errors use these numbers.
Theory of operation and component interconnection

Printheads
The printheads fire ink onto the substrate to perform the actual print. Each print is controlled by the
dedicated carriage printhead interconnect PCA.
● Each printhead contains two colors.
● Each printhead prints a maximum swath width of 108 mm (4.25 in).
● The printheads have five dies, and each die has 2112 nozzles (10,560 total nozzles per printhead). The
dies are divided into two arrays of nozzles (1056 nozzles per array, one for each color).
There are two arrays of color printheads, six printheads in total, two of each type (C/K, M/Y, lc/lm). There is a
seventh printhead for the optimizer, which is fired before the colored inks, which has multiple benefits:
● It helps to achieve print-quality requirements at a high throughput.
● It allows lower temperature, which in turn allows increased substrate versatility.
● It helps to achieve color consistency when tiling.
ENWW Carriage 41
Primer assembly
Each printhead houses a primer assembly that is responsible for squeezing ink out of the printhead nozzles
to remove clogging and maintain printhead health.
Each primer assembly includes an air pump that pushes air into a bag inside the printhead regulator. When
this bag is inflated, the ink channel is opened, the ink pressure received in the printhead pushes the ink out of
printhead through the nozzles. This is called ‘priming’.

Carriage interconnect boards
There are two carriage interconnect boards located in the carriage tower. They receive 42 V from the e-
cabinet and 12 V from the drying PCAs. They are responsible for:
● Distributing the required power to all the printhead interconnect boards (42 V).
● Powering the primer pumps (3V3 generated by the board). The upper carriage interconnect powers the
primer pump for printheads 1, 2, 4, and 6. The lower one does so for printheads 3, 5, and 7.
● Powering the spectrophotometer shutter mechanism (12 V). Done by the upper carriage interconnect
board.
Printhead interconnect boards
There are seven printhead interconnect boards, one for each printhead. Each one receives 42 V from the
carriage interconnect boards. They are responsible for:
● Generating the required voltage for each printhead.
● Sending control and printing data to printheads.
● Processing the line sensor signal (printhead interconnect 3).
● Controlling the spectrophotometer sensor and shutter mechanism. This is done by printhead
interconnects 3 and 5 respectively, through the upper carriage interconnect board.
● Controlling the printhead priming. Printhead interconnect 5 controls priming for printheads 1, 2, 4, 6;
printhead interconnect 7 controls priming for printheads 3, 5, 7.
● The scan-axis encoder signal passes through printhead interconnect 6→4→2→1 and then goes to the
drying PCAs.
The are two types of printhead interconnect PCA, one for the color printheads and a different one for the
Optimizer printhead.
ENWW Carriage 43
The crash sensor and aerosol system are controlled by the drying PCAs.
Carriage fiber-optics PCA
This PCA demultiplexes the printing data coming from the fiber-optics and sends the data to each printhead
interconnect board.
It receives 12 V from the upper drying PCA and it is connected to the fiber-optics coming from the box
through the dynamic chain.
Spectrophotometer
The spectrophotometer is used to perform color calibrations. There is a control board embedded within the
spectrophotometer mechanism that cannot be replaced independently.
Line sensor
The line sensor is used to:
● Detect the edge of the substrate.
● Detect printed line positions in order to perform various calibrations:

◦ Automatic printhead alignment
◦ Automatic substrate advance calibration
◦ Service station calibration
Carriage encoder
The carriage encoder set reads the scan-axis encoder strip to determine the position of the carriage on the
scan axis. The scan-axis encoder signal passes through printhead interconnects 6→4→2→1 and then goes
to the drying PCAs.
Aerosol fan assemblies and aerosol filters

There are two arrays of fans at both sides of the printheads. The fans and filters remove aerosol (ink
particles) from the print path to maintain good print quality and component health. The aerosol system is
controlled and powered by the drying PCAs.
Crash sensor
Increase printer reliability and safety in the case of a print platen substrate crash. The working principle is as
follows:
1. There are two fiber-optic light beams, one at each carriage side.
2. The sensor triggers an alarm signal if something obstructs the light beam.
3. On the alarm signal, the control electronics switch off the heater lamps and stop the carriage.
ENWW Carriage 45
Carriage oiling foam retainers
The carriage oiling foams lubricate the rods and bushings that support the carriage. There are two foams
located at the front and rear of the carriage.

As the carriage is one of the main processing centers in the printer and contains the electronics for several
subsystems, all the above explanations refer to the carriage electric and electronic interactions.
See the subsystem block diagrams for more details: Figure 2-10 Carriage print block diagram on page 67
and Figure 2-11 Carriage AR and crash sensor block diagram on page 68.
Service station: capping and drop detection

Functionality
The service station is an assembly located on the right side of the printer. It is composed of two independent
platforms, the capping station platform and the drop detection platform. Each platform has its own motor
and transmision and is operated independently.
Capping is the process of sealing the printheads while they are not in use, to keep the printhead’s nozzles in
good condition.
Drop detection identifies possibly blocked nozzles, allowing the printer to apply the appropriate algorithms
to compensate and maintain print quality.
Components

Capping station platform
● The capping station motor is mounted on the rear side of the service station chassis and drives the
screw that moves the capping station. It is controlled by an independent motor drive PCA.
● The capping station screw assembly is rotated by the capping station motor. The assembly includes a
nut and pin system which is inserted into the platform.
● The printhead capping module is the mechanical part that seals the printheads.
Drop-detector platform
● The drop-detector platform motor is mounted on the rear side of the service station chassis and drives
the screw that moves the drop-detector platform. It is controlled by an independent motor drive PCA.
● The drop-detector platform screw assembly rotates by the action of the capping station motor. The
assembly includes a nut and pin system which is inserted into the platform.
● There is one drop-detector sensor for each printhead, each of which is connected to a Drop Detector
PCA. Each Drop Detector PCA is directly connected to the e-box engine PCAs
● The encoder strip and sensor are used during drop detection to ensure that the drops of ink are fired in
the correct place. The strip is located under the platform and from side to side of the drop-detector
platform.
Theory of operation
The capping procedure
The printheads must be sealed when they are not printing to prevent ink from drying and clogging the
nozzles. The capping procedure is as follows:
1. The printheads are capped by moving the capping station into position underneath the carriage.
ENWW Service station: capping and drop detection 47

2. The capping station moves until the capping module posts come into contact with the carriage bottom
base plate, underneath the printheads.
3. The upper part of the capping station rises into position (shown in red below), pushing the rubber caps
up to seal the printheads. The capping station is forced upwards, capping the printheads.
4. The service station continues to move, pushing the capping head up to seal the printheads.
NOTE: While the printer is turned off and the printheads are in the capped position, it is not possible to
move the carriage. To uncap the printheads manually, rotate the platform screw with a screwdriver; the
screw can be accessed from the front of the service station.
NOTE: If the carriage is moved in capped position, the capping post may become damaged and the capping
module will be unable to perform the capping procedure on the printhead. Print quality and printhead life will
be impaired.
NOTE: To return the carriage to the capping position after work in diagnostic mode, reboot the printer in
normal mode.
Drop detection procedure

The drop detection platform system contains seven drop-detector modules, one for each printhead. Each
drop detector has a window with a sender LED on one side and a receiver on the other.
The printer sequentially fires drops of ink from each nozzle into the window, through the signal path. This
generates a disturbance in the signal that detects whether the nozzle was fired correctly.
Any nozzles that did not fire correctly are then disabled, allowing the printer to compensate and maintain
print quality by using the other nozzles. This is the error-hiding algorithm.

The service station motors receive 32 V from the e-cabinet PCA. Each motor is controlled by a dedicated
Motor Drive PCA. The data cable comes from the e-box, interconnect PCA to the capping station motor and
from there, both PCAs are connected in series.
There are 4 drop-detector PCAs. Each one has a dedicated flat cable coming from the e-box interconnect PCA.
Each PCA controls 2 drop-detector sensors, except the DD PCA 4, that controls only the drop detection for the
optimizer printhead.
The linear encoder signal goes from the DD PCA1 to the rest of the DD PCAs.
See Figure 2-12 SVS block diagram on page 69.
ENWW Service station: capping and drop detection 49

Functionality
The printhead cleaning system is designed to clean the printheads and absorb ink during the priming and ink-
spitting procedures. The subsystem absorbs ink and cleans the printheads with a cloth roll that is
impregnated with non-volatile PEG liquid.
This roll is moved from an input (top roller) to an output collecting roller (bottom roller), while the cloth is
impelled by the advance of the delivery system pressed with the pinch roll, in a similar way to the substrate
path.
There is a rubber blade that moves up and down, lifting the cleaner roll to ensure that the printheads make
proper contact with the cloth.
Components
● The input roll holds the new printhead cleaner roll before it is fed through the roll path. The input roll is
powered by its own motor to maintain uniform tension, and its encoder helps to calculate the remaining
amount of cloth on the roll.
The cleaner roll cores are easily fastened into place and removed using the blue lock at the cap holder.
● The output roll receives the used printhead cleaner roll. The output roll is also powered by its own
motor to maintain uniform tension, and its encoder helps to calculate the remaining amount of cloth on
the input roll.
The cleaner roll cores are easily fastened into place and removed using the blue lock at the cap holder.
● The printhead cleaner roll is moved through the roll path by the drive roller. The pinchwheel
mechanism presses the roll against the drive roller to ensure good contact. The drive roller includes
teeth that grip the roll to help pull it through the path. The drive roller is powered by the advance motor
through a gearbox system.
The pinchwheel mechanism must be opened and closed in order to load and unload a roll. It is important
to ensure that the pinchwheels are correctly closed, otherwise the printer may report false substrate
jams and/or printhead crashes.
● The rubber wiper moves up and down, lifting the cleaner roll to ensure that the printheads make proper
contact with the cloth.

The up/down motion has two main positions. The engage position is the upper position calibrated for
correct printhead cleaning operation, and the disengage position is the lower resting position of the
rubber wiper.
● Each of the four motor systems has its own PCBoard to control its behavior and movement:
◦ Advance motor and advance motor encoder
◦ Input motor and input motor encoder
◦ Output motor and output motor encoder
◦ Engage motor and engage motor encoder
Theory of operation
Printhead wipe
A printhead wipe is a printhead cleaning procedure in which the rubber wiper is set to the correct height, and
the carriage passes over the printhead cleaner, from right to left, without stopping (but making contact and
being cleaned).
This routine can be done before or after printing, and also while printing:
● If an image printing is larger than 152 cm (60 in), a dynamic wipe is performed every two swaths.
● If the image is smaller than that, a dynamic wipe is performed every four swaths.
When printing, this routine is performed every two swaths: that is, every time the carriage is over the
cleaning assembly.
Spitting
In order to ensure the good health of the nozzles, the carriage is moved over the printhead cleaning
assembly, and the system performs a spitting operation in which all the nozzles spit a small amount of ink
over the surface of the wiping cloth. There are two spitting modes:
One spit is performed:
● On the right, every time the carriage is over the cleaning assembly, after wiping.
● On the left, every time the carriage is over the left spitoon
ENWW Printhead cleaning system 51

Priming
Priming is performed in order to ensure good nozzle health and to prevent the nozzles from becoming
blocked with dried ink. Ink floods out of the printhead onto the wiper cloth. This procedure can be performed
by selecting the option in the Internal Print Server.
The priming procedure is also performed on new printheads once they are installed, or when a hard cleaning
is launched from the Internal Print Server.

The printhead cleaning roll subsystem is powered with 32 V coming from the e-cabinet PCA. There is a LAN
data cable that comes from the e-box interconnect PCA to the first motor drive PCA and from there the four
PCAs are connected in series.
See Figure 2-13 Printhead cleaning block diagram on page 70.
Drying
Functionality
The drying system provides controlled heat to the substrate while it is over the print zone, to evaporate
water from the ink vehicle. Together with the latex optimizer, this heat helps in the dot fixing to prevent
bleed and coalescence.
This heat is provided by means of two infrared lamps located on each side of the carriage.
Components
The drying system is composed of two symmetrical modules, one on each side of the carriage.
Each drying module has the following components:
● 1 infrared lamp

● 1 filter
● 1 array of 8 fans
● 1 quartz glass
ENWW Drying 53
● 2 temperature sensors : one after the fans (to measure cold air) and other in the hot air outlet.
Each drying module is controlled though a dedicated drying PCA located at the carriage tower. Two AC power
cables come from the e-cabinet AC converters to the drying PCAs (through the dynamic chain) to power each
of the modules.
Theory of operation
The substrate over the print platen is irradiated by the infrared lamps, whose power level is regulated in
open-loop mode. Each one of the modules is controlled independently and the PWM level can be set
individually.
The two temperature sensors are used only for monitoring; there is no control of lamp operating
temperature.
Each lamp is refrigerated by a set of eight fans, whose power control and diagnosis is common for the
complete array. The fans are kept on in case of emergency shutdown or after the lamp switching off, to avoid
module overheating. Apart from this, there is a safety thermostat to stop the lamp in case of temperature
error or fan failure.
The quartz glass is transparent to lamp radiation and allows redirecting the fans airflow to be evacuated
through the air outlet, following a direction parallel to the substrate. Besides, it helps to protect the lamp
chamber from the aerosol generated in the print platen.

All the power and data cables for the drying subsystem come from the e-box and e-cabinet through the
dynamic chain. The drying lamps are powered with AC power coming from the AC/AC converters. 2AC cables,
one from each module, connect the AC converters with the drying PCAs. The drying fans are power with 12V
coming from the e-cabinet PCA. The cable is divided in 2 branches to power both drying PCAs.

The Control cable comes from the e-box Interconnect PCA to the Upper Drying PCA. From there, both Drying
PCAs are connected in series.
From each Drying PCA a single harness containing the AC, DC and control cable connect with each of the
modules.
See Figure 2-14 Carriage drying block diagram on page 71.
Curing
Functionality
The curing system provides controlled heat and airflow to the ink and substrate after the print zone. This
causes the latex particles to coalesce and form a continuous film on the substrate. Ink pigments are
encapsulated inside this film.
The complete module can be moved horizontally to allow substrate loading. Two latches fix the module in
the printing position.
The lower beam can be also considered as part of the vapor removal system as it collects vapors coming
from curing process that condense into a waste bottle located inside the ISM. For more details of the vapor
removal system, see the vapor removal section.
Components
The curing system is composed of 6 base modules.
Each base module has the following components:
● 2 heater/fan assemblies
ENWW Curing 55
● 2 temperature sensors
● 1 curing PCA, with 2 pressure sensors
● 1 perforated plate
Each heater/fan assembly is controlled independently, so that the system has 12 functional chambers.
Theory of operation
The temperature of each of the 12 air chambers is controlled by means of a closed-loop system that adjusts
the power provided to the heater to reach the target temperature. This hot air passes through the perforated
plates located at the rear side of each base module and reaches the ink on the substrate to allow film
formation.
The air is recirculated to reduce power consumption. However, a net airflow exists from the print zone to the
lower beam to collect excess vapor. See the vapor removal section for more details.
The following picture shows the cross section of a base module:

During the warm-up phase, extra power is applied to the heaters and the airflow is set to the minimum.
During the cool-down phase, the heaters are turned off and the airflow is set to the maximum.
Each heater/fan module has a safety thermostat to avoid overheating. The thermostat opens at 110°C and
its state is monitored by the PCA. Apart from the heater power and temperature monitoring, each fan has
independent power control and diagnosis through the curing PCA. The air pressure is monitored inside each
functional chamber to ensure that the system is working correctly.
The base modules turn on and off automatically, depending on the substrate width, to optimize power
consumption by the system.

Power and control per module
Two power cables are connected to each curing PCA (six PCAs in total):
● One AC cable to power the heaters (two heaters per module)
● One DC cable to power the fans (two fans per module)
Each resistor-fan assembly is connected to the PCA with two cables, the AC for the resistor and the DC for the
fan.
One data cable arrives to each module to control it.
Two temperature sensors (one per chamber) are connected to each curing PCA.
Each curing PCA has a 24 V fan to keep it refrigerated.
Power and control for the whole subsystem
ENWW Curing 57
Power (DC and AC) and data cables enter and exit each curing PCA to connect all six in series.
The curing cable routing is as follows:
AC power
Three AC cables come from the e-cabinet back panel to the entrance connector of the subsystem. From
there:
● One AC cable goes to Curing PCA 1. Curing PCAs 1 and 4 are connected in series.
● The second AC cable goes to Curing PCA 2. Curing PCAs 2 and 5 are connected in series.
● The third AC cable goes to Curing PCA 3. Curing PCAs 3 and 6 are connected in series.
DC power
Two DC cables come from the e-cabinet PCA to the entrance connector of the subsystem. From there:
● One DC cable goes to Curing PCA 1. Curing PCAs 1, 2, and 3 are connected in series.
● The other DC cable goes to Curing PCA 4. Curing PCA 4, 5, and 6 are connected in series.
Data
One LAN cable comes from the e-box interconnect to module 1. From there all the modules are connected in
series.
See also Figure 2-16 Curing block diagram on page 73.
Vapor removal
Functionality
The vapor removal system removes, condenses, and collects the low-volatile co-solvents (VOCs) evaporated
during the curing process in a controlled way. This provides a comfortable working environment and prevents
uncontrolled condensations on the printer elements, thus maintaining printer performance and reliability.
Components
The system is composed of the following elements:
● Curing lower beam
● Heat exchanger
● Impaction filter (demister pad)
● Vacuum pump
● Waste bottle

Theory of operation
The curing beam is designed with a pattern of decreasing holes to extract the same airflow along the length
of the beam. The vapor is driven through the interior of the curing lower beam by a vacuum pump located in
the ISM. Some of the VOCs condense by wall contact along the beam, but mainly through a heat exchanger
and demister pad located in the ISM. The condensates are driven to a 20 l container (waste bottle) through a
drainage system.
The heat exchanger is composed of 4 fans that blow ambient air through the airflow coming from the curing
beam. This lowers the temperature of the airflow and causes its condensation.
After the heat exchanger, there is a demister element to get rid of the high mass particles, which may still be
airborne, by impaction. Those particles, together with the condensate formed in the plates of the exchanger,
are drained into a bottle.
The exhaust air temperature should be similar to the ambient temperature to avoid any visible vapor
formation leaving the control system.
The heat exchanger fans are controlled by a PCA similar to the curing PCA. The vacuum pump is supplied from
the e-cabinet and controlled by a vacuum PCA, similar to the one controlling the print-zone vacuum.

The vapor removal pump is powered with AC power coming from the e-cabinet PCA. Note that the AC power is
not distributed through the e-cabinet PCA, so the power cable comes from a connector in the e-cabinet back
panel. The pump is controlled by the vapor removal vacuum PCA, which is connected to the e-box
interconnect with a data and a power cable.
ENWW Vapor removal 59

There is a PCA to control the vapor removal fans, identical to the curing PCA. The 24V cable to power the
fans goes from the e-cabinet PCA to the vapor removal PCA. The fans data cable goes from the e-box
interconnect PCA to the vapor removal PCA.
Note that there is a connection panel in the ISM, so that all the e-box and e-cabinet cables arrive to this
panel, and from there they are connected to the pump and the vapor removal PCA.
See Subsystem block diagrams on page 61.

Subsystem block diagrams
The following pages show the electrical and electronic subsystem block diagrams.
ENWW Subsystem block diagrams 61

62
eBox
eBox physical connection to

P1
x
PHs (FO PCA, ebox in repair
position)
P4 P5
J18 CZ056-50225 CARRIAGE
P6 P7
J24 PZ OMAS & TUR
VR VAC
VAC ctrl VR fans sensors
P2 P3 TUR PCA
This cable IDS PCA PCA buzzer
PCA
contains the CZ056-50050
CZ056-50238
address for FO CAN
J11:upper connector (ebox in
J9
J8
J17
J11
J16
J10
J15
J14
repair position) PCA on the CZ056-50053 CZ056-50163 CZ056-50057 CZ056-50249
1 assembly CZ056-50239
FO PCA (CZ056-60360)
CZ056-80269 J20:lower connector (ebox in ebox
repair position)

ENGINE PCA 1 (CZ056-60014) ENGINE ADAPTOR PCA1 J_471 PWR
FORMATTER PCA
(CZ056-60005) J7 CZ056-50001 JT1 (CZ056-60004)
Board2Board PH2 Board2
SLOT 1 PCI CONN CZ056-50046
conn <NAME> Board <NAME>
J_241 I2C
J_481 CAN*
J_262 CAN
J_381 CAN*
J_371 PWR
PH3 conn J_302
J11 CZ056-50058 Encoder
J_351 MICCI2
J12 CZ056-50001 JT2 ENC J_321
enc MI
J22
OMAS
J20 JT3 PWR_IN
PH6 J_301 CZ056-50237

ENGINE PCA 2 (CZ056-60014) ENGINE ADAPTOR PCA 2
PH7
J7 CZ056-50002 JT1 (CZ056-60004)
CZ056-50221 Board2 MA
Board2Board
SLOT 3 PCI CONN Board
conn <NAME> <NAME>
conn
J_303 CZ056-50236
PH4 J11 J12 CZ056-50002 JT2
J22
CZ056-50059 Encoder
OMAS
PH5 J20 JT3 PWR_IN ENC J_322 enc MO
CZ056-50252 Ebox INTERCONNECT PCA (CZ056-60005)
ENGINE PCA 3 (CZ056-60014) ENGINE ADAPTOR PCA 3 CZ056-50048

PH1 J7 CZ056-50133 JT1 (CZ056-60004)
Board2Board Board2 J_304
SLOT 2 PCI CONN Board CZ056-50060 Encoder
conn <NAME> <NAME> ENC J2_323
conn enc MF
J11 J12 CZ056-50133 JT2
J22
OMAS
J20 JT3 PWR_IN J_101 CZ056-50045
SAX
ENGINE PCA 4 (CZ056-60014) ENGINE ADAPTOR PCA 4
J7 CZ056-50134 JT1 (CZ056-60004)
J_261 CAN CZ056-50051 CURING
Board2Board Board2Board
SLOT 4 PCI CONN
conn <NAME> conn <NAME>
SLOT 5 J11 J_161 CAN CZ056-50044 DRYING

J_341 I2C
J12 CZ056-50134 JT2

J_431 ODD
J_331 ODD
J_231 ODD
J_131 ODD
J_151 MICCI2
J_152 MICCI2
J_251 MICCI2
J22
J_111 DLT
OMAS
SATA 1
J20 JT3 PWR_IN SPI4 SPI2 SPI3 SPI1
CQ105-50010 WW CZ056-50157
PSU CZ056-50003
HDD 633187-001 = =
SVS CZ056-50054
7x CZ056-50220
691917-001 = CZ056-50112
CZ056-50056
PPS CZ056-50052 CZ056-50138
8121-1044
DD
8121-0796
CZ056-50222 CZ056-50041 CZ056-50267
UP
CZ056-50267
3V3DC AC/
AC
5VDC OUT_7_2
IPS
12VDC OUT_6_2
8121-0796
AC/
24VDC
AC
ECABINET PCA (CZ056-60010)
32VDC
DOWN
42VDC
eBox BD eCabinet
220VAC
Figure 2-5 E-box block diagram
ENWW
ENWW
SAX 1 assembly CZ056-50131 1 assembly CZ056-50142
E>
<N
AM
<NAME>
<NAME>
<NAME>
<NAME>
CZ056-50045
E>
<N
AM
eCabinet
SAX
<N
AM
E>
Ebox INTERCONNECT PCA (CZ056-60005)
J_101
1 assembly CZ056-50225 1 assembly CZ056-50226
E>
<N
AM
<NAME>
<NAME>
<NAME>
<NAME>
eBox
CZ056-50046
E>
<N
AM
MI
<N
AM
ECABINET PCA (CZ056-60010) E>
CZ056-50058
MI enc
CZ056-50118
E>
<N
AM
MA
CZ056-50236
E>
<N
AM
MO
MF
MA
<N
AM
E>
eCabinet 1 assembly CZ056-50227 1 assembly CZ056-50228
E>
<N
AM
<NAME>
<NAME>
<NAME>
<NAME>
J_302 CZ056-50237
E>
<N
AM
J_301
<N MO
CZ056-50059
AM
enc
E>
J_303
E>
<N
AM
J_304
ENC
ENC
ENC
1 assembly CZ056-50229 1 assembly CZ056-50230
(J2_323)
(J2_322)
(J2_321)
<NAME>
<NAME>
<NAME>
<NAME>
eBox 1 assembly CZ056-50130

E>
<N
AM
CZ056-50048
MF
<N
AM
CZ056-50060 E>
3V3DC enc
5VDC
12VDC
24VDC
42VDC
220VAC
SAX Impelling & Substrate Path BD

Figure 2-6 SAXmiMAmoMF block diagram
63
Figure 2-7 OMAS-Vacuum platen block diagram
J_371
J_381 CAN* PWR
eBox
CZ056-50050 CAN CZ056-50057
MA
Encoder
CZ056-50036
Vacuum PCA (CZ056- 60156) J2 P4 ENCODER (J1)
VAC
ENCODER CAN
PUMP
<NAME> (J3) (P3) P1 (P5)
CZ056-50037
CZ056-50038 CZ056-50039
Q6702-50062 CZ056-50040
enc CAN
ENCODER CAN POWER

(P4) (P2) (P7)
TOMAS, TºC sensor

(Q6702-60626)
1 VACUUM PUMP
OMAS cntrl ES PCA (CQ869-60170) No name
CZ056-50202
OMAS sensor
(CZ056-60173)
CZ056-50114
VR PUMP
VAC PUMP
CURING AC
eCabinet
3V3DC
5VDC
12VDC
24VDC
42VDC
220VAC
OMAS &Platen Vacuum BD

ID:
Near PPS 1 Far PPS ID:
3
MOTOR DRV PCA (Q6702-60953 ) MOTOR DRV PCA (Q6702-60953 )
ENWW
CZ056-50178
J1 P2 J1 P2
1 3
Term jumper
CZ056-
J2 J3 50028
CZ056-50149 J4 CZ056-50149 J4
CZ056-50052
CZ056-50146 CZ056-50146
RS485 PCA RS485 PCA
(Q6703-60195) CZ056-50169 (Q6703-60195) CZ056-50169
M <NAME>
M <NAME>
CZ056-50035 <NAME> CZ056-50035 <NAME>

Encoder Encoder
Switch Switch
CZ056-50178
ID: ID:
CZ056-50151 2 4
MICCI2 (J2_351) MICCI2 (J_251)
J1 P2 CZ056-50177 J1 P2
2 4
eBox
J3 J3
CZ056-50149 J4 CZ056-50149 J4

TUR SNS CZ056-50146 CZ056-50146
RS485 PCA RS485 PCA
PPS CZ056-50072 (Q6703-60195) CZ056-50169 (Q6703-60195)
M M CZ056-50169
<NAME> <NAME>
<NAM <NAM
E> E>
CZ056-50035 <NAME> CZ056-50035 <NAME>
Encoder Switch Encoder
eCabinet Switch
3V3DC
5VDC
12VDC
24VDC
32VDC
42VDC
220VAC
WARNING: THIS IS THE

2 MO 3 PHYSICAL MAP ->NOTICE
THAT THE LOGIC MAP
SEEMS TO BE
Ecabinet IDS DIFFERENT!!!
1 4

MI PPS BD
Figure 2-8 PPS block diagram
65
66
Leakage Leakage
Q6702-50061 Sensor Q6702-50061 Sensor
ISS PCA (CZ056-60012) ISS PCA (CZ056-60012)
green
green
green green
Electrov Electrov
green
alve alve
green green green
blue green blue
green
Electrov green Electrov green

alve alve
green green
INK SENSORS PCA (Q6703-

(CZ056-60381)
INK SENSORS PCA (Q6703-

60542) CZ056-50034 J4 60542) CZ056-50034 J4 J26 CZ056-50034
2 1
CZ056-50032 CZ056-50029 CZ056-50030
J7 CZ056-50032
(black, acumen) J7
INK SENSORS PCA 1 sensor
4 (black, acumen) 4
UI PCA (Q6702-60957) 3 3
UI PCA (Q6702-60957)
Lc Mg
UI_1 yellow UI_4 CZ056-50182
yellow
CZ056-50033 S_1 red CZ056-50033 S_4 red
CZ056-50032 CZ056-50032
J6 J6
(black, acumen) (black, acumen)
UI PCA (Q6702-60957) UI PCA (Q6702-60957)
Lm Y
UI_2 yellow UI_5 yellow red S_7 CZ056-50033
CZ056-50033 S_2 red CZ056-50033 S_5 red

CZ056-50032
CZ056-50032 CZ056-50032 J29 PT
J40 J40 (black, acumen)
(black, acumen) (black, acumen)
UI PCA (Q6702-60957) UI PCA (Q6702-60957) yellow yellow UI PCA (Q6702-60957)

Cy yellow K
UI_3 UI_6 UI_7
red red
CZ056-50033 S_3
CZ056-50033 S_6
1
2
2
1
P4
J35
J13
J12
J19
J14
J16
J17
J35
J14
J15
J22
ISS 24V
POWER ISS 24V
Relief Valve Air Air POWER Relief Valve Air Air
Pump Pump CZ056-50217 ISS STORK INTERCONNECT PCA Pump Pump
(Q1251-60238)
BUS termination
CZ056-50031 ISS LAN
CZ056-50250 ISS STORK INTERCONNECT PCA

CZ056-50031 (Q1251-60238)
CZ056-50262 LAN
CZ056-50263
LAN CZ056-50031
ISS ISS LAN ISS STORK INTERCONNECT PCA
(Q1251-60238)
ISM Connection Panel
ISS
CZ056-50071 CZ056-50053
3V3DC
5VDC
IDS I2C (J_241)
12VDC
24VDC
42VDC Ebox INTERCONNECT PCA (CZ056-
220VAC ECABINET PCA (CZ056-60010) 60005) ISM BD
eCabinet eBox
Figure 2-9 ISM block diagram
ENWW
CZ056-50066
SENSORS INTERCONNECT PCA
(Q6702-60181) CZ056-50063
ENWW
CARRIAGE INTERCONNECT PCA (CZ056-60155) CARRIAGE INTERCONNECT PCA (CZ056-60155)
SOL CZ056-50007 TO SENSORS BOX 42V POWER TO SENSORS BOX 42V POWER IGUS
CHAIN 42V CARR
42V POWER FROM SPRAY PCA 1 42V POWER
FROM SPRAY PCA 1
24V on
FROM SPRAY PCA 2 FROM SPRAY PCA 2 silkscreen 12V CARR
<NAME>
( UP ) (DOWN)
24V
24V
POWER
POWER
1 2 eCabinet
Drying
CZ056-50243 PCA
UP
Primer2 (J9)
Primer1 (J7)
Primer2 (J9)
Primer3 (J11)
Primer4 (J13)
Primer5 (J14)
Primer6 (J15)
Primer1 (J7)
SPRAY #1 (J27)
SPRAY #2 (J28)
SPRAY #3 (J29)
SPRAY #4 (J32)
SPRAY #5 (J33)
SPRAY #6 (J34)
SPRAY #1 (J27)
SPRAY #2 (J28)
SPRAY #3 (J29)
SPRAY #4 (J32)
SPRAY #5 (J33)
SPRAY #6 (J34)
Primer3 (J11)
Primer4 (J13)
Primer5 (J14)
Primer6 (J15)
Drying
PCA
CZ056-50004
down primers control
CZ056-50243
This cable
CZ056-50188 contains the
CZ056-50004 address for FO
Primers control& SOL shutter control PCA on the
CZ056-50187 CZ056-50186
CZ056-50008 CZ056-50189 carriage
CZ056-50189
CZ056-50244
CZ056-50011
CZ056-50188
CZ056-50143
CZ056-50188 CZ056-50186
CZ056-50006
CZ056-50186 Encoder
primer1 CZ056-50006 CZ056-50008 SAX
CZ056-50186
eBox
ENCODER IN
ENCODER OUT
CZ056-50011 CZ056-50008 CZ056-50008
CZ056-50004 CZ056-50005
CZ056-50143
SOL power
(J5)
CZ056-50011
POWER
CZ056-50008 CZ056-50008
CZ056-50008 CZ056-50255
CZ056-50011 primer4 primer6 IGUS CHAIN
primer2
1
ENCODER IN
ENCODER IN
ENCODER IN
ENCODER OUT
ENCODER OUT
ENCODER OUT
primer3 primer5 primer7
ENCODER IN
ENCODER IN
ENCODER IN
J24
J18
DATA
(J5)
ENCODER OUT
ENCODER OUT
ENCODER OUT
TRAILING
(J5)
(J5)
POWER
CARRIAGE
POWER
POWER
SENSOR (J2)
TETRIS (J6)
4 6
PH
(J5)
(J5)
(J5)
INTERCONNECT1
POWER
POWER
POWER
PCA (CZ056-60002)
J9
J8
J17
J15
J16
J10
J14
J11
DATA DATA
DATA 5 7
FO PCA (CZ056-60360)
3 TRAILING TRAILING
TRAILING
CARRIAGE CARRIAGE
CARRIAGE
SENSOR (J2) SENSOR (J2)
SENSOR (J2)
TETRIS (J6) DATA TETRIS (J6) DATA
TETRIS (J6) DATA
TRAILING CZ056-50198 PH7
TRAILING TRAILING
PH PH CARRIAGE PH CARRIAGE
CARRIAGE
INTERCONNECT2 INTERCONNECT2 SENSOR (J2) INTERCONNECT2 SENSOR (J2)
SENSOR (J2)
PCA (CZ056-60016) PCA (CZ056-60016) TETRIS (J6) PCA (CZ056-60016) TETRIS (J6)
TETRIS (J6)
PH PH PH
INTERCONNECT2 INTERCONNECT2 INTERCONNECT2
PCA (CZ056-60016) PCA (CZ056-60016) PCA (CZ056-60016)
CZ056-50010
CZ056-50198 PH6
LINE SENSOR CZ056-50198 PH5

CZ056-50198 PH4
3V3DC
CZ056-50198 PH3
5VDC
CZ056-50198 PH2
12VDC
CZ056-50199 PH1
24VDC
32VDC

42VDC
220VAC
Carriage Print BD
Figure 2-10 Carriage print block diagram
67
Figure 2-11 Carriage AR and crash sensor block diagram
Crash sensor RIGHT Crash sensor LEFT

Aerosol module RIGHT
Pressure Aerosol module LEFT
Pressure
sensor sensor
FO FO
PH INT PCA 1
CZ056-50240 CZ056-50240
ASSY ASSY
CZ056-50011
(enc)
CZ056-50265 CZ056-50265
ASSY
ID ID
:1 :2
ASSY
DRYING PCA (CZ056-60024) FO SENSOR ENC_IN DRYING PCA (CZ056-60024) FO SENSOR ENC_IN
CZ056-50241
CZ056-50241 AEROSOL_EXT AEROSOL_EXT
TO/FROM CZ056-50137 TO/FROM

ENC_OUT TWIN PCA (enc) ENC_OUT TWIN PCA
DRYING_MODULE
1 CAN TERM
DRYING_MODULE
2 CAN TERM
ADR0 ADR0
MAX DIS MAX DIS

AC_OUT (UP) AC_OUT (DOWN)
J12 J12 AC_IN 12V_IN J12 J12 AC_IN 12V_IN
CZ056-50264
CZ056-50016
No jumper CZ056-50044
ADDRESS= 1
Add jumper to
IGUS CHAIN
CZ056-50066 this connector.
jumper
Is the
ADDRESS= 2
termination for
CAN bus
CAN (J161) ECABINET PCA

12V CARR
(CZ056-60010)
J_111 DLT
13V PSU (to
compensate
V drop)
eBox eCabinet
3V3DC
5VDC
12VDC
24VDC
32VDC
42VDC
220VAC
Carriage AR + Crash Sensor BD

ENWW
DD DD DD
DD CZ056-50174 DD CZ056-50174 DD CZ056-50174 DD CZ056-50174
CZ056-50175 CZ056-50069 CZ056-50175 CZ056-50176
PH 2 PH 4 PH 6 PH 1
Linear CZ056-50174 CZ056-50174 CZ056-50174

encoder DROP MUX PCA (Q6702-60013 ) DROP MUX PCA (Q6702-60013 ) DROP MUX PCA (Q6702-60013 ) DROP MUX PCA (Q6702-60013 )
CH 1
CH 1
CH1
CH 1
CZ056-50115 CZ056-50175 CZ056-50175 CZ056-50175

CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2
PH 3 PH 5 PH 7
1 3 2 4
Serial Serial Serial Serial

encoder extender encoder extender encoder extender encoder extender
CZ056-50021
CZ056-50112 CZ056-50112
CZ056-50112
MOTOR DRV PCA (Q6702-60953 ) CZ056-50112 MOTOR DRV PCA (Q6702-60953 )

2
Term jumper
ID:
ID
CZ056-50028
:1
Q6703-50031
J1 P2 J1 P2
LAN
C D
A D
P
J3 J3
J4 J4
CZ056-50156
CZ056-50156
CZ056-50160
CZ056-50116
PH1
DD1
M CZ056-60278 M CZ056-60278
PCA1
Capping Drop Detector

PH2
DD2
Encoder CZ056-50116 Encoder

PCA3
Switch Switch
DD3
PH 3
PH 4
CZ056-50054
DD4
LAN WARNING: THIS IS THE

PCA4
PH 5
DD5
PHYSICAL MAP ->NOTICE

THAT THE LOGIC MAP
DD6
PH 6
SEEMS TO BE
PCA2
CZ056-50077 SVS J_152 DIFFERENT!!!

PH7
3V3DC
DD7
MICCI2
5VDC
12VDC
24VDC
ODD (J_131)
ODD (J_231)
ODD (J_331)
ODD (J_431)
32VDC ECABINET PCA (CZ056-60010)

42VDC
eCabinet DD capping
220VAC eBox
SVS BD

eCabinet
Figure 2-12 SVS block diagram
69
70
ID: ID:
1 4

Q6703-50031
CZ056-50157 J1 P2 J1 P2
LAN
J_151 MICCI2
Z MI
J3 J3
CZ056-50156 J4 CZ056-50156 J4
eBox

ECABINET PCA (CZ056-60010) M M
Q6703-50031
WW CZ056-50076 Encoder CZ056-50116 Encoder CZ056-50116 LAN
CZ056-50161
eCabinet
ID: ID:
5 2
Term jumper: MOTOR DRV PCA (Q6702-60953 ) MOTOR DRV PCA (Q6702-60953 )
CZ056-
500028
Q6703-50031
J1 P2 J1 P2
LAN
M M
O A
J3 J3
CZ056-50156 J4 CZ056-50156 J4
M M
Encoder CZ056-50116 Encoder CZ056-50116

3V3DC
5VDC
12VDC
24VDC
32VDC
42VDC
220VAC WEB WIPE BD
ENWW
Figure 2-13 Printhead cleaning block diagram
ENWW
Drying module LEFT Drying module RIGHT
bimetal bimetal
bimetal bimetal
Fan harness CZ056-50208

Fan harness CZ056-50208
CZ056-80068 Temp CZ056-80068 Temp
sensor sensor
Drying harness CZ056-50167 Drying harness CZ056-50167
Temp Temp
CZ056-80068 sensor CZ056-80068 sensor
PH INT PCA 1
ID ID
:1 :2
CZ056-50011
50013
50205
DRYING PCA (CZ056-60024) FO SENSOR ENC_IN DRYING PCA (CZ056-60024) FO SENSOR ENC_IN
(enc)
AEROSOL_EXT AEROSOL_EXT
Drying left CZ056-

Drying right CZ056-
TO/FROM TO/FROM
CZ056-50137 TWIN PCA
ENC_OUT TWIN PCA ENC_OUT
(enc)
1 CAN TERM 2 CAN TERM

DRYING_MODULE DRYING_MODULE
ADR0 ADR0 Add jumper to
this connector.
MAX DIS AC_OUT MAX DIS Is the
AC_OUT (UP) (DOWN)
Carriage Carriage termination for
Interconnect PCA CAN bus
Interconnect PCA CZ056-50243 12V_CS CZ056-50243 12V_CS
J3 J12 J12 AC_IN 12V_IN J12 J12 AC_IN 12V_IN
DOWN UP
CZ056-50016
jumper
No jumper
ADDRESS= 2
ADDRESS= 1
SLINKY PCA 1 (CZ056-60360)

CZ056-50065
J17 CZ056-50244
J24 CZ056-50044
J15 CZ056-50264
J9
J16
J18 IGUS CHAIN
J10
CZ056-50065
J14 CZ056-50066
J8
CZ056-50056
J11
UP
3V3DC CAN (J161) CZ056-50267
12V CARR
5VDC AC/
AC
OUT_7_2
J2_111
12VDC
24VDC OUT_6_2
32VDC AC/
AC
Ebox INTERCONNECT PCA (CZ056-60005) ECABINET PCA (CZ056-60010)
42VDC
220VAC DOWN
eBox eCabinet
Carriage Drying BD

Figure 2-14 Carriage drying block diagram
71
72
CURING MODULE CABLING
AC IN
DC IN
LAN
LAN LAN LAN LAN LAN LAN
M8 M8
LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN
DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC
OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN
AC OUT AC OUT AC OUT AC OUT AC OUT AC OUT
LAN LAN LAN LAN LAN LAN COMM IN
100 LAN LAN LAN LAN LAN COMM OUT
CURING PCA AC IN CURING PCA AC IN CURING PCA AC IN CURING PCA AC IN CURING PCA AC IN CURING PCA AC IN
2x TEMP #6 PCA 2x TEMP #5 PCA 2x TEMP #4 PCA 2x TEMP #3 PCA 2x TEMP #2 PCA 2x TEMP #1 PCA
SENSORS SENSORS SENSORS SENSORS SENSORS SENSORS
FAN FAN FAN FAN FAN FAN
PCA ADDR 2x AC PCA ADDR 2x AC PCA ADDR 2x AC PCA ADDR 2x AC PCA ADDR 2x AC PCA ADDR 2x AC
HEATERS HEATERS HEATERS HEATERS HEATERS HEATERS
2x FANS 2x FANS 2x FANS 2x FANS 2x FANS 2x FANS
OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
FAN 2 FAN 1 FAN 2 FAN 1 FAN 2 FAN 1 FAN 2 FAN 1 FAN 2 FAN 1 FAN 2 FAN 1
HEATER 1
HEATER 1
HEATER 1
HEATER 1
HEATER 1
HEATER 1
PT1000
PT1000
PT1000
PT1000
PT1000
PT1000
PT1000
PT1000
PT1000
PT1000
PT1000
PT1000
HEATER 2
HEATER 2
HEATER 2
HEATER 2
HEATER 2
HEATER 2
SLEEVE
SLEEVE
SLEEVE
SLEEVE
SLEEVE
SLEEVE
SLEEVE
SLEEVE
SLEEVE
SLEEVE
SLEEVE
SLEEVE
Figure 2-15 Curing module cabling
ENWW
CZ056-50019 CZ056-50019
LAN LAN
ENWW
(…)
CZ056-50219 Daisy
chain
24V_IN 24V_OUT 24V_IN 24V_OUT
J11 J16
CURING PCA (CZ056-60008 ) CAN_TERM J11 J16
CURING PCA (CZ056-60008 ) CAN_TERM
J7 AC_IN J7 AC_IN
P. Sensor P. Sensor
CZ056-80069 AC_IN_Link J3 CZ056-80069 AC_IN_Link J3
J12 J12
P. Sensor P. Sensor
J12 CZ056-80069 1 J12 CZ056-80069 2
J10 CZ056-50219 J10
J1 J1
CZ056-50183 AC_HEATER_2 CZ056-50183 AC_HEATER_2
TEMP_SENSORS TEMP_SENSORS
AC_HEATER_1 AC_HEATER_1
J4 J14 J13 J4 J14 J13

HUMID_1 24V_FAN_3 24V_FAN_CURING HUMID_1 24V_FAN_3 24V_FAN_CURING
Temp Temp CZ056-50121 Temp Temp CZ056-50121

Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor
CZ056-80068CZ056-80068 CZ056-80068CZ056-80068
CZ056-50120 CZ056-50120
CZ056-50232
CZ056-50218 CZ056-50218
Add jumper to this

connector. Is the
termination for CAN
CZ056-50219 bus. ADD ONLY TO
CZ056-50219 MODULE 6
Module Module Module Module

“3” “4” “5” “6”
CZ056-50051 :3 4
ID : :5 :6
CZ056-50231 ID ID ID
CZ056-50218
MODULE BASE
MI
CZ056-50068
CZ056-50067 1 2 2 1
left right
IDS eCab
6 5 4 3 2 1
MO
3V3DC
5VDC ENT-4
J_261 CAN
12VDC
POWER DAISY CHAIN
24VDC
ECABINET PCA (CZ056-60010) ENT-2 Ebox INTERCONNECT PCA (CZ056-60005) AC: DC:
32VDC 1 4 1 2 3 CURING BD
42VDC 2 5 4 5 6
eCabinet eBox 3 6
220VAC

Figure 2-16 Curing block diagram
73
74
Ebox INTERCONNECT PCA (CZ056-60005) CZ056-50259
J_371
PWR
J_381 CAN*
J_471
J481 CAN*
J12
J12
PWR J_262 CAN CZ056-50249

J4
VR LAN
HUMID_1
J1
eBox
TEMP_SENSORS
CZ056-50239
P. Sensor P. Sensor
J14
CZ056-50238 CZ056-80069 CZ056-80069

24V_FAN_3
Vacuum PCA (CZ056- 60156) J2 P4 ENCODER (J1)

CZ056-50242
J13
7
CZ056-50260
24V_FAN
VR PUMP
VR PUMP
CPNTROL
CPNTROL
VAC
ENCODER CAN PUMP CZ056-50247
(J3) (P3)
CURING PCA (CZ056-60008 )
<NAME> P1 (P5)
ISM CONNECTION PANEL

CAN_TERM
J11
24V_IN
VACUUM PUMP Add jumper to this

J10
connector. Is the
J16
J7 AC_IN
AC_HEATER_1
AC_HEATER_2
termination for CAN

AC_IN_Link J3
24V_OUT
VR PUMP bus.
PANEL
ECABINET PCA (CZ056-
60010)
PANEL CZ056-50261
VR PUMP
VR PCA VR PUMP CZ056-50248

VAC PUMP
CURING AC CZ056-50258
VR SPLIT
eCabinet
CZ056-50246
3V3DC
5VDC
12VDC
24VDC Vapor Removal BD
42VDC
220VAC
ENWW
Figure 2-17 Vapor removal block diagram
ENWW
This is a single connector with different cables.
CZ056-50170
ID:
5
FW: MOTOR DRV PCA (Q6702-60953 ) Bus
Luna215 termination
CZ056-50163 J1 P2 CZ056- 50028

TUR
J3
J4
MICCI2 (J2_351)
J1_471
gnd gnd gnd gnd gnd
12 24 24 24
5V
V V V V
eBox
(CZ056-50180)
1 assembly CZ056-50239 R2F.TUR.Paper.PCA
(Q6703-60426)
CZ056-50127 CZ056-50203
VR pump Window (1x) Pinch switch short Pinch switch long R2F R2F
CZ056-50210
buzzer
Optical sensor

3V3DC
TUR SNS
5VDC
PPS
12VDC
<NAM <NAM 24VDC

E> E> 32VDC
42VDC
TUR BD
eCabinet
220VAC

Figure 2-18 Take-up reel block diagram
75
3 Safety requirements
● Printer safety features
● Hazards
● Safety Check
76 Chapter 3 Safety requirements ENWW

Printer safety features
Any repair or maintenance operation, running diagnostics, or troubleshooting may require maintenance key,
e-cabinet key, mains switch key, IPS switch key, and Torx screwdriver set.
NOTE: After using the maintenance key to open a door, remember to lock it afterwards, and return the key
to safe and secure storage.
Warning labels
Label Explanation
Electric shock hazard
Heating modules operate at hazardous voltage. Disconnect

power source before servicing.
Caution! Double pole. Neutral fusing. Refer servicing to qualified

service personnel.
In case of operation of the fuse, parts of the printer that remain

energized may represent a hazard during servicing. Before
servicing, turn off the printer using the Branch Circuit Breakers
located in the building's Power Distribution Unit (PDU).
Warning
High leakage current. Current leakage may exceed 3.5 mA. Earth
connection essential before connecting supply. Equipment to be
connected to earthed mains only.
See installation instructions before connecting to the supply.

Ensure that the input voltage is within the printer's rated voltage
range. The printer requires up to two dedicated lines, each
Located on the e-cabinet; for service personnel only protected by a branch circuit breaker according to site
preparation requirements.
Before starting
Read and follow the operating and safety instructions before

starting the printer.
Risk of burns. Do not touch the internal enclosures of the printer's

drying and curing modules.
Located on the curing and drying modules
Crush hazard. Do not touch PPS while moving. When the

substrate has been loaded, the carriage descends into its printing
position, and could crush your hand or anything else left
underneath it.
Located on each side of the substrate path, close to the PPS gear
ENWW Printer safety features 77

Label Explanation
Risk of trapped fingers. Do not touch gears while moving. Danger

that your hands may become trapped between gearwheels.
Located on each side of the substrate path, close to the PPS gear
Hazardous moving part. Keep away from moving printhead

carriage. When printing, the printhead carriage travels back and
forth across the substrate.
Located internally on the substrate path and internally on the

right cover; for maintenance/service personnel only
Risk of cutting your hands on sharp edges.
Light radiation hazard. Infrared (IR) radiation is emitted from this

printer. Do not modify the dryer enclosure. You are recommended
not to look directly at the lamps when they are on.
The dryer enclosure limits radiation in compliance with the

requirements of the exempt group of IEC 62471:2006,
Photobiological safety of lamps and lamp systems.
Located on the dryer module; for maintenance/service personnel

only
You are recommended to wear gloves when handling ink

cartridges, printhead cleaning cartridges, and the printhead
cleaning container.
Located on the condensation collector bottle and the printhead

cleaning roll carriage
Sound level could exceed 70 dBA in some print modes. Hearing

protection may be required.
Located at the rear, on the left cover

Label Explanation
Electric shock hazard. Disconnect power before servicing. Heating

modules and electrical cabinets operate at hazardous voltage.
Located internally on heating modules and electrical cabinets; for

maintenance/service personnel only
Hazardous moving parts. Keep away from moving fan blades.
Located internally, close to vacuum fan blades; for maintenance/

service personnel only
Identifies the Protective Earth (PE) terminal for qualified

electricians, and bonding terminals for maintenance/service
personnel only. Earth connection essential before connecting
supply.
Emergency stop buttons

There are four emergency stop buttons distributed around the printer. If an emergency occurs, simply push
one of the emergency stop buttons to stop all printing processes. A system error message is displayed, and
the fans turn at maximum speed. Ensure that all emergency stop buttons are released before restarting the
printer.
ENWW Printer safety features 79

Hazards
Electrical shock hazard
Description
Internal circuits use hazardous voltage capable of causing death or serious personal injury. Turn off the
printer using the branch circuit breakers located in the building's Power Distribution Unit (PDU) before
servicing the printer. The printer must be connected to earth at mains outlets only.
Particular attention must be paid to the drying and curing subsystem, which uses hazardous voltages. Even
when the drying and curing subsystem is not operating, there will still be parts of the electrical circuit with
hazardous voltage levels.
Best practice
● Always perform the Safety Check before servicing the printer. See Safety Check on page 84
● Fuses blown after being replaced may indicate malfunctioning electrical circuits within the system.
Have the system checked by qualified service personnel, and do not attempt to replace the fuse again.
● Ensure you have the appropriate test equipment for the voltage range to be measured and proper
insulated leads before measuring the voltage at any test point.
● Be in a stable and reliable position for measuring any voltage safely.
● Avoid unintentional short-circuits with conductive parts surrounding the test points.
● Ensure the test leads do not slip out of your hands when measuring voltages, and be careful not to
touch uninsulated parts accidentally.
Mechanical hazard
Description
● When the PPS is lowered, it can crush body parts if they are in the way.
● When the carriage moves, it can crush or cut body parts if they are in the way.
● Any moving printer components can potentially crush, cut, or seriously injure you.
Best practice
● Keep your clothing or body parts safe from moving parts of the printer.
● Avoid wearing loose clothing, jewelry like necklaces or bracelets, or any kind of hanging objects.

● If you have long hair, make sure that it is restrained.
● Take care that sleeves and gloves do not get caught in the mechanical parts of the printer.
● Stay clear of the printer when lowering the PPS.
● Stay clear of the print path when the carriage is moving.
● Be aware of the location of the emergency stop buttons.
● Also make sure that there are no tools obstructing the operation of the printer.
● Avoid standing close to the fans, which could cause injury and could also affect print quality (by
obstructing the air flow).
● Do not touch gears or moving rolls during printing.
● Do not operate the printer with covers bypassed.
Scan-axis encoder strip hazard

Description
The scan-axis encoder strip is very sharp, and can easily cut your hands when you work near it.
Best practice
● Wear protective gloves if you must touch the scan-axis encoder strip.
● Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry.
Burn hazard (drying and curing)

Description
The drying and curing subsystems of the printer operate at high temperatures and can cause burns if
touched.
Best practice
● Avoid direct contact with the drying and curing area of the printer.
● Be careful when you work near the print path.
● If you must work near the drying and curing modules, make sure that they have completely cooled
down.
Lifting and handling

Description
Improper handling of heavy materials can lead to serious bodily injury.
ENWW Hazards 81
Best practice
● When handling substrate rolls, care must be taken to avoid back strain and/or injury.
● Always use a forklift, pallet truck, or other handling equipment to lift substrates.
● Always wear personal protective equipment like boots and gloves.
● Follow any manpower instructions included in this service manual when you replace components. Many
components, such as the drive roller or the cover, require at least two people for removal.
Fire Hazard
Description
Drying and curing subsystems operate at high temperatures.
Best practice
● Always perform the Safety Check before servicing the printer. See Safety Check on page 84.
● Use the power supply voltage specified on the nameplate.
● Connect the power cords to dedicated lines, each protected by a branch circuit breaker.
● Do not manipulate the heating modules, unless required for servicing parts.
● Do not insert objects through slots in the printer.
● Do not use aerosol products that contain flammable gases inside or around the printer. Do not operate
the printer in an explosive atmosphere.
● Do not block or cover the openings of the printer.
● Follow any manpower instructions included in this service manual when you replace components. Many
components, such as the drive roller or the cover, require at least two people for removal.
● Do not attempt to modify the drying or curing module, or the e-cabinet, unless required for servicing
parts.
● Do not load substrates that cannot be used at an operating temperature above 125°C (257°F). Ensure
that the operating temperature of the substrate recommended by the manufacturer is not exceeded. If
this information is not available, ask the manufacturer.
● Proper maintenance and genuine HP consumables are required to ensure that the printer operates
safely as designed. The use of non-HP consumables (foams, filters, printhead cleaner roll, and inks)
may present a risk of fire.
● Do not load substrates with auto-ignition temperatures below 250°C (482°F). See note below. No
ignition sources are close to the substrate.
NOTE: Test method based on EN ISO 6942:2002: Evaluation of materials and material assemblies
when exposed to a source of radiant heat, method B. The test conditions, to determine the temperature
when the substrate starts ignition (either flame or glow) were: heat flux density 30 kW/m², copper
calorimeter, K type thermocouple.

Light radiation hazard
Description
Infrared (IR) radiation is emitted from the dryer module. The dryer enclosure limits radiation in compliance
with the requirements of the exempt group of IEC 62471:2006, Photobiological safety of lamps and lamp
systems.
Best practice
● You are recommended not to look directly at the lamps while they are on.
● Do not modify the dryer enclosure.
● After servicing parts, make sure to reassemble them properly.
Sound pressure level

Description
The sound pressure level could exceed 70 dBA in some print modes.
Best practice
● Hearing protection may be required.
Ink handling
Your printer does not use solvent inks and does not have the traditional problems associated with them.
However, HP recommends that you wear gloves when handling ink system components.
ENWW Hazards 83
Safety Check
Description
The Safety Check must be performed before every service operation of the printer. From purging the printer
to replacing a single component, this Safety Check must always be performed.
Procedure
NOTE: The protective earth conductor is marked with a symbol.
1. If you intend to remove any components of the drying and curing system, turn off the main power
switch and disconnect the printer from the Power Distribution Unit (PDU).
2. Check that the protective bonding conductor (green-and-yellow grounding cable) is well attached to the
e-cabinet doors.
3. Check that the protective earth conductor for single phase and three-phase (green-and-yellow
grounding cable) is well attached to the back panel of the e-cabinet.
back panel of the e-cabinet.
single-phase input.
6. Check that the protective bonding conductor (green-and-yellow grounding cable) is well attached to
printer structure.
drying system.
curing system.
9. Check that the protective bonding conductor (green-and-yellow grounding cable in the power cord) is
well attached to the vacuum and vapour removal pumps.
10. Check that the protective bonding conductor (green-and-yellow grounding cable in the power cord) is
well attached to the e-box.
11. Check that safety interlock is not in bypass position.
12. Check that all emergency stop buttons are released.
13. Check that all RCCBs (GFIs) trip properly, by pressing the Test button.
14. Check that all doors and windows remain closed and in their original position.
15. Check that all safety warning labels remain in their intended positions and add any required labels on
new or removed parts.

4 Troubleshooting
● Troubleshooting with Print Care
● Print Care login and boot modes
● Troubleshooting system error codes
● Troubleshooting without system errors
● Print-quality troubleshooting
● How to extract and read the service plot
● Troubleshoot non-HP ink usage
Troubleshooting with Print Care

When there is a problem with the printer, a system error is displayed in the Internal Print Server. See the
following sections for details about system error codes.
All the troubleshooting steps and corrective actions are described below. In many cases, a diagnostic test is
needed to determine the failure mode, and these tests are performed with the Print Care software. See How
to run a diagnostic test on page 341.
ENWW Troubleshooting with Print Care 85

Print Care login and boot modes
As someone authorized by HP to provide support for this printer, you can log into Print Care as
‘ServiceEngineer’ to gain access to the special tools, diagnostics, and calibrations provided to support,
diagnose, and repair the printer. First use the Print Care Password Manager to generate a password: click
Generate in the window below, then use the generated password.
NOTE: The password is case-sensitive.
The printer can be started in normal mode or diagnostic mode, from Printer tools > Power options > Boot
modes. Normal mode starts the printer normally, but diagnostic mode starts only a minimal part of the
printer engine for diagnostic purposes, so the diagnostics available can be different in each case. See
Diagnostics on page 340.
When the printer is started in diagnostics mode, you should see the window below on the screen of the built-
in computer.
In diagnostic mode you may be able to run tests with parts detached from the printer, or run one subsystem
only and start the components required for this subsystem.
NOTE: To return the carriage to the capping position after working in diagnostic mode, you should restart
the printer in normal mode.
86 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting ENWW

Troubleshooting system error codes
● Useful information
● Understanding system error codes
● Resolve a system error code
● 01. E-box error codes
● 10. E-cabinet error codes
● 11. Pipeline error codes
● 15. Dryer error codes
● 16. Curing error codes
● 21. Capping-station error codes
● 22. Ink-delivery-system error codes
● 41. Substrate-path error codes
● 43. Substrate vacuum-system error codes
● 46. Printhead-primer error codes
● 47. Printhead-cleaning error codes
● 48. PPS error codes
● 49. Carriage aerosol-removal error codes
● 50. OMAS error codes
● 51. Printer-covers and safety-element error codes
● 52. Drop-detector error codes
● 55. Carriage line-sensor error codes
● 58. Carriage SOL error codes
● 61. Internal firmware error codes
● 79. Miscellaneous error codes
● 86. Scan-axis error codes
Useful information
When dealing with a system error, first obtain the following information:
● The model and serial number of the printer
● The firmware version that the printer is using (from the Internal Print Server: Utilities > Statistics >
Code rev.)
● The complete error code
● The service configuration print
● The current configuration print
● The name and version of the software application that the customer is using
ENWW Troubleshooting system error codes 87

NOTE: When reporting the system error code, ensure that you supply the full error code and the firmware
version.
Understanding system error codes

A system error code appears in the following format:
● XX.nn.mm:ff
The different parts of the code have the following meanings:
● XX: Subsystem in which the failure has been detected (see the subsystem error codes table below)
● nn: Service part in which the failure has been detected.
● mm: Service part index, if more than one such part is used: for example, it may be used to identify the
ink cartridge (color and number).
● ff: Type of failure: voltage too low, temperature too high, communications error, time-out, and so on.
XX code Subsystem
01 E-box
10 E-cabinet
11 Pipeline
15 Carriage drying system
16 Curing system
21 Capping station
22 Ink delivery system
30 Vapor removal system
41 Substrate path
43 Substrate vacuum system
46 Printhead primers
47 Printhead cleaning roll
48 PPS
49 Carriage aerosol removal
50 Substrate-advance sensor (OMAS)
51 Printer covers and safety elements
52 Drop-detector system
55 Carriage line sensor
58 Carriage color sensor
79 Internal firmware
86 Scan axis
Resolve a system error code

In this section “X” or “XY” means the index of the component, for instance for printhead position or curing
modules.

01. E-box error codes
01.01.00:01
Internal Print Server message

Formatter CPU fan does not spin. Some printer components could be damaged by over-temperature. If
problem persists, call support and shut down the printer
Description
The fan that cools down the heat sink of the CPU in the Formatter PCA does not spin.
Causes in order of importance

a. The fan is broken.
b. The wire of the fan is disconnected from the formatter PCA.
c. The fan is not powered (red wire).
d. The fan does not properly receive the PWM signal (yellow wire).
Corrective actions
1. Check for proper fan wire connection to Formatter PCA (CPUFAN1 connector).
2. Check, with multimeter, for supply voltage presence in pin 2 (5 V) on CPUFAN1 connector in Formatter
PCA.
3. Check, with multimeter, for PWM signal presence in pin 3 (between 1 and 3 V) on CPUFAN1 connector in
Formatter PCA.
4. If you find no other explanation, replace the fan.
Severity
Advisory (continuable)
01.02.01:02

Engine PCA #01 start-up fail.
Description
Engine PCA #01 does not start-up properly (during power on) or there is an error during start-up.

a. The engine PCA #01 is missing.
b. The engine PCA #01 is not correctly installed.
c. The contact with formatter PCA (BUS PCI express) fails.
d. The engine PCA #01 is damaged and is not performing properly.

Corrective actions
1. Check for PCA presence in proper slot.
2. Visual check for proper assembly of the PCA.
3. Run sub-system diagnostic.
4. Physical check (push) of the assembly of the PCA.
5. If the problem persists, replace the PCA. See Engine PCA on page 535.
6. If the problem still persists, call support.
Severity
SEVERE (non-continuable)
01.02.01:76

Engine PCA #01 memory check fail.
Description
Check (through R/W commands) the data lines and address lines to detect physical tracks' errors.

a. PCA tracks are damaged or broken.
b. Any component in the PCA is damaged or broken.
Corrective actions
1. Run subsystem diagnostic.
2. Check (through R/W commands) the data lines and address lines to detect physical tracks’ errors.
3. Replace the PCA. See Engine PCA on page 535.
Severity
01.02.02:02
Description
Engine PCA #02 does not start up properly (during power on), or there is an error during start-up.

d. The engine PCA #02 is damaged and does not perform properly.
Corrective actions
3. Physical check of the PCA assembly (push).
Severity
01.02.02:76

Description

Corrective actions
Severity

01.02.03:02

Engine PCA #03 start-up fail
Description
Engine PCA #03 does not start up properly (during power-on), or there is an error during start-up.

d. The engine PCA #03 is damaged and doesn’t perform properly.
Corrective actions
Severity
01.02.03:76
Description
Corrective actions

Severity
01.02.04:02

Description
Engine PCA #04 does not start up properly (during power-on), or there is an error during start-up.

d. The engine PCA #04 is damaged and is not performing correctly.
Corrective actions
Severity
01.02.04:76

Description

Corrective actions
Severity
01.06.01:04

Engine adaptor PCA #01 to engine PCA communication fail.
Description
There is a communication error between the engine adaptor PCA #01 and the engine PCA #01.

a. The flat cable between engine adaptor PCA and engine PCA is missing or not connected.
b. The connection of the flat cable fails (not connected properly).
c. The engine adaptor PCA supply cable is not connected (engine adaptor PCA not powered).
d. Any fuses of the engine adaptor PCA are blown.
Corrective actions
1. Visual check of the flat cable between the engine adaptor PCA and engine PCA (both ends).
2. Physical check of the flat cable (push both ends).
3. Visual check of the voltage LEDs on the engine adaptor PCA; if they do not illuminate, check the supply
cable and PCA fuses.
4. If the problem persists, replace the engine adaptor PCA. See Engine adaptor PCA on page 539.
Severity

01.06.01:09

Engine adaptor PCA #01 to e-box interconnect PCA connection fail.
Description
There is an error in the assembly (connection) of the slot in the engine adaptor PCA #01 and e-box
interconnect PCA.

a. The engine adaptor PCA is not properly connected to the e-box interconnect PCA.
b. There is a pin broken in the e-box interconnect PCA connector.
c. The engine adaptor PCA is damaged.
d. The e-box interconnect PCA is damaged.
Corrective actions
1. Visual check of the connection between engine adaptor PCA and e-box interconnect PCA.
2. Physical check of the connection between engine adaptor PCA and e-box interconnect PCA.
3. Replace the engine adaptor PCA. See Engine adaptor PCA on page 539.
4. Replace the e-box interconnect PCA. See E-box interconnect PCA on page 541.
5. If the problem persists, call support.
Severity
01.06.01:10

Engine adaptor PCA #01 supply voltages out of range.
Description
The voltmeters in the engine adaptor PCA #01 sensed a voltage source (24V, 12V, 5V, or 3V3) out of its valid
range.
a. Any of the fuses of the engine adaptor PCA are blown.
b. The engine adaptor PCA is damaged or broken.
c. There is a short-circuit or an overcurrent consumption in at least one voltage source.

Corrective actions
1. Check the engine adaptor PCA fuses.
2. Check the overcurrent LEDs on the side of the engine adaptor PCA (it must be off).
Severity
01.06.02:04

Description
There is a communication error between the engine adaptor PCA #02 and the engine PCA #02.

a. The flat cable between engine adaptor PCA and engine PCA is missing or not connected.
Corrective actions
3. Visual check of the voltage LEDs in engine adaptor PCA; if they do not illuminate, check the supply cable
and PCA fuses.
Severity
01.06.02:09

Description
There is an error in the assembly (connection) of the slot in the engine adaptor PCA #02 and e-box
interconnect PCA.

Corrective actions
Severity
01.06.02:10

Engine adaptor PCA #02 supply voltages out of range.
Description
range.

Corrective actions

Severity
01.06.03:04

Description
There is a communication error between the engine adaptor PCA #03 and engine PCA #03.

a. The flat cable between the engine adaptor PCA and engine PCA is missing or not connected.
c. The engine adaptor PCA supply cable is not connected (engine adaptor PCA not supplied).
Corrective actions
3. Visual check of the voltage LEDs in the engine adaptor PCA; if they do not illuminate, check the supply
cable and PCA fuses.
4. If problem persists, replace the engine adaptor PCA. See Engine adaptor PCA on page 539.
Severity
01.06.03:09
Description
There is an error in the assembly (connection) of the slot in the engine adaptor PCA #03 and the e-box
interconnect PCA.

Corrective actions
Severity
01.06.03:10

Engine adaptor #03 supply voltages are out of range.
Description
range.

Corrective actions
2. Check the overcurrent LEDs on the side of engine adaptor PCA (it must be off).
Severity

01.06.04:04

Description
There is a communication error between the engine adaptor PCA #04 and engine PCA #04.

a. The flat cable between the engine adaptor PCA and engine PCA is missing or not connected.
Corrective actions
3. Visual check of the voltage LEDs in the engine adaptor PCA; if they do not illuminate, then check the
supply cable and PCA fuses.
Severity
01.06.04:09

Description
ELA #04 to PPA connection fail: there is an error in the assembly (connection) of the slot in the engine
adaptor PCA #04 and the e-box interconnect PCA.
c. The engine adaptor PCA PCA is damaged.

Corrective actions
Severity
01.06.04:10

Engine adaptor PCA #04 supply voltages are out of range.
Description
range.

Corrective actions
4. If the problem persists call support.
Severity
01.50.00:20

E-box temp being high.
Description
The temperature measured inside the e-box enclosure is being suspiciously high.

a. The e-box fan does not spin.
b. The e-box air filter is dirty and does not allow air-exchange with the outside atmosphere.
c. Ambient temperature around the printer is too high.
d. There is an outer element which increases the temperature of the e-box.
Corrective actions
None mandatory, only a warning.
Severity
01.50.00:21

E-box temp too high.
Description
The temperature measured inside the e-box enclosure is above the upper limit allowable

a. The e-box fan does not spin.
b. The e-box air filter is dirty and does not allow the air exchange with the outside atmosphere.
c. The ambient temperature around the printer is too high.
d. There is an outer element which increases the temperature of the e-box.
Corrective actions
1. Check for the proper ambient temperature near the printer and e-box.
2. Check for cleanliness of the air filter and replace it if applicable.
3. Check for the proper working of both fans (CPU fan and e-box fan).
Severity

01.51.00:01

E-box fan does not spin.
Description
The fan located in the e-box enclosure (door's cover) does not spin.

a. The fan is broken.
b. The wire of the fan is disconnected from the formatter PCA.
c. The fan is not powered (red wire).
d. The fan does not properly receive the PWM signal (yellow wire).
Corrective actions
1. Check for proper fan wire connection to Formatter PCA (SYSFAN1 connector).
2. Check, with multimeter, for supply voltage presence in pin 2 (12V) on SYSFAN1 connector in Formatter
PCA.
3. Check, with multimeter, for PWM signal presence in pin 3 (between 1V and 3V) on SYSFAN1 connector in
Formatter PCA.
4. If there isn’t any of the above; replace the fan.
Severity
01.60.00:01
Printer hard disk data crash.
Description
Files found in the hard disk are corrupted
a. An unexpected shutdown of the printer corrupted the data on the hard disk.
b. The hard disk is broken or does not perform properly.
Corrective actions
1. Restart the printer.
2. Run diagnostics.

3. If the problem persists, replace the hard disk. See E-box hard disk drive on page 526.
Severity
01.60.00:03

NVM check doesn't match. Call support.
Description
The printer has encountered an error while accessing/writing values to the NVM.

a. Sporadic error
b. Firmware error
c. Hard disk data corrupted
Corrective actions
1. Turn off the printer, wait a few seconds, then turn it on again.
2. If the problem persists, reinstall the firmware.
3. If the problem persists, replace the printer’s hard disk drive. See E-box hard disk drive on page 526.
Severity
01.60.00:75
No free space left in printer hard disk.
Description
There is no space left in the internal hard disk; for some reason the hard disk does not clean the temporal
data.

a. The hard disk does not perform properly.
b. Firmware error or bug.

Corrective actions
1. Run diagnostics.
Severity
01.60.01:03

NVM default values.
Description
The data written in the hard disk does not match with the data found in IDS (EE-PROM) or both are empty.

Both hard disk and IDS replaced at the same time (and both memories were empty).
Corrective actions
Call support.
Severity
01.60.02:03

Part number mismatch.
Description
Part number of the hard disk does not match the proper part number required by the printer (wrong part).

The printer was assembled with the wrong hard disk.
Corrective actions
Call support.
Severity

01.60.03:03

Serial number mismatch.
Description
The serial number of the hard disk is not correct.

The printer was assembled with the wrong hard disk.
Corrective actions
Call support.
Severity
10. E-cabinet error codes

10.01.01:01

Contactor K1 does not switch state
Description
The contactor K-1 is closed when it should be open, or open when it should be closed.

a. Contactor fault
b. Feedback cable fault (from K-1 contacts 33/34 to e-cabinet PCA contact connector)
c. E-cabinet PCA fault
Corrective actions
1. Restart the printer. If the problem does not repeat, it is probably a firmware glitch.
2. If the problem persists, check that the cable from the 33/34 contacts of K-1 to the e-cabinet PCA is not
damaged. If it is damaged, replace the cable. This affects the other contactors as there is only one
feedback cable for all of them.
3. If the problem persists, replace the K-1 contactor.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the e-cabinet PCA. See E-cabinet PCA on page 552.
Severity

10.01.02:01

Description
a. Contactor fault
Corrective actions
4. If the problem still persists, replace the e-cabinet PCA. See E-cabinet PCA on page 552.
Severity
10.01.03:01

Description

a. Contactor fault

Corrective actions
4. If the problem persists, replace the e-cabinet PCA. See E-cabinet PCA on page 552.
Severity
10.01.04:01

Description

a. Contactor fault
Corrective actions
4. If the problem persists, replace the e-cabinet PCA. See E-cabinet PCA on page 552.
Severity
10.02.00:01

E-cabinet PCA malfunction. Run subsystem diagnostic. If the problem persists, call support representative.

Description
A malfunction on the e-cabinet PCA has been detected.

SMT fuse blown, component failure
Corrective actions
2. Replace the e-cabinet PCA. See E-cabinet PCA on page 552.
Severity
10.02.00:03

E-cabinet PCA not supported version
Description
PCA wrong version

a. Wrong version of the PCA installed
b. PCA malfunction
Corrective actions
2. Replace the PCA with the appropriate revision. See E-cabinet PCA on page 552.
Severity
10.02.00:04

E-cabinet to e-box communication failure

Description
I2C communication malfunction. The e-box cannot communicate with the e-cabinet.

a. Communication cable not connected or misconnected
b. PSU-2 not working
c. PCA malfunction
Corrective actions
2. Find the root cause and correct it.
Severity
10.02.00:11

E-cabinet PCA 5V to ground voltage out of range
Description
E-cabinet PCA 5V to ground voltage is out of range.

E-cabinet PCA malfunction
Corrective actions
Severity
10.02.00:13

E-cabinet PCA 8V to ground voltage out of range

Description
E-cabinet PCA 8V to ground voltage out of range.

E-cabinet PCA malfunction
Corrective actions
Severity
10.02.00:15

E-cabinet PCA replaceable fuse blown
Description
The glass fuse on the inner face of the e-cabinet PCA (F24) has blown.

a. Fuse blown
b. PCA fault
Corrective actions
1. Replace the fuse.
2. If the problem persists, check for short-circuits:
a. Safety circuit (Safety Engine Adaptor PCA, contactors, e-stops, Interlocks, and all associated
cabling).
b. E-cabinet fan and cabling.
c. Rearm button light and cabling.
Severity

10.02.00:20

E-cabinet temperature outside normal range
Description
The ambient temperature is too high in the e-cabinet.

a. Room temperature too high
b. Fan failure
c. Ventilation grille filter clogged
d. Ventilation grille blocked by an external factor
Corrective actions
None mandatory, warning only.
Severity
Warning only—continuable
10.02.00:21
E-cabinet temperature outside safe range
Description
Ambient temperature too high in the e-cabinet.
a. Room temperature too high
b. Fan failure
c. Ventilation grille filter clogged
d. Ventilation grille blocked by an external factor
Corrective actions
1. Wait for cool-down.
2. Check the ventilation and room temperature.

Severity
10.02.00:41

E-cabinet PCA overcurrent
Description
The overcurrent protection for the actuators powered by the e-cabinet PCA has been triggered.

a. Fault in a 24 V component external to the PCA
b. PCA fault
Corrective actions
1. Inspect the safety circuit: safety engine adaptor PCA, contactors, e-stops, interlocks, and all associated
cabling.
2. Inspect e-cabinet fan and cabling.
3. Rearm button light and cabling.
Severity
10.03.01:01

E-cabinet PSU-1 no voltage or alarm signal asserted
Description
PSU-1 not supplying voltage, or alarm signal is activated.

a. PSU-1 not receiving AC voltage
b. PSU-1 DC output cable disconnected
c. PSU-1 in fault mode (overcurrent, overvoltage, overtemperature)
d. PSU-1 end of life
e. PCA malfunction

Corrective actions
1. Check ACB-7.
3. Reboot the printer.
4. Check that the PSU-1 feedback LED is lit.
5. If the LED is lit, check the DC output cable and the PCA.
6. If the PSU-1 is still not working replace the PSU-1. See E-cabinet PSUs 1 to 4 on page 555.
Severity
10.03.01:18

E-cabinet PSU-1 voltage too high
Description
PSU–1 voltage too high.

a. PSU-1 voltage too high
b. PCA malfunction
Corrective actions
2. Run the subsystem diagnostic.
3. If the problem persists:
a. Disconnect the DC output cable from the PCA.
b. Measure the PSU-1 output voltage with a voltage meter.
c. If lower than 42V +10%, it is likely a PCA malfunction.
d. Otherwise adjust the PSU-1 output voltage through its adjustment potentiometer with the help of
a voltage meter. Voltage must be within 42V +/- 5%.
e. If the PSU-1 cannot be adjusted, replace the PSU. See E-cabinet PSUs 1 to 4 on page 555.
Severity

10.03.01:19

E-cabinet PSU-1 voltage too low
Description
PSU–1 voltage too low.

a. PSU-1 voltage too low
b. PCA malfunction
Corrective actions
c. If higher than 42V +10%, it is likely a PCA malfunction.
Severity
10.03.02:01

Description

e. PCA malfunction

Corrective actions
1. Check ACB-6.
Severity
10.03.02:10
Description
PSU_2 ground to earth voltage out of range. Run subsystem diagnostic. If the problem persists, call support.

The subsystem powered by this PSU may be not properly earthed.
Corrective actions
Check powered subsystem earthing.
Severity
Silent
10.03.02:18

Description
PSU_2 voltage too high.

b. PCA malfunction

Corrective actions
Severity
10.03.02:19

Description
The PSU-2 voltage is too low.

b. PCA malfunction
Corrective actions
Severity

10.03.03:01

Description
e. PCA malfunction
Corrective actions
1. Check ACB-7.
6. If the PSU-3 is still not working, replace the PSU-3. See E-cabinet PSUs 1 to 4 on page 555.
Severity
10.03.03:10
Description

Corrective actions

Severity
Silent
10.03.03:18

Description
The PSU-3 voltage is too high.

b. PCA malfunction
Corrective actions
Severity
10.03.03:19

Description

b. PCA malfunction
Corrective actions
Severity
10.03.04:01

Description
The PSU-4 is not supplying voltage, or an alarm signal is activated.

e. PCA malfunction
Corrective actions
1. Check ACB-7.

Severity
10.03.04:10
Description

Corrective actions
Severity
Silent
10.03.04:18
Description
b. PCA malfunction
Corrective actions

c. If lower than 13 V +10%, it is likely a PCA malfunction.
a voltage meter. Voltage must be within 13 V ±5%.
Severity
10.03.04:19

Description

b. PCA malfunction
Corrective actions
Severity
10.03.05:01

Description

e. PCA malfunction
Corrective actions
1. Check ACB-6.
6. If the PSU-5 is still not working, replace the PSU-5. See E-cabinet PSUs 5 to 7 on page 563.
Severity
10.03.05:10
Description
PSU-5 ground to earth voltage out of range. Run subsystem diagnostic. If the problem persists, call support.

NOTE: In the case of this PSU, this error may appear as scan-axis motor braking, but it doesn't mean that
the scan-axis motor is faulty.
Corrective actions
Severity
Silent

10.03.05:18

Description

b. PCA malfunction
Corrective actions
Severity
10.03.05:19

Description

b. PCA malfunction

Corrective actions
Severity
10.03.06:01

Description

e. PCA malfunction
Corrective actions
1. Check ACB-6.

Severity
10.03.06:10
Description

Corrective actions
Severity
Silent
10.03.06:18

Description

b. PCA malfunction
Corrective actions

Severity
10.03.06:19

Description

b. PCA malfunction
Corrective actions
Severity
10.03.07:01

Description

e. PCA malfunction
Corrective actions
1. Check ACB-7.
Severity
10.03.07:10
Description
PSU-7 ground to earth voltage out of range. Run subsystem diagnostic. If the problem persists, call support.

Corrective actions
Severity
Silent
10.03.07:18


Description

b. PCA malfunction
Corrective actions
Severity
10.03.07:19

Description

b. PCA malfunction
Corrective actions

Severity
10.04.11:15

E-cabinet MO fuse blown
Description
The MO Motor 42V fuse has blown.

MO Motor 42V fuse blown (F12)
Corrective actions
2. Shut down the machine (completely, main switch off).
3. Replace the fuse F12.
Severity
Continuable (when in roll-to-floor mode this output is not used)
10.04.12:15

E-cabinet MF fuse blown
Description
The MF Motor 42V fuse has blown.

MF Motor 42V fuse blown (F11)

Corrective actions
Severity
10.04.13:15

E-cabinet MI fuse blown
Description
The MI Motor 42V fuse has blown (F10).

MI Motor 42V fuse blown (F10)
Corrective actions
Severity
10.04.14:15

E-cabinet MA fuse blown
Description
The MA Motor 42V fuse has blown.

MA Motor 42V fuse blown (F9)

Corrective actions
Severity
10.04.15:15

E-cabinet 42V CARR fuse blown
Description
The carriage 42V CARR fuse has blown.

Carriage 42V fuse blown (F8)
Corrective actions
Severity
10.04.21:15

E-cabinet ISS fuse blown
Description
The ISS 24V fuse has blown.

ISS 24V fuse blown (F19)

Corrective actions
Severity
10.04.22:15

E-cabinet VAPOR fuse blown
Description
The vapor removal 24V fuse has blown.

Vapor removal 24V fuse blown (F20)
Corrective actions
Severity
10.04.31:15

E-cabinet PPS fuse blown
Description
The PPS 32V fuse has blown.

PPS 32V fuse blown (F7)

Corrective actions
Severity
10.04.32:15

E-cabinet WW fuse blown
Description
The printhead cleaning system 32V fuse has blown.

Printhead cleaning system 32V fuse blown (F6)
Corrective actions
Severity
10.04.33:15

E-cabinet SVS fuse blown
Description
The SVS 32V fuse has blown.

SVS 32V fuse blown (F5)

Corrective actions
Severity
10.04.34:15

E-cabinet TUR fuse blown
Description
The take-up reel PCA 32V fuse has blown.

TUR PCA 32V fuse blown (F4)
Corrective actions
Severity
SEVERE (non-continuable) (if the TUR is not in use this output is not needed)
10.04.35:15

E-cabinet PSU-3-5 fuse blown
Description
The unused 32V fuse has blown.

Unused 32V fuse blown (F3)

Corrective actions
Severity
Continuable
10.04.41:15

E-cabinet 12V CARR fuse blown
Description
The carriage 12V fuse has blown.

Carriage 12V fuse blown (F2)
Corrective actions
Severity
10.04.42:15

Description


Corrective actions
Severity
Continuable
10.04.51:15

E-cabinet SAX fuse blown
Description
The SAX 42V fuse has blown.

SAX 42V fuse blown (F13)
Corrective actions
Severity
10.04.52:15

Description


Corrective actions
Severity
Continuable
10.04.61:15

E-cabinet CURING-1 fuse blown
Description
The curing-1 24V fuse has blown.

Curing-1 24V fuse blown (F18)
Corrective actions
Severity
10.04.62:15

E-cabinet AC/AC converter 2 fuse blown. Run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support
representative.
Description
The DS-2 24V fuse has blown.

DS-2 24V fuse blown (F17)

Corrective actions
Severity
10.04.71:15

E-cabinet CURING-2 fuse blown
Description
The curing-2 24V fuse has blown.

Curing-2 24V fuse blown (F16)
Corrective actions
Severity
10.04.72:15

E-cabinet AC/AC converter 1 fuse blown. Run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support
representative.
Description
The DS-1 24V fuse has blown.

DS-1 24V fuse blown (F15)

Corrective actions
Severity
10.05.11:40

E-cabinet MO power output overload. Run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support
representative.
Description
The MO motor 42V switch is overloaded.

MO motor 42V switch overload
Corrective actions
3. If the problem persists, most likely there is a problem in the MO motor.
Severity
Continuable (when in roll-to-floor mode this output is not used)
10.05.12:40

E-cabinet MF power output overload. Run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support
representative.
Description
The MF motor 42V switch is overloaded.

MF motor 42V switch overload

Corrective actions
3. If the problem persists, most likely there is a problem in the MF motor.
Severity
10.05.13:40

E-cabinet MI power output overload. Run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support
representative.
Description
The MI motor 42V switch is overloaded.

MI motor 42V switch overload
Corrective actions
3. If the problem persists, most likely there is a problem in the MI motor.
Severity
10.05.14:40
E-cabinet MA power output overload. Run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support
representative.
Description
The MA motor 42V switch is overloaded.

MA motor 42V switch overload

Corrective actions
3. If the problem persists, most likely there is a problem in the MA motor.
Severity
10.05.15:40

E-cabinet 42V CARR power output overload. Run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support
representative.
Description
The carriage 42V switch is overloaded.

Carriage 42V switch overload
Corrective actions
3. If the problem persists, most likely there is a problem in the Carriage.
Severity
10.05.21:40
E-cabinet ISS power output overload. Run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support
representative.
Description
The ISS 24V switch is overloaded.

ISS 24V switch overload

Corrective actions
3. If the problem persists, most likely there is a problem in the ISS.
Severity
10.05.22:40

E-cabinet VAPOR power output overload. Run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support
representative.
Description
The vapor removal 24V switch is overloaded.

Vapor removal 24V switch overload
Corrective actions
3. If the problem persists, most likely there is a problem in the Vapor removal.
Severity
10.05.31:40
E-cabinet PPS power output overload. Run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support
representative.
Description
The PPS 32V switch is overloaded.

PPS 32V switch overload

Corrective actions
3. If the problem persists, most likely there is a problem in the PPS.
Severity
Continuable
10.05.32:40

E-cabinet WW power output overload. Run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support
representative.
Description
The printhead cleaning system 32V switch is overloaded.

Printhead cleaning system 32V switch overload
Corrective actions
3. If the problem persists, most likely there is a problem in the printhead cleaning system.
Severity
10.05.33:40
E-cabinet SVS power output overload. Run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support
representative.
Description
The SVS 32V switch is overloaded.

SVS 32V switch overload

Corrective actions
3. If the problem persists, most likely there is a problem in the SVS.
Severity
10.05.34:40

E-cabinet TUR power output overload. Run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support
representative.
Description
The take-up reel PCA 32V switch is overloaded.

Take-up reel PCA 32V switch overload
Corrective actions
3. If the problem persists, most likely there is a problem in the TUR sensor system.
Severity
Continuable (if the TUR is not in use this output is not needed)
10.04.35:40
E-cabinet PSU-3-5 power output overload. Run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support
representative.
Description
Unused 32V switch is overloaded.

Unused 32V switch overload

Corrective actions
No corrective actions as output is not used.
Severity
Continuable
10.05.41:40

E-cabinet 12V CARR power output overload. Run subsystem diagnostics. If problem persists, call your
support representative.
Description
The carriage 12V switch is overloaded.

Carriage 12V switch overload
Corrective actions
3. If the problem persists, most likely there is a problem in the Carriage.
Severity
10.05.42:40

representative.
Description

Corrective actions

Severity
Continuable
10.05.51:40

E-cabinet SAX power output overload. Run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support
representative.
Description
The SAX 42V switch is overloaded.

SAX 42V switch overload
Corrective actions
3. If the problem persists, most likely there is a problem in the SAX motor.
Severity
10.05.52:40

representative.
Description

Corrective actions
Severity
Continuable

10.05.62:40

E-cabinet DS-2 power output overload. Run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support
representative.
Description
The DS-2 24V switch is overloaded.

DS-2 24V switch overload
Corrective actions
3. If the problem persists, most likely there is a problem in the DS-2 AC converter.
Severity
10.05.72:40

E-cabinet DS-1 power output overload. Run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support
representative.
Description
The DS-1 24V switch is overloaded.
DS-1 24V switch overload
Corrective actions
3. If the problem persists, most likely there is a problem in the DS-1 AC converter.
Severity

10.06.09:40

One or more emergency stops are pressed. Run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support
representative.
Corrective actions
1. Ensure that no emergency stops are pressed.
2. Run safety diagnostics to check the emergency stops.
3. Run e-cabinet diagnostics and check the e-box interconnect PCA LEDs.
Severity
10.07.07:40

Interlock bypass activated. Run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support representative.
Safety bypass in the e-cabinet enabled
Corrective actions
Disable the bypass to operate the printer in normal mode. For the customer to use the printer normally, the
bypass must be disabled.
Severity
10.08.00:01

E-cabinet fan not working
Description
Fan rotation feedback signal not detected

Fan malfunction or not connected

Corrective actions
1. Check the fan cabling.
2. Replace the fan if necessary. See E-cabinet fan on page 571.
Severity
Advisory
10.09.00:01

Safety circuit powered by default
Description
The PCA detects power in the safety circuit when there should be no power.

PCA malfunction
Corrective actions
1. Replace the PCA.
Severity
SEVERE
10.10.0X:01 (X may be 1 or 2)
(10.10.01:01, 10.10.02:01)

AC/AC converter 0X faulty signal detected. Reinitialize carriage to recover the system. If this doesn’t work,
run subsystem diagnostics, and if the problem is confirmed call your support representative.

a. PSU malfunction
b. Printer input voltage problem (usually temporary)
c. Temperature too high
d. Current too high

Corrective actions
1. Run e-cabinet and drying subsystem diagnostics and check AC/AC LEDs and cabling.
2. Check whether the customer has power line problems at the site (usually this causes intermittent
failures).
3. Check that environmental temperature and e-cabinet fan and filter are OK.
4. Check that there is no short-circuit in the AC/AC output.
Severity
Advisory
10.10.0X:40 (X may be 1 or 2)
(10.10.01:40, 10.10.02:40)

AC/AC converter 0X current not zero. Reinitialize carriage to recover the system. If this doesn’t work, run
subsystem diagnostics, and if the problem is confirmed call your support representative.

a. Control failure in drying module X, internal check failure
b. Error or problem with lamp X
Corrective actions
1. Run e-cabinet and drying subsystem diagnostics and drying lamps.
2. Follow troubleshooting instructions for the part identified by the diagnostics.
Severity
Advisory
10.10.0X:41 (X may be 1 or 2)
(10.10.01:41, 10.10.02:41)

AC/AC converter 0X current too high detected. Reinitialize carriage to recover the system. If this doesn’t
work, run subsystem diagnostics, and if the problem is confirmed call your support representative.

a. Drying PCA fuse burnt out
b. Drying PCA failure
c. Current leakage to ground

Corrective actions
3. Check connections to the lamp.
Severity
Advisory
10.10.0X:42 (X may be 1 or 2)
(10.10.01:42, 10.10.02:42)

AC/AC converter 0X current too low detected. Reinitialize carriage to recover the system. If this doesn’t work,

a. Lamp problem: open circuit, lamp blown
b. Drying PCA problem
Corrective actions
Severity
Advisory
10.10.0X:43 (X may be 1 or 2)
(10.10.01:43, 10.10.02:43)

AC/AC converter 0X current sensor value zero or missing. Reinitialize carriage to recover the system. If this
doesn’t work, run subsystem diagnostics, and if the problem is confirmed call your support representative.
a. Drying PCA problem
b. Cabling problem
c. Engine board adaptor problem

Corrective actions
1. Run e-cabinet, e-box, and drying subsystem diagnostics and drying lamps.
Severity
Advisory
10.10.0X:96 (X may be 1 or 2)
(10.10.01:96, 10.10.02:96)

AC/AC converter 0X current check failed. Reinitialize carriage to recover the system. If this doesn’t work, run

Drying problem
Corrective actions
1. Run e-cabinet, e-box, and drying subsystem diagnostics and drying lamps.
Severity
Advisory
11. Pipeline error codes

11.01.01:01
FO PCA (e-box) malfunction. Reboot the printer and run printhead Control diagnostics. If problem is
confirmed, call your support representative.

a. Fiber-optic PCA in e-box doesn't work.
b. Fiber-optic PCA in e-box isn't powered.
Corrective actions
1. Check that PCA is in place.
2. Check PCA input voltage.

Severity
Advisory
11.01.01:04

E-box fiber-optics PCA is not responding. Reboot the printer, and run Control link diagnostics. If problem is
confirmed, call your support representative.

a. Fiber-optic PCA in e-box does not work or it is not connected.
b. Check the cabling of Engine PCA to fiber-optics PCA.
Corrective actions
1. Check that the PCA is in place.
2. Check all the cabling.
3. Check LEDs.
Severity
Advisory
11.02.01:09

FO Cable not connected. Reboot the printer and run Control link diagnostics. If problem is confirmed call your
Connection problem
Corrective actions
1. Check if the connector is latched OK.
2. Check if the cable is not damaged.
Severity
Advisory

11.03.01:04

Carriage fiber-optics PCA not responding. Reboot the printer and run Control link diagnostics. If problem is
confirmed call your support representative.

a. Fiber-optic PCA in carriage doesn't work or isn’t connected
b. FO damage
Corrective actions
1. Check that the PCA is on place.
2. Check all the cabling.
3. Check LEDs.
4. Check fiber-optic cable.
Severity
Advisory
11.04.0X:09 (X may be in the range 1–7)

(11.04.01:09, 11.04.02:09, 11.04.03:09, 11.04.04:09, 11.04.05:09, 11.04.06:09, 11.04.07:09)

Carriage fiber-optics PCA cable to printhead X interconnect not properly connected. Reboot the printer and
run Control link diagnostics. If problem is confirmed call your support representative.

a. FO PCA cable to printhead interconnect X is not connected/damaged/broken.
b. FO PCA is damaged or not working.
Corrective actions
1. Run Control link diagnostics test.
2. Check cabling and LEDs in fiber-optics PCA and printhead interconnect X.
3. Swap printhead interconnect PCA (same color)
4. If the problem accompanies the printhead interconnect PCA then replace it.
5. Otherwise replace cable.
6. If the problem remains, replace the fiber-optics PCA. See Fiber-optics PCA on page 466.
Severity
Advisory

(11.05.01:01, 11.05.02:01, 11.05.03:01, 11.05.04:01, 11.05.05:01, 11.05.06:01, 11.05.07:01)
Printhead interconnect X malfunction. Restart the printer in diagnostic mode and run printhead control
diagnostics. If problem is confirmed, call your support representative.
Printhead interconnect X is not working/damaged/broken.
Corrective actions
1. Run control link diagnostics test.
2. Check cabling and LEDs in the fiber-optics PCA and printhead interconnect X.
3. Swap the printhead interconnect PCA with one of the same color.
4. If the problem accompanies the printhead interconnect PCA, then replace it. See Printhead interconnect
color PCA on page 464 or Printhead interconnect optimizer PCA on page 462.
Severity
Advisory

(11.05.01:04, 11.05.02:04, 11.05.03:04, 11.05.04:04, 11.05.05:04, 11.05.06:04, 11.05.07:04)
Printhead interconnect X not responding. Reboot the printer and run printhead control diagnostics. If
problem is confirmed, call your support representative.

Printhead interconnect X is not working/damaged/broken.
Corrective actions
1. Run control link diagnostics test.
2. Check cabling and LEDs in the fiber-optics PCA and printhead interconnect X.
3. Swap the printhead interconnect PCA with one of the same color.
4. If the problem accompanies the printhead interconnect PCA, then replace it. See Printhead interconnect
color PCA on page 464 or Printhead interconnect optimizer PCA on page 462.
Severity
Advisory

NOTE: In some cases when a printhead is not accepted by the printer, try swapping the printhead with
another one of the same color. If the problem remains in the same position, run the control link diagnostic.
Otherwise proceed to replace the rejected printhead.
15. Dryer error codes

15.01.0X:01 (X may be 1 or 2)
(15.01.01:01, 15.01.02:01)
Drying PCA 0X PCA issue. Reinitialize carriage to recover the system. If this doesn’t work, run subsystem
diagnostics, and if the problem is confirmed call your support representative.
a. Drying PCA power problem
b. Drying PCA communications problem
c. Calibration jumper problem
d. Temperature sensor problem
e. HW/Watchdog supervisor disabled
f. Drying PCA failure
Corrective actions
1. Check connections.
2. Run drying and e-cabinet diagnostics.
3. Replace the drying PCA. See Drying PCA on page 522.
Severity
Advisory
15.01.0X:02 (X may be 1 or 2)
(15.01.01:02, 15.01.02:02)

Drying PCA 0X hardware supervisor reset. Internal trigger couldn't be set automatically. Run subsystem
diagnostic.

a. Isolated problem
b. Drying PCA problem

Corrective actions
1. Check drying PCA connections.
2. Run drying PCA diagnostics.
Severity
Advisory
15.01.0X:03 (X may be 1 or 2)
(15.01.01:03, 15.01.02:03)

Drying PCA 0X firmware/hardware mismatch. Drier subsystem disabled. Reinstall/upgrade printer firmware,
if the problem persists call your service representative.

Hardware/software mismatch
Corrective actions
1. Update the firmware.
2. Replace the PCA. See Drying PCA on page 522.
Severity
Advisory
15.01.0X:05 (X may be 1 or 2)
(15.01.01:05, 15.01.02:05)

Drying PCA 0X scan axis timeout expired. Reinitialize carriage to recover the system. If this doesn't work, run
subsystem diagnostics, and if problem is confirmed call your support representative.
Description
The scan axis has been stopped with lamps on for a longer time than the safety threshold set by the
firmware.
a. Problems with scan-axis control
b. Problems with drying hardware or cabling

c. Intermittent DS1 or DS2 behavior or cabling problem
d. AC line power-quality problems
Corrective actions
1. Reinitialize the carriage, run the scan-axis friction test, and oil the carriage if necessary.
2. Run scan-axis diagnostics and check the encoder strip.
3. Check drying cables. Run drying subsystem diagnostics. Check the encoder cable to the drying PCA and
replace failing parts.
4. Check DS-X cabling. Run e-cabinet diagnostics, and replace a failing power supply if necessary.
5. Ask the customer’s power utility provider about recent changes.
Severity
Advisory
15.01.0X:09 (X may be 1 or 2)
(15.01.01:09, 15.01.02:09)

Drying PCA 0X has lost scan axis encoder signal. Retry. If this doesn’t work, run subsystem diagnostics, and if
problem is confirmed call your support representative.
Description
A scan-axis problem has been detected with lamps on. The drying subsystem is disconnected for safety
reasons.
a. Scan-axis encoder problem
b. Drying safety monitor hardware problems
Corrective actions
1. Run scan-axis diagnostics.
2. Run drying diagnostics.
Severity
Advisory
15.01.0X:86 (X may be 1 or 2)
(15.01.01:86, 15.01.02:86)

Drying PCA 0X Dryer PCA ID issue. Reinitialize carriage to recover the system. If this doesn’t work, run

The PCA is not providing the correct ID.
Corrective actions
2. Run drying diagnostics.
Severity
Advisory
15.01.01:94

Drying PCA 01 scan-axis timeout check failed. Reinitialize carriage to recover the system. If this doesn’t work,

Hardware timeout check failed.
Corrective actions
1. Check that the AC/AC power supply works properly.
Severity
Advisory
15.01.01:95
Drying PCA 01 hardware supervisor check failed. Reinitialize carriage to recover the system. If this doesn’t


Corrective actions
Severity
Advisory
15.01.02:94

Drying PCA 02 scan-axis timeout check failed. Reinitialize carriage to recover the system. If this doesn’t work,

Corrective actions
Severity
Advisory
15.01.02:95

Drying PCA 02 hardware supervisor check failed. Reinitialize carriage to recover the system. If this doesn’t

Corrective actions
Severity
Advisory

15.02.0X:01 (X may be 1 or 2)
(15.02.01:01, 15.02.02:01)

Bi-metal dryer 0X in error state. Reinitialize carriage to recover the system. If this doesn’t work, run
a. Bi-metal not properly connected to PCA
b. Temperature too high in drying module
Corrective actions
1. Reconnect properly.
2. Check temperature module temperature.
3. Replace bi-metal.
Severity
Advisory
15.03.0X:01 (X may be 1 or 2)
(15.03.01:01, 15.03.02:01)

Drying fan array 0X in error state. Reinitialize carriage to recover the system. If this doesn’t work, run

At least one fan is not spinning (blocked or broken).
Corrective actions
Search for the faulty fan and replace it.
Severity
Advisory
15.03.0X:42 (X may be 1 or 2)
(15.03.01:42, 15.03.02:42)
Drying fan array 0X current value too low. Reinitialize carriage to recover the system. Replace affected part.

a. At least one fan is not connected to the fan harness.
b. At least one fan is failing.
c. A fan fuse is blown.
d. There is an error in a pressure servo (incorrect PWM).
Corrective actions
1. Visually inspect the fan array harness.
3. Reset or restart the system.
Severity
Advisory
15.06.0X:01 (X may be 1 or 2)
(15.06.01:01, 15.06.02:01)

Drying PCA 0X lamps disabled. Reinitialize carriage to recover the system. If this doesn’t work, run subsystem

Safety issue or wrong working condition detected. Typically this error will never show up alone, it is
consequence of another error condition.
Corrective actions
Run subsystem diagnostics to identify root cause.
Severity
Advisory
15.07.0X:01 (X may be 1 or 2)
(15.07.01:01, 15.07.02:01)

Drying PCA 0X relay error. Reinitialize carriage to recover the system. If this doesn’t work, run subsystem

a. There is a drying PCA power problem.
b. One (or both) relays are in S.C. or GPIO is stuck in logical level 1.
c. Some cable into the AC circuit is not connected.
d. One (or both) is in O.C.
Corrective actions
1. Run subsystem diagnostics to confirm the problem.
4. Reconnect properly.
Severity
Advisory
15.07.01:93

Drying PCA 01 relay check failed. Reinitialize carriage to recover the system. If this doesn’t work, run

Drying PCA relay failed
Corrective actions
Check with diagnostics and replace the PCA if necessary. See Drying PCA on page 522.
Severity
Advisory
15.07.02:93

Drying PCA 02 relay check failed. Reinitialize carriage to recover the system. If this doesn’t work, run

Drying PCA relay failed

Corrective actions
Check with diagnostics and replace the PCA if necessary. See Drying PCA on page 522.
Severity
Advisory
15.08.01:15

Drying PCA 01 fuse 1 burnt. Reinitialize carriage to recover the system. If this doesn’t work, run subsystem

Fuse burnt out.
Corrective actions
Severity
Advisory
15.08.02:15


Fuse burnt out.
Corrective actions
Severity
Advisory

15.08.03:15


Fuse burnt out.
Corrective actions
Severity
Advisory
15.08.04:15
Fuse burnt out.
Corrective actions
Severity
Advisory
15.09.01:01
Drying PCA 01 substrate crash sensor 1. Reinitialize carriage to recover the system. If this doesn’t work, run

Description
Crash sensor 1 is detecting an obstacle.

a. Printhead crash against the substrate
b. Any obstacle in the carriage path
c. Dirty sensor
d. Faulty sensor
Corrective actions
1. Check that the carriage can move freely without obstacles.
2. Clean the sensor.
3. Replace the sensor.
Severity
Advisory
15.09.01:92

Substrate crash sensor 01 check failed. Reinitialize carriage to recover the system. If this doesn't work, run

a. Any obstacle in the carriage path
b. Dirty or misplaced sensor
c. Cabling problem
d. Drying PCA problem
Corrective actions
2. Check that nothing is blocking the crash sensor.
3. Reboot in diagnostic mode and run crash sensor and drying diagnostics.
4. Check cable and fiber-optic ends.
Severity
Advisory

15.09.02:01

Description

c. Dirty sensor
d. Faulty sensor
Corrective actions
Severity
Advisory
15.09.02:92
Substrate crash sensor 02 check failed. Reinitialize carriage to recover the system. If this doesn't work, run
a. Any obstacle in the carriage path
b. Dirty or misplaced sensor
c. Cabling problem
d. Drying PCA problem
Corrective actions
2. Check that nothing is blocking the crash sensor.
3. Reboot in diagnostic mode and run crash sensor and drying diagnostics.
4. Check cable and fiber-optic ends.

Severity
Advisory
15.09.03:01

Description

c. Dirty sensor
d. Faulty sensor
Corrective actions
Severity
Advisory
15.09.04:01

Description


c. Dirty sensor
d. Faulty sensor
Corrective actions
Severity
Advisory
16. Curing error codes

16.01.00:86

Voltage configuration out of range. contact your support representative to reset installation parameters.

Voltage configuration is not correctly set.
Corrective actions
Reconfigure the voltage.
Severity
Advisory
16.01.0X:01 (X may be 1 or 2)
(16.01.01:01, 16.01.02:01)

Curing module X error state. Module disabled, substrate going under this module won't be cured. But if
module is required to print, run subsystem diagnostic. If the problem persists, call support.
a. The curing module reports a failure and cannot be used.
b. The curing PCA has failed.
c. There is a problem with the curing PCA connections.

Corrective actions
2. Run e-cabinet, e-box, and curing diagnostics.
3. Replace the curing PCA. See Curing and vapor removal PCA on page 490.
Severity
Advisory
16.01.0X:02 (X may be 1 or 2)
(16.01.01:02, 16.01.02:02)

Curing module X temperature servo start failure. Retry, and if the problem persists call HP support and run
diagnostic.

a. Temperature sensor problem
b. Curing PCA failure
Corrective actions
1. Run curing diagnostics.
2. Check temperature sensor connections, and replace the sensor if necessary.
Severity
Advisory
16.01.0X:03 (X may be 1 or 2)
(16.01.01:03, 16.01.02:03)
Curing module X firmware and hardware mismatch. Module disabled, substrate going under this module
won't be cured. But if module is required to print, reinstall/upgrade printer firmware. If problem persists, call
support.

Current firmware version and curing module hardware version mismatch.

Corrective actions
1. Update printer firmware.
Severity
Advisory
16.01.0X:04 (X may be 1 or 2)
(16.01.01:04, 16.01.02:04)

Curing module X generic comms error Module disabled, substrate going under this module won't be cured.
But if module is required to print, run subsystem diagnostic. If the problem persists, call support.

a. Printer cannot communicate with module
b. Cabling problem or curing PCA problem
Corrective actions
1. Check cabling.
2. Run e-cabinet and e-box diagnostics.
Severity
Advisory
16.01.0X:05 (X may be 1 or 2)
(16.01.01:05, 16.01.02:05)

Curing module X warm-up timeout module disabled, substrate going under this module won't be cured. But if
module is required to print, run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call support.
a. Curing module cannot reach target temperature on time.
b. Curing bar is not properly closed and latched.
c. Curing module is not closed or has an internal failure (fan or resistor).

Corrective actions
1. Check that the module is properly closed and sealed.
2. Run subsystem diagnostics.
3. Replace fan/resistor module.
Severity
Advisory
16.01.0X:09 (X may be 1 or 2)
(16.01.01:09, 16.01.02:09)

Curing module X: no PCA device detected. Module disabled, substrate going under this module won't be
cured. But if module is required to print, run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call support.
Description
The printer cannot detect the curing PCA.

a. Curing PCA connection problem
b. Curing PCA malfunction
Corrective actions
Severity
Advisory
16.01.0X:10 (X may be 1 or 2)
(16.01.01:10, 16.01.02:10)

Curing module X AC power out of range. Module disabled, substrate going under this module won't be cured.
But if module is required to print, run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call support.
Description
AC power to the module has been cut.

a. Safety interlocks or emergency stops have been activated. Usually, if this happens, you will have
another system error pointing to the safety element activated.
b. ACB is down (then a couple of modules down).
c. There has been an AC power cut or AC input tension out of range.
d. A resistor has failed.
e. A current-sensor PCA has failed.
Corrective actions
1. Check that safety elements work properly.
2. Check that all ACBs are OK and in working position.
3. Check whether the customer has power cuts and input voltage problems.
4. Check resistor and replace if necessary.
5. Check PCA and replace if necessary. See Curing and vapor removal PCA on page 490.
Severity
Advisory

(16.01.01:41, 16.01.02:41, 16.01.03:41, 16.01.04:41, 16.01.05:41, 16.01.06:41)

Curing module 0X overcurrent warning. contact your support representative to check input voltage
configuration.

a. Wrong configuration of AC input tension
b. AC input tension out of range
c. Resistor degradation
Corrective actions
1. Check AC input tension and reconfigure the printer’s AC input configuration.
2. Check resistor and replace if necessary.
Severity
Advisory

16.02.0X:01 (X may be 1 or 2)
(16.02.01:01, 16.02.02:01)

Curing module X PCA error. Module disabled, substrate going under this module won't be cured. But if module
is required to print, reinstall/upgrade printer firmware. If problem persists, call support.
a. Curing PCA internal error
Corrective actions
1. Reinstall or update the printer’s firmware.
Severity
Advisory
16.02.0X:04 (X may be 1 or 2)
(16.02.01:04, 16.02.02:04)

Curing module X comm error between curing PCA and e-box. Module disabled, substrate going under this
module won't be cured. But, if module is required to print, run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call
support.
a. Curing PCA connection problem
Corrective actions
Severity
Advisory
16.02.0X:10 (X may be 1 or 2)
(16.02.01:10, 16.02.02:10)

Curing module X PCA DC supply error. Module disabled, substrate going under this module won't be cured.
But, if module is required to print, run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call support.

a. DC power error
b. Curing PCA problem
c. Cabling problem
d. Curing PCA power supply error
Corrective actions
Replace any faulty part.
Severity
Advisory
16.02.0X:21 (X may be 1 or 2)
(16.02.01:21, 16.02.02:21)

Curing module X PCA temp too high. Module disabled, substrate going under this module won't be cured. But,
if module is required to print, run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call support.

a. Ambient temperature too high
b. Not enough airflow in module
c. Failure in temperature control
Corrective actions
1. Check the ambient temperature.
2. Check that the fans are working, and that the holes in the curing plate are not blocked.
3. Check the curing PCA.
Severity
Advisory

16.03.00:03

Curing bottom plate model not set or wrongly set in firmware. Contact your support representative.
Curing bottom plate model or revision is not properly set in the printer.
Corrective actions
Go to the diagnostic utilities in Print Care and run the set curing bottom plate diagnostic in order to set the
right model and revision. See Table 5-23 Utilities on page 375.
Severity
Advisory

(16.10.01:20, 16.10.02:20, 16.10.03:20, 16.10.04:20, 16.10.05:20, 16.10.06:20)
Curing module X temperature channel 1 out of range (recirculation). Module disabled, substrate going under
this module won't be cured. But, if module is required to print, run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists,
call support.

Corrective actions
Severity
Advisory

(16.11.01:01, 16.11.02:01, 16.11.03:01, 16.11.04:01, 16.11.05:01, 16.11.06:01)

Curing module X chamber 1 Temperature sensor failure Module disabled, substrate going under this module
won't be cured. But if module is required to print, run subsystem diagnostic. If the problem persists, call
support.

Temperature sensor problem
Corrective actions
Replace the temperature sensor.
Severity
Advisory

(16.13.01:01, 16.13.02:01, 16.13.03:01, 16.13.04:01, 16.13.05:01, 16.13.06:01)

Curing module X chamber 1 fan no spinning detected. Module disabled, substrate going under this module
won't be cured. But if module is required to print, run subsystem diagnostic. If the problem persists, call
support.

The fan is not detected to be spinning. The problem could be the fan itself, the fan power, or the tachometer
signal.
Corrective actions
1. Check the fan connections.
2. Replace the fan.
Severity
Advisory

(16.14.01:15, 16.14.02:15, 16.14.03:15, 16.14.04:15, 16.14.05:15, 16.14.06:15)
Curing module X chamber 1 open circuit detected. Module disabled, substrate going under this module won't
be cured. But, if module is required to print, run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call support.

a. Curing PCA fuse blown
b. Resistor failure
c. Resistor cabling error
d. Curing PCA failure (relay, triac, current sensor)
e. Curing PCA firmware bug
Corrective actions
1. Reinstall or update the firmware.
2. Check the curing PCA and replace it if necessary. See Curing and vapor removal PCA on page 490.
3. Check the resistor and replace it if necessary.
Severity
Advisory

(16.15.01:01, 16.15.02:01, 16.15.03:01, 16.15.04:01, 16.15.05:01, 16.15.06:01)

Curing module X resistor 1 failure. Module disabled, substrate going under this module won't be cured. But, if

a. Curing PCA firmware bug
b. Curing PCA failure (relay or triac)
Corrective actions
Severity
Advisory

(16.20.01:20, 16.20.02:20, 16.20.03:20, 16.20.04:20, 16.20.05:20, 16.20.06:20)

Curing module X temperature channel 2 out of range (recirculation). Module disabled, substrate going under
this module won't be cured. But, if module is required to print, run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists,
call support.

Corrective actions
Severity
Advisory

(16.21.01:01, 16.21.02:01, 16.21.03:01, 16.21.04:01, 16.21.05:01, 16.21.06:01)

Curing module X chamber 2 temperature sensor failure. Module disabled, substrate going under this module
won't be cured. But, if module is required to print, run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call support.

Corrective actions
Replace temperature sensor.
Severity
Advisory

(16.23.01:01, 16.23.02:01, 16.23.03:01, 16.23.04:01, 16.23.05:01, 16.23.06:01)

Curing module X chamber 2 fan no spinning detected. Module disabled, substrate going under this module
won't be cured. But, if module is required to print, run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call support.

signal.
Corrective actions
2. Replace the fan.
Severity
Advisory

(16.24.01:15, 16.24.02:15, 16.24.03:15, 16.24.04:15, 16.24.05:15, 16.24.06:15)

Curing module X chamber 2 open circuit detected. Module disabled, substrate going under this module won't
be cured. But, if module is required to print, run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call support.

a. Curing PCA fuse blown
b. Resistor failure
c. Resistor cabling error
d. Curing PCA failure (relay, triac, current sensor)
e. Curing PCA firmware bug
Corrective actions
3. Check the resistor and replace it if necessary.
Severity
Advisory

(16.25.01:01, 16.25.02:01, 16.25.03:01, 16.25.04:01, 16.25.05:01, 16.25.06:01)

Curing module X resistor 2 failure. Module disabled, substrate going under this module won't be cured. But, if

a. Curing PCA firmware bug
b. Curing PCA failure (relay or triac)
Corrective actions
Severity
Advisory

(16.33.01:01, 16.33.02:01, 16.33.03:01, 16.33.04:01, 16.33.05:01, 16.33.06:01)

Curing module X PCA fan no spinning detected. Module disabled, substrate going under this module won't be
cured. But, if module is required to print, run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call support.

signal.
Corrective actions
2. Replace the fan.
Severity
Advisory

(16.33.01:09, 16.33.02:09, 16.33.03:09, 16.33.04:09, 16.33.05:09, 16.33.06:09)
Curing module X fan connector issue. Module disabled, substrate going under this module won't be cured.
But, if module is required to print, run subsystem diagnostic. If problem persists, call support.

a. Fan failure
b. PCA failure
Corrective actions
1. Check the fan connection.
2. Replace the fan.
3. Replace the PCA.
Severity
Advisory

(16.91.01:01, 16.91.02:01, 16.91.03:01, 16.91.04:01, 16.91.05:01, 16.91.06:01)

Curing module X safety relay failure detected. Safety mechanism disabled, printer can't be operated. Reboot
in diagnostic mode and run safety diagnostics. If problem persists, call support.

Curing may be disabled by satety equipment.
Corrective actions
Run safety and e-cabinet diagnostics, and replace any faulty part.
Severity
SEVERE
21. Capping-station error codes

21.01.00:08

Capping station jam. Reinitialize carriage. If problem persists, call support and store Printhead in the orange
caps.

a. Shutter blocked
b. Friction too high

Corrective actions
1. Use a screwdriver to ensure that the shutter is not jammed against the structure.
2. Clean and grease worm and rod sliders.
Severity
Advisory
21.02.00:01

Capping station position error. Reinitialize carriage. If problem persists, call support and store printhead in
the orange caps.

a. Shutter blocked
c. Problem with encoders or cables
Corrective actions
1. Use a screwdriver to check that the shutter is not jammed against the structure.
Severity
Advisory
21.02.00:02

Capping station movement test fault. Reboot in diagnostic mode and run subsystem diagnostic. If problem
persists, call support and store prinhead in the orange caps.

a. Shutter blocked
Corrective actions
1. Use a screwdriver to check that the shutter is not jammed against the structure.

3. Run the backlash/elasticity diagnostic.
4. If the problem persists, replace the part.
Severity
SEVERE
21.02.00:91

Capping bump switch not activated. Reinitialize carriage. If problem persists, run subsystem diagnostic call
support and store printhead in the orange caps.
End of movement switch fail
Corrective actions
1. Run capping bump switch test, check that the shuttle is closing the switch, and check that the switch
status is reported properly.
2. If the switch works well but the shutter doesn't manage to close it, check that friction is not too high.
3. Otherwise check the switch connection or replace the switch.
Severity
Advisory
21.05.11:04
Motor driver PCA comm failure. Reinitialize carriage. If problem persists, call support.
a. Cabling problem
b. PCA failure
Corrective actions
1. Check all cables arriving at the PCA and from PCA to capping and drop detection shutter motors and
sensors.
2. Replace the remote controller board.
Severity
SEVERE

22. Ink-delivery-system error codes
22.00.00:73

Ink System set is not purged. Call your support representative.

a. A purge has not been performed.
b. A purge has been performed but not completed.
c. A purge has been completed manually.
Corrective actions
a. If a purge has not been performed, complete a full purge of the ink system according to the installation
guide (3 steps).
b. If a purge has been performed but not completed, complete the full purging process according to the
installation guide (3 steps).
c. If a purge has been completed manually (by opening electrovalves or filling intermediate tanks), use
diagnostic procedures; the system will not detect the ink system as purged.
Do not set the ink system as purged if you are not fully convinced that a correct and complete purge of the
system as been performed.
Severity
SEVERE
22.01.02:06

Tubes leakage detected. Run IDS diagnostic. If the problem persists, call your support representative.
a. A genuine ink leakage
b. A false ink leakage
c. False ink leakage detection

Corrective actions
1. Check the bottom tray and the leak sensor. If there is ink present, find the source of the ink leak and fix
it as appropriate. Check whether the body of an electrovalve has been in contact with ink. After fixing,
clean the system and clear the ink leak error. See Table 5-10 Ink delivery system on page 362.
2. If there is water or condensation in the ink tray, clean the accumulated water, dry the tray and the
sensor contacts if required. Remove any possible cause of the accumulation of water.
3. Check for possible short circuits in the ink leakage detection line, use the ink system leakage diagnostic
to troubleshoot the problem, and replace the detection cable or ISS PCA if required. See ISS PCA
on page 683.
Severity
Advisory
22.01.01:76

IDS PCA 01 Backup NVM data corrupted.
Call your support representative.

After writing the NVM backup into the ISS PCA, some data are found to be corrupted.
Corrective actions
1. Review ISS PCA connections.
2. Replace the ISS PCA. See ISS PCA on page 683.
Severity
SEVERE
22.02.XY:06 (X may be in the range 1–7, Y may be 1 or 2)

(22.02.11:06, 22.02.21:06, 22.02.31:06, 22.02.41:06, 22.02.51:06, 22.02.61:06, 22.02.71:06, 22.02.12:06,
22.02.22:06, 22.02.32:06, 22.02.42:06, 22.02.52:06, 22.02.62:06, 22.02.72:06)
Intermediate tank ink broken bag XY.
Run IDS diagnostic. If the problem persists, call your support representative

a. Ink in the air lines coming from the intermediate tank.
b. Ink on the interconnect PCA or intermediate tank connector.
c. Wet or dirty EE contacts.
Corrective actions
1. If (a) is true, replace the intermediate tank (see ISM intermediate tank on page 670) and run the
"Intermediate tanks refill (by time)" diagnostic. Drain the air bottle and clean the air tubes.
2. If (b) or (c) are true, just clean the affected parts. Then run the "Intermediate tank broken bag recovery"
diagnostic to check the error condition and clear the error flag.
Severity
SEVERE
22.02.XY:07 (X may be in the range 1–7, Y may be 1 or 2)

(22.02.11:07, 22.02.21:07, 22.02.31:07, 22.02.41:07, 22.02.51:07, 22.02.61:07, 22.02.71:07, 22.02.12:07,
22.02.22:07, 22.02.32:07, 22.02.42:07, 22.02.52:07, 22.02.62:07, 22.02.72:07)

Intermediate tank end of life XY. Proceed with the intermediate tank maintenance procedure. If the problem
persists, call your support representative.

The intermediate tank has reached the end of its life and should be replaced to prevent any broken bag,
replacing both at same time.
Corrective actions
Run the "Intermediate tank change" diagnostic to follow the process with automatic guidance.
Severity
Silent

(22.04.01:71, 22.04.02:71, 22.04.03:71, 22.04.04:71, 22.04.05:71, 22.04.06:71, 22.04.07:71)

Color module flow start error X. Run IDS diagnostic. If the problem persists, call your support representative.

a. Main electrovalve doesn't open.
b. Intermediate tank full (main electrovalve always open).
c. Ink channel blocked (supply connector needle).
Corrective actions
1. Check intermediate tank ink level, by checking its weight.
2. If is not full (~1 kg), the causes could be (a) or (c). Then execute the valve diagnostic, if it is not the valve
then check the ink channel.
3. If it is full, then execute the valve diagnostic and replace the valve if necessary.
4. Clear the flag error by running the "No flow error recovery" diagnostic.
Severity
SEVERE

(22.04.01:72, 22.04.02:72, 22.04.03:72, 22.04.04:72, 22.04.05:72, 22.04.06:72, 22.04.07:72)

Color module X flow stop error. Run IDS diagnostic. If the problem persists, call your support representative.

a. Electrovalve not closed
b. Air bubble in the system
c. Sensor signal blocked
Corrective actions
1. Run the "Automatic electrovalves and ink pressure sensor check" diagnostic and identify whether the
problem is the valve or the sensor.
2. Replace the faulty part, or repurge if the problem is a bubble.
Severity
SEVERE

(22.05.01:30, 22.05.02:30, 22.05.03:30, 22.05.04:30, 22.05.05:30, 22.05.06:30, 22.05.07:30)

Ink pressure sensor X out of range. Run IDS diagnostic. If the problem persists, call your support
representative.

a. Ink pressure sensor not calibrated
b. Ink pressure sensor broken
c. Ink cartridge not in the right position or with a heavy object on it
Corrective actions
1. Check that the ink cartridge is in the right position with nothing on it.
2. Run the "Ink pressure sensor calibration" diagnostic.
3. Compare the values returned with the ink sensor board label values.
4. If the values are different, set label values, otherwise run the "Automatic electrovalves and ink pressure
sensor check" diagnostic to stabilize pressure, and go back to step 1.
5. If this fails, change the ink sensor board and recalibrate it.
Severity
SEVERE

(22.05.01:83, 22.05.02:83, 22.05.03:83, 22.05.04:83, 22.05.05:83, 22.05.06:83, 22.05.07:83)

Ink pressure sensor X not calibrated. Run IDS diagnostic. If the problem persists, call your support
representative.

a. Ink pressure sensor not calibrated
b. Ink pressure sensor broken
Corrective actions
1. Check that the ink cartridge is in the right position, with nothing on it.
2. Run the "Ink pressure sensor calibration" diagnostic.
3. Compare the values returned with the ink sensor board label values.
4. If the values are different, set label values, otherwise run the "Automatic electrovalves and ink pressure
sensor check" diagnostic to stabilize pressure, and go back to step 1.
5. If this fails, change the ink sensor board and recalibrate it.

Severity
SEVERE
22.06.00:06

General ink leakage. contact your support representative.

a. A genuine ink leakage
b. A false ink leakage
c. False ink leakage detection
Corrective actions
1. Check the ink sump to identify leakage color.
2. Check the faulty ink line, paying attention to the ink pressure sensor, ink four-way valve, electrovalves,
tubes, and fitting.
3. Replace the leaking part.
4. Clean the system.
5. Run the ink system leakage diagnostic, to check that it is fixed and clear the error.
Severity
SEVERE
22.07.0X.01 (X may be 1 or 2)
(22.07.01:01, 22.07.02:01)

ISS PCA0X Adc Ads7828e not responding. Reboot the printer and run subsystem diagnostics. If the problem

Internal ISS PCA malfunction
Corrective actions
1. Check LED status lights.
2. Check ISS PCA connections.
3. Replace ISS PCA. See ISS PCA on page 683.

Severity
SEVERE
22.07.0X.04 (X may be 1 or 2)
(22.07.01:04, 22.07.02:04)

ISS PCA0X GpioExpander not responding. Reboot the printer and run subsystem diagnostics. If the problem
Corrective actions
1. Check the ISS PCA LEDs.
3. Replace the ISS PCA. See ISS PCA on page 683.
Severity
SEVERE
22.10.0X:30 (X may be 1 or 2)
(22.10.01:30, 22.10.02:30)

APS air pressure out of range 0X. Run IDS diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support representative.
Air pressure sensor valves have been detected as out of the expected measurement range. Expected
pressure between −0.2 and 7 psi; for the system error to be triggered the condition must be repeated for 1
minute.
Corrective actions
1. Check the connections of the air tube to the air pressure sensor in the ISS board.
2. Disconnect the tubes and perform a visual inspection of the system, in case of doubt blow into the tube
to ensure there is no blockage towards the relief valve.
3. Replace the ink system main board.
Severity
Advisory

22.10.01:31

APS pressurize error 01. Run IDS diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support representative.
Description
The air system is unable to pressurize to the expected working pressure, which, depending on the actual
working cycle, could be 5.2–5.6 psi (normal working pressure) or 3.6–4 psi (during refilling the non-refilled
side is pressurized to prevent backwards refill).
a. Air tube disconnected from the air system
b. Air pump failure (pump or ISS PCA failure)
c. Air pressure bottle leak
d. Air tube leak (tube damaged)
e. Air relief valve failure
f. Intermediate tank leak
g. Air sensor failure, leading to ISS main board failure
h. Intermediate tank supports failure
Corrective actions
1. Review all air tube connections and ensure that there is no disconnection (tubes from pumps and relief
valve to tap, tubes from tap to intermediate tanks).
2. Perform the front and rear air pumps diagnostic procedures. See Table 5-10 Ink delivery system
on page 362.
3. If the pumps do not work, check pump connections and verify pin integrity.
4. If connections are correct, connecting to another working port and start the pump.
5. If the pump works with another port, replace the ink system main board.
6. If the pump fails, replace the air pump. See ISM pump and relief valve on page 679.
7. Check that the pressure bottle cap is tight and there is no leakage.
8. Pressurize the system and check for any failed tube. Leave the pumps on test with diagnostic
procedure , the pump will operate until 6 psi is reached.
9. Check relief valve is closed and air is not escaping from it when pressurizing. Swap the relief valve from
the other side to verify that it is the relief valve that is failing. If the relief valve fails, replace it. See ISM
pump and relief valve on page 679.
10. Swap all intermediate tanks and ensure that there is no leak. If a leak is detected, swap the
intermediate tanks again one by one until the leak is discovered. Replace the intermediate tank as
appropriate and force-fill intermediate tanks. See ISM intermediate tank on page 670.
11. Swap air pressure sensor tube connections to the PCA and display values if required. If the sensors do
not have similar behavior, replace the ISS PCA. See ISS PCA on page 683.

12. Try to adjust tubes and check connections, clean if required.
13. If necessary, replace the ink circuit module. See ISM ink circuit module on page 675.
Severity
SEVERE
22.10.0X:32 (X may be 1 or 2)
(22.10.01:32, 22.10.02:32)
APS air pump error 0X. Run IDS diagnostic. If the problem persists, call your support representative.
Description
The air system is unable to pressurize to the expected working pressure, which, depending on the actual
working cycle, could be 5.2–5.6 psi (normal working pressure) or 3.6–4 psi (during refilling the non-refilled
side is pressurized to prevent backwards refill).
a. Air tube is disconnected on the air system
b. Air pump failure (pump or ISS PCA failure)
c. Air pressure bottle leak
d. Air tube leak (tube damaged)
e. Air relief valve
f. Intermediate tanks leak
g. Air sensor failure, leading to ISS main board failure
h. Intermediate tank supports failure
Corrective actions
1. Review all air tube connections and ensure that there is no disconnection (tubes from pumps and relief
valve to tap, tubes from tap to intermediate tanks.
2. Perform the front and read air pump diagnostics procedures.
3. If the pumps do not work, check pump connections and verify pin integrity.
4. If connections are correct, connect to another working port and start the pump.
5. If the pump works with another port, replace the ink system main board.
6. If the pump fails, replace the air pump. See ISM pump and relief valve on page 679.
7. Check that the pressure bottle cap is tight and there is no leakage.
8. Pressurize the system and check for any failed tube. Leave the pumps on test with diagnostic
procedure, the pump will operate until 6 psi is reached.

9. Check relief valve is closed and air is not escaping from it when pressurizing. Swap the relief valve from
the other side to verify that it is the relief valve that is failing. If the relief valve fails, replace it.
10. Swap all intermediate tanks and ensure that there is no leak. If a leak is detected, swap the
intermediate tanks again one by one until the leak is discovered. Replace the intermediate tank as
appropriate and force-fill the intermediate tanks. See ISM intermediate tank on page 670.
11. Swap air pressure sensor tube connections to the PCA and display values if required. If the sensors do
not have similar behavior, replace the ISS PCA. See ISS PCA on page 683.
12. Try to adjust tubes and check connections, clean if required. If they cannot be recovered, replace the ink
circuit module. See ISM ink circuit module on page 675.
Severity
SEVERE
22.10.01:83

APS calibration error 01. Run IDS diagnostic. If problem persists call your support representative
a. Calibration cannot be stored or was corrupted
b. Calibration out of specification
Corrective actions
Run the calibration test from the IDS diagnostics menu. If the calibration fails, replace the APS or replace the
IDS PCA.
Severity
SEVERE
22.10.01:86 and 22.10.01:87

22.10.01:86: Close relief valve error 01. Run IDS diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support
representative.
22.10.01:87: Open relief valve error 01. Run IDS diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support
representative.
Description
The system is considered to be depressurized at 0.3 psi, and there is a timeout of 120 seconds to
depressurize. The standard operating range is 5.2–5.6 psi (working pressure). Block flow pressure 3.6–4 psi
(not printing but refilling, the selected side is pressurized to this level to ensure that refilling is done on the
expected side). While printing, the unused side is pressurized to prevent backwards refilling.

1. Relief valve does not open
2. Relief valve cable disconnected
3. Relief tubes blocked
4. Pressure sensor does not detect depressurizing.
Corrective actions
1. Check that the relief valve cable is correctly connected to the valve and to the ISS main board.
2. Open and close the relief valve several times to check that it works (you can do this with a finger).
3. Swap the relief valve connections to check whether the failure is the driver or the relief valve. If the
cause is the valve, remove and replace it. See ISM pump and relief valve on page 679.
4. If the failure is the driver of the electrovalve, replace the ISS main board.
5. Disconnect the tubes and perform a visual inspection of the system. In case of doubt, disconnect the
tube and blow into it to ensure that there is no blockage towards the relief valve.
6. If the relief system seems to be working correctly, replace the ISS main board.
7. Replace the air pump, relief valve, and tubes. See ISM pump and relief valve on page 679.
Severity
SEVERE
22.10.01:88

APS pump switch off error 01. Run IDS diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support representative.

a. APS switch failure
b. IDS PCA problem
Corrective actions
1. Replace the APS.
2. Replace the IDS PCA.
Severity
SEVERE

22.10.01:95

Air pump driver error 01. Run IDS diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support representative.
IDS PCA pump driver problem
Corrective actions
Replace the IDS PCA.
Severity
SEVERE
22.11.0X:01 (X may be 1 or 2)
(22.11.01:01, 22.11.02:01)
APS open relief valve error 0X. Run IDS diagnostic. If the problem persists, call your support representative.

a. The system is considered to be depressurized at 0.3 psi, and there is a timeout of 120 seconds to
depressurize.
b. The standard operating range is 5.2–5.6 psi (working pressure).
c. Block flow pressure 3.6–4 psi (not printing but refilling, the selected side is pressurized to this level to
ensure that refilling is done on the expected side), while printing the unused side is pressurized to
prevent backwards refilling.
Corrective actions
1. Check that the relief valve cable is correctly connected to the valve and to the ISS Main Board.
2. Open and close the relief valve several times to check that it works (this can be done with a finger).
3. Swap the relief valve connections to check whether the failure is the driver or the relief valve. If the
cause is the valve, remove and replace it.
4. If the failure is the actual driver of the electrovalve, replace the ISS main board.
5. Disconnect the tubes and perform a visual inspection of the system, in case of doubt disconnect the
tube and blow into it to ensure that there is no blockage towards the relief valve.
6. If the relief system seems to be working correctly, replace the ISS main board.
7. Replace the air pump, relief valve, and tubes. See ISM pump and relief valve on page 679.
Severity
SEVERE

22.11.01:96

Relief valve driver error 01. Run IDS diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support representative.

The relief valve is not working properly.
Corrective actions
1. Use diagnostics to check the relief valves.
2. Replace the relief valve.
3. Replace the IDS PCA.
Severity
SEVERE
41. Substrate-path error codes

41.00.00:62

END OF ROLL detected.

a. End of roll
b. Spindle not inflated or core slipping
c. Elastic substrate loaded
d. Broken substrate
Corrective actions
You may have reached the end of the roll. If so, thread a new roll, inflate the spindles, and perform a
substrate load. Otherwise, check that the spindles are inflated and perform a substrate load.
41.00.00:85

Wrong substrate settings file. At least one setting is missing.

Substrate properties missing
Corrective actions
Check for a missing parameter in the substrate properties file and update the OMES substrate package. If the
problem persists, call your support representative.
41.00.01:62

Possible END OF ROLL detected.

a. End of roll
b. Spindle not inflated or core slipping
c. Too much substrate unwound on the input or output side
Corrective actions
You may have reached the end of the roll, or it may be detached from the core. If it has come to the end,
thread a new roll, inflate the spindles, and perform a substrate load. Otherwise, check that the spindles are
inflated and perform a substrate load.
41.01.00:01
Electrical PCA failure detected.
Description
Substrate input motor internal fault.
a. Connector problems
b. PSU problems
c. Driver problem
Corrective actions
1. Reload substrate to clear the error.
2. Run the input roller (MI) motor calibration/diagnostic test and follow the instructions provided in the
test documentation.
3. If the problem persists, call your support representative.

41.01.00:01 and MOTOR’S FAULT LED OFF

Input spindle motor internal fault.

a. Connection problem
b. Motor problem
c. EE problem
Corrective actions
1. Reload the substrate to clear the error.
test documentation.
41.01.00:18
The input spindle motor’s driving voltage is too high.

a. Temporary problem
b. Calibration problem
c. Motor problem
Corrective actions
test documentation.
41.01.00:21
Input spindle motor overpowered.

b. Substrate jam
c. Transmission worn out
d. Main roller motor or encoder problem
e. EE driver failure
Corrective actions
test documentation.
41.01.00:51

Substrate loading table latch unexpectedly open.

a. Latch open
b. Sensor failure (two sensors)
Action
1. Ensure that substrate loading table latches are closed on both sides.
2. Run the substrate path sensor check diagnostic to check which sensor has failed.
41.01.00:60

Input spindle motor spinning too fast.

a. Encoder problem
b. Motor problem

Corrective actions
test documentation.
41.01.00:61

Input spindle not moving.

b. Substrate jam
c. Spindle end cap worn out or blocked
d. Substrate input transmission problem
e. Substrate input motor
f. EE driver failure
Corrective actions
test documentation.
41.02.00:01


a. Connector problem
b. PSU problem
c. Driver problem
Corrective actions
1. Reload the substrate to clear the error and try to print.
2. Check whether the motor fault LED is off.
3. If it is off, call your service representative and replace the electronics.

41.02.00:01 and FAULT LED OFF

Main roller motor internal fault.

b. Motor problem
c. EE problem
Corrective actions
2. If the problem persists, reboot, retry substrate load, and check whether the motor fault LED is off.
3. Run the main roller (MA) motor diagnostic friction test.
4. If the motor is faulty, and after being restarted by firmware it remains faulty, then the motor electronics
may be damaged.
5. If the roller has abnormally high friction, try cleaning and greasing the worm transmission and helical
gear.
41.02.00:08
Main roller substrate jam.

Substrate blocking the substrate path
Corrective actions
1. Remove all substrate from the substrate path.
2. Reload the substrate.
3. Run the main roller motor diagnostics.
41.02.00:18
Main roller motor’s driving voltage is too high.

b. Substrate jam
Corrective actions
2. If the problem persists, check whether the motor fault LED is off.
may be damaged.
gear.
41.02.00:21

Main roller motor overpowered.

b. Substrate jam
Corrective actions
may be damaged.
gear.

41.02.00:60

Main roller motor spinning too fast.
a. Encoder problem
b. Motor problem
Corrective actions
may be damaged.
gear.
41.02.00:61

Problem moving drive roller. Run drive roller motor diagnostic. If problem persists, call your support
representative.
b. Substrate jam
Corrective actions
may be damaged.
gear.

41.02.00:83

Main roller’s encoder is not calibrated.

Calibration values missing
Corrective actions
1. Recalibrate the main roller encoder.
2. Replace the analog encoder, code wheel, and PCA, and recalibrate.
41.02.00:84
Main roller encoder zero position could not be found.
a. Encoder disk broken, dirty, or scratched
b. Connections or encoder PCA problem
Corrective actions
1. Run the main roller diagnostic test to check that the encoder does not read the zero.
41.02.00:85
Main roller’s encoder cannot be read.

Connections or encoder PCA problem
Corrective actions
1. Run the main roller’s encoder calibration.

41.04.00:01

Description
Substrate output motor internal fault

b. PSU problem
c. Driver problem
Corrective actions
2. Run output roller (MO) motor calibration/diagnostic test and follow the instructions provided in the test
documentation.
Output spindle motor internal fault.
Corrective actions
3. Run the output roller (MO) motor calibration/diagnostic test and follow the instructions provided in the
test documentation.
41.04.00:18

Output spindle motor’s driving voltage is too high.
b. Substrate jam

Action
test documentation.
41.04.00:21

Output spindle motor overpowered.
b. Substrate jam
Corrective actions
test documentation.
41.04.00:51

Tension roller pinch bar unexpectedly raised.
a. Pinch bar raised
b. Sensor failure
Corrective actions
1. Ensure that the pinch bar is lowered.
2. Run the substrate path sensor check diagnostic to check that the sensor works correctly.

41.04.00:60

Output spindle motor spinning too fast.

a. Encoder problem
b. Motor problem
Corrective actions
test documentation.
41.04.00:61

Output spindle not moving.
b. Substrate jam
d. Substrate output transmission problem
e. Substrate output motor
Action
test documentation.
41.05.00:01

Description
Substrate-to-floor motor internal fault

b. PSU problem
c. Driver problem
Corrective actions
2. Run the tension roller (MF) motor calibration/diagnostic test and follow the instructions provided in the
test documentation.

Tension roller motor internal fault.

b. Motor problem
c. EE problem
Corrective actions
test documentation.
41.05.00:18

Tension roller motor’s driving voltage is too high.

b. Substrate jam

d. Main Roller motor or encoder problem
Action
test documentation.
41.05.00:21

Tension roller motor overpowered.
b. Substrate jam
Corrective actions
test documentation.
41.05.00:60

Tension roller motor spinning too fast.
a. Encoder problem
b. Motor problem
Corrective actions
test documentation.

41.05.00:61

Tension roller not moving.
Description
Substrate to floor not moving.
b. Substrate jam
d. Substrate tension roller transmission problem
e. Substrate tension roller motor
Corrective actions
test documentation.
41.07.00:51

Tension roller latch unexpectedly open.
a. Latch opened
b. Sensor failure
Corrective actions
1. Ensure that the tension roller latches are closed on both sides.
2. Run the substrate path sensor check diagnostic to check that the sensor (on the capping station side)
works correctly.

41.10.01:08

Possible take-up reel paper jam.
a. Line of sight blocked
b. Sensor failure, misconnection
Action
1. Check that the take-up reel optical substrate sensor works correctly and that there is no object blocking
its line of sight.
2. Run the substrate path sensor check diagnostic.
43. Substrate vacuum-system error codes

43.01.00:01

Vacuum blower not working in diagnostic test. Call support.

Vacuum tachometer is not giving feedback signal.
Corrective actions
1. Run diagnostic.
3. Replace part.
Severity
Advisory
43.02.00:04

No feedback from the vacuum PCA. Check that substrate behavior in the print zone is OK. Run diagnostic
when the job finishes.

a. Connections vacuum PCA failure
b. Power management
Corrective actions
2. Check e-box and e-cabinet.
3. Replace vacuum PCA.
Severity
Advisory
43.03.00:04

No feedback from the vacuum pressure sensor. Check that substrate behavior in the print zone is OK. Run
diagnostic when the job finishes.

Connections pressure sensor vacuum PCA failure
Corrective actions
2. Check pressure sensor EE and air connections.
Severity
Advisory
43.03.00:30

Vacuum out of range. Run diagnostics. If the problem persists, call your service representative.

a. Air path open
b. Pressure sensor inlet disconnected
c. Power problem
d. Pump problem

Corrective actions
1. Run diagnostic.
3. Check EE and air connections.
Severity
Silent
43.03.00:83

Vacuum sensor calibration fail. Check that substrate behavior in the print zone is OK. Run diagnostic when the
job finishes.

a. Calibration process failure
b. Cabling
c. Sensor malfunction
d. Vacuum pump failure
Corrective actions
1. Repeat calibration process.
2. Check cabling and wiring.
4. Replace the vacuum pump.
Severity
Advisory
46. Printhead-primer error codes

(46.00.01:83, 46.00.01:83, 46.00.01:83, 46.00.01:83, 46.00.01:83, 46.00.01:83, 46.00.01:83)
Primer X not calibrated. Run subsystem diagnostic. If the problem persists, call your support representative.

No value or zero read from NVM

Corrective actions
Run primer calibration.
Severity
Advisory

(46.01.01:01, 46.01.02:01, 46.01.03:01, 46.01.04:01, 46.01.05:01, 46.01.06:01, 46.01.07:01)

Primer X signal failure. Run subsystem diagnostic. If the problem persists, call your support representative.

Current signal lost or current measure below reference threshold
Corrective actions
2. Check carriage interconnect PCA 1 or 2, depending on the primer position reported.
3. Check the primer pump.
Severity
Advisory

(46.02.01:06, 46.02.02:06, 46.02.03:06, 46.02.04:06, 46.02.05:06, 46.02.06:06, 46.02.07:06)

Primer X leakage detected. Reset primer latch and/or check o-rings. If the problem persists, run the
subsystem diagnostic.
Current consumption measured below calibration value
Corrective actions
1. Check primers, looking for leaks.
2. Check latches and o-rings.
Severity
Advisory

46.03.0X:04 (X may be 1 or 2)
(46.03.01:04, 46.03.02:04)
Carriage interconnect X communication failure. Run subsystem diagnostic. If the problem persists, call your
a. Cabling problem between carriage interconnect and primer
b. Primer problem
c. Carriage interconnect problem
Corrective actions
1. Try to execute primer subsystem diagnostics and follow their instructions.
2. If the printer cannot move the carriage, move it manually, and check the connections.
Severity
Advisory
47. Printhead-cleaning error codes

47.00.00:50

Wiper engage height error. Run subsystem diagnostics. If the problem persists, call your support
representative.

a. The printer is detecting an error in the engage system.
b. The cleaning roll is not properly set.
c. Engage is not working properly.
d. The height is wrong.
Corrective actions
1. Check engage and roll.
2. Repeat calibration and run subsystem diagnostic.
Severity
Advisory

47.00.00:80

Engage X calibration missing. Applying nominal values.

Calibration has been lost.
Corrective actions
Recalibrate X position.
Severity
Silent
47.00.00:82
Engage Z calibration missing. Default value applied to allow printing to continue. Call your support
representative for more information.
Calibration has been lost.
Corrective actions
Recalibrate Z position and run subsystem diagnostic.
Severity
Advisory
47.01.01:01
Wiper engage motor servo shutdown. Check that your cleaning roll is not blocked. Run subsystem
diagnostics. If the problem persists, call support.
Description
The printhead cleaning advance motor has failed to perform the wiper advance movement as expected. The
advance motor is controlled in a closed loop by the main interconnect board. The motor receives the PWM
signal from the main interconnect board. The internal motor encoder reads the encoder movement signals

and sends the signals to the linear-to-differential encoder PCA, then to the main interconnect board with an
intermediate connection at the rear of the printhead cleaning module.

a. Printhead cleaner pinch module is not correctly closed.
b. Printhead cleaner path blocked. The roller cannot move the roll.
c. Advance motor roller connections failure, motor power or encoder cables disconnected.
d. Advance roller mechanical failure
e. Advance motor failure
f. Main interconnect board failure
g. Printhead cleaning roll system mechanical failure
Corrective actions
1. Make sure the pinch mechanism is closed. Push in the black holder to ensure correct latching of the
system. Repeat closing operation and restart the system.
2. Check the wiper path for obstructions. If there is an obstruction, re-do the wiper path and ensure there
is no damage to the wiper or printhead cleaning roll parts.
3. Check the cable connections of the encoder and motor system.
NOTE: Check the electrical diagram to ensure that all cables in the motor power and encoder path are
correctly connected. See Subsystem block diagrams on page 61.
4. Check the rear side of the printhead cleaning roll and ensure that there is no obvious damage to the belt
impelling system, such as a broken gear, broken belt, or motor out of position. Perform printhead
cleaning roll advance system open loop and printhead cleaning roll advance system closed loop
diagnostics to determine the possible problem.
Depending on the results of the tests, replace the motor or mechanical parts as appropriate.
5. Replace the advance motor. See MA motor on page 811.
6. Replace the main interconnect board.
7. Replace the failing parts of the printhead cleaning roll.
Severity
Advisory
47.01.01:02
Wiper engage motor initialization error. Run subsystem diagnostics. If the problem persists, call support.

a. System initialization fails.
b. The printhead cleaning roll is not correctly installed.
c. Engage is jammed.
Corrective actions
Check the cleaning roll and run the subsystem diagnostic.
Severity
Advisory
47.01.02:01

Wiper advance motor servo shutdown. Check that your cleaning roll is not blocked. Run subsystem
diagnostics. If the problem persists, call support.
Description

c. Advance motor roller connections failure, motor power, or encoder cables disconnected
e. Main interconnect board failure
f. Printhead cleaning roll system mechanical failure
Corrective actions
2. Check the wiper path for obstructions. If there is an obstruction, re-do the wiper path and ensure that
there is no damage to the wiper or printhead cleaning roll parts.
impelling system, such as a broken gear, broken belt, or motor out of position.

Severity
Advisory
47.01.02:02
Wiper advance motor initialization error. Run subsystem diagnostics. If the problem persists, call your
a. System initialization failure
b. The printhead cleaning roll is not correctly installed
c. The printhead cleaning advance motor is jammed
Corrective actions
Run subsystem diagnostic.
Severity
Advisory
47.01.04:01
Wiper input motor servo shutdown. Check that your cleaning roll is not blocked. Run subsystem diagnostics.
If the problem persists, call support.
Description


Corrective actions
cleaning roll advance system open loop and printhead cleaning roll advance system closed loop to
determine the possible problem.
Severity
Advisory
47.01.04:02
Wiper input motor initialization error. Run subsystem diagnostics. If the problem persists, call your support
representative

b. Printhead cleaning roll is not correctly installed
c. Input motor is jammed
Corrective actions
Severity
Advisory

47.01.05:01

Wiper output motor servo shutdown. Check that your cleaning roll is not blocked. Run subsystem diagnostics.
If the problem persists, call support.
Description
Corrective actions
4. Check the rear of the printhead cleaning roll and ensure there is no obvious damage to the belt
cleaning roll advance system open loop and printhead cleaning roll advance system closed loop
diagnostics to determine the possible problem. See Table 5-15 Printhead cleaning on page 368.
Severity
Advisory

47.01.05:02

Wiper output motor initialization error. Run subsystem diagnostics. If the problem persists, call your support
representative.
b. Printhead cleaning roll is not correctly installed
c. Output motor is jammed
Corrective actions
Severity
Advisory
47.04.00:01
End of printhead cleaning roll. Check that your cleaning roll is not blocked. If it is empty, replace it with a new
one.
a. Real end of roll
b. The cleaning roll has slipped over its axis and the printer detects that it is not moving correctly
Corrective actions
Severity
Silent
47.05.11:04
Wiper engage motor drive PCA communication failure. Run subsystem diagnostics. If the problem persists,
call your support representative.

a. Engage motor drive PCA wiring/cabling problem
b. Engage motor drive PCA malfunction
Corrective actions
2. Check connections and replace the PCA if necessary.
Severity
SEVERE
47.05.12:04

Wiper advance motor drive PCA communication failure. Run subsystem diagnostics. If the problem persists,

a. Advance motor drive PCA wiring/cabling problem
b. Advance motor drive PCA malfunction
Corrective actions
Severity
SEVERE
47.05.14:04
Wiper input motor drive PCA communication failure. Run subsystem diagnostics. If the problem persists, call
your support representative.

a. Input motor drive PCA wiring/cabling problem
b. Input motor drive PCA malfunction

Corrective actions
Severity
SEVERE
47.05.15:04

Wiper output motor drive PCA communication failure. Run subsystem diagnostics. If the problem persists,

a. Input motor drive PCA wiring/cabling problem
b. Input motor drive PCA malfunction
Corrective actions
Severity
SEVERE
48. PPS error codes

48.00.00:01
PPS misalignment. Run diagnostics to recover PPS subsystem. If the problem persists, call HP service.
Description
The relative movement of one of the PPS modules with respect to the other is incorrect, which means that
there is danger of a misalignment of the complete system. With this system error the system is protecting
itself to prevent any possible damage. This system error can also happen when the distance between the
homing position and the engage position is more than 7 mm.
a. A trapped obstruction has damaged the power transmission and has broken the mechanical power
chain.
b. Moving down a homing sensor has been activated or the PPS switch has failed.

Corrective actions
1. Restart the printer.
2. Try to move the carriage beam to the normal position (from the Internal Print Server or Print Care). If it
is still failing, reboot in diagnostic mode and perform the same operation from Print Care.
3. From the diagnostic mode, perform the switch diagnostic, testing the four different homing switches of
the PPS.
4. If the carriage beam is misaligned, perform a manual alignment by removing the PPS motor and turning
the PPS gear system until they are aligned.
5. Check that all the PPS supports are touching the scan axis.
6. Check whether any object is trapped between the scan axis and PPS support.
Severity
Advisory

(48.01.01:01, 48.01.02:01, 48.01.03:01, 48.01.04:01)

Servo shutdown PPS X not usable, but printing enabled/disabled depending on PPS value. If the problem
persists, call your service representative.
Description
The meaning of X is:
1 = front right motor
2 = rear right motor
3 = rear left motor (IDS side)
4 = front left motor (IDS side)
An error in the closed-loop control (servo control) of the PPS system has occurred. This error indicates that
the PPS system is not moving as expected in closed-loop control. The servo-controlled movements consist of
applying a specific PWM to a motor (a certain amount of energy) and receiving the feedback of an encoder
about the actual movement of the motor after applying that specific PWM.
Therefore, if after applying a specific PWM the encoder does not register the expected number of encoder
counts (movement), the system will produce this error. Also if the PWM values come out of a certain range of
values for the movement (i.e too high PWM to obtain a movement), this error is produced.

a. PWM signal not supplied to motor. PWM generator (driver) failure, motor failure, cable failure, or
disconnected.
b. Encoder signals indicating the movement not registered. Encoder disconnected, encoder broken or
failed, cable disconnected, or the electrical system receiving the encoder signal has failed.

c. PWM is too high due to a mechanical failure. Mechanical system jammed, mechanical system broken or
loose.
d. PPS system fuse failure. Contact between mechanical system fuse and the motor module.
Corrective actions
1. Check the connection of PPS motor power cable and encoder cables.
2. Check that power is supplied to the encoder PCA (LED in the main interconnect).
3. With PPS in the high position, unscrew the X-Y bushing, and check that it can move smoothly through
the column. The screwdriver needs to be long.
4. With the PPS in the low position, remove the bottom stopper to the PPS screw (may need to remove the
left and right curing module).
5. Remove each PPS screw with a flat screwdriver and then grease the parts. Check that there are no
obstructions.
6. If you find plastic or metal obstructions, you will have to remove the corresponding PPS motor
assembly later to clean it too.
7. If the high friction error continues, swap the PPS screw from one to the other, and check whether the
failure is following the PPS screw.
8. Check mechanical blocking status in the system fuse.
Severity
Advisory

(48.01.01:02, 48.01.02:02, 48.01.03:02, 48.01.04:02)

Movement X test fault. Subsystem disabled, but printing may be possible. If not, run diagnostics. If the
problem still persists, call HP service.
Description
1 = front right PPS movement test fault
2 = rear right PPS movement test fault
3 = rear left PPS movement test fault
4 = front left PPS movement test fault
During start-up the printer produces an automatic check by making a small movement forwards and
backwards to check the main system functionality (motor moves, encoder signals are received). This error is
produced when this test fails.
As the movement is very small, this error usually represents a critical error such as cables disconnected,
motor failure, or a PCA fault.

a. Cable connection failure
b. Rotor of the motor blocked
c. Motor failure/encoder
d. Main interconnect board failure (for the right PPS systems)
e. Remote controller failure (for the left PPS systems)
Corrective actions
1. Check correct connection of PPS motor power cable and encoder cables.
2. Check that the motor is not blocked by anything.
3. Perform the PPS motor diagnostic test.
4. Check mechanical blocking status in the mechanical movement limiter.
5. Replace the PPS motor together with the encoder system and cabling.
6. Replace the main interconnect board or the remote controller board, depending on which part has
failed.
Severity
Advisory

(48.02.01:40, 48.02.02:40, 48.02.03:40, 48.02.04:40)

Servo X current out of range. Run diagnostics. If the problem still persists, call your service representative.
Description
1 = front right PPS
2 = rear right PPS
3 = rear left PPS
4 = front left PPS

a. Environmental conditions of PCA driver
b. Overworking conditions of driver in the PCA
c. Main interconnect board failure (for the right PPS systems).
d. Remote controller failure (for the left PPS systems)

Corrective actions
1. Perform carriage beam system recovery. If this is not possible, recover the system manually by
removing the motor and aligning the PPS by hand.
2. Perform PPS motor diagnostic test.
3. Check correct connection of PPS motor power cable and encoder cables.
4. Perform move to load position and check the average and maximum points of PWM values for high
constant values of friction. If the values are very high, grease the PPS system. If the system error
persists, replace the PPS motor mount unit that fails.
5. Replace the main interconnect board or the remote controller board, depending on the failing side.
● E-cabinet PPS control motors: main interconnect
● IDS PPS controlled motors: remote controller board
Severity
Silent
48.05.3X:04

Driver motor PCA X communication issue. Run diagnostics to recover the PPS subsystem. If the problem
persists, call your service representative.

a. Cabling/wiring problem
b. E-box problem
c. Driver motor PCA problem
Corrective actions
1. Check wiring.
2. Run the subsystem diagnostics for PPS and e-box. Replace the faulty part.
Severity
SEVERE
49. Carriage aerosol-removal error codes

49.01.0X:01 (X may be 1 or 2)
(49.01.01:01, 49.01.02:01)

X = 1 left, X=2 right bar aerosol removal fan fault detected. Run subsystem diagnostic to check them. If any
fan doesn't work, call your support representative.
Description
The aerosol produced while printing may affect print quality. The aerosol can make other parts of the printer
dirty, such as encoders or sensors, and create spontaneous failures. You should repair the problem as soon
as possible.

a. The carriage has two fan arrays with 5 fans to each array. The fans have a fault signal which is activated
when the fan is powered but not rotating. Fans or arrays not connected will not display this error.
b. One of the fans burned or failed.
c. Carriage interconnect power fault (24 V)
d. Carriage interconnect driver fault
e. Data cable failure
f. Printhead interconnect
Corrective actions
1. Check whether the fans are rotating when they are activated. Perform diagnostics.
2. Replace the aerosol fans.
3. Ensure 24 V are reaching the carriage interconnect: see the 24 V LED.
4. Replace the carriage interconnect. See Carriage interconnect PCA on page 465.
5. Swap fan array connections and perform the fan array diagnostic test to check which fan has failed.
6. Swap over data cables to confirm a data cable failure, replace the failed data cable.
7. If there is a signal failure, swap over the printhead interconnects 2 and 3, then recheck and confirm the
error, and replace the faulty printhead interconnect.
Severity
Advisory
49.02.01:02

Left or right bar aerosol removal nozzle clog detected. Ensure that aerosol removal air inlet is clean.

a. Nozzle/filter clogged
b. Pressure sensor clogged/failing or connections damaged

Corrective actions
1. Check and clean the inlet.
2. Check and/or replace the filter.
3. Check the pressure sensor and its connections.
Severity
Advisory
49.02.01:07

Left or right bar aerosol removal filter almost full. Replace it with a new one as soon as possible.
Corrective actions
Severity
Advisory
49.02.01:09
Left or right bar aerosol removal filter not present. Check that the filter is in place. If the filter is already
installed, run diagnostic.

Having set high fan PWM pressure, the value is low.
Corrective actions
1. Check that the filter is present.
2. Check the box sealing.
Severity
Advisory

49.02.02:02

Left or right bar aerosol removal nozzle clog detected. Ensure that aerosol removal air inlet is clean.
a. Nozzle/filter clogged
b. Pressure sensor clogged/failing or connections damaged
Corrective actions
1. Check and clean the inlet.
2. Check and/or replace the filter.
3. Check the pressure sensor and its connections.
Severity
Advisory
49.02.02:07

Left or right bar aerosol removal filter almost full. Replace it with a new one as soon as possible.
Corrective actions
Severity
Advisory
49.02.02:09
Left or right bar aerosol removal filter not present. Check that the filter is in place. If the filter is already
installed, run diagnostic.

Having set high fan PWM pressure, the value is low.

Corrective actions
1. Check that the filter is present.
2. Check the box sealing.
Severity
Advisory
49.03.01:09

Left or right bar aerosol removal pressure sensor not connected. Run subsystem diagnostic to check them. If
problem is confirmed call support.

a. Pressure sensor tube is not connected.
b. Pressure sensor is not connected to Sinatra PCA.
c. Sinatra PCA is failing.
Corrective actions
2. Check tube connection.
3. Check sensor cable.
4. Replace Sinatra PCA.
Severity
Advisory
49.03.01:31
Left or right bar aerosol removal negative pressure detected. Run subsystem diagnostic.

a. The pressure sensor tube is connected to the wrong side of the sensor.
b. The pressure sensor is failing.
c. The Sinatra PCA is failing.
d. The aerosol fan is installed in the reverse direction.

Corrective actions
2. Check that the pressure sensor tube is in the right position.
3. Check that the pressure sensor is working.
4. The drying PCA is failing, run drying diagnostics before replacing it.
5. Check that the aerosol fans are correctly installed.
Severity
Advisory
49.03.01:32

Left or right bar aerosol removal pressure value too high. Run subsystem diagnostic.

The pressure value is out of the pressure sensor range of measurement.
Corrective actions
2. Replace the pressure sensor.
3. Replace the Sinatra PCA.
Severity
Advisory
49.03.01:33

Left or right bar aerosol removal pressure value too low. Run subsystem diagnostic.

The most probable cause of this error is that the tube that connects the pressure sensor (Sensirion SDP1000-
L05) to the aerosol removal box is disconnected or pinched.
The sensor is located near the right bar aerosol removal box, and the tube should be connected from the
sensor inlet marked as Lo to the inlet at the bottom of the aerosol removal box:
● The tube should not be pinched.
● The tube should go up to the full length of the inlets at the sensor and the box.

If the tube is properly connected at both inlets, make sure that it is not pinched by any other element in the
carriage.
If the pressure sensor reading is too low, the aerosol removal bar will work at full power (the module will be
very noisy) and there may be small errors in dot placement that could produce grain.
Corrective actions
2. Check that all tubes are properly connected and not pinched.
3. Check cable connections.
Severity
Advisory
49.03.02:09
Left or right bar aerosol removal pressure sensor not connected. Run subsystem diagnostic to check them. If
problem is confirmed call support
a. Pressure sensor tube is not connected.
b. Pressure sensor is not connected to Sinatra PCA.
c. Sinatra PCA is failing.
Corrective actions
2. Check tube connection.
3. Check sensor cable.
Severity
Advisory
49.03.02:31

Left or right bar aerosol removal negative pressure detected. Run subsystem diagnostic.

a. The pressure sensor tube is connected to the wrong side of the sensor.
b. The pressure sensor is failing.
c. The Sinatra PCA is failing.
d. The aerosol fan is installed in the reverse direction.
Corrective actions
2. Check that the pressure sensor tube is in the right position.
3. Check that the pressure sensor is working.
4. The drying PCA is failing, run drying diagnostics before replacing it.
5. Check that the aerosol fans are correctly installed.
Severity
Advisory
49.03.02:32

Left or right bar aerosol removal pressure value too high. Run subsystem diagnostic.

The pressure value is out of the pressure sensor range of measurement.
Corrective actions
2. Replace the pressure sensor.
Severity
Advisory
49.03.02:33

Left or right bar aerosol removal pressure value too low. Run subsystem diagnostic.

The most probable cause of this error is that the tube that connects the pressure sensor (Sensirion SDP1000-
L05) to the aerosol removal box is disconnected or pinched.
The sensor is located near the right bar aerosol removal box, and the tube should be connected from the
sensor inlet marked as Lo to the inlet at the bottom of the aerosol removal box:
● The tube should not be pinched.
● The tube should go up to the full length of the inlets at the sensor and the box.
If the tube is properly connected at both inlets, make sure that it is not pinched by any other element in the
carriage.
If the pressure sensor reading is too low, the aerosol removal bar will work at full power (the module will be
very noisy) and there may be small errors in dot placement that could produce grain.
Corrective actions
2. Check that all tubes are properly connected and not pinched.
3. Check cable connections.
Severity
Advisory
50. OMAS error codes

50.00.01:00
OMAS is not tracking substrate.
Description
This error is triggered when the OMAS is disconnected as the result of a failed calibration or repeated
navigation failures during a plot. The error is logged in a file.

a. Substrate not navigable
b. OMAS window dirty
c. OMAS failure

Corrective actions
1. Check whether the substrate type is transparent or lacks sufficient features to be read by the OMAS. If
this is the case, turn off the OMAS for that substrate type.
2. Clean the OMAS window. See the user’s guide.
3. Replace the OMAS platen assembly. See OMAS platen assembly on page 806.
Severity
Silent
50.00.01:89

Double-sided only, cannot find the registration line. Reload substrate. If error persists, run diagnostics.

a. Substrate bubble
b. Dirty sensor
c. Faulty sensor
Corrective actions
1. Check that the substrate is navigable, properly loaded, and flat over the sensor.
2. Run the OMAS cleanliness diagnostic and clean it if necessary.
3. Replace the OMAS.
Severity
Advisory
50.01.01:00

OMAS doesn't see fiducials.

a. Substrate bubble
b. Dirty sensor
c. Faulty sensor

Corrective actions
1. Check that the substrate is navigable, properly loaded, and flat over the sensor.
2. Run the OMAS cleanliness diagnostic and clean it if necessary.
3. Replace the OMAS.
Severity
Silent
50.01.01:01

OMAS opti-electronics error (cable or mini-PCA at sensor). OMAS disabled. But the printer can still print. Run
diagnostics and/or call your support representative.
Description
Critical error detected on the OMAS controller board. This failure occurs only during the OMAS controller self-
test (when the printer starts).

a. Sporadic failure
b. Failure in OMAS controller
Corrective actions
1. Restart the printer. This may be sufficient in some cases.
2. If the error is persistent, you can continue printing by turning off the OMAS.
3. Check the OMAS controller board to make sure that everything is correctly connected and undamaged.
4. Replace the OMAS and vacuum control box.
Severity
Advisory
50.01.01:77
OMAS window dirty. OMAS disabled, but the printer can still print. Run diagnostics and/or call support.

a. OMAS is dirty.
b. OMAS is not properly connected.

c. OMAS is faulty.
d. OMAS PCA is faulty.
Corrective actions
1. Check and clean the OMAS window.
2. Run subsystem diagnostics.
4. Replace OMAS and/or OMAS PCA.
Severity
Advisory
50.03.01:01

OMAS controller operational failure. Substrate advance closed loop lost. Run diagnostic and call support if
the problem persists.
Description
The OMAS is disabled, and the printer tries to continue printing. The OMAS will be re-enabled at the next
start-up.
1. Sporadic failure
2. Internal firmware error in OMAS controller
3. OMAS controller failure
Corrective actions
1. Restart the printer. This may be sufficient in some cases.
2. If the error is persistent, it is possible to continue printing by turning off the OMAS. However, we
recommend solving the system error to obtain the full range of printer features.
4. Replace the OMAS cable. See OMAS and vacuum cables kit on page 801.
Severity
Advisory

50.03.01:03

OMAS firmware version mismatch. OMAS disabled, but the printer can still print. Check that your firmware is
up to date.
Description
The system automatically updates the internal firmware when a mismatch occurs; therefore this error is
displayed only if the internal system has been corrupted and an update is not possible.
Failure in OMAS controller
Corrective actions
Replace the OMAS and vacuum control box.
Severity
Advisory
50.07.01:04
OMAS controller CAN communication error. Substrate advance closed loop lost. Run diagnostic, and call your
support representative if the problem persists.
Description
Failure in communication with the OMAS controller board via CAN from the main interconnect board.

a. OMAS controller power failure
b. CAN cable line failure
● From main interconnect board to OMAS controller (cable disconnected or failed)
● From upper engine PCA to main interconnect board
c. Vacuum controller PCA CAN line failure
d. OMAS controller failure
Corrective actions
1. Perform the power diagnostics procedure to supply 24 V power. Check power LEDs on the vacuum
controller. If the LEDs are off, check power arrival in the power connector (GND, 5 V and 24 V).
2. If power does not arrive, check cable connections in the main interconnect board and ensure voltages
are coming from the main interconnect board connector.
3. If power does not leave the main interconnect board, remove the main interconnect board cover and
ensure all power LEDs are on.

4. If all the main interconnect board power LEDs are not on, check power arrival to the main interconnect
board, check cable integrity and connectors.
5. If no problem with the cables or connectors is found, replace the main power supply. See E-box PSU
on page 529.
6. If power arrives to the main interconnect board, replace the main interconnect board.
7. Check data cable connections.
8. Any LAN cable with the necessary length can be used to perform troubleshooting. Replace the cable and
restart the printer. If the problem is the LAN cable, HP recommends that you replace it with the
appropriate HP service part.
9. Disassemble the OMAS and vacuum PCA box and ensure all connections are correct.
Severity
SEVERE
51. Printer-covers and safety-element error codes

51.01.00:92

Main window is open. Close the windows to continue printing. If the problem persists, run diagnostic to
identify problem.

a. Main window is open or switch finger is missing or damaged.
b. Switch is not connected or wiring is damaged.
c. Switch is faulty.
Corrective actions
1. Check that, when the window is closed, the switch is mechanically activated.
2. Check the wiring and plugs.
3. Replace the switch.
Severity
Advisory

51.02.00:92

Front cover is open. Close the front cover to continue printing. If the problem persists, run diagnostic to
identify problem.

a. Front cover is open or safety interlock finger is missing or damaged.
b. Safety interlock is not connected or wiring is damaged.
c. Safety interlock malfunction.
Corrective actions
1. Check that, when the front cover is closed, the switch is mechanically activated (run diagnostic).
2. Check wiring and plugs.
3. Replace the safety interlock.
Severity
Advisory
51.03.00:92

Loading table is not closed. Close loading table to continue printing. If the problem persists, run diagnostic to
identify problem.

a. Loading table is open or safety interlock finger is missing or damaged.
b. Safety interlock is not connected or wiring is damaged.
c. Safety interlock malfunction.
Corrective actions
1. Check that, when the loading table is closed, the switch is mechanically activated (run diagnostic).
2. Check the wiring and plugs.
3. Replace the safety interlock.
Severity
Advisory

51.04.00:92

Emergency stops and/or safety relay activated. Check that emergency stops are not activated. If the problem
persists, run diagnostic to identify problem.

a. Emergency stop is really activated.
b. Emergency stop is not connected or wiring is damaged.
c. Emergency stop is broken.
Corrective actions
1. Run diagnostic to check which emergency stop is raising the problem.
2. Check the wiring.
3. Replace the emergency stop.
Severity
Advisory
52. Drop-detector error codes

52.00.00:01

Drop detector all-sensors problem. Run subsystem diagnostic. Call support if diagnostic fails or print quality
is affected.

a. Service-station interconnect board or cable failed.
b. Main interconnect board failed.
Corrective actions
1. Check the service-station interconnect board cable connections at both ends (service station and main
interconnect board). Make sure that the cable is well connected and check cable integrity, replace parts
if required.
2. Ensure that power (12 V and 5 V) is reaching the board (Power LEDs on). Check the LEDs in the drop-
detector interconnect.
3. Replace the service-station interconnect board and cable.
4. Replace the main interconnect board after finding the root cause of the failure, such as drop detector or
faulty cable.
Severity
Advisory

52.00.00:83

Drop detector all-sensors problem. Run subsystem diagnostic. Call your support representative if the
diagnostic fails or print quality is affected.
Due to NVM change, because of a reset or hard disk replacement.
Corrective actions
Repeat the calibration.
Severity
Advisory
52.00.00:91
Drop-detector bump switch not activated. Reboot in diagnostic mode and run subsystem diagnostic. If the
problem persists, call your support representative and store printheads in their orange caps.
a. Bump is detected but bump switch is not activated.
b. Drop-detector shutter friction is too high at some point, detecting a bump before reaching the bump
switch.
c. Bump switch is broken or disconnected.
Corrective actions
1. Check that the drop-detector worm and sliders are clean and greased, and there is no high friction zone
along its displacement.
2. If the drop-detector shutter reaches the switch but is not detected, check the cable and /or replace the
bump switch.
Severity
SEVERE

(52.01.01:01, 52.01.02:01, 52.01.03:01, 52.01.04:01, 52.01.05:01, 52.01.06:01, 52.01.07:01)

Drop-detector sensor 0X issue detected, sensor disabled. Run subsystem diagnostic. Call your support
representative if diagnostic fails, or print quality is affected.
Description
The drop detectors’ basic operation consists of receiving power to feed an LED transmitter and a receiver
situated at both sides of the drop-detector window. In standby with no drops or interference in the drop
detector window, the transmitter is permanently powered and the receiver receives a signal of medium range
(total range from 0 to 255, medium range signal around 127). The system error is displayed when the drop
detector is 0 in standby (12 V supplied to the drop detectors, but there is no drop detection activity).

a. Drop detector disconnected
b. Drop detector failed
c. Service station interconnect board or cable failed
d. Main interconnect board failed
Corrective actions
1. Make sure that the drop detector is correctly connected to the service station interconnect board. Use
diagnostics to check whether the drop detector is disconnected or faulty.
2. Swap the problematical drop detector connection with another drop detector to check whether the
problem is with the actual drop detector. If so, replace the drop detector.
3. Check the service station interconnect board cable connections at both ends. Make sure the cable is well
connected and check cable integrity, replace parts if required.
4. Ensure power (12 V and 5 V) arrives to the board (Power LEDs on). Check the LEDs in the drop detector
interconnect.
5. Replace service station interconnect board and cable.
6. Replace the OMAS PCA.
Severity
Advisory

(52.01.01:83, 52.01.02:83, 52.01.03:83, 52.01.04:83, 52.01.05:83, 52.01.06:83, 52.01.07:83)

Drop-detector sensor X not calibrated, sensor disabled. Run subsystem diagnostic. Call your support
representative if diagnostic fails, or print quality is affected.
Description
The drop detector is unable to detect its exact position to perform the drop detection. When performing a
drop detection, the printer performs a synchronization with the linear encoder and the tail encoder located in
the service station motor in order to establish its position with respect to the drop detector windows before

performing the actual drop detection action. This error indicates that this synchronization cannot be achieved
as the readings from the two encoders do not match according to the movements performed.

a. Intermittent failure mostly seen when previously used printheads are installed
b. Drop detector linear encoder strip not correctly installed or connected
c. Drop detector linear encoder sensor dirty, disconnected, or failed
d. Incorrect calibration of drop detector system
e. Power not arriving to the service station PCA
f. Service station interconnect board or cable failure
g. Main interconnect board failure
Corrective actions
1. Check the functionality of the drop detector.
2. Check the linear encoder strip in the service station. Make sure that the encoder strip is correctly
installed in the sensor and well placed in its holders at each end.
3. Check the linear encoder sensor connection. Perform the drop detector diagnostic test to check the
linear encoder. If the test fails, replace the encoder system.
4. Perform a drop detector calibration.
5. Ensure power (12 V and 5 V) is reaching the service station interconnect board (power LEDs on).
6. If power is getting through (LEDs on), replace the service station interconnect board and cable.
7. If there is no power (LEDs off), replace the main interconnect board.
8. Check the cable connections of the service station system. If no failure is found, replace the service
station interconnect board.
a. Print the nozzle check by following the directions in the service menu.
b. Cancel the drying time to save 10–15 minutes.
c. If no failure is detected, there no need to go further, the drop detector is working correctly and the
intermittent system error is due to the high usage of the printheads.
Severity
Advisory
52.02.00:83

Calibration LS2K missing. Automatic substrate load and alignment disabled, only manual options available.
Contact your support representative.

a. Calibration value missing
b. Unable to perform calibration
Corrective actions
1. Repeat the calibration.
Severity
Advisory

(52.02.01:11, 52.02.02:11, 52.02.03:11, 52.02.04:11)

Drop-detector electronics X, 5 V power issue. Run subsystem diagnostic. Call support if the diagnostic fails,
or print quality is affected.

a. Cabling connector problem
b. Drop-detector PCA problem
c. PSU problem (check whether this error happens to all drop-detector sensors)
Corrective actions
1. Run the drop-detector diagnostics.
2. Check drop-detector PCA LEDs for troubleshooting. See Board name: Drop-detector PCA on page 305.
3. Replace the faulty part.
Severity
Advisory

(52.02.01:12, 52.02.02:12, 52.02.03:12, 52.02.04:12)

Drop-detector electronics X, 12 V power issue. Run subsystem diagnostic. Call your support representative if
the diagnostic fails, or print quality is affected.

a. Cabling connector problem
b. Drop-detector PCA problem
c. PSU problem (check whether this error happens to all drop-detector sensors)
Corrective actions
1. Run the drop-detector diagnostics.
2. Check the drop-detector PCA LEDs for troubleshooting. See Board name: Drop-detector PCA
on page 305.
3. Replace the faulty part.
Severity
Advisory
52.03.00:01

Drop-detector encoder synchronization issue. Please run substsyem diagnostics. If problem persists, call
Description
When performing drop detection, the printer performs synchronization with the linear encoder and the tail
encoder located in the service-station motor in order to establish its position with respect to the drop-
detector windows before performing the actual drop-detection action. This error indicates that this
synchronization cannot be achieved as the readings from the two encoders do not match according to the
movements performed.
Causes in order of importance in order of importance

a. Intermittent failure due to used printheads that are not in good condition
b. Drop-detector linear-encoder sensor dirty, disconnected, or failed
c. The drop detection tray cannot move smoothly due to excessive friction or a mechanical problem
d. Incorrect calibration of drop-detector system
e. Failure in the service station motor, motor drive PCA, DD MUX PCAs, or connecting cables
Corrective actions
1. Check the nozzle health of the printheads.
2. Check the linear encoder strip in the service station. Make sure that the encoder strip is clean, correctly
installed in the sensor, and correctly placed in its holders at each end.
3. Check the linear encoder sensor connection. Perform the drop-detector diagnostic test to check the
linear encoder. If the test fails, replace the encoder system.
4. Grease the worm with a recommended grease, and make sure bushings are not damaged.

5. Check the functionality of the drop detector:
● Print the nozzle check.
● Cancel the drying time to save 10–15 minutes.
● If no failure is detected, there is no need to go further, the drop detector is working correctly, and
the intermittent system error is due to the high usage of the printheads.
6. Perform a drop-detector calibration.
7. If there is no power (LEDs off), replace the e-box interconnect board. See E-box interconnect PCA
on page 541.
8. Check the cable connections of the service-station system.
Severity
Advisory
52.04.00:02
Drop-detector movement test fault. Run subsystem diagnostic. Call your support representative if the
diagnostic fails, or print quality is affected.
a. Shuttle blocked
Corrective actions
1. Use a screwdriver to ensure that the shuttle is not jammed against the structure.
2. Clean and oil the worm and rod sliders if necessary.
Severity
Advisory
52.04.00:08

Drop-detector station jam. Reboot and run subsystem diagnostic. Call your support representative if the
diagnostic fails, or print quality is affected.

a. Shuttle blocked
Corrective actions
1. Ensure with a screwdriver that the shuttle is not jammed against the structure.
2. Clean and oil the worm and rod sliders if necessary.
Severity
SEVERE
52.05.12:04

Motor driver PCA comm failure. Run subsystem diagnostic. If the problem persists, call your support
representative.

a. Service-station interconnect: main interconnect board cable disconnected, pin connection fault
b. Power not reaching the service station PCA (5 V pin 19 and 12 V pin 2, GND 20&1)
c. Service-station Interconnect fault
d. Main interconnect board failed
e. Engine PCI bBoard
f. Firmware error/corruption
Corrective actions
1. Check the cable connections from the service-station interconnect board to the main interconnect
board. Check for cable or pin damage.
2. Check that power is reaching the service-station interconnect (12 V and 5 V) (Power LEDs on).
3. If there is power (LEDs on) and no other failure is found, replace the service-station interconnect board
and cable.
4. If there is no power (LEDs off), replace the main interconnect board.
6. Replace the service-station interconnect.
7. Replace the engine PCI board. See Engine PCA on page 535.

8. Reinstall the firmware and perform drop-detector calibrations.
9. Replace the hard disk drive. See E-box hard disk drive on page 526.
Severity
Advisory
55. Carriage line-sensor error codes

55.00.00:02

Line sensor communication with EEPROM failure. Automatic substrate load and alignment disabled. Only
manual options available. Contact your support representative.

a. Line sensor disconnected
b. Line sensor failed
c. Sensor interconnect failed
d. Carriage interconnect failed
Corrective actions
1. Check line sensor connections in the sensor interconnect.
2. Perform the line sensor check. See Table 5-12 Carriage sensors on page 365.
3. Replace the line sensor. See Line sensor on page 428.
4. Replace the carriage sensor box.
5. Replace the carriage interconnect board. See Carriage interconnect PCA on page 465.
Severity
Advisory
55.01.00:83

Calibration gain offset missing. Automatic substrate load and alignment disabled, only manual options
available. Contact your support representative.

a. Calibration value is missing.
b. Unable to do the calibration.

Corrective actions
1. Repeat calibration.
3. Replace line sensor.
Severity
Advisory
55.02.00:83

Calibration LS2K missing. Automatic substrate load and alignment disabled. Only manual options available.
Contact your support representative.

a. Calibration value is missing.
b. Unable to do the calibration.
Corrective actions
Repeat the calibration.
Severity
Advisory
58. Carriage SOL error codes

58.00.00:01
CLC failure. Calibration wasn't completed successfully. Run subsystem diagnostics. If the problem persists,

a. SOL shutter is jammed.
b. Sensor is dirty.
Corrective actions
Replace the sensor.
Severity
Advisory

58.00.00:02

CLC measures not increasing value. Check that you have set the right substrate. Run subsystem diagnostics.
If the problem persists, call your support representative.
a. Job pattern is not printed correctly.
b. Sensor shutter is jammed.
c. Sensor has failed.
Corrective actions
1. Check the job pattern.
2. Check printhead nozzle health.
3. Check the sensor shutter.
Severity
Advisory
58.00.00:75
Error saving data on hard disk, out of memory. Calibration wasn't completed successfully. Run subsystem
diagnostics. If the problem persists, call your support representative.

a. Temporary problem
b. Permanent damage to the hard disk drive
Corrective actions
Severity
Advisory

58.00.00:85

CLC white substrate measure out of range. Check that you have set the right substrate. Run subsystem

If substrate and printed job are OK, the most probable cause is a sensor failure.
Corrective actions
Replace the SOL sensor.
Severity
Advisory
58.02.00:02

SOL shutter door open/close check failure. SOL sensor unusable due to shutter door issue. Run subsystem
SOL sensor is open because of a substrate jam, or is failing.
Corrective actions
Run the SOL calibration diagnostic and open the cleaning roll door to check that the shutter is properly
closed. If it is failing, replace it.
Severity
Advisory
58.03.00:04
Color sensor communication error. Run subsystem diagnostics. If the problem persists, call your support
representative.

a. Cabling problem
b. Color sensor problem

Corrective actions
1. Check cabling, and replace it if necessary.
3. Check the sensor, and replace it if necessary.
Severity
Advisory
58.03.00:84

SOL calibration failure. Calibration wasn't completed successfully. Run subsystem diagnostics. If the problem

a. Calibration has failed.
b. The printheads have a lot of blocked nozzles and the pattern is not printed properly.
c. The sensor is faulty.
Corrective actions
1. Check printhead health.
2. Repeat the calibration and replace the sensor if the problem persists.
Severity
Advisory
58.03.00:85

SOL measure error (out of range measure). Calibration wasn't completed successfully. Run subsystem
a. Calibration has failed.
b. The printheads have a lot of blocked nozzles and the pattern is not printed properly.
c. The sensor is faulty.

Corrective actions
2. Check printhead health.
3. Repeat the calibration and replace the sensor if the problem persists.
Severity
Advisory
61. Internal firmware error codes

61.01.00:85
No data received from IPS. Check that IPS and engine are up and running, and data cable is connected. If the
problem persists, call your support representative.
a. The data cable between the Internal Print Server and the printer engine is disconnected or damaged.
b. The printer or engine is not working.
c. The network is not correctly configured.
Corrective actions
1. Check that data cable and connections are OK.
2. Ensure that Internal Print Server and printer engine (lights and LEDs) are up and running.
3. Ensure that the printer configuration in the Internal Print Software is as recommended.
Severity
Advisory
61.02.00:01

Unexpected printing interrupt. Job canceled. Check that you have the recommended IPS configuration and
the right connection between IPS and printer engine, also run drying diagnostics. If the problem persists, call

The job is cancelled because the safety heater timeout has been triggered: the substrate is spending too
much time in the print zone with high-powered lamps. Usually this is because a lack of system performance:
the Internal Print Server is not providing data to the engine fast enough.

Corrective actions
1. Check that the Internal Print Server computer has the recommended configuration and no other third-
party software installed.
2. Check the performance of the hard disk drive. If the problem persists, replace the hard disk drive. See E-
box hard disk drive on page 526.
3. Run printhead control link and drying diagnostics.
Severity
Advisory
61.09.00:04

Unexpected end of file. Job cancelled. Check that you have the recommended IPS configuration and the right
connection between IPS and printer engine. Check that your file is OK. If the problem persists, call your

a. Sporadic error
b. Job file corruption
c. Connection problem between IPS and printer engine
d. Very strange printer firmware or Internal Print Server software corruption
Corrective actions
1. Check that the Internal Print Server configuration is as recommended and there is no software running
that could reduce performance.
2. Turn off the printer, wait 10 seconds, then restart the printer.
3. The job file may be corrupted or cropped, try to RIP it again.
4. Check the connection between Internal Print Server and printer engine.
5. Reinstall printer firmware and Internal Print Server sofware.
Severity
Advisory

79. Miscellaneous error codes
79:03

A critical error has occurred in the communication between the formatter board and one of the engine PCI
boards.

a. Sporadic error
b. PCI board connection failure
c. Faulty engine board
d. Faulty formatter board
Corrective actions
1. Turn off the printer, wait 10 seconds, then restart the printer.
2. Disconnect both PCI boards from the formatter and clean the PCI ports by blowing into them. Clean the
PCI contacts in the engine boards and reconnect.
3. Replace the engine board. See Engine PCA on page 535.
4. Replace the formatter board.
Severity
SEVERE
79.04 or 79.X:04
Generic firmware error

a. An internal firmware error has occurred in the printer. If the error persists, retrieve the printer’s error
logs and escalate the problem to HP.
b. The 79.X:04 error is advisory, and does not require an immediate reboot. It reports that the firmware is
functional and that the printer can still be used, but recommends restarting the printer when possible in
order to ensure that this system error will not be displayed again.
c. A 79:04 system error is usually a consequence of an immediate printer shutdown following another
system error.
Corrective actions
1. Switch the printer off and on.
2. If the error persists, check that the printer has the latest firmware version. If not, update the firmware
to the latest version.
3. Perform the hard disk test from the e-box subsystem diagnostic.

4. If possible, extract the service plot and interpret the results.
5. If the error persists, replace the hard disk drive. See E-box hard disk drive on page 526.
Severity
SEVERE
79.04.00:00

Generic system error. Reboot the printer. If the problem persists, call your support representative
a. This system error code can also be displayed as 79:04 or 79.1:04 (generic firmware error).
b. An internal firmware error has occurred in the printer. If the error persists, retrieve the printer’s error
logs and escalate the problem to HP.
c. The 79.1:04 error is an advisory error, not forcing the customer to restart the printer immediately,
reporting that the internal firmware is not critical and that the printer can still be used, but recommend
restarting the printer when possible in order to ensure that this system error will not be displayed
again.
d. A 79:04 system error is usually a consequence of an immediate printer shutdown following another
system error.
Corrective actions
1. Switch the printer off and then on again.
2. If the error persists, check that the printer has the latest firmware version. If not, update the firmware
to the latest version.
3. Perform the hard disk test from the e-box subsystem diagnostic.
4. If possible, extract the service plot and interpret the results.
5. If the error persists, replace the hard disk drive. See E-box hard disk drive on page 526.
Severity
SEVERE
86. Scan-axis error codes

86.00.00:02
Scan-axis length test failure. Check scan-axis path, clean encoder, run diagnostic. If the problem persists, call

Description
The scan-axis length is not as expected.

a. A high friction point, or something blocking the carriage path
b. Damage to the scan-axis encoder strip
Corrective actions
1. Check for possible obstructions in the carriage path (with the printer turned off, manually uncap the
service station and move the carriage along the scan axis to search for possible high friction points.
Look for objects or possible problems in the carriage path, the rods, bushings, and platen area.
2. Perform the service function test, which can help to diagnose any possible problem with friction
problems in the gear axis.
3. Check for possible damage in the scan-axis encoder strip and replace if required. See Encoder strip
on page 773.
Severity
Advisory
86.01.00:01

Carriage movement failure. Make sure maintenance routines are up to date and then select Reinitialize
carriage from the Tools menu. Perform the carriage-rail cleaning process; if the problem persists, call your

a. Sporadic problem
b. Carriage movement jammed
c. Carriage movement friction too high
Corrective actions
1. Ensure that there is no obstacle in the carriage path.
2. Perform carriage rail maintenance to clean the rails and check friction.
3. Run the scan-axis diagnostics to check whether the problem comes from other part.
4. Reinitialize the carriage, if it continues failing.
Severity
Advisory

86.01.00:02

Scan-axis direction test failure. Run diagnostic. If the problem persists, call your support representative.
a. A high friction point or something blocking the carriage path
b. Damage to the scan-axis encoder strip
Corrective actions
2. Check for possible obstructions in the carriage path (with the printer turned off, manually uncap the
service station and move the carriage along the scan axis to search for possible high friction points.
Look for objects or possible problems in the carriage path, the rods, bushings, and platen area.
3. Check for possible damage to the scan-axis encoder strip and replace it if necessary. See Encoder strip
on page 773.
Severity
Advisory
86.03.01:92

Scan stop triggered by rear safety sensor. Reinitialize carriage. If the problem persists, call your support
representative.
Corrective actions
Severity
Advisory
86.03.02:92
Scan stop triggered by front safety sensor. Reinitialize carriage. If the problem persists, call your support
representative.
Safety element activated

Corrective actions
Severity
Advisory
86.04.00:08

Possible scan-axis jam detected. Check that servicing and substrate paths are completely clean and clear of
obstacles and afterwards perform Reinitialize Carriage from IPS. If problem persists run subsystem
diagnostics and call your service representative.

a. Intermittent or sporadic problem
b. Obstacle in the carriage path
c. Carriage friction too high
d. Encoder strip damaged
e. Motor or motor PCA damaged
Corrective actions
1. Run the scan-axis diagnostics.
2. Ensure that the carriage path is free of obstacles.
3. Perform the scan-axis cleaning process.
4. Check the encoder strip and replace it if it is damaged. See Encoder strip on page 773.
5. Replace the motor.
Severity
Advisory

Troubleshooting without system errors
Troubleshooting using board LEDs
All the printer boards have diagnostic LEDs to help in the troubleshooting. Although some LED information is
redundant and also known by the printer firmware, using the board LEDs can be very useful when trying to
diagnose power or communication problems. The following sections review each board LED and provide
information on:
● Board physical connector: Boards serigraphy together with cables labelling should be enough to
perform repais operations, but this information can be useful when providing remote support not being
in front of the printer.
● Diagnostic LEDs' physical location and meaning:
For further information regarding electric and electronic interactions, see the subsystems’ block diagrams.
ENWW Troubleshooting without system errors 265

Board name: E-cabinet PCA
Board picture pointing to connectors/LEDs—internal side
Internal side
Meaning of LEDs
Side LEDs
Most of the e-cabinet PCA LEDs are packed on the PCA side where they are most visible.

Interlocks
These LEDs give information about the safety interlocks, emergency stops, and watchdog timer.
STATE: refers to the current (real time) state
ACTIVATED: LEDs turn on whenever there is a condition. Only the firmware can turn them off.
1 (front door 2 (loading table 3 BY (Interlock ESTOP WDT (Watchdog

interlock) interlock) bypass) timer)
STATE GREEN: Door GREEN: Table NOT USED RED: Bypass ON GREEN: RED: Watchdog
closed closed emergency triggered
stops released
OFF: Door open OFF: Table open NOT USED OFF: Bypass OFF OFF: 1 or more OFF: Watchdog
emergency untrigg.
stops pressed
ACTIVATED RED: Door has RED: Table has NOT USED RED: 1 or more RED: Watchdog
been opened been opened emergency triggered
stops have been
pressed
OFF: Reset state OFF: Reset state NOT USED OFF: Reset state OFF: Reset state
Safety relay
These LEDs give information about the safety relay (X1)
POWER GREEN: Safety relay powered (all emergency stops released, and PCA supplying +24V)
OFF: Safety relay not powered (1 or more emergency stops pressed, PCA not supplying +24V)
STATE GREEN: Safety relay ON (lights after the enable button is pressed: power ON)
OFF: Safety relay OFF (power OFF)
PCA power
These LEDs give information on the PCA voltage status.

24V 24V_ACT 24V_ACT 8V 5V
GREEN: 24V Input GREEN: 24V to GREEN: 24V for GREEN: 8V GREEN: 5V Regulator OK
power present external internal PCA use OK Regulator OK
(from PSU-2) components OK
OFF: 24V not OFF: 24V to external OFF: 24V for internal OFF: 8V Regulator OFF: 5V Regulator KO
present (from components KO PCA use KO (PCA KO
PSU-2) (fuse blown or malfunction, fuse
overcurrent blown or component
protection triggered) broken)
Fuses
These LEDs give information on the status of the PCA fuses. There is a mistake on the silk screen: where it
says 5×20 it should say SMT, and where it says SMT it should say 5×20.
DS73 DS74
RED: SMT fuse blown (Internal 24V PCA not present) 5x20 fuse F24 blown (24V to external components not present)
OFF: SMT fuse not blown 5x20 fuse F24 not blown
If the fuse is blown, there is no communication with the PCA.
Fan
Fan rotation feedback

Fan (DS75)
GREEN: Fan rotation OK
OFF: Fan fault
If the fuse is blown, there is no communication with the PCA.
PSU power
These LEDs give information on the state of the DC power supplies.
1 (PSU-1) 2(PSU-2) 3(PSU-3) 4(PSU-4) 5(PSU-5) 6(PSU-6) 7(PSU-7)
GREEN: PSU ON
OFF: PSU OFF
Firmware
Firmware (e-box) controlled LEDs
DS64 DS65
Blinking GREEN: e-cabinet firmware alive NOT USED
Static (OFF of GREEN): e-cabinet firmware not communicating
ACT
LEDs for external actuators power: NOT USED

1 (DS66) 2 (DS67)
NOT USED NOT USED
Enable button feedback

DS32 reflects the state of the enable/rearm button.
DS32
GREEN: Enable button lit
OFF: Enable button not lit
Power output state (internal side)

Each power output has a state LED next to the output connector.

The meaning of these LEDs is:
Green Output is on
Off Output is off

Board picture pointing to connectors/LEDs—external side
External side
Meaning of LEDs
Power output fuse feedback (external side)
Accessible on the external side, there is a fuse for each power output, associated with each fuse is a red LED.

The meaning of these LEDs is:
RED Fuse blown or not present
OFF Fuse OK
NOTE: For a LED to turn red indicating that the fuse is blown, there must be DC power present (the
corresponding DC PSU must be ON); for PSUs 1, 3, 4, and 5 this means that the safety relay must be activated
and the front door and loading table closed.
Other e-cabinet LEDs and important test points
Safety relay LEDS

The safety relay X-1 has 3 LEDs: Power, CH-1, and CH-2.

The meaning of these LEDs is as follows:
● POWER:
◦ +24V present at the safety relay, for this LED to be ON the e-cabinet PCA must supply +24V
(firmware activated) and the emergency stops must be all released.
● CH.1 and CH.2:
◦ The safety relay has two redundant channels in series, each LED indicates the state of the channel,
for the safety relay to activate both channels must be good.
◦ These LEDs should be always be in the same state (lit when the safety relay is activated and unlit
otherwise). If one is lit and the other unlit, the safety relay is faulty and should be replaced.
AC power supply DS-1 and DS-2 LEDs

The AC power supplies have three LEDs each: STATUS, PWM, and ACOK.
NOTE: These LEDs work only if there is control voltage present (+24VDC). This voltage is supplied through
the e-cabinet PCA and must be activated by the firmware.
The meaning of each LED is:

● ACOK (green): lit when there is AC input voltage present at the power input is inside the required
margins.
● PWM (green): lit when the firmware is providing an adequate control signal.
● STATUS (yellow): lit when there is any error condition.
DC power supply LEDs

Each power supply has a green LED that lights when the PSU is working normally (has AC voltage and the DC
voltage generated is good).
Even though the visibility of the LED on some of the PSUs is not very good, it’s easy to tell whether it’s lit or
not.
There are seven DC PSUs in the e-cabinet from three different model families, here is the location of the
feedback LED for each family:
● SWS1000L: PSU-1 and PSU-5
● SWS600L: PSU-2, PSU-6, and PSU-7

● SWS300A: PSU-3 and PSU-4
External lights
On the e-cabinet side where the user interface is, there are four lights and one illuminated pushbutton:
L-1, L-2, L-3 (main power lights)

These lights are lit when there is AC voltage present from the installing mains and the main switch (SW-1) is
on.
Inside the e-cabinet there are two for each light:
● L-1 is protected by the fuses in FH-1 and FH-2
If all these lights are not lit when the main switch is on:
● It’s most likely that one or more AC protections on the mains installation (external to the machine) are
switched off, so there is no AC voltage present.
● It’s possible that the installation cross-connectors on TB-1 are not installed, loose, or wrongly installed.
If only one or two of these lights are lit when the main switch is on:

● It’s possible that one or two phases in the installation are failing.
● It’s possible that one or more protective fuses are blown.
L-4 (printer-enabled light)

This light gives direct feedback on the state of the safety relay:
● Safety relay activated: L-4 lit
● Safety relay deactivated: L-4 unlit
L-5 (rearm button)

L-5 is a blue illuminated pushbutton (the rearm button):
● The button is used to activate the safety relay.
● The light is controlled by the firmware through the e-cabinet PCA to indicate to the user when the
machine requires this activation.
AC protections
The AC protections are standard circuit breakers like the ones used in the electrical installation of any
building.
● ACBs (automatic circuit breakers) protect against overcurrents, produced for example when a heater
fails and its actual electrical resistance is much lower than the nominal value.
● RCDs (residual current devices) protect against ground leakages, produced for example when a heater
fails and its wiring breaks and ends up in electrical contact with the machine structure.
The circuit breakers are off when their lever is down, and on when their lever is up. They are easily checked
and actuated from the e-cabinet exterior.
Important test points

This section describes some particular points where measurements can be made with a multimeter to
understand the state of the e-cabinet better.
WARNING! In most cases, these measures require operating the e-cabinet with its doors open. Take all
necessary precautions to prevent electrical shocks. Always check that the grounding cable is correctly
installed before powering up.
AC input voltages (power integrity check)
Verify the power configuration measuring the voltage between adjacent terminal blocks in TB1, all measured
voltages must be inside the 200–240 V ±10% as per the chosen configuration.
Measure the voltage between terminals TB1-1 and TB1-2
Configuration option Nominal line to line voltage Measured voltage
1 and 3 380V 220V
400V 230V
415V 240V

2 and 4 200V 200V
208V 208V
220V 220V
240V 240V
5 and 6 240V 240V
A lower-than-expected reading may indicate a loose screw on the electrical installation. Switch off the mains
through the branch circuit breaker in the building PDU and check that all the input power cables and the
configuration cross connectors are tightly screwed.
Power transformer AC output

The AC output voltage from the power transformer TF-1 should always be 230 V ±10%.
This can be measured with an AC voltage meter between TB7-2 and TB7-4:
Safety circuit DC power

To verify that the e-cabinet PCA is supplying 24V to the safety circuit, measure the DC voltage between TB5-7
(-) and TB5-1 (+).

Emergency stop chain
To verify that the emergency stops are all released, measure the DC voltage between TB5-7 (-) and TB5-2
(+). Make sure to check that there is DC power on the safety circuit (see last paragraph).
Alternatively, with the printer powered off, measure the impedance between TB5-1 and TB5-2:
● When all emergency stop are released the impedance has to be low (~0Ω)
● When one or more emergency stops are pressed the impedance has to be high
Safety relay DC power

The DC power supply of the safety relay can be measured between terminals A1 and A2 of X1. Make sure that
there is DC power to the safety circuit and that the emergency stops are all released.

Rearm button
To determine if the rearm button and its cabling are in order, measure the impedance (ohms) between X1-Y1
and X1-Y2 with the button pressed and the button released. This has to be done with the safety relay
unpowered (press an emergency stop to make sure that the relay has no power).
● With the rearm button released, the measured impedance must be high (>1MΩ)
● With the rearm button pressed, the measured impedance must be low (~0Ω)
Contactor control
To test that the contactors are receiving the control voltage, measure the DC voltage between terminals A1
and A2:
● When the contactor has to be closed (activated) the voltage has to be +24VDC
● When the contactor has to be open (not activated) the voltage has to be 0VDC
Contactor K-4 is shown here as an example, the same applies to K-1,2,3:

Interlock chain
To verify that the interlocks are all closed measure the DC voltage between TB5-7 (-) and TB6-3 (+). Make
sure to check that there is DC power on the safety circuit and the safety relay is activated.
Alternatively, with the printer powered off, measure the impedance between TB6-2 and TB6-3:
● When all interlocks are closed the impedance has to be low (~0Ω).
● When one or more interlocks are open the impedance has to be high.

Board name: Formatter
Board picture pointing to connectors/LEDs
Meaning of LEDs

Board name: Engine PCA

Meaning of LEDs
PCA Designator Color Description
DS10 Green 3V3_PCI presence
DS11 Green 3V3 presence
DS12 Not used

Board name: Engine adaptor PCA
Meaning of LEDs
Voltage LEDs
Four green LED’s (voltage supply)
One for each internal DC voltage
Light is proportional to voltage. For example, if the internal 24V drops to 14V, then the LED will still be on,
but a little bit dim.

Overcurrent LEDs
Four LEDs, one for each DC output voltage, lit in case of overcurrent.
In normal states these LEDs should be off.
12V to 5V3
VOK ON (Green!!) when 5V3 out of Regulation due to Failure
OFF in normal situation

Board name: E-box interconnect PCA
Meaning of LEDs
Zoom to LEDs and table with meaning
Each particular connector has a set of LEDs. The LED state (on/off) is directly related to the presence of
voltage at the pins of the connectors, because they are simply connected to the connector (through an
isolation resistor).
Colors meaning:
● Green: good news; presence of power supply voltages (or “OK” signals)
● Yellow: neutral news; for data, clock, interrupt, encoder phase signals
● Red: bad news; for failure signals (currently only from Delta Sinewave converters)

Brushless motors connector
AC/AC converter connector
Optical encoder connector
Optical drop-detector connector
I2C connector

MICCI2 serial bus connector
CAN connector
Power output connector
CAN+I2C (CAN*) connector

Board name: Printhead interconnect PCA
Visible LEDs with covers

Meaning of LEDs
LED Function Color Description
DS1 Vs presence Green VS power supply ON
DS2 Vs_limits diagnosis Red Vs has been out of range.

(>50.02 V or <37.36 V)
DS3 nReset Diagnosis Red If this LED blinks, Horus reset

occurred
DS4 PVR Horus1 presence Green PVR of Horus1 ON
DS5 Trailing Cable Diagnosis Red Trailing cable badly connected
DS7 PH_CON Diagnosis Red Printhead is badly connected
DS8 VccExt0 presence Green VccExt0 power supply ON
DS9 IVCC_Dig Red VCC_DIG current out of limits
DS10 Vdd1 presence Green Vdd1 power supply ON

DS11 Board_location_OK indicator Green If LED ON, current board is being

controlled by current FUSION
DS14 Vcc_Dig presence Green Vcc_Dig power supply ON
DS15 Trailing Cable Diagnosis Green Trailing cable well connected
In the above table: bold font for the visible LEDs.
Normal operation: Green ON, reds OFF
Board name: Printhead interconnect optimizer PCA
Board illustrations indicating connectors/LEDs

Visible LEDs with covers
Meaning of LEDs
DS1 Vs presence Green VS power supply ON
DS2 Vs_limits diagnosis Red Vs has been out of range.

(>50.02 V or <37.36 V)
DS3 nReset Diagnosis Red If this LED blinks, Horus reset

occurred
DS5 Trailing Cable Diagnosis Red Trailing cable badly connected
DS7 PH_CON Diagnosis Red Printhead is badly connected

DS9 IVCC_Dig Red VCC_DIG current out of limits
DS11 Board_location_OK indicator Green If LED ON, current board is being

controlled by current FUSION
DS14 Vcc_Dig presence Green Vcc_Dig power supply ON
DS15 Trailing Cable Diagnosis Green Trailing cable well connected
In the above table: bold font for the visible LEDs.
Normal Operation: Green ON, reds OFF
Board name: Carriage Interconnect PCA
Board illustrations indicating connectors/LEDs
Figure 4-1 Upper board

Figure 4-2 Lower board
NOTE: From the point of view of functionality, 42V and printhead could be exchanged, but the lengths of
the cables are optimized to follow the connections above.
The power connectors for the primers cannot be exchanged.
Meaning of LEDs
DS1 3V3 presence Green 3V3 power supply ON
DS2 42 V presence I Green 42 V power supply ON
DS3 42 V presence II Green 42 V power supply ON
DS4 12V presence Green 12V power supply presence

(although 24 V appears in silk
screen)

Board name: Fiber-optics PCA
Meaning of LEDs
Zoom to LEDs and table with meaning
LEDs DS1..DS8
If the link is not up (DS12 is switched off), the meaning of the LEDs is the following:
PCA Designator Purpose Color Description
E-box side
DS1 LED7 Green Indicates e-box code
DS2 LED6 Green OFF
DS3 LED5 Green FO TX lane 3 detected
DS7 LED1 Green FO RX lane detected

DS8 LED0 Green FO connector detected
Carriage side
DS1 LED7 Green OFF
DS2 LED6 Green Indicates Carriage code
DS3 LED5 Green FO RX lane 3 detected
DS7 LED1 Green FO TX lane detected
DS8 LED0 Green FO connector detected
On the other had, if the link is up (DS12 is swithed on), these LEDs have another meaning and indicate
communication errors in the high speed link.
Voltage LEDs — LEDs DS9,DS10,DS12 and LEDs DS11, DS13, DS14, DS15, DS16
PCA designator Purpose Color Description
DS9 ENC_CHA Green Blinking: Carriage is moving
DS10 ENC_CHB Green Blinking: Carriage is moving

DS11 DONE bit Green ON: FPGA is programmed
DS12 LINK UP Green The fiber-optic link is up
DS13 1V2_VCCT Green 1.2V FPGA Transceivers
DS14 1V2_INT Green 1.2V FPGA
DS15 3V3_AUX Green 3V3 FPGA
DS16 3V3 Green 3V3 FPGA
DS17 5V Green 5V Board
Cable connection LEDs — LEDs D18,DS19,DS20,DS21,DS23,DS24,DS25,DS26
DS23 TC8 Red ON: There's no cable connected

to TC8 or it is pluggued
incorrectly

to TC7or it is pluggued
incorrectly

incorrectly

incorrectly

incorrectly

incorrectly

incorrectly

incorrectly

LEDs DS22, DS27, DS28
DS22 3V3_MAXIM Green 3V3 Line Driver
DS27 3V3_QSFP Green 3V3 FO
DS28 Vs Green Vin supply
Board name: ISS PCA
Meaning of LEDs

GREEN LEDs
LEDs that should be always on when everything is OK
5V 5V generated internally from the 24V are OK
24V PCB 24V from the PCB are OK
24V ACT 24V to the actuators are OK (no fuse blown and no current monitor
has detected overcurrent)
24V PREFUSE 24V from e-cabinet arrives to ISS
IO I2C It blinks every 1.5 sec if communication with electronics is OK.
RED LEDs
LEDs that should be always off when everything is OK
ACT FAULT If LED is on, an actuator is failing.
5V FAIL If LED is on, indicates that the internally generated 5V rail is off.
Restart the printer, if the problem persists disconnect all bison
connectors, if the problem persists, replace the ISS PCA (see ISS PCA
on page 683), if not, the problem is in the Moby connector.
24V PCB FAIL If LED on, the internal PCB fuse is blown. The ISS PCA needs to be
replaced. See ISS PCA on page 683.
24V ACT FAIL If LED is on, it indicates that the current monitor has detected an
overcurrent.
24V FUSE FAIL If LED on, some actuator/s create a short circuit and the replacable
fuse is blown. In this case, actuator and fuse need to be replaced
LED off in ISS1 and on in ISS2 when everything is OK
Term ON Termination of last ISS PCA is assembled (only for ISS 2)
Board name: Curing PCA
* For connection between modules details, see the curing cabling block diagram.

Meaning of LEDs
LED Color Meaning Normal operation
DC voltages
LED 24V (DS5) Green 24 V present in the board On
LED 12V (DS6) Green 12 V generated in the board On
LED 5V (DS7) Green 5 V generated in the board On
LED 3V3 (DS27) Green 3.3 V generated in the board On
Up signals
Status LED (DS1) Orange On error, repeatedly flashes error codes Off
uC beat (DS8) Yellow Indicates firmware activity On, blinking
Control signals
Max reset (DS4) Red On if events supervisor is in error state Off
K1 relay (DS3) Orange On when the K1 relay is enabled On when the module is activated and
curing
K2 relay (DS10) Orange On when the K2 relay is enabled On when the module is activated and
curing
AC1 enabled (DS9) Orange On when the AC1 TRIAC is enabled On when the module is activated and
curing
Ac2 enabled (DS2) Orange On when the AC2 TRIAC is enabled On when the module is activated and
curing

Board name: Drying PCA
Meaning of LEDs
Name Reference Color Normal state Meaning Error state
3.3V DS27 Green On PCA powered Off
Status DS1 Orange Off Error code Blinking
uC beat DS8 Orange Blinking Code works Off
OVC DS5 Green On No OVC problem Off
Error DS4 Red On Power disabled N/A

Board name: Drop-detector PCA
* See Subsystem block diagrams on page 61 for connection details

Meaning of LEDs
DS1 5V Green 5V power supply ON
Board name: Vacuum control PCA
* For the Vapor removal VACUUM Ctrl PCA, only data & power cables from the e-box Int PCA and the
Control cable for the pump are needed.

Meaning of LEDs
DS1 CAN Activity Green Shows CAN Bus activity
Board name: OMAS control PCA

Meaning of LEDs

DS1 Done Green Shows the FPGA has been
booted correctly
DS2 Internal 3V3 Green 3V3 Internal Power Supply ON
DS3 24V Input Green 24V Power supply ON
DS4 5V Input Green 5V Power supply ON
Board name: Motor drive PCA

The motor drive PCA controls motors on different subsystems. See the corresponding block diagram for
specific subsystem details.
Meaning of LEDs
LED COLOR Description
SDA & SCL Green Communication (blinking in normal

operation)
24V IN Green 24V arrive to the board (green in normal

operaton)
OUT A/B Green Green if motor turning, depending on motor

direction
5V Green 5V ON (green in normal operation)

6 &7 Green Indicates encoder activity
Rest Green Indicate switches operation (depends on

printer subsystem)

Print-quality troubleshooting
Print-quality diagnostic tools and prints
The printer has a number of diagnostic tools and prints for operators, and some more for service engineers,
which can be executed from the Internal Print Server or from the Print Care utility. These tools and prints are
used to identify and resolve print-quality problems. If it is possible to identify the problem using a diagnostic
print; as a matter of best practice, you should reprint the diagnostic print after taking action, until the
problem is solved.
The tools and prints for operators are available and fully documented in the user’s guide. In this service
manual, we will not repeat all the information already available in the user’s guide. Therefore it is important
to have the user’s guide available.
However, in some cases this chapter includes detailed explanations of what each tool is doing and why, which
are important for a better understanding of the results.
The tools and prints for service engineers are fully explained in this chapter.
Tools and prints for operators

All are available from the Internal Print Server. See the user’s guide for further information.
● Pre-ripped image for HP Permanent Gloss Self-Adhesive Vinyl: Nature Flowers
● Add New Substrate Wizard print
● Printhead check and clean
● Printhead status plot
● Drop detector diagnostic
● Printhead hard recovery
● Printhead automatic and manual alignment
● Printhead alignment check print for operators
● Substrate-advance sensor (OMAS) cleanliness check
● Substrate advance check and adjustment print for operators
● Color calibration
Internally, the printer also checks the status of the systems that maintain print quality. Although in most
cases customers cannot act upon them, the error messages can help in understanding the causes of the
defects.
● Drop-detector system errors
● OMAS system errors
Tools and prints for service engineers

● Service alignment check plot (from Print Care)
● Front printhead to rear printhead alignment check plot (from Print Care)
● Substrate-advance sensor pixel-size calibration (manual and automatic)
● Enable and disable the substrate-advance sensor
● Scan-axis encoder strip check (from Print Care)
ENWW Print-quality troubleshooting 311

How to maintain print quality
See the user’s guide for details of basic steps to maintain good print quality. Here is a brief summary of when
to use the various alignments and calibrations.
Printhead New substrate New substrate New substrate Print mode Poor print
replacement created imported loaded changed quality
Automatic Recommended Not needed Not needed Not needed Not needed Recommended if
printhead unless carriage relevant
alignment beam has moved
Manual printhead ● First Not needed Not needed Not needed Not needed Recommended if
alignment alignment unless carriage relevant
with all beam has moved
printheads
replaced
● When
optimizer
printhead
is replaced
● When
substrate
is not
suitable for
automatic
alignment
● If
automatic
alignment
fails
Color calibration Recommended Recommended Recommended Not needed, Not needed Recommended if
unless never relevant
done before
Substrate Not needed Not needed, as Not needed Not needed Not needed Recommended if
advance long as the relevant
compensation substrate-
advance sensor
is working

Print-quality diagnostic tools and prints in detail
Pre-ripped image: Nature Flowers
Load a substrate, align the printheads, and print the HP test image shown below. See the installation guide
for details.
Figure 4-3 Nature Flowers
This image should be printed when the hardware installation is complete. It has been pre-ripped for HP
Permanent Gloss Self-adhesive Vinyl and can be printed by adding it directly to the Internal Printer Server
queue. Therefore, there is no interaction with the RIP. It is a useful image for detecting major deviations from
normal printer performance.
Add New Substrate wizard print

See the user’s guide for more details of this image.
This image cannot be printed outside the wizard. However, if the print is not cured completely or you observe
bleed or graininess defects attributable to the optimizer level, the wizard can be used to find a preset that
works well with your substrate and compare it with the preset that is not working well.
Printhead check and clean

See the user’s guide for more details of this process. To start the process, go to the Internal Print Server and
select Printer > Printhead cleaning > Check.

Remember that this process must be performed daily to maintain the health of the printheads. It consists of
the following steps, which are performed automatically:
● Initial printhead servicing
● Drop detection
● Automatic recovery. If there are an excessive number of blocked nozzles in any of the printheads, the
printer will automatically try to recover them with a more rigorous servicing process, which includes
priming the affected printheads.
● Final drop detection and nozzle substitution. Nozzle health is checked again so that the printer can
correct for the blocked nozzles that were not successfully serviced.
Depending on the number of printheads needing recovery, the total time of this process can go from 10
minutes (no recovery needed) to 45 minutes. The image below gives an example of its effectiveness.
Printhead status plot

See the user’s guide for more details of this plot. To print it, go to the Internal Print Server and select Printer
> Printhead cleaning > Print.

The plot looks like this:
It has two sections:
● Section 1 includes mid-tone areas printed with a single ink using a 6-pass print mode with nozzle
substitution.
NOTE: Early firmware releases do not print Section 1.
● Section 2 shows plainly which nozzles in each printhead are printing and not printing.
Drop-detector diagnostics
Execute the drop-detector diagnostics from the Print Care window. This provides detailed information about
the blocked nozzles detected in each printhead.
NOTE: In early firmware releases the drop-detector diagnostics are not available.
Decision table
The following table summarizes the data that can be seen in each diagnostic, the possible causes, and the
decisions.
Mid-tones (section 1) Nozzle health (section Drop detector Possible cause Action
2)
No banding < 300 blocked (all < 300 blocked (all Other Continue banding
colors) colors) troubleshooting.

Mid-tones (section 1) Nozzle health (section Drop detector Possible cause Action
2)
Banding in all colors < 300 blocked (all < 300 blocked (all Substrate advance, or Check the substrate-
colors) colors) other advance sensor.
Continue banding
troubleshooting.
Banding in one color < 300 blocked (that < 300 blocked (that Other Continue banding
color) color) troubleshooting.
> 300 blocked > 300 blocked Printhead failure Hard-clean the
printhead, twice if
necessary.
Replace the printhead.
N/A < 300 blocked (at least > 300 blocked (at least Drop detection failure Call your service
one color) one color) representative.
Printhead hard clean

See the user’s guide for more details of this process. To start it, go to the Internal Print Server and select
Printer > Printhead cleaning > Hard clean.
The Hard clean button starts a more rigorous cleaning process than the Check button does. It performs
several hard priming routines, and then a final drop detection and nozzle substitution to correct for any
nozzles that are still blocked.
TIP: If nozzles are severely blocked, it may be useful to perform a hard clean more than once.
Printhead alignment
Printer > Printhead alignment.

Automatic alignment
● Takes about 8 minutes and usually delivers optimal print quality
● Useful for smooth, high-quality substrates
● May fail if the printhead has blocked nozzles
● Cannot be used to align the optimizer printhead
● Fast and easy to use when a color printhead has been replaced
Manual alignment
● Provides good print quality when automatic alignment is not possible
● Useful for highly textured or non-white substrates
● Allows more control over the alignment process
● Can be used for all printheads, including the optimizer
Verify alignment
If you press the upper Print button to verify alignment, the following information is printed out:

To interpret this information, see the user’s guide.
Substrate-advance sensor (OMAS) cleanliness check

See Theory of operation (roll-to-roll configuration) on page 25 for background information about the
substrate-advance sensor.
The substrate-advance sensor cleanliness check is executed from Print Care: select Diagnostics > Substrate
Advance Sensor. It requires a sheet of plain paper.
If the sensor is dirty, follow the instructions in the Print Care maintenance wizard or in the user’s guide. If the
sensor is clean but the test fails, the sensor hardware could be faulty.
Substrate-advance adjustment
Printer > Advance calibration > Plot.

If compensation is needed, which is unlikely when the substrate-advance sensor is working correctly, the
compensation must be entered while printing an image (this one or another one) in the printing adjustments
dialog. In the Internal Print Server, select Printing adjustments in the left-hand menu, or Printer > Printing
adjustments.
As shown in the picture, locate the lightest of the columns, enter its number as the substrate advance
parameter and click Apply. If there are two equally light columns, enter the average. For example, if the
lightest columns are -3 and -2, enter -2.5 in the dialog.
Color calibration
Substrate > Color calibration > Calibrate. The printer prints the color calibration test chart:
The calibration includes both the ink restriction and linearization steps of the color workflow. The ink
restriction and linearization vary with the drop weight of the printhead and other external conditions, such as
the substrate type. To reach a specific color density, one printhead may require 3 drops while another one
may require 3.5 drops (smaller drop weight).
Ink restriction values will be different for each calibration.

The user’s guide contains detailed information on when to do color calibration. As a summary:
● Whenever you load a new substrate type that has not yet been calibrated.
● Whenever you notice excessive color differences between prints. Such color differences can be caused
by:
◦ Aging and wear of the printheads
◦ Installing new printheads
◦ Changes in substrate characteristics between one roll and another
◦ Changing environmental conditions
● If a job will be repeated in the future, color calibrations should be run before the current batch of
images and before each subsequent batch of the same images.
The calibration may fail and therefore be cancelled in the following circumstances:
● The substrate is non-white, translucent or transparent, very glossy, or has a rough or punched surface.
● Some color patches are defective due to stains, wrinkles or bubbles, or general poor print quality such
as banding.
● The carriage beam is not in the normal printing position. The distance between sensor and substrate is
very important and must be properly controlled.
● The embedded spectrophotometer is faulty (replace it if necessary).
Print-quality diagnostic tools and prints in detail

The following diagnostics must be executed from Print Care when logged in as ‘Engineer’ (see Print Care login
and boot modes on page 86).
Service alignment check plot
The service alignment test plot is printed from Print Care diagnostics, in the Print Quality section.

For reference, here is the carriage layout (rotated 180° with respect to the image above).
Compared with the customer’s Verify alignment print, this one offers:
● Finer resolution (one-pixel lines)
● Printheads fired in one pass; total plot length is two passes
● No optimizer
The plot does not indicate in what way to correct the alignment; it is used to check finer problems, after
which you should rerun the alignment to fix them. It can also be used to check for skew.
Front printhead to rear printhead alignment check plot
The front printhead (Row 0) to rear printhead (Row 1) alignment check plot is printed from Print Care
diagnostics, in the Print Quality section.
The plot is a simple area fill intended to look only at the alignment between Row 0 and Row 1 in the substrate
axis direction. The area should come out uniform, except perhaps in the pass-to-pass areas that should be
disregarded. When the front printhead to rear printhead alignment is not correct, the first nozzle of the row 1
printhead is incorrectly set. Therefore, in the Row 0 to Row 1 alignment check areas you may find:

● A thin white line where you see a rectangle in the picture. In this case, decrease the corresponding F, G,
or H correction of the manual alignment.
● A thin dark line where you see a rectangle in the picture. In this case, increase the corresponding F, G, or
H correction of the manual alignment.
Substrate-advance sensor pixel-size calibration
See Theory of operation (roll-to-roll configuration) on page 25 for background information about the
substrate-advance sensor.
Substrate-advance sensor pixel-sixe calibration is executed from Print Care diagnostics, in the substrate-
advance sensor section. It may be done automatically or manually; the automatic process is not available
with early firmware releases.
The first step of the manual calibration consists of printing a calibration plot, checking it visually, and
introducing the correction values in the diagnostic test dialog box. The firmware uses these values to
calculate the pixel size of the current sensor.
The second step consists of reprinting the same plot to check that the entered values have properly
calibrated the sensor.
The plot is similar to the substrate-advance adjustment plot: see Substrate-advance adjustment
on page 318. It should be printed on self-adhesive vinyl, preferably HP Permanent Gloss Self-adhesive Vinyl
or a similar material. It consists of a series of interference patterns:
1. From the image, pick the last portion of the most central pattern, which is usually the one that is closest
to the substrate-advance sensor.
2. In the pattern, disregard the incomplete areas and look at the last eight complete passes:
3. Locate the lightest column and, in the diagnostic test dialog boxes, enter the correction for each of the
eight passes. If there are two equally light columns, for example +3 and +4, the dialog boxes have an
option for entering both values: “3-4” instead of “3” or “4”.
4. The firmware uses these values to calculate the pixel size of the current sensor.

Enable or disable the substrate-advance sensor
A service engineer can disable and re-enable the substrate-advance sensor from Print Care diagnostics, in
the substrate-advance sensor section. Select Disable advance sensor or Enable advance sensor.
Disabling the substrate-advance sensor can be useful to check whether the sensor is faulty and producing
random advance errors. Follow these steps:
1. Print the substrate advance adjustment plot (see Substrate-advance adjustment on page 318).
2. Look at the last portion of the three most central patterns. The lightest column should be in
approximately the same position in each case (±1). If this is not the case, the substrate roll is skewed
and should be reloaded properly.
3. If there is no skew, focus on the most central pattern.
4. If the sensor is not working properly, random errors will appear as abrupt changes in the lightest of the
columns.
5. Disable the substrate-advance sensor and reprint the plot. Now there should be a clear lightest column,
possibly not at “0” but at least constant.
If you find a problem, clean the substrate-advance sensor and retry, before replacing it.
NOTE: Disabling the substrate-advance sensor is not permanent: after restarting the printer, the sensor
will be enabled again.
Scan-axis encoder strip check

The scan-axis encoder strip check is printed from Print Care diagnostics, in the Print Quality section.
This plot shows the printhead-to-printhead registration along the scan axis. The error is revealed by means
of an interference or vernier pattern that spans the whole scan axis of the printer. The plot can be printed
only on substrates of maximum width (at least 125 inches) to ensure a complete check of the scan axis.
In general, the registration between colors should not show abrupt changes. A smooth variation along the
scan axis is expected; the main cause is substrate expansion.
Abrupt changes signal serious problems with the scan-axis encoder strip.

In the cyan band, a faulty encoder strip causes glitches about 3 mm apart that correspond to the printhead
arrays.
In the yellow and magenta band, the abrupt glitches measure about 120 to 125 mm apart.
Generally, you should always find both of these glitches when there is a problem with the encoder strip.
NOTE: If you recognize both of these patterns in the same plot, even slightly, replace the encoder strip (see
Encoder strip on page 773). This problem should not be tolerated.
Further information about print-quality problems

See the user’s guide for further information.

How to extract and read the service plot
The service plot and its structure
The service plot is an XML file containing information useful for printer maintenance and troubleshooting.
The file is divided into four different sections:
● Current Substrate, Printhead, Ink System and Sensors Information: This section lists the status of
supplies, relevant sensors, and calibration values for servicing the machine.
● Printer Usage Information: This section lists the usage (consumption) of printheads, cartridges, and
substrate. It also contains counters of usage for hardware elements that require preventive
maintenance when the counter reaches a certain value.
● Event Logs: List of system errors, warnings, and printhead errors.
● Substrate Settings and CLC: Report of the substrate settings and calibration status.
See How to interpret the service plot on page 328 for a deeper understanding of each section of the service
plot.
How to extract and view the service plot

1. Prerequisites: The machine must be in Ready status; if the machine is printing, the job may be
cancelled. The service plot cannot be extracted with the machine booted in diagnostic mode.
2. How to generate the service plot:
The service plot is generated through the IPS, by selecting Information > Service information.
After some seconds needed to create the plot, a Web browser window pops up showing the service plot.
A copy of this file is recorded in the following path of the built-in computer in XML format: c:\Users\user
\Desktop\Service Information.
NOTE: This XML file (service plot) is named automatically using the date of creation. For example, a
plot created on the 20th of February 2013 might be named 2013-02-20T16_59_08_MasterXML.xml.
Check that the date is correct; if not, the date maintained in the printer is wrong and should be
corrected.
3. How to view the service plot:
You can view the service plot using the HPInforetriever software already installed in the built-in
computer.
a. Start the application by clicking on the HPInfoRetriever icon on the desktop:
ENWW How to extract and read the service plot 325

b. Open a service plot by selecting File > Open Service Info.
c. Browse the Service Information folder on the desktop, looking for the latest service plot (the one
with the latest date in the name of the file).
A Web browser opens, showing the service plot.
HP InfoRetriever also allows you to collect other information that may be required if HP support is
needed.
d. If extra information is required, log in as a service engineer and run Print Care.

e. Select Diagnostics > System Diagnostics > Utilities as shown below.
f. Check the box Get printer logs.

g. A pane appears with a link to the folder in which the log files have been stored. Click the link, copy
the specific file requested by HP and send it to the HP support team.
How to interpret the service plot

1 Current Substrate, Printhead, Ink System and Sensors Information
The first section of the service plot shows the overall printer status, followed by the printer configuration and
loaded substrate information:
1.3, 1.4 Current printhead info
This section shows information about each printhead.

● Warranty status: This field can be: ‘In warranty’, ‘Out of warranty’, or ‘See warranty note’. ‘See
warranty note’ indicates that non-HP ink has been used. See the limited warranty document or
http://www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies for more details.
● Status
● Error code ID
0 WORKING (= OK in Status column)
1 NO PRINTHEAD (= Missing in Status column)
2 REPLACE
3 RESEAT
8 REMOVE
16 REPLACEMENT INCOMPLETE
● Product number
● Product name
● Serial number
● Warranty date
● Used non-HP ink
● Used expired ink
● Ink used
● % warranty used (ml)
● Usage time
● Scan-axis shutdown
1.5, 1.6 Current cartridge info
This section shows information about each ink cartridge.
● Error ID Code: Reports the status of the cartridge. The Error ID given converts to the following status:
0 = OK 128 = EXPIRED
1 = NOT PRESENT 256 = WRONG_INSERTION_FAMILY
2 = EMPTY 512 = WRONG_INSERTION_MODEL
4 = ERROR 1024 = WRONG_INSERTION_MISMATCH
8 = LOW LEVEL 2048 = WRONG_INSERTION_SIZE

16 = RESEAT 4096 = NOT_TOTALLY_TESTED
32 = UNKNOWN 8192 = PREPARING_SYSTEM
64 = VERY_LOW_LEVEL
● Install Date: Shows when the cartridge was installed (check that the date is correctly set in the printer
configuration).
1.7 Supply status, 1.8 ISS temperature sensor, and 1.9 Pressure sensor calibration values
1.10 Intermediate tank values, 1.11 Air pressure system, 1.12 PPS system, and 1.13 PPS homing switch status
In this section you can see the status of various hardware elements: the intermediate tanks, the air pressure
system, PPS status, and PPS homing switches.
PPS Status can be any of the following: HOMING, LOW, HIGH, HIGH_PRINT, MEDIA_LOAD, UNKNOWN, HALT. If
the PPS is in an unknown position and needs to be recovered, see Table 5-9 Scan beam on page 362.
See Print to Paper Space (PPS) on page 34 for information that will help you to understand what values
should be expected for every element.
1.14 Vacuum system, 1.15 Voltage configuration, and 1.16 Sensor system
The three-phase system voltage configuration shows the voltage configuration that has been set during
installation (which must match site specifications). The possible values are: 200, 208, 220, 380, 400, and 415
V.

1.17 Substrate advance calibration values
If all the values are zero, substrate-advance calibration has not been done.
1.18 Analog encoder calibration, 1.19 Motor type configuration, and 1.20 Printhead cleaner roll
This information is shown if escalation is needed.
2 Printer usage information

These sections contain information about usage of printer supplies and substrate.
● Total printed substrate reports the printed substrate surface as well as the subtotal for each
configuration: dual-roll, roll-to-free-fall, and take-up reel.
● Total Ink used is the total volume of ink used for each color, in liters.
2.2 Usage per printhead slot and 2.3 Usage per cartridge slot
● Printheads Used is the number of different printheads (with different serial numbers) used by the
printer.
● Total Insertions is the number of times the current printhead has been inserted.
2.4 Substrate per substrate type

This section reports the usage of each substrate type.

2.5 Component usage
This section gives a list of various hardware counters.
2.6 Job accounting

This section shows the print mode selectors used for the print jobs (number of passes, number of colors, ink
density).
3 Event logs
3.1 System errors and 3.2 System warnings

System errors are classified depending on the severity:
● Severe: Process stopper, requiring a restart of the printer
● System Warning/silent: Informative
The error codes are documented in Troubleshooting system error codes on page 87. Every event specifies the
system error, the substrate usage at the time the system error appeared (total quantity of substrate at the
moment of the error), and the date when it happened. These elements let us know the frequency with which
the customer is experiencing problems.

3.3 Printhead error log
The Error Code is a decimal number that must be converted into binary code in order to use the attached
error table conversion (see below). You can use the Windows calculator to convert the number from decimal
into binary.
The following table explains the meaning of the different bits (0 or 1). When the value of the error code is
reported as 0, it means that the printhead is working correctly:

● Example 1: Error code 4099 (decimal) is 1000000000011 (binary). Using the table above, the error code
means “FAILS_LOGICAL_V”, “FAILS_CONTINUITY” and “MISMATCH”.
● Example 2: Error code 532512 (decimal) is 10000010000000100000 (binary). Using the table above,
this errors tells us: TEMP_EXTREMELY_LOW, CSDATA_NOT_RESPONDING and EXPIRED (used expired
ink). The connection between the printer and the printhead does not seem to work.
Here you can see a more detailed table:
Diagnostic log
This section shows which tests or calibrations have been run. For each test, there are two entries: 1) starting
time and 2) brief result after ending the test/calibration (pass, fail or cancelled). In the event the printer is
stopped during the test, through emergency stop or energy cutoff, the result is not logged.
● Starting time
● A brief result after ending the test/calibration (pass, fail, or cancelled)

NOTE: If the printer is stopped during the test, by emergency stop or power cutoff, the result is not
logged.
4 Substrate settings and CLC
4.1 Loaded substrate

Lists the settings of the loaded substrate.
● Substrate input: may be ‘inwards’ or ‘outwards’
● Substrate output: may be ‘inwards’ or ‘outwards’, plus the settings established by the user for this
specific substrate
4.2 Substrate-specific calibrations
The Substrate Name with its corresponding Substrate ID (which appears in the XML of the job sent from the
RIP to the IPS) and the color calibration information (Color Status: done, default) and the date of the last
color calibration done. If the date is set to 1970, no color calibration has been done for this substrate.
Looking at this list, you can identify the parent of a custom-made substrate. A custom substrate has its
parent indicated afterwards between parentheses.

Troubleshoot non-HP ink usage
Warranty statement
Printer
This is an extract of the printer warranty statement related to the use of non-HP inks:
“For HP printer products, the use of a refilled or non-original HP consumable product (ink, printhead, ink
cartridge, or maintenance kit) does not affect either HP’s Limited Warranty or any HP support contract.
However, if printer failure or damage is attributable to the use of a non-HP or refilled ink cartridge or an
expired ink cartridge, HP's authorized representative will charge its standard time and materials charges to
service the printer for the particular failure or damage.”
See the Hewlett-Packard Limited Warranty Statement document for more information.
Ink cartridges and printheads

This is an extract of the warranty statement for HP ink cartridges and customer-replaceable printheads:
“This warranty does not cover HP ink cartridges or customer-replaceable printheads that have been refilled,
remanufactured, refurbished, misused, or tampered with. If failure or damage to ink cartridges or customer-
replaceable printheads is attributable to the use of a non-HP, expired, or refilled ink cartridge, or to their use
with a non-designated HP or unauthorized OEM printing device, HP is not responsible for the cost of
replacement or refund of the purchase price.”
You can find more information about how the use of non-HP inks affects the warranties of ink cartridges and
printheads at http://www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies.
Ink cartridges
Ink cartridge non-HP ink alerts
When non-HP ink usage is detected while replacing an ink cartridge, the customer is alerted about the
implications in performance and warranty. These alerts must be acknowledged twice for the printer to
continue working.

Troubleshooting usage of non-HP ink cartridges
Internal Print Server

The Internal Print Server shows clearly in the supplies information when non-HP ink usage is detected.
Service plot
Similar information can be found in the service plot.
Printheads
Printhead non-HP ink alerts
When non-HP ink usage is detected and the customer acknowledges the warnings, the installed printheads in
question are automatically marked as used with non-HP ink.
When a new printhead is installed, the customer is once again alerted about the performance and warranty
implications, and the customer must acknowledge such alerts.
ENWW Troubleshoot non-HP ink usage 337

Troubleshooting usage of non-HP inks in printheads
Internal Print Server

The Internal Print Server shows clearly in the supplies information when non-HP ink usage is detected.
Service plot
Similar information can be found in the service plot.
Safe mode
When using non-HP inks, the printer operates in safe mode to protect itself and its printheads from failures.
In safe mode:
● Drying lamps are turned off.
● A warning icon is displayed by the Internal Print Server.

Returning to HP inks
There are two ways to resume using non-HP inks:
● Install HP original cartridges and wait until 9 liters of HP ink have gone through the affected tubes of
the ink delivery system to the printheads.
● Flush the non-HP ink, reset the printer flags, and install HP original cartridges.
Install HP original cartridges and wait for 9 liters

During the time it takes to use these 9 liters, the warranty is not recovered.
● Any new printhead installed will automatically lose its warranty.
● The lost-warranty terms still apply.
When the 9 liters have gone through the affected tubes of the ink delivery system:
● Any printheads that have been used with non-HP ink do not recover their warranties.
● Any new printhead installed after this point maintains its warranty.
● All other warranties are recovered.
Flush the non-HP ink

This procedure must be performed by a service engineer. HP engineers or authorized support partners will
make their standard travel and labor charges for this procedure.
1. Flush the non-HP ink; see 3. ISM flush and clean a single ink system line on page 915.
2. Reset the printer flags. Contact the LFP Customer Assurance team for instructions.
3. Install HP original cartridges.
When this process has been completed:
● Any printheads that have been used with non-HP ink do not recover their warranties.
● Any new printhead installed after this point maintains its warranty.
● All other warranties are recovered.
ENWW Troubleshoot non-HP ink usage 339

5 Diagnostics
General diagnostics
NOTE: Some diagnostic tests or calibrations must be performed after removing a component. Read
carefully the instructions given by Print Care.
NOTE: To return the carriage to the capping position after work in diagnostic mode, restart the printer in
normal mode.
340 Chapter 5 Diagnostics ENWW

How to run a diagnostic test
Diagnostic tests are accessible through the Diagnostics tab in Print Care and organized by subsystems.
Diagnostic availability can change depending on the role logged in Print Care and printer boot mode. For
example, logged in as Operator, the user has access to tests that can be useful not only for self-diagnosis,
but also to guide the operator when receiving remote support.
NOTE: The Operator account cannot select individual tests and subsystem tests are executed sequentially.
If the user account is changed to Service, the full set of tests is available for the current boot mode and
individual tests can be selected. To change the user account, go to File > Switch User.
ENWW How to run a diagnostic test 341

Accessing diagnostic test menus
1. Log in
● The user account is ‘ServiceEngineer’.
● The password is generated by the Print Care Password Manager.

2. If the printer can boot in normal mode and if the diagnostic test allows it, the test can be executed
without booting up in diagnostic mode. However, for certain tests, or in the event the printer is not able
to boot up in normal mode, it is necessary to boot the printer in diagnostic mode.
To boot the printer in diagnostic mode, go to Printer tools > Power options > Reboot in diagnostic
mode.
NOTE: There is no password to boot in diagnostic mode, as the operator is allowed to do it.
Boot mode permissions

Table 5-1 Boot mode availability by user type
Boot modes
Normal Diagnostic
When the printer is able to boot When the printer is unable to boot
normally normally, or for specific cases in
which the diagnostic works better if
the printer is not fully booted
User accounts << None >> (i.e. Operator) Partial list of diagnostics for each Partial list of diagnostics for each
subsystem subsystem
- Not selectable: the whole list is
executed for each subsystem.
- Only diagnostics that do not

require engineer intervention (such
as opening the e-cabinet, and so
on).
Engineer Full list of diagnostics, if feasible Full list of diagnostics, if feasible

(for some diagnostics it may not be (for some diagnostics it may not be
Selectable feasible) feasible).
ENWW Boot mode permissions 343

Phone support
The customer can be guided to perform nearly all diagnostic tests, utilities, and calibrations.
However, there are some procedures that the customer should not perform:
● Save Factory Defaults
● Restore Factory Defaults
● Reset Maintenance Kit Usage
● Reset Life Counters
Diagnostic availability can change depending on Print Care login and boot mode.
The following table lists the diagnostics and their availability.
Subsystem Test name Available to users Available in boot

modes
Safety interlocks
Safety interlocks Operator or engineer Normal
Safety circuit Operator or engineer Diagnostic
Print quality
Service alignment check plot Engineer Normal
Front printhead to rear printhead alignment check Engineer Normal

plot
Scan-axis encoder-strip check plot Engineer Normal
Printhead control link
E-box fiber-optics PCA Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Optical link Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Carriage fiber-optics PCA Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Printhead insertion Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Printhead interconnect connectivity Operator or engineer Normal
Printhead electrical status Operator or engineer Normal
FO PCAs version check Engineer Diagnostic
Substrate path mechanics
Substrate path sensors Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Motors check Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Main roller motor test Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Motor calibration Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Encoder calibration Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Drive roller calibration Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Drive roller check Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Substrate-advance sensor
Show sensor status Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic

modes
Cleanliness check Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Disable substrate-advance sensor Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Enable substrate-advance sensor Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Substrate-advance sensor calibration Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Substrate-advance encoder check Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Substrate path vacuum system
Vacuum system diagnostic Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Vacuum sensor defaults Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Reset vacuum pump usage Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Scan axis
Motor direction test Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Move carriage to repair position Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Scan-axis analysis Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Scan beam
Scan beam switch status Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Scan beam movement Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Scan beam motor check Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Ink Delivery System
Check actuator presence Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Inter-valves Engineer Diagnostic
Actual ink pressure Engineer Diagnostic
Set internal tank as empty Engineer Diagnostic
Automatic electrovalves and ink pressure sensor Engineer Diagnostic

check
ISS electronics Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Air pressure system Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Ink supply connector Engineer Normal or diagnostic
IT broken bag recovery Engineer Diagnostic
Ink system leakage Engineer Diagnostic
Electrovalves Engineer Diagnostic
Intermediate tank change Engineer Diagnostic
Ink cartridge LEDs Operator or engineer Diagnostic
Calibrate pressure sensor Engineer Diagnostic
Ink pressure at printhead Engineer Diagnostic
No flow error recovery Engineer Diagnostic
Entry valves Engineer Diagnostic
Air pumps Engineer Diagnostic
ENWW Phone support 345

modes
Relief valves Engineer Diagnostic
Air pressure sensor Engineer Diagnostic
Intermediate tanks refill Engineer Diagnostic
Intermediate tanks refill (by time) Engineer Diagnostic
Int tanks life cycles Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Int tanks ink amount Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Ink supplies check Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Carriage aerosol
Aerosol fan calibration Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
EE check Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Pressure check Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Show calibration values Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Carriage sensors
Color sensor check Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Line sensor check Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Line sensor reset counters Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Line sensor calibration Engineer Normal
Lstok calibration Engineer Normal
Printhead primers
Primer pumps calibration Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Capping/drop detection
Capping/drop-detector calibration Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Reset capping/drop-detector calibration Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Capping/drop-detector XY calibration Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Drop-detector calibration Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Check drop-detector electronics Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Force drop detection Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Check capping/drop-detector mechanics Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Display capping/drop-detection calibration values Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Display printing nozzle health database content Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Reset printing nozzle health database content Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Printhead cleaning roll
Motor direction tests Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Visual motor movement check Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Manual motor movement check Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Printhead cleaning Z calibration check Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic

modes
Set wiper Z calibration Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Drying
Subsystem functional check in module 1 (left) Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Subsystem functional check in module 2 (right) Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Relays check in drying PCA 1 (up) Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Relays check in drying PCA 2 (down) Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Null current check in AC/AC converter 1 (up) Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Null current check in AC/AC converter 2 (down) Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Scan-axis no-movement timeout in drying PCA 1 Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic

(up)
Scan-axis no-movement timeout in drying PCA 2 Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic

(down)
Drying PCA functional check #1 (up) Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Drying PCA functional check #2 (down) Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Monitor curing temperatures
Monitor curing temperatures Operator or engineer Normal
Curing
Status of the curing modules Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Monitor one curing module Engineer Normal or diagnostic
E-cabinet
Fan Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Temperature Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Safety interlocks Operator or engineer Normal
Safety circuit Operator or engineer Diagnostic
Watchdog Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Power supplies Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Activate/deactivate outputs Engineer Normal or diagnostic
All outputs state change Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
E-cabinet state Engineer Normal or diagnostic
E-box
Engine PCAs Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Engine adaptor communication Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Engine adaptor slot Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Printer installation and purge
Purge supply OP Engineer Diagnostic
Purge supply K Engineer Diagnostic
Purge supply Y Engineer Diagnostic
ENWW Phone support 347

modes
Purge supply M Engineer Diagnostic
Purge supply C Engineer Diagnostic
Purge supply LM Engineer Diagnostic
Purge supply LC Engineer Diagnostic
Filling intermediate tanks Engineer Diagnostic
Ink filling tubes Engineer Diagnostic
Set supply consumed ink Engineer Diagnostic
Force normal boot Engineer Diagnostic
Set ISM as purged Engineer Diagnostic
Set TRS as purged Engineer Diagnostic
Set input voltage Engineer Diagnostic
Utilities
Set date and time Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Report version Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Save NVM Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Restore NVM Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Enable advanced logging Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Force boot mode Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Get printer logs Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Set IP address Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Set curing bottom plate Engineer Normal or diagnostic
Reshipment
Manage auxiliary air pump Engineer Diagnostic
Entry valves Engineer Diagnostic
Set all int. tanks as new Engineer Diagnostic
Set ISM as not purged Engineer Diagnostic
Set TRS as not purged Engineer Diagnostic
Move carriage Engineer Diagnostic
Carriage rails cleanliness
Friction analysis Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
Cleaning Operator or engineer Normal or diagnostic
NOTE: If you get a severe error when restarting the printer, the diagnostics in normal mode may not work.
In this case, you are recommended to start the printer in diagnostics mode to fix the problem.
NOTE: While printing, only diagnostics for monitoring curing temperature can be executed; and you are
recommended to start the diagnostic before sending the job.

Service tests, diagnostics, and calibrations
Table 5-2 Safety interlocks
Test Safety interlocks (51001)
Description This test activates the safety circuit and checks that the safety relay and interlocks work properly
Pass criteria See that state change if you open/close the safety interlocks
Fail criteria If you can’t see changes in status after open close front door and loading table.
Test Safety interlocks (51002)
Description This test activates the safety circuit and checks that the safety relay, contactors, e-stops and interlocks work
properly.
Pass criteria See that the state change if you open/close the safety interlocksand check or if the safety relay or etops are
activated.
Fail criteria
Doing this procedure you can determine if the safety locks, safety relay and estops are working properly prior their
replacement.
Table 5-3 Print quality

see Print-quality troubleshooting on page 311.
Table 5-4 Printhead control link

Test E-box fiber-optics PCA (11001)
Description This diagnostic check the E-Box electronics needed for the processing of printing data and the transfer of this data
to the printheads via the fiber-optics cable.
Test steps:
● Formatter test
● Engine board test
● E-box fiber-optics PCA connectivity test
◦ It accesses the e-box fiber-optics PCA internal registers
● Engine board to fiber-optics PCA connectivity test
◦ It checks if all the cables going from the engine board to the fiber-optics PCA not only are connected but
they are also plugged in the correct connector.
● FO module in the e-box side
◦ It checks the fiber-optic connector is plugged, it reads the internal registers in the fiber-optics module
and verifies the data is reaching the fiber-optics module.
In summary, this test checks the formatter, the engine boards, the cables between the engine boards and the e-box
fiber-optics PCA, the e-box fiber-optics PCA and the e-box fiber-optics transceiver. Regarding the e-box fiber-optics
PCA, it checks everything except the high speed lane coming from the carriage side.
Pass criteria All EE before fiber-optic connection works fine
Fail criteria This diagnostic points to the failure connection except for the power.
ENWW Service tests, diagnostics, and calibrations 349

Table 5-4 Printhead control link (continued)
Test Optical link (11002)
Description This diagnostic checks the optical fiber cable connection to the fiber-optics PCA. It will verify that the cable is
properly plugged and functioning correctly.
Test steps:
● Carriage fiber-optics PCA connectivity Test
◦ It accesses to the Carriage fiber-optics PCA internal registers
● If the above check fails, then the diagnostic test requires user interventation in order to check the status of
some LEDs in the e-box side and in the carriage side.
◦ E-box side:
● If LED0 is OFF → Plug the fiber-optics module in the e-box Side
● If LED2 is OFF → Change e-box fiber-optics PCA
● If LED7 is OFF → Plug or change the ID cable
● If LED10 is OFF → This LED is ON when the link is up
◦ Carriage side:
● If LED0 is OFF → Plug the fiber-optics module in the e-box Side
● If LED1 is OFF → Change Carriage fiber-optics PCA
● If LED2 is OFF → Change fiber-optics
● If LED6 is OFF → Plug or change the ID cable
● If LED10 is OFF → This LED is ON when the link is up
● If LED1 in the Carriage is ON and LED1 in the e-box is OFF, then the fiber-optics needs to be
changed.
● Fiber-optics PCA link layer errors

◦ It checks that the fiber-optic connection has no breaks and works perfectly
A sketch of the LED distribution is shown below:
Pass criteria FO OK
Fail criteria FO damage, broken or not connected
1. Check fiber-optics LEDs in fiber-optics PCA (e-box or carriage)
2. Replaced part broken or malfunctional
Test Carriage fiber-optics PCA (11003)
Description This diagnostic test checks the link to the Fiber-optics PCA in the carriage and its connections to the Printhead
Interconnect boards. Success means that the optical fiber link is up and running and each connector in the fiber-
optics PCA has a properly inserted cable connector.
Test steps:
● Carriage fiber-optics PCA to printhead board connectivity test
◦ It checks if all the cables going from the Carriage fiber-optics PCA to the printhead board are plugged.
● Initialize the Horus interface
◦ If it fails, then the user needs to run a diagnostic test and the user needs to check the status of one LED.
● Printhead connectivity test
◦ It checks if the printhead is well connected in the printhead pocket.
In case the printhead boards are not connected in the right Carriage fiber-optics PCA interface, the user will notice
printing errors. In that case, the user needs to check that all the cables going from the Carriage fiber-optics PCA to
the printhead board are plugged in the correct interface.
Pass criteria Successful connection to the printhead
Fail criteria See description
Test Printhead insertion (11007)
Description This diagnostic test checks the printhead insertion mechanism. You should use it only if insertion problems have
repeatedly been observed in a particular printhead slot. The test will move the carriage to the access position. There
you can select any specific slot to check, remove, or insert any printhead, and check that it is properly detected.
Test steps:
● Slinky board to printhead board connectivity test

◦ It checks if all the cables going from the Slinky board to the printhead board are plugged.
● Initialize the Horus interface
◦ If it fails, then the user needs to run the Trailing Cable Connectivity test and the user needs to check the
status of LED DS15.
● printhead connectivity test
◦ It checks if the printhead is well connected in the printhead pocket. If it fails, then the user needs to run a
diagnostic test and the user needs to check the status of LED DS7.
In case the printhead boards are not connected in the right Slinky interface, the user will notice printing errors. In
that case, the user needs to check that all the cables going from the Slinky board to the printhead board are plugged
in the correct interface.
Pass/fail See description

criteria
Test Fiber-optics PCA version check (11005)
Description This diagnostic test checks the versions of the fiber-optic PCAs in case you have a hardware/firmware mismatch.
Pass/fail This test is purely informative and has no pass or fail criteria.
criteria
Test Printhead interconnect connectivity (11004)
Description This diagnostic test checks the data lines from the optical fiber PCA to the printhead interconnect boards. If these
data lines are OK, the two green LEDs on each printhead interconnect board are turned on.
Pass/fail This test lights up the DS1 and DS15 LEDs of each printhead interconnect PCA. If one of them is not lit, replace the
criteria printhead interconnect PCA and/or the cable to the fiber-optics PCA.
Test Printheads electrical status (11006)
Description This test displays the electrical state of the printheads. It should be executed when the printer is idle.
Pass criteria If the test returns #OK, there is no problem.

Fail criteria ● #Not inserted: The printhead is not inserted.
● #Fails continuity: Electrical continuity failure. Communication between printhead and interconnect board is
not working properly. Clean the printhead and the board electrical pads and re-insert the printhead. If the
problem persists, swap the printhead with one of the same color in the adjacent slot. If the error moves with
the printhead, replace the printhead. If the error persists in the same slot, there may be a physical problem in
the interconnection. Make sure that the black metal back support of the printhead interconnect board is
correctly mounted and screws are tight, and call your support representative if the problem persists in the
same slot.
● #Voltage failure: This error may have been caused by a short circuit in the printhead electrical pad or the
printhead board. Remove the printhead and inspect the electrical pads, making sure they are clean and
nothing is creating a short circuit. Also, inspect the printhead board electrical contacts and make sure they are
not bent or damaged. You can swap the printhead with another one of the same color. If the problem persists
in the same slot, please call your support representative, as the printhead board may have to be replaced. If
the error follows the printhead, replace the printhead.
● #CSDATA not responding: The printhead is not responding to communication attempts from the printhead
interconnect board. The printhead may not be correctly inserted, or the electrical pads may be dirty or
damaged. Clean the printhead electrical pads and the printhead board contacts and re-insert the printhead.
Make sure it is correctly inserted. If the problem persists, swap the printhead with one of the same color in the
adjacent slot. If the error moves with the printhead, replace the printhead. If the error persists in the same
slot, there may be an electrical problem. To discard a transient electrical perturbation, shut down the printer,
restart it a minute later, and do a printhead replacement again. If the same problem occurs, the printhead
interconnect board may be faulty. Contact your support representative.
● #Temperature extremely high: The printhead temperature is extremely high. Make sure the printing
operating conditions are OK, and reseat the printhead. A likely cause of this error is that printhead nozzles are
blocked and ink cannot be fired. Try recovering the printheads by manual cleaning or by hard cleaning through
the Internal Print Server. If the error does not disappear, replace the printhead.
● #Temperature too high: The printhead temperature is too high. Make sure the printing operating conditions
are OK, and reseat the printhead. A likely cause of this error is that printhead nozzles are blocked and ink
cannot be fired. Try recovering the printheads by hard cleaning through the Internal Print Server. If the error
does not disappear, replace the printhead.
● #Temperature extremely low: The printhead temperature is extremely low. The operating temperature could
not be reached. The most likely cause is printhead damage in its resistors due to a substrate crash. Replace the
printhead.
● #Temperature too low: The printhead temperature is too low. The operating temperature could not be
reached. The most likely cause is printhead damage in its resistors due to a substrate crash or smear. Replace
the printhead.
● #Bad acumen information: The information encoded in the printhead is incorrect. If it is a genuine HP
printhead, return it to HP.
● #Bad acumen access: The printhead’s internal data cannot be accessed. The printhead may not be correctly
inserted, or the electrical pads may be dirty or damaged. Clean the printhead electrical pads and the printhead
board contacts, and retry the printhead replacement process. If the problem persists, try another printhead of
the same color. If the problem still persists in the same slot, there may be an interconnection problem. Make
sure that the black metal back support of the printhead interconnect board is correctly mounted and screws
are tight.
● #Wrong model: The printhead is not the correct model to be used in this printer.
● #Mismatch: Wrong printhead internal data. The printhead is not the correct model to be used in this printer.
● #Energy calibration failure: This can either be a printhead problem or a printhead interconnect PCA problem.
Remove the printhead and retry the printhead insertion process. If the problem persists, replace the printhead.
If the problem still persists, the printhead interconnect board may need to be replaced. Contact your support
representative.
Table 5-5 Substrate path mechanics

Test Substrate path sensors (41001)

Table 5-5 Substrate path mechanics (continued)
Description This test allows you to check that the following sensors are working properly: Spindles latches, substrate to floor
pinch wheels system, TUR sensor.
Pass criteria If all of them works properly by checking that open/close them you are able to see changes in screen status
Fail criteria
Check the connections and replace those don’t work
Test Motors test (41002)
Description Check motor movement through PWM and reading encoders.
Pass criteria If diagnostic is able to read movement
Fail criteria If movement is not detected
▲ In case of failure, run e-box and e-cabinet diagnostics before replacing parts.
Test Main roller motor test (41003)
Description Check how roller moves and its friction
Pass criteria Automatically provided.
Test Motors calibration (41004)
Description It does a series of movements to ensure that substrate movement accuracy is OK, this test perform a statistical
analysis so it takes some time to be completed
Pass criteria Automatically provided.
Fail criteria
The test takes 8 minutes per motor. You can select MI, MO, and MF in order to calibrate servos and diagnose motors;
in addition, you can boot the printer in diagnostic mode and run this test with the motor detached, in case you are
not sure whether the problem comes from motor or gearbox.
Test Encoder calibration (41005)
Description Calibrate the analog encoder, which calibrates all gain chain in the EE.
Pass criteria The diagnostic itself provides feedback about whether calibration was successful or not.
Test Drive roller calibration (41006)
Description Calibrate substrate advance, slope, and roller eccentricity.
Pass criteria When the calibration is successful, feedback is provided by the diagnostic.
Note: Beware that not all substrate types are suitable for this calibration. Use preferably self-adhesive vinyls of around 78
in width, such as Avery MPI3000 and HP Permanent Gloss Self Adhesive, or papers such as HP Photorealistic. Do not
use any backlit, PP, PE/PET, or PVC substrates. Before proceeding, make sure that the substrate is correctly loaded
and aligned. The calibration takes about 25 minutes and the substrate will be advanced about 8 meters. Check that
there is enough substrate on the input roll before proceeding. Press Continue to proceed or Cancel to exit.
Test Drive roller check (41007)
Description Check that calibration is OK.
Pass criteria Automatically provided

Table 5-5 Substrate path mechanics (continued)
Fail criteria Automatically provided
The substrate path troubleshooting workflows integrated with the diagnostics are shown in the following
flowcharts.

MIMOMF Motors Calibration/Check Flowchart
º A
Start MIMOMF calibration/check process
Test can be executed from Diagnostics tool web service SERIAL NUMBER
(localhost:8080/hp/), via tckl procedure, from CSM or from
printer’s Print Care interface
SERVICE
MANUFACTURING
PART LEVEL KT & DEADZONE TEST

SERVICING MENU Connect motor to cables if done on a test bench,
- Media Path Mechanics or disengage motor from transmission if done at
- Motor Calibration printer
A
Set parameters:
Select the motor axis (MI/MO/MF) if it is a service
Select that it is a PART_TEST
Select the correct motor (MO/MI/MF)
test and do the part test at the test bench if it is
done in Manufacturing
B
Introduce the 10 digits motor's serial
number (ie 500419870)
DUNKER PROVIDED
Raw data and results files (*) COGGING TORQUE
/tmp/"motor"-SN-"serial"-Date-"date".tar.gz Run test/ Excel calculations

Example: MO-SN-5001995496-Date-
20121114_1302.tar.gz
Check values and pass/fail messages

/tmp/"motor"-"serial".txt
showed
Write values on the motor using a sticker
Brushless motor check

test passes?
Error 3 1
PWM levels - missing PWM

levels >
[PWM_levels_missing] = 3
Error 4 2
1 Retry 1: Check encoder signal is being read by electronics
- Check the motor is not braked and the cables are properly connected
- Check ELA is receiving encoder feedback and that encoder is receiving voltage
- Enable ELA to receibe encoder signal and repeat test
PWM levels >
[min_PWM_levels] = 2
Error 5
Retry 2: Motor windings, motor electronics, or motor EE may be damaged
- Run a part test with another motor to check that the problem is a faulty motor
Retry 3: Possible encoder cable or encoder cable connector failure
0,50= [min_KT] - Replace encoder cable and/or check both motor and board connectors are not damaged
< KT <
[max_KT] = 0,83
Error 1 3
Retry 4: ELA board might be failing
- Replace ELA and check that now all works by repeating the test
2440= [abs_min_deadZone] 2 Retry 1: Test conditions may have been introduced incorrectly
< abs (Dead Zone)< Error 2
[abs_max_deadZone] = 4540
- Check if the test has been executed with less than 2 PWM levels (ERROR 5)
- Repeat test ensuring the parameters and the axis selected are correct
- Spindle may be engaged to transmission
SERVICE ONLY
Retry 2: Motor windings, motor electronics, or motor EE may be damaged
PART LEVEL COGGING TORQUE TEST - Run a part test with another motor to check that the problem is a faulty motor
SERVICING MENU Connect motor to cables if done on a test bench, Retry 3: Possible encoder cable or encoder cable connector failure
- Media Path Mechanics or disengage motor from transmission if done at
- Motor Cogging Torque Test printer if it has not been done previously B - Replace encoder cable and/or check both motor and board connectors are not damaged
Set parameters: Retry 4: ELA board migt be failing

Select the motor axis (MI/MO/MF) if it is a service
Select the correct motor (MO/MI/MF) - Replace ELA and check that now all works by repeating the test
test and do the part test at the test bench if it is
Introduce the 10-digit motor serial
done in Manufacturing
number (e.g. 500419870)
Introduce de-cogging torque value provided by
retry 1 only
3 Retry 1: Test Conditions may have been introduced incorrectly
Raw data and results files (*)
- Check if the motor is properly connected
/tmp/Cogging-SN-"serial"-Date-"date".tar.gz Run test/ Excel calculations - Repeat test ensuring the parameters and the axis selected are correct
Example: Cogging-SN-5001995496-Date- - Spindle may be engaged to transmission
20121114_1302.tar.gz
Retry 2 (SUBSYSTEM): ELA board may not be working properly
Check values and pass/fail messages - Connect the motor to another ELA and repeat the test
/tmp/Cogging-"serial".txt - Replace ELA if faulty
showed
Retry 3 (SUBSYSTEM): Possible transmission failure or wrong transmission usage
- Run part test of the concerned motor with its ELA

- Replace transmission if faulty
Retry 2 (PART) / Retry 4 (SUBSYSTEM): Motor or motor’s EE may be damaged
- Replace motor or do not use the motor on a printer

test passes?
Error 1 1
4 Retry 1: Test conditions may have been introduced incorrectly
- Check if the motor is properly connected

- Check that no pinion is attached to the motor (see figures above)
Cogging torque <
Retry 2: Motor or electronics may be damaged
[Max_Cogging] = sticker
cogging + 1,5
Error 4 4
- Run motor calibration part test
Retry 3 : Possible failure of the motor magnets
- Do not use the motor in a printer

- Replace motor
SUBSYSTEM LEVEL KT & DEADZONE CALIBRATION TEST (*****)
SERVICING MENU Make sure the motor to be tested is engaged to
- Media Path Mechanics transmission and without the spindle as a load
- Motor Calibration and that it is connected
C
Set parameters:
Select that the test to be executed is the
Select the correct motor (MO/MI/MF) SUBSYSTEM TEST and introduce and/or select
the other parameters required
Introduce the printer’s serial number
retries 1 & 2 only

Raw data and results files (*)
/tmp/"motor"-SN-"serial"-Date-"date".tar.gz Run test/ Excel calculations

Example: MO-SN-SG2AD1F001-Date-
20121114_1302.tar.gz
Check values and pass/fail messages

/tmp/"motor"-"serial".txt
showed
If all conditions are passed values

stored in printer’s NVM

test passes?
Error 3 1
PWM levels - missing PWM

levels >
[PWM_levels_missing] = 2
Error 4 2
PWM levels >

[min_PWM_levels] = 2 Error 5
0,50= [min_KT]
< KT <
[max_KT] = 0,83
Error 1 3
2440= [abs_min_deadZone]
< abs (Dead Zone)< Error 2
[abs_max_deadZone] = 4540
MOTOR’S KT AND DEADZONE STORED IN PRINTER’S NVM AND MIMO’S SERVOS

AUTOMATICALLY RECALCULATED
Motor check and calibration

finished.

Substrate Advance Calibration Flowchart
Start substrate advance calibration

Recommended substrate: Avery MPI-3000 78 in
Input roll > 140 mm
Output roll > core (about 10 spindle turns)
OMAS to be cleaned
4. Service Calibrations Menu 1 Retry 1: OMAS may be dirty, substrate not navigable by OMAS or loaded
4.3. Substrate Path Menu Reset compensation parameteres with skew or wrinkles (visual inspection)
4.3.4. Roller Calibration (amplitude = 0)
- Use only recommended navigable substrates
- Unload substrate
- Clean OMAS window
Set OMAS in measure mode - Reload substrate
Rewind substrate
Vacuum calibration
Rewind substrate Retry 2: Friction balance may be wrong for the substrate
- Check that the substrate loaded is correct at IPS

Set Logging:
/tmp/rollerCalibOmasData.dat
Retry 3: OMAS or Media Output may be damaged
Find encoder Zero - Run OMAS service test (3.3.3)

Move to Zero and replace OMAS if faulty
- Run motor calibration test at MI and MO. Repair them if faulty.
- Check vacuum sensor tubes are properly connected
Raw data file
1024 × 11734 eu (29-pass print mode)
/tmp/rollerCalibOmasData_Calib.dat Retry 4: Analog encoder disk may be dirty
- Clean encoder disk

Results file
Run fitting / Excel macro
/tmp/rollerCalibOmasStatistics_Calib.dat
Store compensation values

2 Retry 1: Encoder disk may be damaged or wrongly assembled
- Unload substrate, replace encoder disk, and

run analog encoder calibration
- Reload substrate
Lost navigations <
[percent_discard] = 10% 1
Retry 2: Drive roller may be damaged or out of specification
- Possible drive roller damage
Roller Amplitude <

[roller_amp_max_wcase] = 157
eu
2
3 Retry 1: Unbalanced traction in the substrate, check the following items
- Use only recommended substrates

- Check pinchwheels are down
- Vacuum sensor tubes are properly connected
-0.0100 = [slope_min_wcase] - Run motor calibration test at MI and MO. Repair them if faulty.
< Slope <
[slope_max_wcase] = 0.0077
3

4. Service Calibrations Menu
4.3. Susbtrate Path Menu
4.3.5. Check Roller Calibration Set OMAS in measure mode
Rewind substrate
Vacuum calibration
Rewind substrate
4 Retry 1: Check failed: roller zero flag is not working or vacuum level not
correctly applied.
Set Logging:
/tmp/rollerCheckOmasData.dat - Check that substrate is correct at IPS
- Unload substrate and run Zero Flag Test
- Replace analog encoder PCA if faulty
- Vacuum sensor tubes are properly connected
Move encoder to Zero - Reload substrate and repeat roller calibration
Retry 2: Encoder disk may be damaged or wrongly assembled
Raw data file - Unload substrate, replace encoder disk and

128 × 51204 eu (~6-pass print mode)
/tmp/rollerCalibOmasData_Check.dat run analog encoder calibration
- Reload substrate and repeat roller calibration

Results file
Run fitting / Excel macro
/tmp/rollerCalibOmasStatistics_Check.dat
5 Retry 1: Substrate loaded with skew, OMAS dirty, or analog encoder PCA
damaged
- Unload substrate, run zero flag test,

Lost navigations < and replace analog encoder PCA if faulty
[percent_discard] =10% 1 - Clean OMAS
Retry 2: Unbalanced traction in the substrate, or substrate drive failure.

Check the following items:
- Check pinchwheels are down

Roller Amp < [R Amp Max Res] = 47 eu - Vacuum sensor tubes are properly connected
or - Run substrate drive PWM test and repair it if faulty
4 -0.0070 = [slope_min_wcase]
< Slope <
- Run motor calibration test at MI and MO. Repair them if faulty.
Sigma <
5 [sigma_max_iq] = 90 m
Roller calibration finished
As a summary, the table below shows which calibrations are required after a component replacement:

Calibration name What it does When to run calibration
Analog encoder Calibrates electronic analog offset and gain of the Encoder disc and PCA replacement
calibration encoder PCA
MI-MO-MF calibration Calibrates the main characteristics of the motors ● MI-MO-MF replacement
● Substrate-advance problems
OMAS calibration Corrects OMAS pixel-to-microns size and nominal OMAS replacement
fiducials distance
Drive roller calibration Corrects drive roller eccentricity ● Drive roller replacement
● Encoder disc and PCA replacement, after

analog encoder calibration
Drive roller calibration Checks OMAS readings against encoder readings, ● MA motor replacement
check applying current calibration values to verify that drive
roller eccentricity is corrected, and fine-tuning the ● After OMAS calibration
(available to roller’s slope factor.
customers) ● After drive roller calibration
If the substrate-advance sensor (OMAS) is replaced, the calibration order is:
1. OMAS calibration
2. Drive roller calibration
Table 5-6 Substrate-advance sensor (OMAS)

Test Show sensor status (50005)
Description This test shows the substrate-advance sensor (OMAS) status: enabled or disabled. If enabled, it is being used to
monitor the substrate advance.
Pass criteria None.
Test Cleanliness check (50003)
Description This test checks whether the substrate-advance sensor optics are clean or not. If not, clean the sensor window.
Pass criteria The sensor window is clean.
Test Disable advance sensor (50002)
Description This test disables the substrate-advance sensor for diagnostic purposes. The purpose of this utility is to enable or
disable the substrate-advance sensor, to be able to measure and troubleshoot the influence of the sensor on print-
quality problems. Sometimes, disabling the sensor is recommended for best print quality.
Pass criteria None, it just tells you whether the action was done or not.
Test Enable advance sensor (50001)
Description This test enables the substrate-advance sensor for diagnostic purposes. The purpose of this utility is to enable or
disable the substrate-advance sensor, to be able to measure and troubleshoot the influence of the sensor on print-
quality problems. Sometimes, disabling the sensor is recommended for best print quality.
Pass criteria None, it just tells you whether the action was done or not.

Table 5-6 Substrate-advance sensor (OMAS) (continued)
Test Encoder check (50006)
Description This test checks the substrate-advance encoder and provides feedback about how it is performing.
Pass criteria Provided by diagnostic.
Test Sensor calibration (50004)
Description This test enables the subtrate-advance sensor for diagnostic purposes. The calibration prints interference patterns
that should be visually inspected.
Instructions ● Run this calibration only after replacing the substrate-advance sensor.
● Before calibrating the sensor, use the cleanliness check and clean it if necessary.
● Printheads must be aligned for accurate calibration.
● If the printer has been printing, allow it to cool down for at least an hour before running this calibration.
● Not all substrate types are suitable for this calibration. Preferably use self-adhesive vinyls of around 78 in
width, such as Avery MPI3000 and HP Permanent Gloss Self-Adhesive, or papers like HP Photorealistic. Do not
use any backlit, PP, PE/PET, or PVC substrates. Ensure that the substrate is correctly loaded and aligned, and
that you have at least 5 meters of substrate available for the calibration.
Follow the instructions on the screen. The calibration takes about 30 minutes.
Pass/fail Provided in Print Care depending on test results.

criteria

Figure 5-1 Substrate-advance calibration workflow
Test Substrate-advance-encoder check (50006)
Description This test checks that the substrate-advance servo gets a correct feedback signal.
Table 5-7 4.2.6. Substrate path vacuum

Test Vacuum system diagnostic (43001)

Table 5-7 4.2.6. Substrate path vacuum (continued)
Description This diagnostic checks whether the platen vacuum system is working as expected. It checks pressure without
vacuum and with maximum vacuum is within expected range. Make sure there is no substrate loaded or covering
the platen during this test, otherwise its result will not be reliable.
Pass criteria Value within margins will return a passed test.
Fail criteria
1. If the test fails, check that the vacuum pump is powered and spinning.
2. Check that the vacuum sensor is properly connected and working.
3. Reset calibration.
Test Vacuum sensor defaults (43002)
Description This test restores a default factory calibration, in the event that caused by another failed calibration is not possible
or/and it is missing.
Pass criteria None.
Fail criteria None.
This test will set default factory calibration values.
Test Reset vacuum pump usage (43003)
Description This diagnostic simply resets the vacuum pump life counter. It should be used only when the vacuum pump is
replaced.
Pass criteria None
Fail criteria None
This test should be executed only when the vacuum pump is replaced.
Table 5-8 Scan axis

Test Move carriage to service position (86006)
Description This test uncaps the carriage and moves it to the repair position. After that printer will be shut down and you will be
asked to turn off the main switch to work within a safe mode.
This test will help you to move the carriage to the replace position and shut down the printer automatically,
remember that if this operation will take long time, it is recommended to remove the printhead and put them in the
orange caps.
Test Scan-axis analysis (86002)
Description This test performs a series of movements at different speeds and saves values in a log for escalations. It also
returns the measured scan-axis length. Use the data extraction procedure to save the data from the printer.
Test Carriage motor direction test (86006)
Description This test will cause a small movement to ensure that all electronics, motor driver, motor, and encoder loop function
properly.
Pass criteria Movement detected.
Fail criteria No movement detected.

Table 5-9 Scan beam
Test Scan beam switch status (48001)
Description This test allows you to check the status of the four PPS columns homing sensors (open or closed).
If you are in the printer position all of them should be closed, but in substrate loading position all of them should be
open.
Pass criteria None
1. If the status is not right, check the switch position and wiring.
2. If everything is OK, but status remains wrong, replace the wrong ones.
Test Scan beam movement (48002)
Description This diagnostic allows you to move the carriage beam to any defined position.
Pass criteria Final position achieved.
This diagnostic could be used to spread the grease after maintenance and also to check that movement is smooth.
Test Scan beam motor check (48003)
Description This test is defined to be performed with the motor detached from its housing in the column, so that you can find
out whether the problem is due to the mechanical gears/column or the motor/electrical/control part.
CAUTION: This test requires that the scan-beam motor is not mounted on the printer, otherwise the printer may
be damaged.
Pass criteria Movement is done well.
Table 5-10 Ink delivery system

Test ISS electronics (22001)
Description IDS Electronic Test Procedure. Start firmware components associated with electronic parts (GpioManagers,
AdcManagers, Dimmer, Nvm). Main PCAs revision number check. Nvm access test.
Pass criteria Feedback about the test result is provided in the Print Care window.
Test Air pressure system (22002)
Description Air pressure system test. Engage the Air Pressure Systems (APS0 and APS1) to get a pressure over 5600 mPsi.
NOTE: Before this test can be performed a complete intermediate tank refill is required in order to ensure exact air
volumes, therefore a minimum of 1.6 l of ink is required in the ink supplies.
Pass criteria Pressure for all systems reaches more than 5600 mPsi.
Fail criteria The test fails if some of the APS does not get this pressure.
Test Ink supply connector (22009)
Description Select a supply to check the connector. The test guides you to unplug the connector and test that it has been
disconnected. It then guides you to plug in the connector and test that it is connected. The test does not check the
acumen connection with the ink supplies.
Test IT broken bag recovery (22016)

Table 5-10 Ink delivery system (continued)
Description Recover from a broken bag in an intermediate tank. The test checks (by reading the sensor) whether there is really a
broken bag in the intermediate tanks. If not, it clears this error on NVM. Also mark as empty the IT installed in this
position. So, If there is a real broken bag, you have to clean the contacts and ink from the air tube, then install a
brand new and empty IT and later on run this diagnostic again.
Pass criteria Automatically provided
Test Ink system leakage (22017)
Description Recover from ink system leakage. The test checks (by reading the sensor) whether there is really a system ink
leakage. If not, it clears this error on NVM.
Pass criteria If you have an ink leakage, fix it and clean the sensor, then run this test until no leakage is detected. If a false
positive is given, replace the sensor.
Test Electrovalves (22010)
Description You can select which valve to test, and the amount of time before the test begins. When the test begins the selected
valve will be opened and closed several times. You have to listen to the valve on this action and tell the test when to
finish.
Pass criteria You can hear the valves operating.
Fail criteria You cannot hear the valves operating.
Test Intermediate tank change (22018)
Description Intermediate tank change. This test will guide you in replacing an intermediate tank by a new one. First the ink is
passed from intermediate old tanks group X1 to the intermediate old tanks group X2. The old group X1 is then
extracted and the new group X1 is inserted. The ink is transferred from X2 old to X1 new. Then the X2 old are retired
and the X2 inserted. Where X is the IT color and 1 or 2 are the color index.
Pass criteria Given by the test itself
Test Ink cartridge LEDs (22004)
Description Ink supply LEDs test. This test lets you select one supply LED, and that will start to blink. After executing it, tested
LED light will remain off until you reboot the printer.
Pass criteria LED for selected line turns on.
Fail criteria LED for selected line does not turn on.
Test Calibrate pressure sensor (22019)
Description This procedure displays and introduces calibration values for the three ink pressure sensors boards. The Ink
Pressure Sensor Calibration is used any time the Ink Pressure Sensors are replaced, in order to enter the proper
calibration values into the system. These calibration values are included with the service part (label).
Pass criteria The Print Care screen reports whether the change of values was successful.
Test Ink pressure at printhead (22020)
Description Ink pressure sensor at printhead. This test applies ink pressure and guides the user to insert a syringe on the
printhead position. The ink must refill the syringe to an estimated value according to the pressure applied.
Pass criteria If you get the expected ink volume in the syringe.
Test No flow error recovery (22021)

Description The procedure recovers the system condition of no start flow error, which is performed after a system error has
been displayed and solved. Select the color you want to perform the no flow error recovery, or all colors can be
recovered. This test also clears the NVM values of a previous flow start error.
Test Entry valves (22022)
Description Electro valves management. This procedure opens and closes the front entry electrovalves for any of the colors
(refill valves).
Test Inter-valves (22023)
Description Inter-valves management. With this test the user can change the status of the intermediate valves (valves that
connect among Intermediate tanks).
Test Air pumps (22011)
Description Air pumps management. This test switches on/off the air pump manually for troubleshooting purposes. After
executing this test, as the circuit could keep some pressure, we recommend to execute the relief valves test to
release any pressure.
Test Relief valves (22012)
Description Relief valves management. This procedure opens the relief valves releasing the pressure from the APS.
Test Air pressure sensor (22013)
Description Actual air pressure. This test shows the actual air pressure sensor value (APS1 and APS2) in mPsi units.
Test Actual ink pressure (22014)
Description Actual ink pressure. This test shows the actual ink pressure sensor value in mPsi for every color.
Test Intermediate tanks refill (22024)
Description This test allows a refill of the intermediate tanks with ink level monitoring. To perform this test it is required the
system operates appropriately and to have at least 1.6 liters of ink in all the supplies. The Intermediate tanks refill
diagnostic utility is to fill the intermediate ink tanks in case they must be transported. In this way, the risk of a
broken bag is reduced. Also this procedure has to be used to fill a brand new IT after a broken bag problem
Test Intermediate tanks refill by time (22025)
Description This procedure forces a refill of the intermediate tanks and sets them as full. The refill is time based. Use this
procedure in case the standard operation of refilling the intermediate tanks fails. The procedure can be used to fix
any other defect of the system where the intermediate tanks are emptied (electrical failures, leakages, etc). The
refill time is fixed to 15 minutes per side.
Test Ink tanks life cycles (22005)
Description This procedure displays the number of life cycles (full refill) of the intermediate tanks.
Test Ink tanks ink amount (22006)
Description This procedure shows in percentage (%) terms the amount of ink in the intermediate tanks.

Test Ink supplies check (22007)
Description This test shows the actual supply information and performs validation checks.
Table 5-11 Carriage aerosol

Test Aerosol fan calibration (49001)
Description This test checks that the fans spin and no faulty signal is returned.
Pass/fail Feedback provided by the test itself as well as by the noise produced by the fans.
criteria
Test Pressure sensor check (49003)
Description This is a test of the pressure sensor.
Fail criteria Pressure negative or too high.
With the fan stopped for some seconds, check that the pressure value is close to zero, otherwise it is an error:
● The pressure sensor is faulty
● The fans are faulty (they are spinning when they should not).
● The Sinatra PCA is faulty.
Test Pressure sensor calibration (49004)
Description This test shows pressure sensor calibration values. Automatic pressure calibration must be done first.
Table 5-12 Carriage sensors

Test Color sensor check (58001)
Description This diagnostic performs a self-calibration of the spectrophotometer. The shutter is opened, and then a
measurement in a dark zone of the printer is taken. Finally, the internal white calibration tile is measured.
Fail criteria Provided automatically.
● If two readings are similar it could be that the shutter remains open/closed all the time, so repeat the test,
observing whether light from the sensor is visible all the time.
● If the black point fails, it could be that there is a piece of substrate over the calibration position.
● If the white calibration fails, maybe the sensor is dirty and needs to be replaced.
Test Line sensor check (55001)
Description The test checks correct internal operation and communication with the line sensor located in the sensor box of the
printer. The printer enables the red LED with different current levels and performs a couple of reads to check
internal operation.
Pass criteria Gain within a range of values.
● This test requires a substrate load.
● It will activate vacuum, cap station, substrate advance, scan axis.
NOTE: Ensure the reading is taken over white substrate.

Table 5-12 Carriage sensors (continued)
Test Line sensor reset counters (55002)
Description Deletes usage counters for line sensor, number of cycles, and working hours.
NOTE: This diagnostic should be run only when a line sensor is replaced.
Test Line sensor calibration (58002)
Description The line sensor calibration should be performed mainly after replacing a line sensor or a sensor box. It is done in two
steps:
1. Calibration of the sensor, by measuring the white of a substrate and a dark area. During this first part, you can
see that the printer is places the line sensor at the top of the substrate, taking measurements (measuring the
white area), and then it places the sensor at the top of the printhead cleaning roller, performing other
measurements (measuring a dark area). A white substrate must be loaded: the substrate cannot contain color,
not even light gray.
2. Calibration of the position of the line sensor versus the black printhead. During this second step, the printer
will print 21 small squares, and will scan them back.
To perform the calibration correctly, load the substrate towards the right of the printer: the edge of the substrate
should be positioned within 4 cm (2 in) of the right-hand side.
TIP: Check that the black printhead is in very good condition, most importantly the first die of the black printhead.
Test LsToK calibration (55004)
Description This line sensor to black calibration should be performed mainly after replacing a line sensor or a sensor box. It
calibrates the position of the line sensor with respect to the black printhead. During the second step, the printer
prints 21 small squares, and scans them back. To perform the calibration correctly, load the substrate towards the
right of the printer: the edge of the substrate should be positioned within 4 cm (2 in) of the right-hand side.
TIP: Check that the black printhead is in very good condition, most importantly the first die of the black printhead.
Pass criteria Value within a range of values.
Table 5-13 Printhead primers

Test Primer pump calibration (46002)
Description This diagnostic calibrates all primers based on empty prime.
IMPORTANT: You must open all the printhead primer latches whenever required, otherwise you will create a big
puddle of ink on the print platen.
This calibration is recommended to be done after replacing a primer, NVM restore or issue or primer leak system
error reported.
Pass criteria Provided by the diagnostic itself.
Table 5-14 Drop detector/capping station

Test Capping/drop-detector calibration (52003)
Description Measures gears-backlash and bump deformation and saves values for reference.
Fail criteria This test will fail if a bump is broken or if there is very high friction.

Table 5-14 Drop detector/capping station (continued)
If the test fails, do a visual inspection of the bump and clean the gear.
Test Reset cap/drop-detector calibration (52004)
Description Set the backlash and elasticity of the service station to default values. This should be done for specific system
errors, in case the printer is not able to boot for a system error pointing to the service station. After this test, it is
important to redo the capping/drop-detector calibration.
Test Capping/drop-detector XY calibration (52006)
Description This test calibrates the XY position of capping and drop-detector shuttle, for the printer to perform the drop
detection and the capping procedures appropriately with respect to the carriage. It is recommended to perform this
action after interventions in the carriage or the capping/drop-detector station that change their relative positions.
Fail criteria V shape is not recognized.
Ensure this appendix is clean and line sensor works properly.
Test Drop-detector calibration (52005)
Description This test calibrates the drop-detector system. Perform this test whenever one or more drop detectors are replaced
or when the service station interconnect PCA is replaced.
CAUTION: All printheads must be in good health. If one of the printheads does not having enough nozzles working,
the calibration will fail, or will finish. To check that most of the nozzles are good enough for this calibration, print
the printhead alignment.
If all the calibration parameters are within limits the printer will finish and display an OK message, otherwise it will
display a fail message.
In case of failure perform a new hard cleaning procedure and redo the calibration. If the calibration still fails, check
the printhead that has failed (print printhead alignment) and replace the printhead if necessary. If all the printheads
are in good condition, replace the drop-detector sensors, then redo the calibration.
The nozzle-check plot is a better option for this purpose, but it may not be available to the operator.
Fail criteria If the final value received from the calibration is out of specification, it will be rejected and reported as failed.
Ensure printheads have good nozzle health.
Test Check DD electronics (52001)
Description Performs an electrical check of the drop-detection sensors.
Test Force drop detection (52002)
Description Executes a single drop detection for all the printhead dies.
Test Display capping/drop-detection calibration values (52009)
Description Displays stored calibration values for capping and drop detection.
Test Display printing nozzle health database content (52010)
Description Displays the current content of the printing nozzle health database.
Test Reset printing nozzle health database content (52011)

Table 5-14 Drop detector/capping station (continued)
Description Resets the content of the printing nozzle health database.
Table 5-15 Printhead cleaning

Test Wiper motor direction test (47004)
Description Moves the selected cleaning roll axis, making a large enough movement to be seen.
This diagnostic initializes correctly, it operates in open loop and will always report OK.
Recommended sequence is: Engage, MI, MA, and MO. Look the roll and axis movement to detect any slippage.
Fail criteria Movement not detected.
Test Wiper visual motor movement check (47002)
Description This test is similar to the previous one, but seeking a movement large enough to be seen by a human observer. If the
previous test is passed, but you are unable to see movement in this one, perhaps there is a jam, or friction is too
high and the motor is unable to move the axis.
Test Wiper manual motor movement check (47003)
Description 1. Select the axis to be observed.
2. Press the Start button.
3. Move the axis manually.
4. Press the Stop button.
5. The encoder should detect movement.
Pass criteria Delta in encoder counts reported, showing that the closed-loop feedback works.
Fail criteria The encoder does not detect movement.
Test Printhead cleaning Z calibration check (47005)
Description This test perform the actions to show you the Z axis calibration. To execute the full process, see Height and tilt
check and calibration test on page 755.
Test Set wiper Z calibration (47006)
Description Execute this test in order to set or change the current calibration, if needed after running the printhead cleaning Z
calibration check.
Table 5-16 Drying

Test Subsystem functional check in module 1 (left) (15010)
Description This test checks that the drying subsystem is working properly, by applying test power and checking that the
current provided to the lamps is within the expected range. If not, it tries to diagnose the problem. It can also
suggest visual inspection and replacement.

Table 5-16 Drying (continued)
Test Subsystem functional check in module 2 (right) (15110)
Description This test checks that the drying subsystem is working properly, by applying test power and checking that the
current provided to the lamps is within the expected range. If not, it tries to diagnose the problem. It can also
suggest visual inspection and replacement.
Test Relays check in drying PCA 1 (up) (15008)
Description This test checks that AC relays in the Sinatra PCA can be opened and closed.
Test Relays check in drying PCA 2 (down) (15108)
Description This test checks that AC relays in the Sinatra PCA can be opened and closed.
Test Null current check in AC/AC converter 1 (up) (15009)
Description This test checks whether the printer can set zero power by setting zero output using sinewave control only (without
using the relays in the drying PCA).
Test Null current check in AC/AC converter 2 (down) (15109)
Description This test checks whether the printer can set zero power by setting zero output using sinewave control only (without
using the relays in the drying PCA).
Test Scan-axis no-movement timeout in drying PCA 1 (up) (15003)
Description This text checks that the drying PCA no-movement timeout when applying power is working properly.
Test Scan-axis no-movement timeout in drying PCA 2 (down) (15103)
Description This text checks that the drying PCA no-movement timeout when applying power is working properly.
Test Hardware supervisor check in drying PCA 1 (up) (15005)
Description This test checks several hardware blocks in the drying PCA.
Test Hardware supervisor check in drying PCA 2 (down) (15105)
Description This test checks several hardware blocks in the drying PCA.
Test Drying PCA functional check #1 (up) (15011)
Description This test checks several hardware components inside the drying PCA or connected to it.
Test Drying PCA functional check #2 (down) (15111)
Description This test checks several hardware components inside the drying PCA or connected to it.

Table 5-17 Monitor curing temperatures
Test Monitor curing temperatures (16001)
Description This diagnostic displays the internal temperatures of the curing modules. This test is useful to see internal chamber
curing module temperatures and check whether they are uniform. Also consider that modules without substrate
under them are not powered.
Table 5-18 Curing

Test Status of the curing modules (16002)
Description Displays the status of the curing modules, safety interlocks status, substrate presence under each module and
temperature of each chamber (internal).
Also with this diagnostic you can apply power to heaters and fans (only the ones with substrate under them,
reproducing printing conditions).
Options available are:
● Heater enabled + fans at 40%
● Heater disabled + fans at 40%
● Heater and fans disabled.
This diagnostic has enabled all software monitors, so you can reproduce and isolate system errors reported by the
customer for troubleshooting purposes. Recommended to be executed when the customer reports curing problems,
then you can check whether all modules have the same behavior.
Test Monitor one curing module (16003)
Description Monitor all the internal parameters monitored in the curing PCA in one single module.
Also with this diagnostic you can apply power to heaters and fans (only the ones with substrate under them,
reproducing printing conditions).
Options available are:
● Heater enabled + fans at 40%
● Heater and fans disabled.
This diagnostic has enabled all software monitors, so you can reproduce and isolate system errors reported by the
customer. Recommended to be executed when the customer reports curing errors, to identify the module and root
cause of the problem.
Table 5-19 E-box

Test Engine PCAs presence and positioning (01005)

Table 5-19 E-box (continued)
Description This test looks (for each slot of the PCI express) if there is an engine PCA attached to it. In the formatter PCA there
are five PCI express slots. In slots 1 to 4 must be assembled one engine PCA each, and slot 5 must be free. Any other
configuration than this is wrong.
Test steps Launch the diagnostic.
Pass/fail If the slots corresponding to PCAs 1 to 4 reply properly and slot #5 does not reply; the test result is PASS. Otherwise
criteria the test result is FAIL.
Possible ● At least one of the engine PCAs is missing or assembled in slot 5.

causes for test
failure ● The contacts of the PCI express bus in any slot are dirty (formatter or engine PCA).
● Engine PCA is broken.
● Formatter PCA is broken.
Test Engine PCAs start-up (01006)
Description This test looks for errors during the start-up of the four engine PCAs, and checks that the PCA startup is OK.
Test steps 1. Launch the test: NESSCTengineConnectivity (check for proper connectivity of the ASIC fusion)
2. Launch the test: NESSMCtokamakMemoryCheck (check for the memory)
Pass/fail The test result is FAIL if:

criteria
● There is a problem with the communication of the formatter PCA with any of the engine PCAs.
● There is a short-circuit or open circuit in the tracks (involving the fusion) in any engine PCA.
● The PCA does not start up properly.
Otherwise the test result is PASS.
Possible Engine PCA is broken.

causes for test
failure
Test Connectivity between ELA and engine PCAs (01007)
Description This test verifies that each of the engine PCAs is properly connected to its corresponding engine adaptor PCA. The
engine PCA tries to communicate with the microcontroller of the engine adaptor PCA.
Pass/fail If there is a problem with the communication (missing reply, unexpected reply) between each the engine PCA and its
criteria corresponding engine adaptor PCA, the test result is FAIL.
Possible ● Any engine PCA is broken.

causes for test
failure ● Any engine adaptor PCA is broken.
● The flat cable between engine PCA and engine adaptor PCA is missing.
● Flat cables are wrongly connected (PCAs mismatch).
● Flat cables are improperly assembled (not completely inserted).
Test Engine adaptor PCAs voltage supplies check (01009)
Description This test read the voltage outputs of each of the voltage sources in engine adaptor PCA. The voltages must be
within a range (±15% needs to be defined thresholds) to declare the test passed.
(Read the ADC channels in the microcontroller STM8_U3.)

Table 5-19 E-box (continued)
Pass/fail If any of the voltmeters (24V, 12V, 5V3, 5V 3V3) integrated into the engine adaptors PCA reads a voltage out of the
criteria valid range the test result is FAIL.
Possible ● Any engine PCA is broken

causes for test
failure ● There is a problem with the supply of the engine PCA (cable or ATX power supply).
● There is a shortcircuit or overload in the loads connected to the e-box interconnect PCA.
Test Engine adaptor PCA to PPA connectivity (01007)
Description This test checks for the proper connection of the engine adaptor PCAs to the e-box interconnect PCA. It can detect
which one(s) (if they exist) of the four engine adaptor PCAs are not connected to the e-box interconnect PCA. The
engine adaptor PCA sends a signal that travels through the e-box interconnect PCA and returns to the engine
adaptor PCA.
Test steps Launch the diagnostics.
(V monitor TCL; PNP monitor TCL)
Pass/fail If any of the four engine adaptors PCA does not read back one or more of the signals sent through the e-box
criteria interconnect PCA, this test result is FAIL.
Possible ● Any engine adaptor PCA is not properly assembled.

causes for test
failure ● Any engine PCA is broken.
● A pin from the e-box interconnect PCA slots is broken (J1, J2, J3, J4).
Table 5-20 E-cabinet

Test Check e-cabinet e-box communication (10006)
Description This test will determine if there is communication between the e-box and the e-cabinet PCA.
Pass criteria The e-cabinet PCA responds to a communication command.
Fail criteria The e-cabinet PCA does not respond to a communication command
Action(s) Possible causes for a test failure:
● Communication cable disconnected or damaged
● PSU-2 not working (e-cabinet PCA not powered)
● E-cabinet PCA malfunction
● E-box malfunction
Test Check that the fan works (10001)
Description This test determines if the rotation signal of the fan is detected.
Pass criteria The rotation signal of the fan is detected.
Fail criteria The rotation signal of the fan is not detected.
● Fan not connected to the e-cabinet PCA
● Fan blocked or malfunctioning

Table 5-20 E-cabinet (continued)
Test Power supplies (10004)
Description This test will start up all the DC power supplies, and measure their output voltages and read their status signals (if
available).
During this test the firmware will ask the user to press the rearm button.
Pass criteria All the power supplies output voltages inside range and no alarm signal is detected.
Fail criteria One or more PSUs not supplying the adequate voltage or an alarm signal detected.
● PSU end of life (internal fan not working or otherwise)
● PSU protection activated (be sure to leave some time for the PSU to cool down and do an OFF/ON cycle with
the main switch before repeating)
● PSU cabling: AC, DC, or control cables not connected or damaged
● PSU output voltage-sensing jumper missing
Test Temperature (10010)
Description This test reads the internal temperature of the e-cabinet.
Pass criteria Temperature inside range.
Fail criteria Temperature outside range.
● Insufficient ventilation:
◦ Fan not working
◦ Ventilation grille blocked by an external item (a box, a table…)
◦ Air filters clogged with dust
● Room temperature above machine specifications
Test Activate/deactivate one of the power outputs of the PCA (10007)
Description This test activates the DC PSUs and the selected outputs of the e-cabinet PCA.
During this test the firmware will ask the user to press the rearm button.
Pass criteria All outputs can be activated.
Fail criteria One or more outputs cannot be activated.
● The system powered by the failing output has a problem; check that system for short-circuits
Test Automatic activation/deactivation of ALL of the power outputs of the PCA (10009)
Description This test activates the DC PSUs and the activates all the outputs of the e-cabinet PCA. It also tests the state of the
fuses.
Pass criteria All outputs can be activated.

Table 5-20 E-cabinet (continued)
Fail criteria One or more outputs cannot be activated.
● The system powered by the failing output has a problem; check that system for short-circuits
● The output fuse on the failing output is blown
Test E-cabinet state (10005)
Description This test shows the state of all the analog and digital sensors on the e-cabinet PCA (voltages, currents,
temperature, switch states, and so on).
Test Check watchdog timer (10008)
Description This test checks that the watchdog timer on the e-cabinet PCA works.
Pass criteria Watchdog timer works
Fail criteria Watchdog timer fails
Action(s) Causes for a test fail:
Table 5-21 Printer installation and purge

Test Purge supply (per color) (22500, 22501, 22502, 22503, 22504, 22505, 22506)
Description NOTE: More information about purging the system is available in the installation guide.
Purge supply. Purge ink main service diagnostic (1/3). This test checks the supply, opens the main electro-valve and
checks that the ink pressure is correct. Test failure usually indicates that the manual refill of the first tube segment
is incorrect (air in tubes).
Test Filling intermediate tanks (22507)
Description Purge Intermediate Tanks. Purge ink main service diagnostic (2/3). This test performs several steps to refill the new
empty intermediate tanks.
Test Ink filling tubes (22508)
Description Purge Tubes. Purge ink main service diagnostic (3/3). This operation leads the ink from the intermediate tanks to
the carriage. To avoid the air to damage any head, temporary setup printheads will be plugged at the end of each
tube, inserted to the needle where the final printheads will seat afterwards.
Test Set supply consumed ink (22509)
Description This test allows you to subtract ink consumed by the ink cartridge during the installation process, in order to count
the ink actually used in printing.
Test Force normal boot (22511)
Description The execution of this test forces the printer to start in normal mode at the next restart.

Table 5-21 Printer installation and purge (continued)
Test Set input voltage
Description This test allows you to set in the printer the input AC voltage measured in the installation process.
Test Set ISM as purged
Description This test sets the ISM as purged (filled with ink).
Test Set TRS as purged
Description This test sets the TRS as purged (filled with ink).
Table 5-22 Printer reshipment preparation

Test Manage auxiliary air pump (22600)
Description This test allows you to control the auxiliary air pump that can be used to empty the ink lines.
Test Entry valves (22601)
Description Entry-valves management. With this test you can change the status of the intermediate valves (valves that
interconnect the Intermediate tanks).
Test Set all intermediate tanks as new (22602)
Description This test sets intermediate tanks installed as new, allowing them to be reused them when the printer is reisntalled.
Test Set ISM as not purged (22603)
Description This test sets the ISM as not purged (empty), so that the next time the printer is powered up it will ask to be filled
with ink.
Test Set TSR as not purged (22604)
Description This test sets the TRS as not purged (empty), so that the next time the printer is powered up it will be ask to be filled
with ink.
Test Move carriage (22605)
Description This test moves the carriage to the service position, allowing you to insert the syringes into the ink lines to empty
them.
Table 5-23 Utilities

Test Get printer logs (99009)
Description This utility displays a URL that takes you where the Printer.log file is stored.
Test Set IP address (99010)
Description This utility guides you to change the IP addresses of the computer and printer.

Table 5-23 Utilities (continued)
Test Set date and time (99001)
Description This utility changes the actual date and time of the internal electronics system in the printer, this date and time are
different from the data displayed by the IPS PC of the printer. A correct setup of the time and date in the printer is
especially important when saving and tracking the error logs used for escalations. Performing this utility is
recommended when installing the printer in order to align the time with the local time.
Test Report version (99002)
Description This utility will show the actual version of the test utilities package installed in the printer. As the package can be
updated independently of the firmware, this test helps the user to keep track of the actual version installed in the
printer.
Test Save NVM (99003)
Description This utility creates a backup copy of all the NVM values of the printer (including calibration values, part numbers,
and so on) in the tmp directory of the hard drive of the printer (where the printer.log is stored).
Test Restore NVM (99004)
Description This utility recovers a previous copy of all the NVM values of the printer (including calibration values, part numbers,
and so on).
Test Enable logging (99007)
Description This utility sets the printer to create the printer.log file in the tmp directory of the printer. The file will include all
necessary information to use and provide in case of escalation. In addition to the standard logs reporting, the test
sets additional log information (extended logs) for selected subsystems within the printer. If the problem is
localized in one of those subsystems, select the appropriate one. Otherwise just select at random one of the
subsystems displayed, which will be enough to gather the standard set of logs reporting.
Test Force boot mode (99006)
Description This utility sets the printer to start always in diagnostic mode. This is useful if you intend to perform multiple tests
in diagnostic mode.
Test Set curing bottom plate (99011)
Description This utility allows you to set in the printer firmware which curing bottom plate is assembled in the printer. After
setting the right value, it displays the value to confirm that the change has been done. To check which curing
bottom plate you have, see Curing bottom plate assembly on page 477.
Table 5-24 Carriage rail cleanliness

Test Friction analysis (86003)
Description This maintenance script moves the carriage along the scan axis, reading and displaying friction values and limit
thresholds. It recommends a cleaning process if needed.
Test Cleaning (86004)

Table 5-24 Carriage rail cleanliness (continued)
Description Follow the instructions of this script to clean the carriage rails. You need to use the tools recommended for regular
maintenance. The script enables heavy users to run this maintenance routine whenever needed.

6 Service parts and diagrams
● Rear left covers
● Front left covers
● Front right covers
● Rear right covers
● Center covers
● Covers (structure)
● Vapor removal (1)
● Vapor removal (2)
● Drying
● Aerosol
● E-cabinet general
● E-cabinet left (1)
● E-cabinet left (2)
● E-cabinet center
● E-cabinet right
● E-box
● Printhead cleaning system (1)
● Printhead cleaning system (2)
● Tube Routing System (TRS)
● Ink system module (1)
● Impelling
● Service station
● Substrate path (1)
378 Chapter 6 Service parts and diagrams ENWW

● Curing (1)
● Curing (2)
● Carriage (1)
● Carriage (2)
● Human-machine interface
● Miscellaneous parts
ENWW 379
Rear left covers
Part number Description
1 CZ056-67344 Top left cover clamp and labels on page 633
2 CZ056-67349 Top left panel assembly on page 637
3 CZ056-67348 Bottom left panel assembly on page 636
4 CZ056-67345 Left corner assembly on page 634
5 CZ056-67351 Rear left internal corner assembly on page 638
6 CZ056-67347 Rear left panel assembly on page 636
7 CZ056-67339 Rear left pillar on page 629
8 CZ056-67352 Rear left internal cover on page 639

Front left covers
1 CZ056-67343 Top left cover on page 631
2 CZ056-67342 Front left internal cover on page 631
3 CZ056-67341 Front top left pillar on page 630
4 CZ056-67340 Front left pillar on page 630
5 CZ056-67350 Front left internal corner assembly on page 638
6 CZ056-67346 Front left panel assembly on page 635
7 CZ056-67397 Front left panel door on page 653
8 CZ056-67345 Left corner assembly on page 634
ENWW Front left covers 381

Front right covers
1 CZ056-67330 Front right corner assembly on page 622
2 CZ056-67327 Front top right cover on page 619
3 CZ056-67331 Front right panel assembly on page 623
4 CZ056-67336 Printhead cleaning door assembly on page 627
5 CZ056-67329 Keyboard shelf assembly on page 621
6 CZ056-67325 Front right cover on page 616
7 CZ056-67338 Front right pillar on page 628
8 CZ056-67416 Front lower right cover on page 615

Rear right covers
1 CZ056-67328 Rear right internal cover on page 620
2 CZ056-67337 Rear right pillar on page 627
3 CZ056-67335 Rear right internal corner assembly on page 626
4 CZ056-67332 Rear right panel assembly on page 624
5 CZ056-67326 Rear top right cover on page 618
6 CZ056-67324 Bottom right cover on page 614
7 CZ056-67334 Rear right corner assembly on page 625
8 CZ056-67333 Right panel assembly on page 624
ENWW Rear right covers 383

Center covers
1 CZ056-67355 Front top center cover on page 644 and Rear top center cover on page 644
2 CZ056-67359 Rear PC sheet on page 648
3 CZ056-67360 Rear center-right PC sheet cover on page 649
4 CZ056-67353 Center right cover on page 643
5 CZ056-67356 Arch center cover on page 645
6 CZ056-67361 Window gas spring on page 650
7 CZ056-67363 Front door on page 652
8 CZ056-67364 Center window on page 653
9 CZ056-67358 Window PC sheet on page 647
10 CZ056-67357 Front PC sheet on page 646
11 CZ056-67354 Center left cover on page 641

Covers (structure)
1 CZ056-67362 Right structure on page 651
2 CZ056-67323 Buzzer and cable on page 614
3 CZ056-67365 Cover supports on page 654, includes a set of covers supports, door hinges, and the Internal Print Server
computer support
ENWW Covers (structure) 385

Vapor removal (1)
1 CZ056-67384 Curing and vapor removal PCA on page 902
2 CZ056-67379 Vapor removal fan on page 889, one unit
3 CZ056-67380 Vapor removal impactor on page 890
4 CZ056-67382 Vapor removal condensation collector bottle on page 894
5 CZ056-67403 Vapor removal sealing kit
6 CZ056-67383 Vapor removal curing box on page 896
7 CZ056-67377 Vapor removal drainage on page 882, includes two intermediate collectors, one end collector, one main
holder, and one waste bottle container
8 CZ056-67378 Vapor removal crossflow exchanger on page 887
9 CZ056-67381 Vapor removal exchanger box on page 891

Vapor removal (2)
1 CZ056-67284 Vapor removal fans power cable kit on page 898, includes vapor removal fans cable (CZ056-50242), vapor
removal pump power cable (CZ056-50246), vapor removal fans PCA data cable (CZ056-50249), vapor
removal cable power 24 V split to curing PCA (CZ056-50258), and vapor removal cable LAN split to curing
PCA (CZ056-50259)
2 CZ056-67376 Vapor removal pipes on page 874, includes one set of vapor removal pipes (4 different units)
3 CZ056-67282 Vapor removal pump cable kit on page 897, includes vapor removal cable data split to blower
(CZ056-50260), vapor removal cable power 230 V split to blower (CZ056-50261), vapor removal pump
control cable (CZ056-50247), e-box interconnect PCA to vapor removal vacuum power cable
(CZ056-50239), e-box interconnect PCA to vapor removal vacuum LAN cable (CZ056-50238), and vapor
removal fans power cable (CZ056-50248)
4 CZ056-67109 Vacuum pump cable kit on page 799
5 CZ056-67105 Vacuum pump on page 892, includes one unit of centrifugal blower 230 V AC
ENWW Vapor removal (2) 387

Drying
1 CZ056-67026 Drying cable right (CZ056-50205) on page 515
2 CZ056-67023 Drying fan case right
3 CZ056-67322 Drying NIR lamp on page 496
4 CZ056-67252 Drying quartz glass on page 511 (right)
5 CZ056-67204 Drying PCA on page 522
6 CZ056-67253 Drying quartz glass on page 511 (left)
7 CZ056-67024 Drying fan case left
8 CZ056-67029 Drying module on page 518 (left)
9 CZ056-67028 Drying module on page 518 (right)
10 CZ056-67027 Drying cable left (CZ056-50013) on page 517
CZ056-67030 Drying AC/AC converter control cable on page 521, includes CZ056-50056
CZ056-67251 Drying temperature sensor kit on page 505

Aerosol
1 CZ056-67246 Aerosol top case assembly on page 421, includes aerosol lid assembly and aerosol harness cable
(CZ056-50240)
2 CZ056-67005 Aerosol cables kit on page 423, includes CZ056-50240 and CZ056-50241
3 CZ056-67004 Aerosol box assembly on page 423
4 CZ056-67003 Aerosol pressure sensor on page 424
ENWW Aerosol 389

E-cabinet general
1 CZ056-67394 E-cabinet right door assembly on page 585
2 CZ056-67137 E-cabinet fan filter on page 581
3 CZ056-67393 E-cabinet left door assembly on page 584

E-cabinet left (1)
1 CZ056-67134 E-cabinet installation kit
2 CZ056-67132 E-cabinet terminal block kit on page 575
3 CZ056-67425 E-cabinet line filter bypass cables on page 547, includes line filter bypass cable (CZ056-50275)
4 CZ056-67135 E-cabinet fuses kit on page 577
5 CZ056-67128 E-cabinet fan on page 571
ENWW E-cabinet left (1) 391

E-cabinet left (2)
1 CZ056-67115 E-cabinet main switch kit on page 545
2 CZ056-67119 E-cabinet ACB 10A 2-phase on page 551
3 CZ056-67131 E-cabinet lamps kit on page 572
4 CZ056-67117 E-cabinet ACB 20A 2-phase on page 550
5 CZ056-67404 E-cabinet RCD 25A 30mA 1-phase on page 552

E-cabinet center
2 CZ056-67135 E-cabinet fuses kit on page 577
3 CZ056-67125 E-cabinet 24V PSU (E-cabinet PSUs 5 to 7 on page 563)
5 CZ056-67127 E-cabinet AC/AC converter on page 569
6 CZ056-67133 E-cabinet X-way cross-connector kit on page 577
7 CZ056-67122 E-cabinet modular contactor kit on page 555
ENWW E-cabinet center 393

E-cabinet right
2 CZ056-67129 E-cabinet safety relay on page 571
3 CZ056-67134 E-cabinet installation kit
4 CZ056-67138 E-cabinet transformer on page 583
9 CZ056-67202 E-cabinet PCA on page 552
10 CZ056-67136 E-cabinet PCA fuses kit on page 579

E-box
1 CZ056-67386 E-box fan and filter on page 532
2 CZ056-67187 Engine PCA on page 535
3 CZ056-67389 Fiber-optics PCA on page 543
4 CZ056-67085 E-box PSU on page 529
5 CZ056-67266 E-box LAN cable to IPS (CZ056-500041 and CZ056-50222) on page 534, includes the IPS to e-box LAN
cable (CZ056-50041) and the LAN to IPS cable (CZ056-50222)
6 CZ056-67189 E-box interconnect PCA on page 541
7 CZ056-67188 Engine adaptor PCA on page 539
8 CZ056-67083 E-box cable kit on page 524, includes engine PCA1 to engine adaptor PCA1 data cable (CZ056-50001) (×2),
engine PCA2 to engine adaptor PCA2 data cable (CZ056-50002) (×2), engine PCA3 to engine adaptor PCA3
data cable (CZ056-50133) (×2), engine PCA4 to engine adaptor PCA4 data cable (CZ056-50134) (×2),
engine adaptor PCA power cable (CZ056-50003), ATX to fiber-optics PCA power cable (CZ056-50221), CAN
B bus cable (CZ056-50252), engine PCA to fiber-optics PCA long cable (CZ056-50220), and e-box
interconnect PCA to e-cabinet PCA cable (CZ056-50138)
9 CZ056-67186 Formatter PCA on page 537
10 CZ056-67084 E-box hard disk drive on page 526
ENWW E-box 395

Printhead cleaning system (1)
1 CZ056-67052 Printhead cleaning module on page 750, includes shims (to be used only if previous repair failed)
2 CZ056-67236 Printhead cleaning gear kit on page 749, includes gear (×4), web-drive gear, and roll transmission hub
(gear and rubber) (×2)
3 CZ056-67235 Printhead cleaning roll axis with structure on page 738, includes the structure baseplate, an output
diverter, and two units of both roll axis and transmission hub assembly
4 CZ056-67051 Printhead cleaning shims calibration on page 754, includes 3 units

Printhead cleaning system (2)
1 CZ056-67048 Printhead cleaning drive roller on page 746
2 CZ056-67050 Printhead cleaning roll free hub (×2)
3 CZ056-67049 Printhead cleaning rubber hub on page 739 (×2)
4 Q6702-60685 Printhead cleaning waste bottle
5 CZ056-67045 Printhead cleaning transmission box on page 735, includes transmission box and gearbox inversor
assemblies
6 CZ056-67190 Motor drive PCA on page 752, includes one motor drive PCA assembly and a micci2 termination
(CZ056-50028)
7 CZ056-67234 Printhead cleaning central cage top cover on page 747
8 CZ056-67047 Printhead cleaning roll pinch assembly on page 740
9 CZ056-67046 Printhead cleaning blade assembly on page 742
CZ056-67313 Printhead cleaning cables kit on page 767, includes capping power in T extensor cable (CZ056-50156)
(×4), printhead cleaning power in T cable (CZ056-50161), data cable between motor drive PCAs
(Q6703-50031) (×3), e-box to printhead cleaning cable (CZ056-50157), e-cabinet to printhead cleaning
power cable (CZ056-50076), motor encoder cable (CZ056-50116) (×4), and micci2 termination
(CZ056-50028)
ENWW Printhead cleaning system (2) 397

Tube Routing System (TRS)
1 CZ056-67298 TRS FI tower assembly on page 869, includes FI tower assemblies (×8), FI holders (×8), and FI covers (×8)
2 CZ056-67315 TRS barnacle kit on page 873, includes barnacle assembly, sleeve, anti-rotation sleeve, TRS ink tube
segments, tube cutter and fitting connectors; removal and installation of this service part also requires the
materials included in the following kits: tubes repair kit (CZ056-67320), flush kit (Q6702-60679), and
purge kit (CZ056-67218)

CZ056-67063 PPS front right and rear left assembly on page 717
1
CZ056-67064 PPS front left and rear right assembly on page 716
2 Q6702-60487 PPS motor assembly on page 719
3 CZ056-67065 Mechanical switch on page 718
(CZ056-50028)
5 CZ056-67066 PPS screw assembly on page 721
CZ056-67068 PPS cables kit on page 724, includes e-cabinet to PPS power cable (CZ056-50072), PPS power in T cable
(CZ056-50151), short PPS data bridge cable (CZ056-50178) (×2), long PPS data bridge cable
(CZ056-50177), take-up-reel Luna to PPS cable (CZ056-50052), and micci2 termination (CZ056-50028)
CZ056-67069 PPS motor cable kit on page 732, includes motor drive PCA to PPS motor cable (CZ056-50035), motor
drive PCA to differential encoder PCA cable (CZ056-50146), differential encoder PCA (Q6703-60195), PPS
power in T extensor cable (CZ056-50149), mechanical switch—short cable (CZ056-50169), and
differential encoder PCA to encoder cable (CZ056-50046)
CZ056-67398 XY guide assembly on page 726, includes vertical XY guide assembly, vertical Y guide assembly, XY
column guide (×2), pan top, machine grease and oil kit, and taptite screws (×6)

Ink system module (1)
1 CZ056-67077 ISM air circuit on page 672, includes air bottle assemblies (×2), air bottle ties (×2), and air tube segments
and fittings
2 CZ056-67074 ISM intermediate tank set on page 672 (14 units)
3 CZ056-67073 ISM intermediate tank on page 670
4 CZ056-67370 ISM ink pressure sensor mount assembly on page 665; removal and installation of this service part also
requires the following kits: tubes repair kit (CZ056-67320), flush kit (Q6702-60679), and purge kit
(CZ056-67218)
5 CZ056-67385 ISM ink leakage detector on page 686
6 CZ056-67079 ISM pump and relief valve on page 679, includes air tube segments, air pump supports (×2), air pump
assemblies (×2), relief valve assembly, fittings, tapping screws (×4)
7 CZ056-67198 ISS PCA on page 683
CZ056-67075 ISM cables kit on page 681, includes ISS daisy chain cable (CZ056-50250), ISS termination cable
(CZ056-50217), ISM actuators cable 3 (CZ056-50182), IDS I2C data cable (CZ056-50053), 24V IDS cable
(CZ056-50071), intermediate tanks cable (CZ056-50031), ISM actuators light cable (CZ056-50030), ISM
actuators cable (CZ056-50029), ISM LAN cable split to air tray PCA (CZ056-50263), and ISM power cable
split to air tray PCA (CZ056-50262)
CZ056-67070 ISM pressure sensor assembly on page 659

1 CZ056-67369 ISS intermediate tanks interconnect PCA on page 686
2 CZ056-67078 ISM ink circuit module on page 675; removal and installation of this service part also requires the
following kits: tubes repair kit (CZ056-67320), flush kit (Q6702-60679), and purge kit (CZ056-67218)
3 CZ056-67307 ISM wheel on page 669
4 CZ056-67072 ISM repair kit on page 666, includes electro-valves bridge, ink electro-valve (×2), 4-way electro-valve
assembly, ink tube segments, fittings (×4), a tube cutter, gloves (medium/large), and purge cleaning cloth
(×2); removal and installation of this service part also requires the following kits: flush kit (Q6702-60679)
and purge kit (CZ056-67218)
5 CZ056-67308 ISM quick connector M&F assembly on page 669; removal and installation of this service part also requires
the following kits: tubes repair kit (CZ056-67320), flush kit (Q6702-60679), and purge kit (CZ056-67218)
ENWW Ink system module (2) 401

1 CZ056-67387 Ink cartridges PCA on page 684; removal and installation of this service part also requires the following
kits: tubes repair kit (CZ056-67320), flush kit (Q6702-60679), and purge kit (CZ056-67218)
2 CZ056-67305 ISM OP cartridge connector with tube (ISM cartridge connector with tube (K, Y, C, M, LC, LM, or PT ink)
on page 660); removal and installation of this service part also requires the following kits: tubes repair kit
(CZ056-67320), flush kit (Q6702-60679), and purge kit (CZ056-67218)
3 CZ056-67303 ISM LC cartridge connector with tube (ISM cartridge connector with tube (K, Y, C, M, LC, LM, or PT ink)
4 CZ056-67304 ISM LM cartridge connector with tube (ISM cartridge connector with tube (K, Y, C, M, LC, LM, or PT ink)
5 CZ056-67301 ISM C cartridge connector with tube (ISM cartridge connector with tube (K, Y, C, M, LC, LM, or PT ink)
6 CZ056-67302 ISM M cartridge connector with tube (ISM cartridge connector with tube (K, Y, C, M, LC, LM, or PT ink)
7 CZ056-67300 ISM Y cartridge connector with tube (ISM cartridge connector with tube (K, Y, C, M, LC, LM, or PT ink)
8 CZ056-67299 ISM K cartridge connector with tube (ISM cartridge connector with tube (K, Y, C, M, LC, LM, or PT ink)

Impelling
1 CZ056-67154 Impelling motor on page 593
2 CZ056-67159 Impelling carriage belt assembly on page 599
3 CZ056-67160 Impelling tensioner assembly on page 601
4 CZ056-67157 Impelling encoder strip on page 596
5 CZ056-67366 Impelling fiber-optics trailing cable (CZ056-50255) on page 592
6 CZ056-67149 Impelling PE cable (CZ056-50150) on page 591
7 CZ056-67150 Impelling drying data cable (CZ056-50044) on page 592
CZ056-67145 Impelling drying AC cable (CZ056-50065) on page 589
CZ056-67146 Impelling 42 V power cable (CZ056-50063) on page 590
CZ056-67148 Impelling 12 V power cable (CZ056-50066) on page 590
CZ056-67368 SAX motor data cable (CZ056-50045) on page 603
CZ056-67367 SAX motor power cables kit on page 602, includes CZ056-50130, CZ056-50131, and CZ056-50142
ENWW Impelling 403

Service station
1 CZ056-67036 Caps kit on page 776, includes seven capping assemblies
(CZ056-50028)
3 CZ056-67031 Motor kit on page 770
4 CZ056-67033 Switch on page 771
5 CZ056-67039 Drop-detector transmission assembly on page 782
6 CZ056-67038 Capping transmission assembly on page 781
7 CZ056-67035 Encoder strip on page 773
8 CZ056-67034 Encoder sensor and support on page 774
9 CZ056-67040 Capping module on page 782
10 CZ056-67041 Drop-detector module on page 783
11 CZ056-67037 Drop-detector kit on page 779, includes two drop-detector assemblies
12 CZ056-67388 Drop-detector Mux PCA on page 784
CZ056-67043 Drop-detector cable kit on page 790, includes drop-detector short extensor cable (CZ056-50175), Drop-
detector extensor cable (CZ056-50069), Drop-detector long extensor cable (CZ056-50176), Drop-detector
Mux PCA cable (CZ056-50112) and Drop-detector daisy chain cable (CZ056-50021)
CZ056-67312 Cable kit on page 792, includes capping power in T extensor cable (CZ056-50156) (x2), capping power in T
cable (CZ056-50160), data cable between motor drive PCAs (Q6703-50031), micci2 termination
(CZ056-50028), printer capping station motor drive PCA cable (CZ056-50054), service station power cable
(CZ056-50077), and motor encoder cable (CZ056-50116)
CZ056-67423 Service station retainers

Substrate path (1)
1 CZ056-67178 R2FF pinch hinge inner on page 855
2 CZ056-67176 R2FF pinch hinge outer on page 849
3 CZ056-67173 R2FF pinch lever kit on page 848
4 CZ056-67174 R2FF damper on page 849
5 CZ056-67172 R2FF pinch mechanical assembly on page 846
6 CZ056-67180 R2FF roller on page 860
7 CZ056-67224 R2FF take-up-reel assembly on page 858, includes the take-up reel assembly with its support, RJ45
jumper (CZ056-50028), e-box to take-up reel PCA cable (CZ056-50163), take-up reel power cable
(CZ056-50180), take-up reel sensor in T cable (CZ056-50170), take-up reel sensor single cable
(CZ056-50203), and take-up reel long sensor cable (CZ056-50210)
8 CZ056-67175 R2FF switch cable on page 849, includes R2FF switch cable assembly
CZ056-67190 Motor drive PCA on page 859
ENWW Substrate path (1) 405

Substrate path (2)
1 CZ056-67237 Single-roll spindle
2 CZ056-67240 Dual-roll spindle
3 CZ056-67242 Dual-roll gear and end-cap with lock
4 CZ056-67241 Dual-roll gear and end-cap
5 CZ056-67243 Dual-roll spindle rulers
6 CZ056-67244 Dual-roll spindle differential cover
7 CZ056-67238 Spindle end-cap left
8 CZ056-67239 Single-roll spindle ruler
9 Q6702-60464 Pneumatic gun
10 Q6702-67025 Spindle air valve on page 867
11 Q6702-60462 Spindle gear and end-cap set

Substrate path (3)
1 CZ056-67374 Drive roller encoder disc and PCA on page 814
2 CZ056-67228 Substrate drive roller transmission assembly on page 817
3 CZ056-67269 MA motor on page 811
4 Q6702-60478 Drive roller motor coupling on page 818
5 CZ056-67405 Interlock on page 865, includes one interlock switch and a set of interlock cables
6 Q6702-60477 Drive roller support bearings on page 820, includes both the end and the central drive roller support
bearings
CZ056-67271 MA power cable (CZ056-50118) on page 813
CZ056-67094 MA motor encoder cable (CZ056-50036) on page 813
CZ056-67270 MA data cable (CZ056-50236) on page 813

Substrate path (4)
1 CZ056-67185 Platen extra assembly on page 810
2 CZ056-67321 OMAS controller PCA and vacuum control PCA on page 803
3 CZ056-67111 OMAS platen assembly on page 806
4 F0D27A HP Latex 3000 Edge Holder Kit, includes 4 substrate edge holder assemblies and 24 substrate edge holder
strips
5 CZ056-67184 Platen assembly on page 808
CZ056-67316 OMAS and vacuum cables kit on page 801, includes vacuum supply PCA cable (CZ056-50057), vacuum
pump control cable (CZ056-50050), vacuum control to OMAS encoder cable (CZ056-50038), vacuum
control to OMAS CAN cable (CZ056-50039), vacuum control to OMAS power cable (CZ056-50040), and
OMAS controller to sensor cable (CZ056-50202)

Substrate path (5)
1 CZ056-67231 Pinch front cover right on page 867
2 CZ056-67230 Pinch front cover on page 866
3 CZ056-67097 Pinch assembly on page 864
4 CZ056-67318 Pinch switch assembly on page 865, includes one pinch sensor cable (CZ056-50127) and one mechanical
switch—short cable (CZ056-50169)
5 CZ056-67098 Pinch clamp on page 865
6 CZ056-67232 Pinch front cover left on page 867

Substrate path (6)
1 CZ056-67415 MO support spindle plate (MO left support spindle plate on page 838, MO right support spindle plate
on page 841)
2 CZ056-67177 R2FF side plates on page 851
3 CZ056-67272 MI motor on page 822, MO motor on page 824, or MF motor on page 825
4 Q6702-60469 Spindle latch type B on page 834
5 Q6703-67058 Roll-to-floor timing belt on page 856
6 Q6702-60468 Spindle latch type A on page 829
7 CZ056-67414 MI support spindle plate (MI left support spindle plate on page 827, MI right support spindle plate
on page 828)
CZ056-67281 MF encoder cable (CZ056-50060) on page 846
CZ056-67280 MF data cable (CZ056-50048) on page 846
CZ056-67279 MF power cable kit (CZ056-50229, CZ056-50130, CZ056-50230) on page 845
CZ056-67278 MO encoder cable (CZ056-50059) on page 837
CZ056-67277 MO data cable (CZ056-50237) on page 837
CZ056-67276 MO power cable kit (CZ056-50227, CZ056-50130, CZ056-50228) on page 837
CZ056-67275 MI encoder cable (CZ056-50058) on page 826
CZ056-67274 MI data cable (CZ056-50046) on page 826
CZ056-67273 MI power cable kit (CZ056-50225, CZ056-50130, CZ056-50226) on page 826

Substrate path (7)
1 CZ056-67107 Vacuum pipe on page 797
2 CZ056-67105 Vacuum pump on page 795
3 CZ056-67109 Vacuum pump cable kit on page 799, includes vacuum control PCA to vacuum pump cable (CZ056-50037)
and vacuum pump power cable (CZ056-50114)

Substrate path (8)
Design 1
1 CZ056-67401 Diverter bottom module on page 862
2 CZ056-67183 Diverter wheel on page 863
Because of the necessary removal of both the entire bottom diverter structure and the bottom plate
assembly, the diverter top module for design 1 does not include its corresponding service part. Therefore,
you must follow the upgrade instructions for both the diverter and the bottom module assemblies. If you
have an affected top diverter module that belongs to design 1, see the diverter and bottom plate upgrade kit.
Design 2
1 CZ056-67428 Diverter bottom module on page 862
3 CZ056-67429 Diverter top module on page 861

Curing (1)
1 CZ056-67061 Curing bracket pin support kit on page 476
2 CZ056-67057 Curing right module on page 472
3 CZ056-67058 Curing general module on page 474
4 CZ056-67056 Curing left module on page 475
5 CZ056-67059 Curing latch on page 476
6 CZ056-67060 Curing linear guide kit on page 476
7 – Curing bottom plate (design 1) *
8 CZ056-67427 Curing bottom plate with ribs (design 2) (Curing bottom plate assembly on page 477)
CZ056-67314 Curing cables kit on page 479, includes data cable from curing PCA to curing PCA (CZ056-50019) (×5),
curing data cable (CZ056-50051), fan cable (CZ056-50120), DC curing module to curing module
(CZ056-50219), heater cable (CZ056-50121), AC curing module to curing module (CZ056-50218), ground
strip (CZ056-50124), short ground strip (CZ056-50213), and curing ground (CZ056-50125)
CZ056-67256 Curing power input DC cables kit on page 487, includes e-cabinet to air connector cable (CZ056-50232)
and air connector to curing PCA cable (CZ056-50068)
CZ056-67259 Curing power input AC cables kit on page 488, includes air connector to curing PCA cable (CZ056-50067)
and e-cabinet to air connector cable (CZ056-50231)
* Because of the necessary removal of the entire bottom plate assembly, it does not include its
corresponding service part in design 1. Therefore, you must follow the upgrade instructions for both the
diverter and the bottom module assemblies. If you have an affected curing bottom plate assembly that
belongs to design 1, see the diverter and bottom plate upgrade kit.
ENWW Curing (1) 413

Curing (2)
1 CZ056-67384 Curing and vapor removal PCA on page 490
2 CZ056-67054 Curing heater and fan module on page 468
3 CZ056-67055 Curing temperature sensor kit on page 471

Carriage (1)
1 CZ056-67407 Crash sensor lenses on page 440
2 CZ056-67408 Crash sensor right assembly on page 441
3 CZ056-67010 Carriage encoder assembly on page 435
4 CZ056-67007 Spectrophotometer sensor on page 430
5 CZ056-67006 Line sensor on page 428
6 CZ056-67409 Crash sensor left assembly on page 442
7 CZ056-67371 Printhead interconnect optimizer PCA on page 462
8 CZ056-67372 Printhead interconnect color PCA on page 464
9 CZ056-67396 Primer and latch on page 432
10 CZ056-67011 Printhead pocket on page 436
11 CZ056-67406 Crash sensor amplifier and cable on page 438, includes one carriage crash sensor amplifier and one fiber-
optic to drying PCA cable (CZ056-50265)
ENWW Carriage (1) 415

Carriage (2)
1 CZ056-67410 Carriage Rail Cleaning Tool (CRCT)
2 CZ056-67373 Carriage interconnect PCA on page 465
3 CZ056-67018 Carriage bushing kit on page 451
4 CZ056-67413 Oil cups
5 CZ056-67311 Carriage oiling felts kit and carriage oiling foams kit on page 453
6 CZ056-67295 Carriage rear oiler assembly on page 447
7 CZ056-67019 Carriage tower on page 461; removal and installation of this service part also requires the materials
included in the following kits: tubes repair kit (CZ056-67320), flush kit (Q6702-60679), and purge kit
(CZ056-67218)
8 CZ056-67389 Fiber-optics PCA on page 466
CZ056-67015 Carriage cables kit on page 443, includes carriage to printhead interconnect PCA power cable
(CZ056-50006) (×2), carriage to printhead interconnect PCA short power cable (CZ056-50186) (×4),
carriage to printhead interconnect PCA long power cable (CZ056-50187), sensor box cable (CZ056-50007),
carriage to printhead interconnect PCA data cable (CZ056-50004) (×3), spray to spray cable
(CZ056-50011) (×4), carriage encoder cable (CZ056-50005), drying to fiber-optics PCA (Slinky) power
cable (CZ056-50244), drying PCA to carriage sensor power cable (CZ056-50243), line sensor cable
(CZ056-50010), printhead to fiber-optics PCA data cable (CZ056-50198), LAN cable between drying PCAs
(CZ056-50016), curing encoder daisy-chain cable (CZ056-50137), and drying PCA to drying PCA fiber-optic
cable (CZ056-50264)

Human-machine interface
1 Q6703-67100 Webcam (H2W19AA#ABB) on page 587
2 Q6703-67101 Webcam USB extension cable (8121-1202) on page 588
3 CZ056-67163 Internal Print Server computer (A3L24PA#AB4) on page 586
4 CZ056-67164 Internal Print Server monitor (C9V75AA#AB4) on page 587
ENWW Human-machine interface 417

Miscellaneous parts
CZ056-67395 PCA fuses kit

7 Removal and installation
● Required tools
● Aerosol removal
● Carriage
● Curing
● Drying
● E-box
● E-cabinet
● Human-Machine Interface
● Impelling
● Industrial design covers
● Ink system module
● Internal Print Server computer installation and setup
● Service station: capping and drop detector
● Substrate path
● Tube Routing System (TRS)
● Vapor removal
ENWW 419
Required tools
The following tools are required to perform the procedures described in this chapter.
and Ink System Module (ISM)
Electrical system (e-box and

Drying and aerosol removal
Industrial design covers
Scan axis – impelling

Service station
Substrate path
Vapor removal
e-cabinet)
Carriage
Curing
Required tool Comments
Flat-end screwdriver Used for both the e-cabinet
with a tip wider than small potientometer
4 mm but no wider than adjustment and plastic tabs X X X
5 mm. removal
L-shaped wrench X X X X X
Used mainly to reach some
Long screwdriver
difficult screws X
Used for some carriage
Tweezers cable connector X
replacements
Pliers Used for removing pins X
Used to remove the PPS
Loctite
screw X
Silicone (use DOW
CORNING 732 MULTI-
PURPOSE SEALANT or
Mainly used for air isolations X X X X
equivalent)
Aluminum tape Mainly used for air isolations X
Mainly used to label either
Markers for both metal cables or ink tubes. Also
and plastic surfaces used to locate the screws X X X X X
along the pinch beam.
Mainly used for the Igus
chain trailing cables, either
Plastic-headed hammer
ink tubes or the substrate- X X X
path side plate replacements
Mainly used for the roll-to-
Jack free-fall pinch mechanical X
assembly replacement
Flush kit (Q6702-60679) Mainly used for ink system
(includes a tube cutter) X X
procedures
Purge kit (CZ056-67218)
(includes protective NOTE: These can also be X X
gloves) used for other procedures,
Tubes repair kit (CZ056- such as drop detector
67320) cleaning procedures or
(includes purge cleaning carriage procedures that
X X
cloth) need to flush, cut, and purge
Coat the ink tubes. X X X
Multimeter set to
measure DC voltage X
Mainly used for electrical
Smart Phillips
system replacement and
screwdriver to adjust a
trimmer (small
check procedures. X
potentiometer)
The standard set of tools
(Torx screwdriver, flanges, For general usage X
Allen keys, hex keys, etc.)
420 Chapter 7 Removal and installation ENWW

Aerosol removal
Aerosol top case assembly
Prepare to replace the aerosol fans module
1. Ensure that you have the Aerosol Fan Module (CZ056-67246), which is included in the Standard Uptime
Kit (D4J02A).
2. Ensure that the printer is not printing.
3. Ensure that all windows, covers, and doors are closed and remain in their original position.
4. Move the carriage to the repair position. See How to run a diagnostic test on page 341.
5. Turn off the printer in the correct way for maintenance operations.
6. Stand on the folding steps and open the service position window.
Replace the aerosol fan module

1. Open the aerosol fan cover, as if you were going to replace the filters.
2. Remove the three screws that attach the cover, and remove the cover.
3. Disconnect the two aerosol fan cable connectors.
ENWW Aerosol removal 421

4. Remove the main cable harness from the cover slot.
5. Close the cover and remove the nuts from the hinges. You must hold the nuts to prevent them from
falling and get lost inside the carriage.
6. Remove the aerosol fan module and insert the new one.
7. Put the hinges back in place, put back the nuts and tighten them.
8. Open the new aerosol fan cover.
9. Remove the three screws that attach the new fan cover, and remove the cover.
10. Connect the two aerosol fan cable connectors.
11. Route the main cable harness and insert the grommet in the cover slot. Make sure the cables are not
tight inside the cover.
12. Install the aerosol fan cover and attach the three screws.
13. Close the cover.

Finish off replacing the aerosol fan module
1. Close the service position window.
CAUTION: Do not leave anything in the way of the carriage.
2. Turn on the printer in the correct way for maintenance operations.
3. Run a diagnostic test to check that the aerosol fans are working correctly.
4. Dispose of the old aerosol module fans.
Aerosol box assembly

Removal
2. Turn off the printer and the power-enable switch.
4. Remove all printheads from the carriage and store them in their caps.
5. Disconnect the aerosol cable from the aerosol harness cable.
6. Remove the aerosol removal module.
7. Remove the pointed T-20 screws from the aerosol module supports.
NOTE: When removing the T-20 screws from the rear support, be careful with the holder amplifier and
its support, which are also attached to the carriage through these screws.
Installation
1. Install the new aerosol removal module from the repair kit.
2. Screw back the supports and reconnect both aerosol removal cables.
Aerosol cables kit


Aerosol harness (CZ056-50240)
1. Disconnect the aerosol cable from the aerosol harness cable.
2. Open the aerosol fan cover, as if you were going to replace the filters.
3. Remove the three screws that attach the cover using a hex key M5, and remove the cover.
4. Disconnect the two aerosol fan cable connectors and the pressure sensor connector.
5. Remove the aerosol harness from the cover slot.
6. Reconnect and reroute the new aerosol harness.
CAUTION: When reconnecting the aerosol module cables, ensure that they are properly connected to
the corresponding drying PCA; see Drying PCA on page 522.
Aerosol cable (CZ056-50241)

1. Disconnect the aerosol cable from the aerosol module and unroute it.
2. Disconnect the aerosol cable from the drying PCA (AEROSOL_EXT connector).
3. Reroute the aerosol cable and connect it back to both aerosol harness cable and drying PCA
(AEROSOL_EXT connector).
CAUTION: When reconnecting the aerosol module cables, ensure that they are properly connected to
the corresponding drying PCA. See Drying PCA on page 522.
Aerosol pressure sensor

Removal

4. Remove all printheads from the carriage and store them in their caps
5. Disconnect the aerosol harness from the pressure sensor.

6. Remove the tube connected to the pressure sensor.
7. Remove the pressure sensor from the aerosol removal module.
Installation
1. Connect the new pressure sensor to the aerosol harness, then put the pressure sensor into place.

NOTE: The pressure sensor connector has no latch, so it is important to ensure that it is correctly
connected.
2. Connect the tube to the Lo port of the pressure sensor.
CAUTION: When reconnecting any aerosol module cable, ensure that it is properly connected to the
corresponding drying PCA. See Drying PCA on page 522.

Carriage
Line sensor
Removal
5. Remove the four T-20 screws and the line sensor cover.

6. Disconnect the line sensor cable.
7. Cut the flanges and remove them from the wrap tie holder. Unroute the cable.
8. Remove the T-10 screw that secures the line sensor.
ENWW Carriage 429

9. Remove the line sensor.
Installation
1. Place the new part into position.
2. Route the line sensor cable and tighten the cable to the tie-wrap holder, located at the printhead
interconnect color PCA3 cover (PH3). Connect the line sensor cable to the printhead interconnect color
PCA3 (PH3).
NOTE: The line sensor cable (CZ056-50010) is not easy to route because it has a rigid part followed by
a ferrite and a thin white strip. In addition, you are recommended to be careful when routing the cable
because of the printhead latches. Also be careful when connecting the cable strip so that it is well
oriented: the connectors side must be up when placing it into the printhead interconnect color PCA3
(PH3).
3. Perform the following reset procedures:
● Line sensor calibration (see Table 5-12 Carriage sensors on page 365)
● Line sensor to black
● Line sensor field of view
Spectrophotometer sensor
Removal
2. Move the carriage beam to the substrate load position.

6. Remove the right aerosol removal assembly. See Aerosol removal on page 421.
NOTE: If the aerosol removal assembly is not removed before replacing the spectrophotometer
sensor, it is possible to break either the aerosol removal pressure sensor or the air fitting from its cover
(and consequently to have air pressure problems at the right aerosol removal).
7. Remove the five pointed screws and the carriage-tower cover.
8. Disconnect the sensor box cable (CZ056-50007) from the carriage interconnect PCA UP (TO SENSORS
BOX connector). See Board name: Carriage Interconnect PCA on page 296.
NOTE: The cable is rigid, so it is important not to twist it too much, and not to force its connectors. Be
careful also not to pinch the cable with any latch since it is routed between them.
9. Remove the two T-10 screws from the spectophotometer sensor cover. Remove the two T-20 screws
that hold the cover to the base plate, and remove the cover.
10. Remove the two T-20 screws that hold the spectrophotometer sensor PCA to the baseplate.
ENWW Carriage 431

11. Remove the two T-20 screws that hold the spectrophotometer sensor to the baseplate.
12. Remove the spectrophotometer sensor assembly.
Installation
1. Screw back the spectrophotometer sensor to the baseplate.
2. Screw back the two T-20 screws that hold the spectrophotometer sensor PCA to the baseplate.
3. Screw back the two T-20 screws that hold the spectrophotometer sensor cover to the baseplate and
screw back the two T-10 screws.
4. Route and connect the sensor box cable (CZ056-50007) to the carriage interconnect PCA UP (TO
SENSORS BOX connector). See Board name: Carriage Interconnect PCA on page 296.
NOTE: Be careful when replacing the spectophotometer sensor assembly and its PCA that the cables
that connect the two are not excessively tight.
5. Screw back the carriage-tower cover.
6. Perform the reset procedure calibrate spectrophotometer sensor. See How to run a diagnostic test
on page 341.
Primer and latch

Prepare to replace a primer
1. Ensure that you have the Primer and Latch Kit (CZ056-67396), which is included in the Standard Uptime
Kit (D4J02A).

Replace a primer
1. Disconnect the primer cable. You have to disconnect a white connector that you can find at the back of
the printhead.
2. Open the latch. It is not usually necessary to remove the printhead.
ENWW Carriage 433

3. Remove the latch of the printhead whose primer is to be replaced. To remove it, you have to push open
the printhead pocket wall to the right while pulling the latch up.
4. Stick the corresponding printhead color label on the latch. Be careful with the orientation.
5. Install the new latch with primer.
6. Replace the printhead, if it was removed, and close the latch.
Finish off replacing a primer
3. Perform the primer pumps calibration procedure. See How to run a diagnostic test on page 341.
4. Dispose of the old primer.

Carriage encoder assembly
Removal
1. Move the carriage to the normal position.
4. Remove the three hand-removable nuts that secure the encoder protector, and remove the encoder
protector.
CAUTION: The encoder strip is very sharp. Be careful not to cut yourself. If feasible, wear protective
gloves.
6. Turn on the printer and the power-enable switch.
9. Open the service position window.
11. Remove the rear windows in order to access the whole rear of the encoder. See Impelling encoder strip
on page 596.
12. Disconnect the carriage encoder sensor cable (ENCODER IN) from the printhead interconnect PCA of
primer 6.
13. Unroute the encoder cable from any clips or plastic ties until it reaches the sensor.
14. Remove the T-10 screw that secures the carriage encoder set.
15. Slide the sensor so that its support remains out of the pins until it reaches the gap.
CAUTION: Be careful not to touch the encoder strip when moving the encoder sensor assembly.
gloves.
ENWW Carriage 435

16. Move it straight down through the gap to free it from the encoder strip. If there is not enough free
space, you can try to turn the encoder assembly slightly.
17. Remove the entire assembly.
Installation
1. Replace the encoder assembly.
gloves.
2. Ensure that the assembly is correctly placed, with the encoder strip in the encoder sensor gap.
NOTE: Be careful, when rerouting the encoder sensor cable, to route it safely away from the belt. If
feasible, use flanges to fix it to the carriage.
5. Move the carriage to the normal position.
8. Reinstall the encoder protector.
9. Reinstall the rear windows.
Printhead pocket
Removal
1. Move the carriage to the service position. See How to run a diagnostic test on page 341.

5. Remove eight screws: five at the front and three more on the top of the carriage-tower cover.
NOTE: These are all ferromagnetic screws.
6. Remove the carriage-tower cover by turning it enough to pull it up.
7. Disconnect the primer cable from the printhead interconnect PCA.
ENWW Carriage 437

8. Primers 2 and 4: Remove the four T-20 screws that secure the printhead pocket.
Other primers: Remove the T-10 screws that secure the printhead pocket.
9. Remove the printhead pocket from the carriage.
Installation
1. Insert the new printhead pocket and screw its base to the carriage.
2. If you replaced more than one primer assembly, make sure that you connect the primer cable to the
right connection. See Primer and latch on page 432.
3. Force a priming to ensure that the new primer assembly works.
Crash sensor amplifier and cable

This service part includes one carriage crash sensor amplifier and its fiber-optic cable (CZ056-50265) to the
drying PCA.

Removal
5. Remove the five pointed screws and remove the carriage-tower cover.
6. Remove the rear window panel in order to have free access to both sides of the carriage and reach the
two amplifiers.
7. Disconnect the crash sensor cables from the corresponding drying PCA (PCA UP or DOWN).
8. Unroute the fiber-optic cables (CZ056-50265) from this drying PCA to its crash sensor amplifier. See
Subsystem block diagrams on page 61.
9. Disconnect both fiber-optic cables from the amplifier.
10. Loosen the two aerosol removal T-20 screws that hold the crash sensor amplifier’s support.
11. Remove the amplifier.
12. Remove the two pointed T-20 screws from the front and rear of the carriage.
13. Replace the crash sensor.
Installation
1. Install the new amplifier (if it does not come screwed to the support, reuse the old one).
2. Route the two new fiber-optic cables from the amplifier to their drying PCA (fiber-optic sensor
connector) and connect them correctly.
NOTE: Check which fiber-optic cable connects to which drying PCA: see Drying PCA on page 522.
CAUTION: When connecting the fiber-optic cables to the amplifier, follow this procedure. Pull out the
amplifier’s plastic cover to open it, and pull down the tab located on its corner. Ensure that both fiber-
optic cables reach the top end when inserting them into amplifier IN and OUT connector holes. Push
back the amplifier’s plastic cover to close it.
3. Screw the amplifier to the carriage. If the amplifier does not come with its metal sheet support, reuse
the old support.
4. After re-installing the amplifier, re-install everything else.
5. Turn on the printer and check that the amplifier display value is 2000.
ENWW Carriage 439

The crash sensor amplifier service part comes with its configuration already set. You are recommended to
follow these steps to ensure that the amplifier configuration is correctly set:
1. Press one of the two arrows for 3 seconds, so that the green number in the display will start blinking.
Set the switching threshold to 1000 by using the arrows.
2. Enter the amplifier menu and set the following adjustments (highlighted in green):
3. Block the device by pressing both arrow keys at the same time for 2 seconds.
Crash sensor lenses

Removal

NOTE: The crash sensor lenses are located at bottom front and back corners, at either left or right of
the carriage.
5. Unscrew and remove the lenses.
TIP: If it is difficult to reach the lens, the corresponding drying lamp can be removed before this step.
See Drying NIR lamp on page 496.
TIP: If it is difficult to reach the bottom rear corner of the carriage (in order to unscrew the lens), it can
be done from the rear by first removing the rear window panel.
CAUTION: It is important not to remove the aluminum lens support while it still holds the fiber-optic
cable. Otherwise the fiber-optic cable could suffer too much torque, and break.
Crash sensor right assembly

Removal
1. Move the scan axis to the load position.
two amplifiers.
ENWW Carriage 441

7. Remove the right drying lamp. See Drying NIR lamp on page 496.
8. Disconnect both fiber-optic cables from the right amplifier.
9. Carefully unroute the fiber-optic cables until you reach the crash sensor right assembly support.
CAUTION: It is important not to twist or pinch the fiber-optic cables excessively while manipulating
them. Otherwise the cables could break during routing or unrouting.
10. Remove the four T-20 screws that hold the crash sensor right assembly support to the carriage base.
NOTE: They are located at the bottom of the base.
Installation
1. Replace the crash sensor right assembly with the new one.
2. Route the fiber-optic cables from the crash sensor right assembly to the right amplifier.
3. Connect the fiber-optic cables to the right amplifier.
4. Install the right drying module. See Drying module on page 518.
Crash sensor left assembly

Removal
two amplifiers.
7. Remove the left drying lamp. See Drying NIR lamp on page 496.

8. Disconnect both fiber-optic cables from the left amplifier.
9. Carefully unroute the fiber-optic cables until you reach the crash sensor left assembly support.
10. Remove the four T-20 screws that hold the crash sensor left assembly support to the carriage base.
NOTE: They are located at the bottom of the base.
Installation
1. Replace the crash sensor left assembly with the new one.
2. Route the fiber-optic cables from the crash sensor left assembly to the left amplifier.
3. Connect the fiber-optic cables to the left amplifier.
4. Install the left drying module. See Drying module on page 518.
Carriage cables kit

Removal
7. Disconnect and replace the cables as follows.
ENWW Carriage 443

Carriage to printhead interconnect PCA power cable (×2) (CZ056-50006)
1. Remove the six T-20 screws from the carriage interconnect PCA cover, so that you can reach both
carriage interconnect PCAs.
2. Disconnect the carriage to printhead interconnect PCA’s power cable from both the carriage
interconnect PCA (SPRAY#1 (J27) connector) and the printhead interconnect PCA (POWER (J5)
connector).
3. Unroute the cable (cut the flanges if necessary).
4. Replace the cable with the new one, route it, and connect it.
Carriage to printhead interconnect PCA short power cable (×4) (CZ056-50186)

1. Disconnect the carriage to printhead interconnect PCA’s short power cable from both the carriage
interconnect PCA (SPRAY#2 (J28) or SPRAY#3 (J29) connectors) and the printhead interconnect PCA
(POWER (J5) connector).
Carriage to printhead interconnect PCA long power cable (×2) (CZ056-50187)

1. Remove the six T-20 screws from the carriage interconnect PCA cover, so that you can reach both
carriage interconnect PCAs.
2. Disconnect the carriage to printhead interconnect PCA’s long power cable from both the carriage
interconnect PCA (SPRAY#4 (J32) connector) and the printhead interconnect PCA (POWER (J5)
connector).
Sensor box cable (CZ056-50007)

1. Remove the six T-20 screws from the carriage interconnect PCA cover, so you can reach both carriage
interconnect PCAs.
2. Disconnect the sensor box cable from both the carriage interconnect PCA 1 (TO SENSORS BOX
connector) and the sensor interconnect PCA (<NAME> connector).
NOTE: The cable is rigid, so it is important not to twist it too much, and not to force its connectors.
Carriage to printhead interconnect PCA data cable (×3) (CZ056-50004)
1. Remove the six T-20 screws from the carriage interconnect PCA cover, so you can reach both carriage
interconnect PCAs.
2. Disconnect the carriage to printhead interconnect PCA’s data cable from both the carriage interconnect
PCA (FROM SPRAY PCA 1 or FROM SPRAY PCA 2 connectors) and the printhead interconnect PCA 3, 5, or 7
(CARRIAGE SENSOR (J2) connector).

Spray-to-spray cable (×3?) (CZ056-50011)
1. Disconnect the spray-to-spray cable at both ends.
NOTE: This cable chain is routed as follows; see also Subsystem block diagrams on page 61.
● Drying PCA 2 (ENC_IN connector) > printhead interconnect PCA 1 (ENCODER OUT connector)
● Printhead interconnect PCA 1 (ENCODER IN connector) > printhead interconnect 2 (ENCODER OUT
connector)
connector)
connector)
Carriage encoder cable (CZ056-50005)
1. Disconnect the carriage encoder cable from both the printhead interconnect PCA 6 (ENCODER IN
connector) and the encoder SAX.
TIP: The cable is thin and tiny, so you may need to use tweezers.
NOTE: Be careful when connecting back the cable. Although its connector is pokayoke, as it is so tiny it
can be forced to enter the wrong way round. The correct position is shown below.
Drying to fiber-optics PCA power cable (CZ056-50244)

1. Disconnect the drying to fiber-optics PCA’s power cable from both the drying PCA UP (J3 out power
connector) and the fiber-optics PCA (J24 is the in power connector and J26 is the jumper).
NOTE: It is important to ensure that both fiber-optic connectors (shown below) are correctly
connected to the fiber-optics PCA. Otherwise, the printer will return an error.
ENWW Carriage 445

Drying PCA to carriage-sensors power cable (CZ056-50243)
1. Disconnect the drying PCA to carriage sensors’ power cable from both the drying PCA (12V_CS
connector) and its corresponding carriage interconnect PCA (24V POWER connector).
Line sensor cable (CZ056-50010)

1. Disconnect the line sensor cable from both the printhead interconnect PCA 3 (TETRIS (J6) connector)
and the line sensor.
TIP: The line sensor cable is not easy to route because it has a rigid part followed by a ferrite and a
thin white strip. Be careful when routing the cable because of the printhead latches. Also take care
when connecting the cable strip that it is well oriented: the connectors side must be up when placing it
into the printhead interconnect color PCA3 (PH3).
Printhead to fiber-optics PCA data cable (CZ056-50198)
NOTE: This cable can replace both CZ056-50198 and CZ056-50199 cables.
1. Disconnect the printhead to fiber-optics PCA data cable from both the printhead interconnect PCA
(DATA TRAILING connector) and its connector on the fiber-optics PCA
(JXX connector, where XX = 11, 8, 14, 10, 16, 9, and 15; for printhead interconnects PCA 1 to 7). See also
2. Cut and unroute the cable (cut the flanges if necessary).
3. Replace the cable with the new one, routing it along the outer side of the FI tower, through either the
left or the right side flanges, and reconnect the data cable.
LAN cable between drying PCAs (CZ056-50016)

1. Disconnect the LAN cable between drying PCAs from both drying PCAs (J12 connector). See Subsystem
block diagrams on page 61.
Curing encoder daisy chain cable (CZ056-50137)

1. Disconnect the curing encoder daisy chain cable from both drying PCAs (ENC_IN connector for drying
PCA UP and ENC_OUT connector for drying PCA DOWN). See Subsystem block diagrams on page 61.
NOTE: Be careful when connecting the curing encoder daisy chain cable not to mismatch both ends.
The end connector of the cable with 5 pins is connected to the drying PCA UP (ENC_IN connector), while
the other cable end, with 4 pins on its connector, is connected to the drying PCA DOWN (ENC_OUT
connector).

Drying PCA to drying PCA fiber-optic cable (CZ056-50264)
1. Disconnect the drying PCA to drying PCA fiber-optic cable from both drying PCAs (TO/FROM TWIN PCA
connectors).
Carriage rear oiler assembly

Rear oiler foam removal
1. Locate the rear oiler foam in the carriage.
2. Slide off the cover of the rear oiler foam.
3. Remove the old foam.
ENWW Carriage 447

4. Remove the two screws that attach the black oiler holder to the carriage, and pull the holder out of the
carriage
5. Remove the used wicks.
Rear oiler foam installation

1. Insert the new wicks.

Check that the wicks are inserted correctly.
2. Put the black oiler holder back into position. The holder has two pins to locate it properly.
ENWW Carriage 449

3. Check again that the new wicks are inserted correctly.
4. Tighten the screws.
5. Insert the new foam.
6. Slide in the cover.
9. Move the carriage back to the normal position.

12. Move the carriage beam back to its working position (this takes about 2 minutes).
Carriage bushing kit

Removal
Rear left bushing assembly

1. Remove the ISM assembly.
2. Remove the impelling carriage belt. See Impelling carriage belt assembly on page 599.
3. Remove the three T-25 screws and the Igus end cover.
4. Remove the four T-30 screws that secure the carriage Igus chain.
5. Disconnect and unroute the trailing cables from the carriage printhead interconnect to the chain
assembly.
6. Remove the left side plate of the scan axis.
7. Slide out the carriage assembly.
NOTE: The carriage assembly is heavy.
NOTE: Do not try to save time by just sliding the bushing out from the carriage, as you could damage
the rear right bushing.
8. Place the carriage on a table.
9. Remove the rear left bushing assembly T-10 screws from the carriage.
10. Slide out the rear left bushing assembly and replace it with the new one.
ENWW Carriage 451

Front bushing assembly
3. Remove the four T-30 screws that secure the Igus chain.
assembly.
8. Remove the screw indicated below.
9. Remove the front bushing assembly.
Rear right bushing assembly

3. Remove the four T-30 screws that secure the carriage Igus chain.
assembly.

8. Remove the rear right bushing assembly T-10 screws from the carriage.
9. Slide out the rear right bushing assembly and replace it with the new one.
Carriage oiling felts kit and carriage oiling foams kit

NOTE: Oiling felts and oiler wicks are the same service parts.
Front oiler foam removal

1. Ensure that you have the Oiler Foams Kit included in the HP Latex 3000 Printer Cleaning Kit, provided
with your printer.
2. Take the replacement oiler foams and wicks from the kit.
4. You are recommended to wear gloves.
ENWW Carriage 453

9. Locate the front oiler foam in the carriage.
10. Unlock the window.
11. Open the window.
12. Slide off the cover of the front oiler foam.

14. Remove the old wicks.
Front oiler foam installation

ENWW Carriage 455

3. Put back the cover.
Rear oiler foam removal
1. Locate the rear oiler foam in the carriage.

2. Slide off the cover of the rear oiler foam.
4. Remove the two screws that attach the black oiler holder to the carriage, and pull the holder out of the
carriage
ENWW Carriage 457

5. Remove the used wicks.
Rear oiler foam installation

Check that the wicks are inserted correctly.

2. Put the black oiler holder back into position. The holder has two pins to locate it properly.
3. Check again that the new wicks are inserted correctly.
4. Tighten the screws.
ENWW Carriage 459

6. Slide in the cover.
9. Move the carriage back to the normal position.
Clean the carriage rails
3. Move the carriage beam to its highest position (this takes about 2 minutes).
5. Open the front door.
6. Standing at the front of the printer, clean the front rail using a lint-free cloth dampened with isopropyl
alcohol.
NOTE: If you are in an area (such as California) that regulates VOC cleaning and maintenance fluids,
instead of isopropyl alcohol use a VOC-certified cleaner such as a properly diluted Simple Green All-
Purpose Cleaner.

7. Close the front door.
8. Go to the rear of the printer and open the loading table.
9. Standing at the rear of the printer, clean the rear rail in the same way. You can access the rail from
below, through the gap between the platen and the beam.
CAUTION: Be careful not to stain the encoder strip. Keep the cloth well away from the encoder
housing.
10. Ensure that the cleaned parts are completely dry and all vapor has completely evaporated.
11. Close the loading table.
14. Move the carriage beam back to its working position (this takes about 2 minutes).
Carriage tower
Removal
1. Remove the carriage assembly from the printer.
4. Disconnect all the cables that come through the Igus chain. See Subsystem block diagrams on page 61.
5. Remove the two drying PCAs (see Drying PCA on page 522) and the fiber-optics PCA (see Fiber-optics
PCA on page 466).
NOTE: When removing the fiber-optic cable, be careful not to pinch or twist it excessively. Otherwise it
can easily break.
6. Remove both carriage interconnect PCAs. See Carriage interconnect PCA on page 465
NOTE: It is important to label all the cables or keep them properly identified; so that, when they are
reconnected, there will not be any cable mismatched or connected to the wrong connector or PCA. See
ENWW Carriage 461

7. Hold the ink tubes routed through the carriage tower to the Igus chain while removing the twenty T-20
screws that hold together the tower sheets, so that you can open the carriage tower and reach the ink
tubes and cables routed through it.
8. Remove the twelve T-20 screws that hold the support plate and the carriage tower to the carriage
baseplate.
baseplate, and replace the tower and support plate with the new one while you carefully route the ink
tubes through the carriage tower.
Installation
1. Screw back the support plate to the carriage baseplate.
NOTE: If the new carriage tower does not come with all the cable plastic ties, reuse them from the old
carriage tower assembly.
2. Carefully reroute the ink tubes and cables through the tower assembly. See Subsystem block diagrams
on page 61.
3. Screw back the tower sheet, so that the ink tubes and the cables are held vertically through the carriage
tower.
4. Install the two drying PCAs and the fiber-optics PCA and reconnect all the corresponding cables. See
5. Screw back both carriage interconnect PCAs and reconnect all the carriage cables. See Subsystem block
diagrams on page 61.
6. Screw back the cable cover sheet.
7. Install the carriage assembly into the printer.
8. Remove all printheads from their caps and install them into their pockets in the carriage.
9. Carefully unroute the ink tubes and cables from the tower assembly.
baseplate.
Printhead interconnect optimizer PCA

Removal

5. Disconnect the data trailing cable, the power cable from the printhead interconnect optimizer PCA and
the two spray-to-spray cables (one connects to the drying PCA DOWN and the other connects to the
printhead interconnect color PCA 2).
ENWW Carriage 463

6. Remove the two M3 pointed screws with a flat screwdriver and remove the printhead interconnect
optimizer PCA assembly from the carriage.
NOTE: This PCA is located between the drying and the aerosol removal left modules, and it is screwed
to the Primer 1. See Subsystem block diagrams on page 61.
Printhead interconnect color PCA

Removal

5. Disconnect both the data trailing cable and the power cable from the printhead interconnect color PCA.
NOTE: Depending on the printhead interconnect color PCA, it may also be necessary to disconnect the
line sensor cable (CZ056-50010, connected to PH3), the spray-to-spray cables (CZ056-50011,
connected to PH1, PH2, PH4, and PH6), or the carriage encoder cable (CZ056-50005, connected to PH6).
6. Remove the two M3 pointed screws with a flat screwdriver and remove the printhead interconnect color
PCA assembly from the carriage.
NOTE: These PCAs are located at the carriage base, between both aerosol removal modules, and they
are screwed to Primers 2 to 7. See Subsystem block diagrams on page 61.
Carriage interconnect PCA

Removal
ENWW Carriage 465

7. Disconnect the carriage interconnect PCA cables from the PCA.
NOTE: It is important to label all the cables or keep them properly identified; so that, when they are
reconnected, there will not be any cable mismatched or connected to the wrong connector or PCA. See
NOTE: The following table shows the equivalences between the carriage interconnect PCA locations
and their ID.
Carriage interconnect
ID 1 2
Carriage tower location UP / LEFT DOWN / RIGHT
8. Remove the seven T-10 screws from the carriage interconnect PCA.
Installation
1. When installing the new carriage Interconnect PCAs, perform the removal steps in reverse to position
the carriage interconnect PCA and reconnect its cables.
Fiber-optics PCA
Removal

7. Disconnect the data and power cables from the fiber-optics PCA.
CAUTION: Do not remove the fiber-optic cable from the fiber-optics PCA (which could break the cable).
8. Remove the seven T-10 screws that hold the fiber-optics PCA.
9. Remove the fiber-optics PCA, while simultaneously disconnecting the fiber-optics PCA from the fiber-
optic cable connector by sliding the PCA connector out of the cable’s connector.
CAUTION: Do not remove the fiber-optic cable from the fiber-optics PCA (which could break the cable).
ENWW Carriage 467

Curing
Curing heater and fan module
Prepare to replace a curing fan and resistor module
1. Ensure that you have the Curing Heater and Fan Module Kit (CZ056-67054), which is included in the
Standard Uptime Kit (D4J02A).
4. Wait for the curing modules to cool down.
Replace a curing fan and resistor module


2. Use a flat screwdriver to remove the screws of the curing module.
3. Raise the metal sheet in order to reach the interior of the module.
ENWW Curing 469

4. Disconnect the two cables shown in the picture. You have to press the retention clip on each of the two
connectors, and gently pull the cable. The black one is for the DC fans supply and the white one is for AC
power to the curing heaters.
5. Use a flat screwdriver to remove the screws of the fan-resistor module.
6. Remove the fan-resistor module.

7. Put the new fan-resistor module into position.
8. Screw in the screw and connect the two cables to each fan-resistor module.
9. Close the metal sheet and replace the screws to secure it.
Finish off after replacing a curing fan and resistor module
Curing temperature sensor kit

Removal
ENWW Curing 471

3. Remove the four pointed T-20 screws and open the curing PCA cover.
4. Disconnect the temperature sensor cable from the curing PCA.
5. Remove the pointed screws using a flat screwdriver and pull out the curing service inner cover.
6. Remove the curing fan heater assembly from both curing chambers.
7. Unroute the temperature sensor cable from its supports to the curing PCA, looping through both covers
by the left cables’ routing.
8. Disconnect the temperature sensor from the curing PCA.
Installation
1. Be careful when replacing the temperature sensor: it is important to leave the sensor free on air, but
also to route the temperature sensor cable correctly, looping along the temperature sensor support.
2. Check the status of the curing modules. See Table 5-18 Curing on page 370.
NOTE: You can check all the curing modules, or one particular module.
Curing right module

Removing the curing module assembly
3. Pull the curing module to the service position.
4. For the right module, remove the two T-25 screws and open the cable covers.

5. For the right module, remove the four T-20 screws and the curing PCA cover. Disconnect the LAN cable
from the curing PCA at LAN connector (J12).
6. Disconnect all the cable air connections on module 1 and unroute for module 1 those cables that keep
on routing to module 2.
7. Cut the flanges that hold the routing curing cables along the cable bundler cover, and unroute those
cables.
8. Remove the four pointed T-20 screws and the vapor removal mobile collector.
9. Remove the six pointed screws and the vapor removal motion curing box.
10. Push back the curing module to the carpet position and close both clamps.
NOTE: It is recommended to screw back both the cable cover and the curing PCA cover before
removing the curing module assembly, in order to make the removal of the curing module easier to
handle.
11. Carefully open the curing module assembly and remove the three screws that hold the left upper curing
slide support to the sideplate.
12. Move the curing module assembly back to the carpet position and remove the two remaining screws
from the left upper curing slide support.
13. Loosen the right upper curing slide support (T-20 screws).
14. Slide a flange through the left upper curing slide support and the left curing side plate and tighten it in
order to disable linear guide movement.
15. Repeat the same operation to tighten the right linear guide with a flange.
NOTE: The following operations require at least two people. Holding and removing the curing module
assembly must be done with caution, as it is too large and heavy for one person.
16. Open both clamps and hold the curing module assembly on both sides, by holding the upper beam and
the clamp.
17. Pull the curing module slightly to the left in order to free the right side from the T-20 screws.
18. Carefully slide the module out, holding it by the clamp and the upper position on both sides.
19. Leave the curing module assembly on a flat surface.
Removing the curing right module

1. Remove the three HEX screws, and the six screws that hold the lower beam to the right curing external
sideplate.
2. Remove the right curing external sideplate from the curing module assembly.
3. For the right module, remove the two T-25 screws and open their cable covers.
4. For the right module, remove the four T-20 screws and the curing PCA cover.
5. Disconnect and unroute all the cables routed along the right curing module (the cables that go from the
right module to the central top right module 2) in order to be able to remove the module separately.
ENWW Curing 473

6. The following picture shows the criteria that must be followed when removing the curing modules
(from right to left):
7. For the right module, remove the ground short.
8. Remove the right module by pulling it to the right.
IMPORTANT: Do not touch or remove the pins from their location when replacing any module, in order
not to modify the calibration along the guides during the replacement procedure.
Installation
1. To install back the side plate it is important to close the vapor removal guide properly with silicone in
order not to have any air leakage.
Curing general module

Removal
2. Remove the curing module assembly.
3. Remove the three HEX screws, and the six screws that hold the lower beam to the right curing external
sideplate.
5. For each module, from the right to the required module, remove the two T-25 screws and open their
cable covers.
6. For each module, from the right to the required module, remove the four T-20 screws and the curing
PCA cover.
7. Disconnect and unroute all the cables routed along the curing modules in order to be able to remove the
modules separately.
8. The following picture shows the criteria that must be followed when removing the curing modules, from
right to left:
9. For each module, from the right to the required module, remove the ground short cable.

11. Remove the subsequent modules by sliding them to the right.
Installation
1. When reinstalling the side plate, it is important to close the vapor removal guide properly with silicone
in order not to have any air leakage.
TIP: It is strongly recommended to use Dow Corning 732 Multi-Purpose Sealant.
Curing left module

Removal
3. Remove the three HEX screws, and the six screws that hold the lower beam from both the right curing
external sideplate.
5. For all the modules, going from right to left, remove the two T-25 screws and open their cable covers.
6. For all the modules, going from right to left, remove the four T-20 screws and the curing PCA cover.
7. Disconnect and unroute all the cables routed along the curing modules (which means removing the
entire cable routing) in order to be able to remove all the modules separately.
8. The following picture shows the criteria that must be followed when removing the curing modules, from
right to left:
9. For all modules, remove the ground short cable.
11. Remove the subsequent modules by sliding them to the right.
ENWW Curing 475

Installation
Curing latch
Removal
3. Open both curing latches.
5. Remove the two pointed T-20 screws and replace the latch.
Curing linear guide kit

Removal
3. Remove the screws that hold the linear guide to the external sideplate and the curing slide support.
4. Replace the linear guide.
Curing bracket pin support kit


Removing an upper pin

1. Remove the two T-25 screws and open the cable covers of the module you are working on.
2. Remove the pin support screws with an HEX key.
IMPORTANT: Do not touch or remove the modules when replacing any pin support, in order not to modify
the calibration along the guides during the replacement procedure.
IMPORTANT: Do not remove more than one pin at a time, in order not to affect the calibration along the
curing beams.
Removing a lower pin

1. Remove the pointed screws using a flat screwdriver in order open the curing service Inner cover and
reach the lower pins of the module you are working on.
2. Remove the pin support screws with an HEX key.
IMPORTANT: Do not touch or remove the modules when replacing any pin support, in order not to modify
the calibration along the guides during the replacement procedure.
IMPORTANT: Do not remove more than one pin at a time, in order not to affect the calibration along the
curing beams.
Installation
TIP: It is strongly recommended to use Dow Corning 732 Multi-Purpose Sealant.
Curing bottom plate assembly

Removal part 1
ENWW Curing 477

3. Open both curing latches.
4. Pull the curing module to the substrate load position and remove any substrate.
5. Push the curing module assembly back to the closed position and remove the flat Phillips M6 screw
from each dolly (left and right).
6. Perform the following steps, depending on the curing bottom plate design. There are two different
designs for the curing bottom plate assembly:
● Design 1, used in printers manufactured before November 2013
● Design 2, used in printers manufactured after November 2013 (the exact manufacturing date and
the serial number of the first printer using design 2 will be included in a service newsletter, around
November 2013)
Removal part 2 (design 1)

The curing bottom plate’s design 1 does not include any row of plastic ribs on its assembly.
1. Remove the curing module assembly. See Curing left module on page 475 and Curing right module
on page 472.
2. Remove the Torx M3 screws that fix the bottom plates to the upper and lower diverter modules.
3. Remove the bottom plate assembly.
NOTE: When removing the bottom plate, you are recommended to remove the three panels from the
ISM side to the e-cabinet side (from left to right). When installing, follow the reverse order, from right to
left, from the e-cabinet side to the ISM side.
Removal part 2 (design 2)

The curing bottom plate’s design 2 includes two rows of plastic ribs on its assembly.
1. Remove the curing module assembly. See Curing left module on page 475 and Curing right module
on page 472.
2. Remove the Torx M3 screws that fix the bottom plates to the upper and lower diverters.
3. Remove the bottom plate assembly.
NOTE: When removing the bottom plate, you are recommended to remove the three panels from the
ISM side to the e-cabinet side (from left to right). When installing, follow the reverse order, from right to
left, from the e-cabinet side to the ISM side.

NOTE: To replace any rib of the curing bottom plate assembly, it is necessary to remove the entire
curing bottom plate, so that the screws hidden backwards, that attach the ribs to the curing bottom
plate, are accessible.
Installation (design 2)
1. Perform the opposite procedure to install the curing bottom plate assembly.
CAUTION: Ensure that both Torx M6 screws are replaced at the ends of the curing linear guides;
otherwise, the guide lines can break easily.
2. If there has been a curing bottom plate upgrade from design 1 to design 2, perform the set curing
bottom plate diagnostic so that the printer is aware of the change. See Table 5-23 Utilities on page 375.
Curing cables kit

Curing data cable (CZ056-50051)
Removal
2. Remove the rear right panel. See Rear right panel assembly on page 624.
3. Remove the front right panel. See Front right panel assembly on page 623.
4. Open the printhead cleaning system door.
6. Open both curing module assembly latches.
8. Remove the two T-25 screws and, for module 1, open the cable cover.
9. Disconnect the cable at both ends (the e-box connector and the air connector).
10. Unroute the cable.
11. If necessary, pull out the printhead cleaning system.
ENWW Curing 479

Installation
1. Remember to leave free loops when rerouting the cable. It is important to leave enough for the curing
module to move freely and route the cable along the bundle cover shape, but also not to exceed this
free loop, otherwise it could become hooked, or tighten, or break.
Data cable from curing PCA to curing PCA (CZ056-50019) (×5)
Removal
5. Remove the two T-25 screws and open the cable covers of the required modules and the ones between
them. See Subsystem block diagrams on page 61.
6. Remove the four T-20 screws and open the curing PCA covers of both modules whose data cables are
connected to the curing PCA. See Subsystem block diagrams on page 61.
7. Disconnect both ends of the data cable from the curing PCAs.
8. Unroute the curing data cable.
Installation
1. Remember to leave free loops when routing back again.
2. When replacing module 6, ensure that there is a jumper at the CAN TERM connection to re-mark the end
of the daisy chain (if there is no jumper, take it from the old PCA).
DC curing module to curing module (CZ056-50219)
Removal

5. Remove the two T-25 screws and open the cable cover of the required modules and the ones between
6. Remove the four T-20 screws and open the curing PCA covers of both modules where the DC cable is
7. Disconnect both ends of the DC cable from the curing PCAs.
8. Unroute the curing DC cable.
Installation
1. Remember to leave free loops when rerouting the cable.
AC curing module to curing module (CZ056-50218)
Removal
ENWW Curing 481

5. Remove the two T-25 screws and open the cable cover of the required modules and the ones between
6. Remove the four T-20 screws and open the curing PCA cover of both modules where the AC cable is
7. For those two modules, remove the pointed screws using a flat screwdriver and remove the curing
service inner cover.
8. Disconnect the AC cable ends (the air connector and the curing PCA’s connector). If necessary, remove
the pointed T-20 screws that hold the AC safety cover sheet, disconnect the curing PCA fan, and, while
sliding the cover sheet along the AC cables, disconnect it from the curing PCA.
9. Unroute the AC cable through the modules.
Installation
2. Do not forget to reconnect the curing PCA fan.
Fan cable (CZ056-50120)
Removal
5. Remove the two T-25 screws and open the cable cover.
6. Remove the four T-20 screws and open the curing PCA cover.
7. Remove the pointed screws using a flat screwdriver and open the curing service inner cover to reach the
heaters.
8. Disconnect the curing PCA’s fan cable connector.
9. Unroute the fan cable through the cover left hole until it reaches both heaters, and disconnect them.

Installation
1. Reroute the fan cable through the left curing inner cover hole to reach the curing PCA.
NOTE: Remember to leave free loops in the cable.
2. Connect the fan cable to both fans and screw back the curing inner cover.
3. Cut the jumpers following the corresponding addresses (see Subsystem block diagrams on page 61),
and connect the fan cable to the curing PCA connector.
When cutting the cable jumpers to give the address, follow these criteria on the connector:
The following table shows the schemes for each address module: how the jumper cables should be cut
in order to get the different module addresses:
Module Address Jumper cables Module Address Jumper cables
1 (0,0,1) 4 (1,0,0)
2 (0,1,0) 5 (1,0,1)
3 (0,1,1) 6 (1,1,0)
The following illustration shows the jumper cables cut for module 3:
ENWW Curing 483

CAUTION: Ensure that the jumper cables are cut near to the connector. Otherwise they may touch the
cover and short-circuit.
The curing modules are arranged as follows:
Heater cable (CZ056-50121)
Removal

5. Remove the two T-25 screws and open the cable cover.
7. Remove the pointed screws using a flat screwdriver and open the curing service inner cover.
8. Disconnect the curing PCA. If necessary, remove the pointed T-20 screws that hold the AC safety cover
sheet, disconnect the curing PCA fan, and, while sliding the cover sheet along the AC heater cables,
disconnect it from the curing PCA.
9. Unroute the heater cable through the cover right hole until it reaches both heaters, and disconnect
them.
Installation
2. If you previously disconnected the curing PCA fan, do not forget to reconnect it.
Ground strip (CZ056-50124)
Removal
5. Remove the two T-25 screws and open the cable cover of the required module and the next one in order
to reach the upper pin screws.
6. Remove the four T-20 screws and open the curing PCA cover to reach the required ground strip.
7. Remove the curing PCA (see Curing and vapor removal PCA on page 490).
8. Remove the pointed screw from the upper pin and unroute the curing ground strip.
Installation
▲ Remember to leave free loops when rerouting the cable.
ENWW Curing 485

Curing ground (CZ056-50125)
Removal
6. Remove both T-25 screws and open the cable cover of module 1.
7. Remove the pointed screws from the right structure and the curing external sideplate in order to
disconnect both ends of the curing ground cable.
8. Unroute the curing ground cable.
Installation
▲ Remember to leave free loops when rerouting the cable.
Short ground strip (CZ056-50213)
Removal

5. Remove the four T-20 screws and open the curing PCA cover of the required module and the next one in
order to reach the lower pin screws.
6. Remove both ground strip cable end screws.
Curing power input DC cables kit

E-cabinet to air connector cable (CZ056-50232)
Removal
8. Remove two T-25 screws and open the module 1 cable cover.
9. Disconnect both ends of the cable (the e-cabinet connector and the air connector).
10. Unroute the cable. If needed, pull out the e-box carefully.
Installation
Air connector to curing PCA cable (CZ056-50068)
Removal
ENWW Curing 487

5. Remove the T-25 and T-20 screws and, from module 1 to module 4, open the cable cover and the curing
PCA cover.
6. Disconnect both cable ends (the air connector and both modules 1 and 4 curing PCA connectors).
7. Unroute the cable through modules 1 to 4.
Installation
Curing power input AC cables kit

E-cabinet to air connector cable (CZ056-50231)
Removal
2. Pull out the right front panel.

7. Remove the two T-25 screws and open the module 1 cable cover.
8. Disconnect both ends of the cable (the e-cabinet connector and the air connector).
Installation
Air connector to curing PCA cable (CZ056-50067)
Removal
5. Remove the four T-20 screws and, from module 1 to module 5, open both the cable cover and the curing
PCA cover.
7. For modules 1, 3 and 5, remove the pointed T-20 screws that hold the AC safety cover sheet, and, when
sliding the cover along the AC cables, disconnect both cable ends (the air connector and the curing PCA
connector).
8. Unroute the cable through modules 1 to 5.
Installation
ENWW Curing 489

Curing and vapor removal PCA
Removal

ENWW Curing 491

6. Disconnect all the cables located at the left side of the PCA, including the PCA fan cable.
7. Remove the four pointed nuts that hold the PCA fan, and remove the PCA fan.

ENWW Curing 493

9. Remove the pointed T-20 screws that hold the AC safety cover sheet, and, while sliding the cover along
the AC cables, disconnect those cables from the curing PCA.
10. Remove the T-8 pointed screws.
11. Remove the curing PCA.

Installation
1. Install the new curing PCA and secure it with screws.
2. Reconnect the AC cables, sliding them through the AC safety cover sheet.
3. Screw the curing PCA fan to the AC safety cover sheet.
4. Install the AC safety cover sheet.
5. Connect all the left cables to the curing PCA, including the PCA fan cable.
6. Install the curing PCA cover.
ENWW Curing 495

Drying
Drying NIR lamp
Prepare to replace the drying lamps
1. Ensure that you have the Drying Filter Lamps Kit (CZ056-67322), which is included in the Printer
Maintenance Kit (CZ056-67391) and in the Standard Uptime Kit (D4J02A).
6. Perform the following processes for both drying modules (left and right).
Remove the drying module

1. Remove the electrical connector latch.

2. Unplug the connector.
3. Unscrew the three screws shown below in order to remove the drying module (the left module is
shown).
ENWW Drying 497

4. Pull the drying module carefully out of the carriage and lay it gently on a table.
Drying lamps emitter—safety precautions
CAUTION: Disregard of the safety precautions or improper operation of the infrared emitter can lead to
injuries and material damage.
CAUTION: The IR heating device must be operated only by specialists or trained personnel.
The operator of the system must compile specific operating instructions for the training of operating
personnel.
CAUTION: The safety and functional reliability of the IR heating device are guaranteed only in the event of
use of original accessories and spare parts from Heraeus Noblelight.
WARNING! After an emitter break, a dangerous voltage may be exposed to contact by the heating spiral.
Transport and handling
Transport the IR emitter, in the packaging provided, to the place of installation. If the IR emitter must be
transported without its packaging, wear linen gloves.
CAUTION: Fingerprints on the quartz tube will cause devitrification, which leads to radiation losses and
mechanical failure.
Always carry the emitter with both hands. Carry it so that the cross section faces up, to avoid bending and
breaking.
● Grip the emitter only by the glass tube, and not by the connection cable, pinches, or ceramics.
● Avoid any pressure on the flat base.
When installing IR emitters
CAUTION: We recommend that you wear protective goggles when installing or replacing emitters, to
protect yourself from broken glass that you may come into contact with.
CAUTION: Pulling the connection cable must not cause any tension on the flat base. Bending radius of
connection cable: > 30 mm.
After installation, the quartz glass tube of the IR emitter must be cleaned of any soiling or perspiration. For
this purpose, use the cleaning cloth included in our delivery, or a clean linen cloth (without textile finishing
agents) soaked in methylated spirit, to remove any impurities and soiling or fingerprints from the surface.

CAUTION: The reflector side must not be cleaned.
Replace the drying lamps

1. To separate the drying glass and air outlet from the rest of the module, remove the three screws shown
below.
2. Take out the drying lamps section of the drying module and place it upside down.
ENWW Drying 499

3. Remove the two screws shown below.
4. Pull out the two clamps.
5. Disconnect the four dryer lamp cables.
6. Locate the lamp latches.

7. Release the screws that secure the lamp latches, and rotate the latches 90° to set the lamp free.
8. Rotate and pull out the old lamp.
ENWW Drying 501

9. Carefully install the new lamp. Leave the golden side down towards the interior of the module; when
correctly installed, the internal wires of the lamp are visible.
NOTE: The lamp is symmetrical lengthwise and both orientations are correct.
10. Rotate the latches back to the normal position and insert the screws.
11. Connect the cables of the new lamps. There is no mandatory orientation of the cables (top or bottom).
12. Add and screw in both clamps.
Clean the drying quartz glass and the air outlet

1. Take the drying quartz glass and air outlet, which you have already removed.

2. Moisten both sides of the glass with a lint-free cloth dampened with isopropyl alcohol.
NOTE: If you are in California, instead of isopropyl alcohol use a VOC-certified cleaner such as a
properly diluted Simple Green All-Purpose Cleaner.
3. Scrub both sides of the glass with the steel scourer.
4. Repeat the above two steps as many times as needed to remove any visible ink stains on the glass.
ENWW Drying 503

5. Clean the air outlet using the same damp cloth.
Reassemble the drying module

1. Reassemble the drying lamps with the drying quartz and air outlet.
2. Insert the three screws.
Reinstall the drying module

1. Install the drying module into the carriage and tighten the three screws that attach it to the carriage.
2. Reconnect the electrical connector and close the latches.

Finish off replacing the drying lamps
3. Dispose of the old lamps according to local regulations.
Drying temperature sensor kit

Removal
5. Remove the drying module (see Drying module on page 518).
Upper temperature sensor removal
1. Remove the drying filter,
2. Remove the drying fan case. See Drying fan array on page 506.
3. Remove the pointed T-8 screws on both sides of the connector box.
4. Separate the connector box enough to disconnect the two T-8 screws securing the upper temperature
sensor support.
5. Disconnect the temperature sensor cable.
6. Unroute the temperature sensor cable from its support to its connector.
ENWW Drying 505

Upper temperature sensor installation
1. Connect the new temperature sensor cable, route it back and place the sensor on its support.
2. Once the temperature sensor is in position, tighten the two screws that secure the support to the top
cover.
NOTE: Ensure that the temperature sensor has been correctly placed on its support and does not
touch any surface, in order not to give false temperature readings.
Lower temperature sensor removal

1. Remove the pointed T-8 screws on both sides of the connector box.
2. Separate the connector box enough to disconnect the temperature sensor cable.
3. Remove the drying quartz glass in order to reach the lower lamp module (see Drying quartz glass
on page 511).
4. Unscrew both pointed T-8 screws and remove the cable cover.
5. Remove the drying NIR lamp (see Drying NIR lamp on page 496).
6. Remove the six T-10 screws that hold the dryer cosmetic cover.
7. Unscrew the T-8 screws that hold the temperature sensor support, and remove it.
8. Unroute the temperature sensor cable from its support to its connector, through the cover.
Lower temperature sensor installation

1. Connect the new temperature sensor cable, route it, and place the sensor on its support.
2. Once the temperature sensor is located in its position, tighten the two screws that secure the support to
the top cover.
3. Tighten the two T-8 screws on both sides of the connector box.
NOTE: Ensure that the temperature sensor has been correctly placed on its support and does not
touch any surface, in order not to give false temperature readings.
4. Tighten the four T-10 screws that hold the dryer cosmetic cover.
5. Place the lamp in position.
6. Place the cable covers in position.
7. Assemble the drying quartz glass.
Drying fan array

Prepare to replace the drying fan array
1. Ensure that you have the necessary Drying Fan Array Kit: for the left drying module (CZ056-67024) or
the right drying module (CZ056-67023). Both kits are included in the Standard Uptime Kit (D4J02A).

Drying lamps emitter—safety precautions
CAUTION: Disregard of the safety precautions or improper operation of the infrared emitter can lead to
injuries and material damage.
CAUTION: The IR heating device must be operated only by specialists or trained personnel.
The operator of the system must compile specific operating instructions for the training of operating
personnel.
CAUTION: The safety and functional reliability of the IR heating device are guaranteed only in the event of
use of original accessories and spare parts from Heraeus Noblelight.
WARNING! After an emitter break, a dangerous voltage may be exposed to contact by the heating spiral.
Transport and handling
Transport the IR emitter, in the packaging provided, to the place of installation. If the IR emitter must be
transported without its packaging, wear linen gloves.
CAUTION: Fingerprints on the quartz tube will cause devitrification, which leads to radiation losses and
mechanical failure.
Always carry the emitter with both hands. Carry it so that the cross section faces up, to avoid bending and
breaking.
● Grip the emitter only by the glass tube, and not by the connection cable, pinches, or ceramics.
● Avoid any pressure on the flat base.
When installing IR emitters
CAUTION: We recommend that you wear protective goggles when installing or replacing emitters, to
protect yourself from broken glass that you may come into contact with.
ENWW Drying 507

CAUTION: Pulling the connection cable must not cause any tension on the flat base. Bending radius of
connection cable: > 30 mm.
After installation, the quartz glass tube of the IR emitter must be cleaned of any soiling or perspiration. For
this purpose, use the cleaning cloth included in our delivery, or a clean linen cloth (without textile finishing
agents) soaked in methylated spirit, to remove any impurities and soiling or fingerprints from the surface.
CAUTION: The reflector side must not be cleaned.

shown).
Replace the drying fans array

1. Remove the drying filter.
ENWW Drying 509

2. Disconnect the drying fans array connector.
3. Remove the screw attaching the drying fans array to the drying module.
4. Remove the drying fans array and place the new array. There are two pins on each side of the drying
module to ensure that it is placed in the correct position.

5. Put back the screw that you removed earlier.
6. Reconnect the drying fans array connector.
7. Reinstall the drying filter.
Finish off replacing the drying fan array
3. Dispose of the old drying fan array according to local regulations.
Drying quartz glass

Prepare to replace the drying quartz glass
1. Ensure that you have the necessary Drying Quartz Glass Kit: for the left drying module (CZ056-67253)
or the right drying module (CZ056-67252). Both kits are included in the Standard Uptime Kit (D4J02A).
ENWW Drying 511

4. Turn off the printer in the correct way for maintenance operations


shown).
ENWW Drying 513

Replace the drying quartz glass
1. To separate the drying glass and air outlet from the rest of the module, remove the three screws shown
below.
2. Assemble the drying lamps section and the new drying glass and air outlet.
3. Insert the three screws.


Finish off replacing the drying quartz glass
3. Dispose of the old quartz glass according to local regulations.
Drying cable right (CZ056-50205)

Removal
ENWW Drying 515

5. Remove the drying module (see Drying module on page 518)
6. Disconnect the drying cable right assembly from the drying connector box.
9. Disconnect the drying cable right assembly from the following drying PCA DOWN connectors. See the
drying PCA criteria (Drying PCA on page 522) in order to see the connections between the drying
cables and the drying PCAs.
10. The following table shows the drying cable connections to the drying PCA connectors:
11. Unroute the drying cable. Be careful while unrouting not to tighten or twist the crash sensor optical
fiber cables (they could break). Cut the flanges if necessary.
Installation
1. Route the new drying cable.

Drying cable left (CZ056-50013)

Removal
5. Remove the drying module (see Drying module on page 518).
6. Disconnect the drying cable left assembly from the drying connector box.
ENWW Drying 517

9. Disconnect the drying cable left assembly from the following drying PCA UP connectors. See the drying
PCA references (Drying PCA on page 522) in order to see the connections between the drying cables
and the drying PCAs.
10. The following table shows the drying cable connections to the drying PCA connectors:
11. Unroute the drying cable. Be careful while unrouting not to tighten or twist the crash sensor optical
fiber cables (they could break). Cut the flanges if necessary.
Installation
1. Route the new drying cable.
Drying module
Removal

ENWW Drying 519

shown).
Installation

Drying AC/AC converter control cable

Removal
3. Turn off the branch circuit breakers, or disconnect the power cord(s) from the mains.
ENWW Drying 521

9. Disconnect the drying AC/AC converter control cable from the e-cabinet connectors and the e-box
interconnect PCA (J2_111 connector).
Drying PCA
Removing the drying PCA UP
7. The following tables show the drying PCA references, connections, and addresses:
Drying PCA criteria:
Drying PCA jumper connections:
Drying PCA jumper connectors Jumper connections
No jumper Jumper
ADR0 (to set the drying PCA ID) Drying PCA UP Drying PCA DOWN
CAN TERM (end can bus) Drying PCA UP Drying PCA DOWN

8. Disconnect all the cables connected to the drying PCA UP. See Subsystem block diagrams on page 61.
9. Loosen without removing the two screws that hold each metal-sheet carriage-tower rear cover to the
carriage tower.
10. Remove the carriage-tower rear covers.
11. Remove the four T-10 screws that hold the drying PCA UP cover to its support.
12. Remove the T-8 screws that hold the drying PCA to its cover.
Removing the drying PCA DOWN
5. See the tables above with the drying PCA references, connections, and addresses.
8. Disconnect all the cables connected to the drying PCA DOWN. See Subsystem block diagrams
on page 61.
9. Loosen without removing the two screws that hold each metal-sheet carriage-tower rear cover to the
carriage tower.
10. Remove the carriage-tower rear covers.
11. Remove the four T-10 screws that hold the drying PCA DOWN cover to its support.
12. Remove the T-8 screws that hold the drying PCA to its cover.
Installation
1. When installing the new drying PCAs, it is important to check whether it is necessary to reuse the
following jumpers in order to set the PCA end can bus and ID address correctly.
2. Perform the removal steps in reverse to position the drying PCA and reconnect its cables.
ENWW Drying 523

E-box
E-box cable kit
Removal
3. Remove the two T-20 screws from the e-box support and pull it out carefully.
4. To open the e-box, remove the nine T-20 screws and remove the e-box cover.
NOTE: If you need to replace the e-box interconnect PCA to e-cabinet PCA cable (CZ056-50138), it is
not necessary to pull out and open the e-box.
5. Disconnect and replace the cables as described below.
Engine PCA 1 to engine adaptor PCA 1 data cable (×2) (CZ056-50001)

1. Disconnect the engine PCA 1 to engine adaptor PCA 1 data cables at both ends. See Subsystem block
2. Unroute the cables.
3. Replace the cables with the new ones, route them, and reconnect them.
NOTE: Be careful to connect each PCA connector to its corresponding connector. The table shows the
connections between the engine PCA and the engine adaptor PCA.
Engine PCA Engine adaptor PCA
J7 JT1
Connector
J12 JT2
J7 JT1
Connector
J12 JT2


J7 JT1
Connector
J12 JT2

J7 JT1
Connector
J12 JT2
Engine adaptor PCA power cable (CZ056-50003)

1. Disconnect the engine adaptor PCA power cable from the air connector and the engine adaptor PCAs
(PCA 1 to PCA 4) (PWR_IN connectors). See Subsystem block diagrams on page 61.
2. Unroute the cable. Cut the flanges if necessary.
3. Replace the cable with the new one, route it, and reconnect it.
ATX to fiber-optics PCA power cable (CZ056-50221)

1. Disconnect the ATX to fiber-optics PCA power cable from the air connector and the fiber-optics PCA (J24
connector). See Subsystem block diagrams on page 61.
NOTE: It is important to ensure that both fiber-optics connectors (shown below) are correctly
connected to the fiber-optics PCA. Otherwise, the printer will return an error.
ENWW E-box 525

CAN B bus cable (CZ056-50252)
1. Disconnect the CAN B bus cable from the engine PCA 2 (J22 OMAS connector) and the engine adaptor
PCA 2 (JT3 connector). See Subsystem block diagrams on page 61.
2. Unroute the cable. Cut the flanges if necessary.
Engine PCA to fiber-optics PCA long cable (CZ056-50220)

1. Disconnect the engine PCA to fiber-optics PCA data cable at both ends. See Subsystem block diagrams
on page 61.
NOTE: The table shows the connections between the engine PCA and the fiber-optics PCA.
Engine PCA X Fiber-optics
J11 J8
PCA 1
J20 J14
J11 J9
PCA 2
J20 J15
J11 J10
PCA 3
J20 J16
PCA 4 J11 J11
NOTE: The J20 connector is the one located closer to the formatter PCA.
E-box interconnect PCA to e-cabinet PCA cable (CZ056-50138)

1. Disconnect the e-box interconnect PCA to e-cabinet PCA cable at both ends. See Subsystem block
NOTE: The e-box interconnect PCA to e-cabinet PCA cable is connected to the e-cabinet PCA RJ45
connector and to the e-box interconnect PCA J_341 I2C connector.
2. Unroute the cable. Cut the flanges if necessary. Make sure to leave the free loops needed to allow the e-
box assembly spinning movement.
3. Replace the cable with the new one, route it, and reconnect it. Replace any flanges that were cut while
unrouting.
E-box hard disk drive

Removal

4. Remove the nine T-20 screws and remove the e-box cover.
ENWW E-box 527

5. Disconnect the hard disk data cable from the formatter PCA (SATA 1 connector).
6. Remove the four screws that hold the hard disk drive sheet cover.

7. Remove the four T-10 screws and remove the hard disk drive from its sheet cover.
Installation
1. Insert the new hard disk drive.
2. Reconnect the hard disk data cable to the formatter PCA (SATA 1 connector).
E-box PSU
Removal
3. Disconnect the power cord from the e-box.
ENWW E-box 529

4. Loosen the four crossed screws that hold the PSU (do not remove them, so that the PSU will not be
freed inside the e-box while pulling it out).

7. Disconnect both the PSU cables from the formatter PCA and the air connector.
ENWW E-box 531

8. Remove the four loosened screws that hold the PSU (they are located outside the e-box).
9. Remove the PSU.
Installation
1. Insert the new PSU.
2. Screw the PSU to the e-box.
3. Reconnect the PSU to the formatter PCA and the air connector.
4. Screw the e-box cover and push it back to its vertical position.
5. Reconnect the power cord to the PSU connector.
E-box fan and filter

Removal

5. Disconnect the fan cable from the formatter PCA.
6. Remove the fan filter.
7. Remove the four crossed screws that hold the fan.
ENWW E-box 533

8. Remove the screw that holds the coated lanyard.
9. Remove the fan.
Installation
1. Insert and connect the new fan.
2. Screw back the e-box cover.
3. Remove the plastic cover and replace the filter.
E-box LAN cable to IPS (CZ056-500041 and CZ056-50222)

This service part contains two cables: the IPS to e-box LAN cable (CZ056-50041) and the LAN to IPS cable
(CZ056-50222).

Removal
5. Disconnect the IPS to e-box LAN cable from the formatter PCA and the e-box LAN connector.
6. Disconnect the LAN to IPS cable from the IPS and the air connector.
7. Unroute both cables. These cables are routed from the e-box to the IPS, along the bottom frame.
Installation
1. Replace and route both cables, so that there is enough free looped cable to allow the e-box spinning
movement. Do not leave too much cable, or it could interfere with other components that could tighten
or twist it.
2. Connect the air connectors.
3. Reconnect the e-box and the IPS.
Engine PCA
Removal
ENWW E-box 535

5. Disconnect the engine PCA from all cables that you can reach. See Subsystem block diagrams
on page 61.
6. Remove the T-10 screw that holds the engine PCA.
7. Remove the engine PCA.

8. Disconnect any remaining cables.
Installation
1. Insert the new engine PCA. Ensure that it is well placed between its plastic supports, so that it is
correctly connected to the formatter PCA. Otherwise the printer will will return an error.
2. Reconnect the the engine PCA cables.
NOTE: Be careful to connect each PCA connector to its corresponding connector. The following tables
show how the connections match. See Subsystem block diagrams on page 61.
Between the engine PCA and the engine adaptor PCA (eight cables):
Engine PCA X Engine adaptor PCA X
J7 JT1
Connector
J12 JT2
Between the engine PCA and the fiber-optics PCA (seven cables):
Engine PCA X Fiber-optics
J11 J8
PCA 1
J20 J14
J11 J9
PCA 2
J20 J15
J11 J10
PCA 3
J20 J16
PCA 4 J11 J11
NOTE: The J20 connector is the one located closer to the formatter PCA.
Formatter PCA
Removal
1. Remove the four engine PCAs. See Engine PCA on page 535.
ENWW E-box 537

2. Disconnect all cables from the formatter PCA connectors.
3. Remove the two pointed T10 screws and carefully remove the light pipe.
4. Remove the nine T-10 screws that hold the formatter PCA.

5. Remove the formatter PCA.
Installation
1. Insert the new formatter PCA.
2. Connect the cables to the formatter PCA.
3. Reinstall the light pipe.
4. Reinstall and reconnect the four engine PCAs.
Engine adaptor PCA

Removal
ENWW E-box 539

5. Disconnect the engine adaptor PCA from all cables. See Subsystem block diagrams on page 61.
6. Remove the four T-20 screws from the support that holds the four engine adaptor PCAs and pull it
slightly out. The four engine adaptor PCAs remain connected to the e-box interconnect PCA.

7. Carefully remove the engine adaptor PCA.
Installation
1. Insert the new engine adaptor PCA, making sure to connect it properly to the e-box interconnect PCA.
NOTE: Be careful while reconnecting the engine adaptor PCAs to the e-box interconnect PCA. It can be
hard to connect both PCAs correctly, and the connector pins are delicate: they can easily break.
2. Locate the engine adaptor PCA’s metal sheet support and push it slightly to match it with the four
engine adaptor PCA supports.
3. Screw back the four screws that hold the metal sheet support, ensuring that the four PCAs are properly
connected to the e-box interconnect PCA.
4. Reconnect the engine adaptor PCA cables.
NOTE: Be careful to connect each PCA connector to its corresponding connector. The table below
shows the connections between the engine PCA and the engine adaptor PCA. See Subsystem block
J7 JT1
Connector
J12 JT2
E-box interconnect PCA

Removal
1. Remove the four engine adaptor PCAs. See Engine adaptor PCA on page 539.
ENWW E-box 541

2. Disconnect all cables from the e-box interconnect PCA.
NOTE: You are strongly recommended to ensure that all cables are labeled, to avoid confusion when
replacing the e-box interconnect PCA and reconnecting all the cables.
3. Remove the six T-10 screws.
4. Remove the e-box interconnect PCA.
Installation
1. Insert the new e-box interconnect PCA.
2. Screw the e-box interconnect PCA into position.
3. Reinstall and reconnect the four engine PCAs.

4. Reinstall the engine adaptor PCAs.
NOTE: Be careful while reconnecting the engine adaptor PCAs to the e-box interconnect PCA. It can be
hard to connect both PCAs correctly, and the connector pins are delicate: they can easily break.
5. Reconnect all the cables to the e-box interconnect PCA, taking care to connect each cable to the
corresponding e-box interconnect PCA connector. See Subsystem block diagrams on page 61.
Fiber-optics PCA
Removal
4. Remove the nine T-20 screws and the e-box cover.
5. Disconnect all cables from the fiber-optics PCA. See Subsystem block diagrams on page 61.
ENWW E-box 543

6. Remove the seven T-10 screws that attach the fiber-optics PCA.
7. Remove the PCA.

E-cabinet
E-cabinet main switch kit
Removal
1. Turn off the printer and its built-in computer, then turn off the main switch and the computer’s power
switch.
2. Disconnect the printer from all its power cords.
CAUTION: Before opening the e-cabinet, turn off the printer by using the branch circuit breakers
located in the building's power distribution unit or by disconnecting the power cord(s) from the mains.
Always check that the grounding cable is correctly installed before powering up and take all necessary
precautions to prevent electrical shocks.
CAUTION: If there is a dedicated single-phase line for the built-in computer, the circuit breakers
associated with this line must also be switched off.
3. Open the e-cabinet doors.
4. Remove the crossed screw that holds together the lockable actuator part (in red) and the fixed actuator
part (in yellow). Remove the lockable part and save it.
NOTE: It is necessary to turn the lockable part to the OFF position before removing or installing the
lockable actuator part. Otherwise it will not match correctly.
5. Remove the two crossed screws and the fixed actuator part, so that you can reach the screws that hold
together the outer and the inner main switch 6-pole 63 A body parts.
ENWW E-cabinet 545

6. Remove the four crossed screws and separate the two main switch 6-pole 63 A body parts.
7. Disconnect the main switch 6-pole 63 A body from all its cables.

8. Remove the main switch 6-pole 63 A body.
Installation
1. Install the new main switch 6-pole 63 A body and reconnect its cables.
CAUTION: Ensure that the cables are correctly connected.
2. Remove the four crossed screws and separate the two main switch 6-pole 63 A body parts.
3. Place the inner and outer main switch 6-pole 63 A body parts on the e-cabinet left cover and screw
them together.
4. Remove the crossed screw that holds together the lockable actuator part (in red) and the fixed actuator
part (in yellow). Separate both actuator parts and save the lockable part.
5. Screw back the two crossed screws and install the fixed actuator part to the main switch 6-pole 63 A
body.
6. Install the lockable actuator part to the fixed actuator part.
7. Close the e-cabinet doors.
8. Reconnect the printer power cords and turn on the printer.
E-cabinet line filter bypass cables

Whenever any line filter needs to be replaced, you are strongly recommended to replace all the line filters by
their corresponding line filter bypass cables, as described below.
Removal
ENWW E-cabinet 547

4. Disconnect all cables from the line filter.
5. Remove the line filter.
6. Repeat until all the line filters are removed, and follow the installation steps to replace them with their
corresponding bypass cables.
Installation
1. For each line filter, follow the connection table shown below to replace it with its corresponding bypass
cable. Connect the bypass cable at both ends.
TIP: Notice that all bypass cables have the same colors as the cables to which they connect.
2. Always check that the grounding cables are correctly installed before powering up. Ensure that they are
fixed to the e-cabinet bottom plate, and take all necessary precautions to prevent electrical shocks.

Table 7-1 Line filter bypass cable connections
Left cable Bypass cable RIght cable
LF-1/L Gray LF-1/L
LF-1/N Blue LF-1/N
LF-1/PE – Not connected
LF-2/L Black LF-2/L
LF-2/N Blue LF-2/N
LF-3/L Gray LF-1/L
LF-3/N Blue LF-1/N
LF-4/L Black LF-1/L
LF-4/N Blue LF-1/N
LF-5/L Brown LF-5/L
LF-5/N Blue LF-5/N
LF-6/L Brown LF-6/L
LF-6/N Blue LF-6/N
LF-7/L Brown LF-7/L
LF-7/N Blue LF-7/N
ENWW E-cabinet 549

E-cabinet ACB 20A 2-phase
Removal
1. Turn off the printer and its built-in computer, then turn off the main switch and the computer power
switch.
4. Remove the two screws that attach the AC protection DIN rail to the e-cabinet supports and separate
the e-cabinet ACB 20A 2-phase switch block sufficiently to free the e-cabinet ACB 20A 2-phase switch
that needs to be replaced.
5. Disconnect all cables from the e-cabinet ACB 20A 2-phase switch and remove the switch.
NOTE: You may need to unroute some cables to some extent and cut some flanges.
Installation
1. Install the new e-cabinet ACB 20A 2-phase switch and reconnect its cables.
NOTE: Make sure that all cables are correctly routed and attached as they were originally, to keep the
e-cabinet tidy.
2. Screw back the AC protection DIN rail to its supports.

E-cabinet ACB 10A 2-phase

Removal
switch.
the e-cabinet ACB 10A 2-phase switch block sufficiently to free the e-cabinet ACB 10A 2-phase switch
that needs to be replaced.
5. Disconnect all cables from the e-cabinet ACB 10A 2-phase switch and remove the switch.
ENWW E-cabinet 551

Installation
1. Install the new e-cabinet ACB 10A 2-phase switch and reconnect its cables.
e-cabinet tidy.
E-cabinet RCD 25A 30mA 1-phase

Removal
switch.
the e-cabinet RCD 25A 30mA 1-phase switch block sufficiently to free the e-cabinet RCD 25A 30mA 1-
phase switch that needs to be replaced.
5. Disconnect all cables from the e-cabinet RCD 25A 30mA 1-phase switch and remove the switch.
Installation
1. Install the new e-cabinet RCD 25A 30mA 1-phase switch and reconnect its cables.
e-cabinet tidy.
E-cabinet PCA
Removal
switch.

4. Disconnect all cables from inside the e-cabinet PCA.
TIP: Before disconnecting any cable, ensure that it is labeled, to avoid any mismatch when
reconnecting the cables to the e-cabinet PCA.
ENWW E-cabinet 553

5. Disconnect all cables from outside the e-cabinet PCA.
TIP: Before disconnecting any cable, ensure that it is labeled, to avoid any mismatch when
reconnecting the cables to the e-cabinet PCA.
6. Remove the ten crossed screws and remove the e-cabinet PCA lid.
7. Remove the thirteen T10 screws that hold the e-cabinet PCA to its lid, and remove the e-cabinet PCA.
Installation
1. Install the new e-cabinet PCA.
2. Screw back the e-cabinet PCA lid to the e-cabinet.
3. Reconnect all cables to the e-cabinet PCA, both inside and outside the e-cabinet.

E-cabinet modular contactor kit
Removal
switch.
4. Disconnect all cables from the e-cabinet modular contactor.
5. Remove the e-cabinet modular contactor fixed to the DIN rail.
TIP: To remove the contactor easily, use a flat screwdriver to pull the plastic tab.
Installation
1. Install the new e-cabinet modular contactor and reconnect its cables.
E-cabinet PSUs 1 to 4
Removal
switch.
The following table describes which ID number corresponds to each PSU, their default voltages from the
vendor, the default printer voltage adjustment, and where the PSU is located.
PSU Voltage Default printer adjustment E-cabinet bottom plate
1 48 V 42 V Right
ENWW E-cabinet 555

2 24 V 24 V (no adjustment) Right
3 36 V 32 V Right
4 12 V 13 V Right
5 48 V 42 V Left
6 24 V 24 V (no adjustment) Left
3. Remove the four pointed screws to remove the tray in which the defective PSU is located (the right-
hand tray for PSUs 1 to 4; see Subsystem block diagrams on page 61).
4. Extract the tray a little, so that it is easier to disconnect the cables.

5. Disconnect the cables from the left-hand side of all the PSUs located on the same tray.
6. Rotate the tray a little to the left.
ENWW E-cabinet 557

7. Unscrew and remove the transparent cover.

8. Disconnect the cables from the right-hand side of all the PSUs located on the same tray.
ENWW E-cabinet 559

9. Continue disconnecting cables.
10. Remove the whole tray from the printer.
11. Rotate the tray so that you can access the screws underneath it.

12. Remove the four pointed screws that attach the PSU (the illustration is for PSU 3).
13. Remove the PSU (the illustration is for PSU 3).
Installation
2. If replacing PSU 1 or 2, ensure that the new PSU comes with the remote sense jumper already
connected to it (PSU 3 and 4 do not need any jumper). If it is missing, use the remote sense jumper from
its corresponding old PSU. The following image shows where the PSU remote sense jumper is located.
3. Ensure that the PSU voltage is correct. If not, perform the PSU adjusted voltage checking procedure (see
PSU adjusted voltage checking procedure on page 562).
5. Reconnect and turn on the printer.
ENWW E-cabinet 561

PSU adjusted voltage checking procedure
Some of the power supplies are adjusted to a voltage that is not the factory default from the vendor. The
voltage is adjusted during the manufacture of the e-cabinet and before a service part is sent. However, it is
highly recommended for both the user and the printer’s security always to check the voltage adjustment
before installing a new PSU.
1 48 V 42 V Right
3 36 V 32 V Right
4 12 V 13 V Right
5 48 V 42 V Left
CAUTION: To adjusting the PSUs while mounted, you must open the doors of the e-cabinet. Before opening
the e-cabinet, turn off the branch circuit breakers located in the building's power distribution unit, or
disconnect the power cord(s) from the mains. Always check that the grounding cable is correctly installed
before powering up and take all necessary precautions to prevent electrical shocks.
CAUTION: If there is a dedicated single-phase line for the computer, the circuit breakers associated with
this line must also be switched off.
Procedure
The equipment needed for this adjustment is a multimeter set to measure DC voltage, and a small Phillips
screwdriver to adjust a trimmer (small potentiometer).
1. Make sure that the PSU is correctly installed.
2. Remove the transparent covers over the PSUs if necessary.
3. Disconnect the DC cable of the PSU from the e-cabinet PCA.
4. Power up the e-cabinet, by turning on the power distribution unit circuit breakers.
5. For PSUs 1, 3, and 5 the safety circuit needs to be activated.
6. Using a multimeter set to measure DC voltage, measure the DC voltage out of the PSU at the DC
connector that connects to the e-cabinet PCA (black wire is 0 V, red wire is +V).

7. Carefully turn the adjustment potentiometer until the output voltage is correct for that PSU. The
location of the potentiometer depends on the PSU model. For PSU1 and PSU 5:
For PSU3 and PSU4:
8. Power down the e-cabinet and reconnect the DC cable to the e-cabinet PCA.
CAUTION: To adjust the PSUs while mounted, you must open the doors of the e-cabinet. Before
opening the e-cabinet, turn off the branch circuit breakers located in the building's power distribution
unit, or disconnect the power cord(s) from the mains. Always check that the grounding cable is correctly
installed before powering up, and take all necessary precautions to prevent electrical shocks.
CAUTION: If there is a dedicated single-phase line for the computer, the circuit breakers associated
with this line must also be switched off.
E-cabinet PSUs 5 to 7
Removal
switch.
ENWW E-cabinet 563

1 48 V 42 V Right
3 36 V 32 V Right
4 12 V 13 V Right
5 48 V 42 V Left
3. Unscrew and remove the transparent cover.

4. Remove the four pointed screws to remove the tray in which the defective PSU is located (the left-hand
tray for PSUs 5 to 7; see Subsystem block diagrams on page 61).
5. Extract the tray a little, so that it is easier to disconnect the cables.
ENWW E-cabinet 565

6. Disconnect the cables from all the PSUs located on the same tray.

7. Continue disconnecting cables.
8. Remove the whole tray from the printer.
9. Rotate the tray so that you can access the screws underneath it.
ENWW E-cabinet 567

10. Remove the four pointed screws that attach the PSU (the illustration is for PSU 6).
11. Remove the PSU (the illustration is for PSU 6).
Installation
2. Ensure that the new PSU comes with the remote sense jumper already connected to it. If it is missing,
use the remote sense jumper from the old PSU. The following image shows where the PSU remote
sense jumper is located.
3. Ensure that the PSU voltage is correct. If not, perform the PSU adjusted voltage checking procedure (see
PSU adjusted voltage checking procedure on page 562).

E-cabinet AC/AC converter
Removal
switch.
3. Disconnect the e-cabinet AC/AC converter from all its cables.
ENWW E-cabinet 569

4. Unscrew the four pointed screws.
5. Lift up the e-cabinet AC/AC converter slightly before pulling it out, to free it from the small attachments
at the rear.

Installation
1. Insert the new e-cabinet AC/AC converter.
2. Reconnect all cables to the converter.
NOTE: When connecting the cables, ensure that they are not mismatched. All cables are labeled.
E-cabinet fan
Removal
switch.
3. Disconnect the fan cable from its air connector.
4. Remove the four crossed screws that hold the fan and remove the fan.
Installation
1. Insert the new fan and attach with the four screws.
2. Reconnect the fan cable.
4. Remove the plastic cover and replace the filter with the new one.
E-cabinet safety relay

Removal
switch.
ENWW E-cabinet 571

3. Disconnect the e-cabinet safety relay from all cables.
4. Remove the e-cabinet safety relay fixed to the DIN rail.
TIP: You are recommended to use a flat screwdriver to pull the plastic tab, so that the part can be
easily removed from the DIN rail.
Installation
1. Insert the new safety relay.
2. Reconnect all cables to the safety relay.
E-cabinet lamps kit

Removal
switch.

2. Open the e-cabinet and locate the lamp that has to be replaced.
3. Using a flat-head or Phillips screwdriver, release the screw that fixes the lamp to the box.
4. Using the screwdriver, pull up the L-shaped lever gently to detach the main body from the lens cap. Be
careful not to damage any cable.
ENWW E-cabinet 573

5. Remove the lens cap from the exterior of the e-cabinet and disconnect the power cables from the main
body, unscrewing the terminals X1 and X2.
6. Disconnect both e-cabinet lamp cables.
Installation
1. Connect the power cables to the replacement main body. Ensure that the cables are not loose, by
pulling them after screwing in the terminals.
2. Insert the lens cap from the exterior of the e-cabinet and attach it to the main body. There is no need to
actuate the lever, which is on a spring.
NOTE: The lens cap can be inserted in only one position.
3. Fix the lamp body to the panel using the fixing screw. Ensure that it is correctly attached, by trying to
rotate the body (it should not move).

E-cabinet terminal block kit
Removal
switch.
3. Locate the e-cabinet terminal block that you want to remove, and follow the appropriate steps below.
Removing the TB-1 assembly

1. Disconnect the e-cabinet terminal block from all cables.
2. Unscrew the e-cabinet installation cross-connector from the e-cabinet terminal block assembly TB-1.
3. Remove the e-cabinet terminal block fixed to the DIN rail.
TIP: You are recommended to use a flat screwdriver to pull the plastic tab, so that the part can be
easily removed from the DIN rail.
Installing the TB-1 assembly

1. Insert the new e-cabinet terminal block TB-1.
2. Reconnect all cables to the e-cabinet terminal block.
3. Screw back the e-cabinet power jumper to the e-cabinet terminal block assembly TB-1. See Subsystem
Removing the TB-2 to TB-7 assemblies
1. Disconnect the e-cabinet terminal block from all cables.
ENWW E-cabinet 575

2. Remove the e-cabinet installation X-way cross-connector from the e-cabinet terminal block assembly.
TIP: You are recommended to use a flat screwdriver to pull out the cross-connector, so that the part
can be easily removed from the e-cabinet terminal block assembly.
3. Remove the e-cabinet terminal block fixed to the DIN rail.
Installing the TB-2 to TB-7 assemblies

1. Insert the new e-cabinet terminal block.
2. Reconnect all cables to the e-cabinet terminal block.
3. Reinsert the e-cabinet X way cross-connector into the e-cabinet terminal block assembly, ensuring that
it is correctly connected to the e-cabinet terminal block assembly. See Subsystem block diagrams
on page 61.
CAUTION: It is important to connect the e-cabinet X-way cross-connector correctly. The correct
positions are either the upper or the lower holes. The center holes are not for this kind of cross-
connector.
Completing the installation

E-cabinet X-way cross-connector kit
Removal
switch.
3. Remove the e-cabinet installation X-way cross-connector from the e-cabinet terminal block assembly.
TIP: You are recommended to use a flat screwdriver to pull out the cross-connector, so that the part
can be easily removed from the e-cabinet terminal block assembly.
Installation
1. Reinsert the e-cabinet X way cross-connector into the e-cabinet terminal block assembly, ensuring that
it is correctly connected to the e-cabinet terminal block assembly. See Subsystem block diagrams
on page 61.
CAUTION: It is important to connect the e-cabinet X-way cross-connector correctly. The correct
positions are either the upper or the lower holes. The center holes are not for this kind of cross-
connector.
E-cabinet fuses kit

Removal
switch.
ENWW E-cabinet 577

3. For fuses FH-1 to FH-9, locate the appropriate e-cabinet fuse to be replaced.
4. Open the e-cabinet fuse holder by pulling out its plastic tab from the top, so that the fuse slot rotates,
exposing the e-cabinet fuse.
5. Remove the fuse.

Installation
1. Insert the new fuse and close its holder.
E-cabinet PCA fuses kit

CAUTION: Do not attempt to replace fuses other than those in this specific area of the e-cabinet. These are
the only ones you are allowed to replace. Call your service representative in all other cases.
Prepare to replace an e-cabinet fuse

1. Ensure that you have the E-cabinet PCA Fuses Kit (CZ056-67136), which is included in the Standard
Uptime Kit (D4J02A).
2. Check the Print Care error message log to find out which fuse needs to be replaced.
Replace an e-cabinet fuse

ENWW E-cabinet 579

3. Remove the screws shown below, then remove the rear right cover.
4. Locate the e-cabinet fuses.

5. Locate the failing fuse identified by the Print Care error message logs.
6. Pull out the fuse and insert a new one. Ensure that the new fuse matches the old one in size, rating, and
color.
7. Run a diagnostic test to check that the new fuse is working correctly.
CAUTION: Fire risk! A blown fuse may indicate malfunctioning electrical circuits within the system. If a
fuse trips repeatedly, call your service representative and do not attempt to replace the fuse with one
with a higher current rating.
8. Dispose of the old fuse.
9. Put back the rear right cover and screw it into place.
E-cabinet fan filter

Prepare to replace the e-cabinet fan filters
1. E-cabinet fan filters are provided with your printer in the HP Latex 3000 Printer Cleaning Kit: the
necessary sets of two filters are provided; only one set is needed for this operation.
ENWW E-cabinet 581

3. Locate the fan filters on the printer.
Replace the e-cabinet fan filters

1. Pull off the plastic fan filter cover.
2. For each fan, change the fan filter for the new one provided. Be careful to locate it correctly: it must
cover the fan’s square surface.

3. Put back the fan cover.
E-cabinet transformer
Before replacing the transformer, check the corresponding fuses. Replace them if necessary, and check the
printer again. If the fuses are all OK, proceed with the steps below.
Removal
switch.
ENWW E-cabinet 583

3. Disconnect all cables from the transformer.
4. Remove the four pointed screws that hold the e-cabinet transformer and remove the transformer.
Installation
1. Insert the new transformer and attach it with the four screws.
2. Reconnect all cables to the transformer.
NOTE: When connecting the cables, ensure that they are not mismatched. All cables are labeled.
E-cabinet left door assembly

Removal
switch.
3. Remove the e-cabinet fan filter.
4. Remove the e-cabinet fan.
5. Remove the pointed screw and disconnect the grounding cable from the e-cabinet left door assembly.
6. Remove the four pointed screws from the e-cabinet left door hinges and remove the e-cabinet left door
assembly.

Installation
1. Install the new e-cabinet left door assembly and attach it with the four screws.
2. Screw back the grounding cable to the e-cabinet left door assembly.
3. Reconnect the e-cabinet fan cable.
4. Reinstall the e-cabinet fan filter.
E-cabinet right door assembly

Removal
switch.
3. Remove the e-cabinet fan filter.
4. Remove the e-cabinet fan.
5. Remove the pointed screw and disconnect the grounding cable from the e-cabinet right door assembly.
6. Remove the four pointed screws from the e-cabinet right door hinges and remove the e-cabinet right
door assembly.
Installation
1. Install the new e-cabinet right door assembly and attach it with the four screws.
2. Screw back the grounding cable to the e-cabinet right door assembly.
3. Reconnect the e-cabinet fan cable.
4. Reinstall the e-cabinet fan filter.
ENWW E-cabinet 585

Human-Machine Interface
In case of any need to reinstall the Internal Print Server software, read the Internal Print Server installation
and setup instructions.
To reinstall or solve any other software setup problems, follow the post-installation steps.
If there is a problem that can be solved only by physical removal and reinstallation of either the Internal Print
Server computer or its hard disk drive, follow the instructions in the Internal Print Server service manual and
its removal and installation instructions.
The following sections describe how to remove and install these printer components:
● Internal Print Server computer (A3L24PA#AB4)
● Internal Print Server monitor (C9V75AA#AB4)
● Webcam (H2W19AA#ABB)
● Webcam USB extension cable (8121-1202)
Internal Print Server computer (A3L24PA#AB4)

Removal
switch.
2. Open the printhead cleaning door.
3. Disconnect the computer from all its cables.
4. Remove the computer from the printer.
Installation
1. Install the new computer so that the HP logo is located vertically.

2. Connect all the cables.
IMPORTANT: Take care to connect both LAN cables to the correct sockets. With the computer
positioned as shown above, the e-box LAN cable must connect to the upper connector and the network
LAN cable must connect to the lower one. If they are misconnected, the printer will not work.
3. Follow the Internal Print Server installation and setup instructions to install all the needed software and
configure the computer.
TIP: If you have problems, you can also consult the Internal Print Server service manual.
4. The computer usually comes without the Print Care software installed. See Print Care installation
on page 705.
Internal Print Server monitor (C9V75AA#AB4)

Removal
switch.
2. Disconnect the Internal Print Server monitor from its cables.
3. Hold the monitor and remove the two T-20 screws that hold it to the metal sheet base support.
4. Remove the monitor.
Installation
1. Screw the new monitor to its metal sheet base support.
2. Reconnect all of its cables.
TIP: If you have problems, you can consult the Internal Print Server monitor service manual.
Webcam (H2W19AA#ABB)
Removal
2. Look for the webcam on top of the Internal Print Server monitor.
4. Disconnect and unroute the webcam cable from its air connector.
5. Remove the webcam from the top of the Internal Print Server monitor.
ENWW Human-Machine Interface 587

Installation
1. Put the new webcam in place of the old one.
2. Route and reconnect the webcam cable.
TIP: If you have problems, you can consult the webcam service manual.
Webcam USB extension cable (8121-1202)

Removal
2. Look for the webcam on top of the Internal Print Server monitor.
4. Disconnect and unroute the webcam USB extension cable from its air connector and from the computer.
5. Remove the webcam USB extension cable.
Installation
▲ Route and connect the new webcam USB extension cable.
TIP: If you have problems, you can consult the webcam USB extension cable service manual.

Impelling
Impelling drying AC cable (CZ056-50065)
Removal
3. Open the carriage service position window.
5. Open the right cover door.
CAUTION: Before opening the e-cabinet turn off the printer using branch circuit breakers located in
the building's power distribution unit or disconnecting the power cord(s) from the mains. Always check
that the grounding cable is correctly installed before powering up and take all necessary precautions to
prevent electrical shocks.
8. Disconnect the AC power cables from both the e-Cabinet AC/AC converter and its corresponding drying
PCA.
The following table gives the cable connections between the AC source and the drying PCA (AC_IN
connector).
Drying PCA AC source
1 (LEFT) UP
2 (RIGHT) DOWN
See also Drying PCA on page 522.
9. Unroute the AC cables through the printer structure.
10. Remove the three T-25 screws and the cover Igus end.
TIP: It may be easier to access the Igus chain if you remove the rear window panels.
11. Unroute the AC cables through the Igus chain. See Impelling Igus chain ink tubes and cables
on page 604.
Installation
1. Reroute the AC power cables through the AM structure.
2. Reroute through the Igus chain; remember to leave a free loop on both ends of the chain. See Impelling
Igus chain ink tubes and cables on page 604.
3. Screw back the cover Igus end.
4. Connect the AC power cables to the AC sources and the Drying PCA.
ENWW Impelling 589

Impelling 42 V power cable (CZ056-50063)
Removal
6. Disconnect the 42 V power cables from the e-cabinet PCA (located at the right cover of the e-cabinet).
8. Disconnect the 42 V power cables from drying PCAs 1 and 2 (there are two 42 V power connectors for
each carriage interconnect PCA).
9. Unroute from the e-cabinet PCA to the end of the Igus chain.
11. Unroute the 42 V power cables through the Igus chain. See Impelling Igus chain ink tubes and cables
on page 604.
12. Unroute from the Igus chain to carriage interconnect PCAs 1 and 2.
Installation
1. Reroute from the e-cabinet PCA to the Igus chain. Remember to leave a free loop at the end of the Igus
chain.
2. Connect to the e-cabinet PCA (42 V CARR connector).
3. Reroute through the Igus chain; remember to leave a free loop on both ends of the chain.
4. Screw back the cover Igus end.
5. Route back the 42 V power cables through the Igus chain. See Impelling Igus chain ink tubes and cables
on page 604.
6. Reroute both cables from the carriage interconnect to the e-cabinet PCAs.
7. Connect to both carriage interconnect PCAs.
Impelling 12 V power cable (CZ056-50066)

Removal

6. Disconnect the 12 V power cables from the e-cabinet PCA (12 V CARR connector).
8. Disconnect the 12 V power cables from drying PCAs 1 and 2 (12V_IN connector).
9. Unroute from the e-cabinet PCA to the end of the Igus chain. See Impelling Igus chain ink tubes and
cables on page 604.
11. Unroute the 12 V power cables through the Igus chain. See Impelling Igus chain ink tubes and cables
on page 604.
12. Unroute from the Igus chain to drying PCAs 1 and 2.
Installation
1. Reroute from the e-cabinet PCA to the Igus chain. Remember to leave a free loop at the end of the Igus
chain.
2. Connect to the e-cabinet PCA (12V CARR connector).
3. Reroute through the Igus chain; remember to leave a free loop on both ends of the chain.
4. Screw back with the three T25 screws the cover Igus end to the beam.
5. Route back the 12 V power cables through the Igus chain. See Impelling Igus chain ink tubes and cables
on page 604.
6. Reroute both cables from the carriage interconnect to the e-cabinet PCAs.
7. Connect to both carriage interconnect PCAs.
Impelling PE cable (CZ056-50150)

Removal
6. Remove the T-20 screw and disconnect the PE cable from the top carriage column.
7. Remove the T-20 screw and disconnect the PE cable from the printer structure.
9. Unroute the PE cable through the Igus chain. See Impelling Igus chain ink tubes and cables
on page 604.
10. Unroute from the Igus chain to drying PCAs 1 and 2.
ENWW Impelling 591

Impelling drying data cable (CZ056-50044)
Removal
6. Disconnect the drying data cable from the e-box interconnect PCA (CAN (J161) connector).
8. Disconnect the drying data cable from the Drying PCA 1 (J12 connector).
9. Unroute from the e-cabinet PCA to the end of the Igus chain.
11. Unroute the cable through the Igus chain. See Impelling Igus chain ink tubes and cables on page 604.
12. Unroute the data cable from the Igus chain to drying PCA 1.
Installation
1. Route the cable from the Igus chain to the drying PCA UP.
2. Route the data cable through the Igus chain. See Impelling Igus chain ink tubes and cables
on page 604.
3. Screw the cover Igus end to the beam with the three T-25 screws.
4. Route the data cable from the e-cabinet PCA to the Igus chain end.
5. Connect the data cable to the drying PCA UP (J12 connector).
6. Connect the data cable to the e-box interconnect PCA (CAN (J161) connector).
Impelling fiber-optics trailing cable (CZ056-50255)

Removal
5. Remove the right back panel.
6. Free the routed fiber-optic cable loops from supports and flanges. Be careful not to break the cable.
NOTE: See Impelling Igus chain ink tubes and cables on page 604 before proceeding with the
following steps. The fiber-optics cable has a specific procedure for its connect and disconnect to fiber-
optics PCA procedure.
7. Disconnect the fiber-optic cable from the e-box fiber-optics PCA (J18 connector).

8. Disconnect the fiber-optic cable from the carriage fiber-optics PCA (J18 connector).
9. Unroute from the e-cabinet PCA to the end of the Igus chain. Be careful not to break the cable.
11. Unroute the fiber-optic cable through the Igus chain. Be careful not to break the cable.
12. Unroute from the Igus chain to the carriage fiber-optics PCA.
Installation
NOTE: See Impelling Igus chain ink tubes and cables on page 604 before proceeding with the following
steps. The fiber-optics cable has a specific procedure for its connect and disconnect to fiber-optics PCA
procedure.
1. Route the fiber-optic cable from Igus chain to the carriage fiber-optics PCA.
2. Route the fiber-optic cable through the Igus chain (see Impelling Igus chain ink tubes and cables
on page 604). Be careful not to break the cable.
3. Screw the cover Igus end to the beam with the three T25 screws.
4. Route from the e-box fiber-optics PCA to the Igus chain end. Be careful not to break the cable.
5. Connect the fiber-optic cable to the carriage fiber-optics PCA (J18 connector).
6. Connect the fiber-optic cable to the e-box fiber-optics PCA (J18 connector).
7. Route the fiber-optic cable (leaving the needed free loops) from its supports and flanges. Be careful not
to break the cable.
Impelling motor
Removal
5. Remove the left side top panel.
6. Remove the left side bottom panel.
NOTE: You can also remove the ink system compartment for completely free access. See Ink system
compartment on page 687.
ENWW Impelling 593

7. Remove the tension nut and washer from the holder.
8. Screw the tension nut and washer onto the scan-axis belt tensioner to loosen the tension. Continue
until you have completely released the tension in the belt.
9. Remove one of the belt clamps to release the tension completely by removing the four T-20 screws.

10. Unscrew the data cable connector and remove it.
11. Unscrew the power cable connector and remove it.
12. Remove the four A5 screws that secure the scan-axis motor. Access them from above.
ENWW Impelling 595

13. Remove the motor straight down.
NOTE: There are two types of scan-axis motor: one with two connectors and one with three (of the three
connectors, one is always unused). Both of them can be swapped and have exactly the same function (the
printer will detect the correct type of motor). There is a slight difference between the motors: the two-
connector one will have a tendency, when positioning the carriage to a specific point, to move the carriage
slightly around the point until it finds the right position, while the other one (three connectors) does not have
this behavior of oscillating around the target position. There is no difference in throughput between the two
motors, they are fully interchangeable.
Impelling encoder strip

Removal
1. Place the scan beam in the high position to get more room in which to work. In the Internal Print Server,
select Substrate > Carriage beam > Move to load position.
4. Remove the right panel. See Right panel assembly on page 624.
5. Remove the rear left panel. See Rear left panel assembly on page 636.
7. Remove the printheads and store them in their protective caps.
8. Manually uncap the service station.
9. Remove the carriage encoder assembly. See Carriage encoder assembly on page 435.
NOTE: You do not need to disconnect the sensor cable in the carriage, although you are recommended
to remove it and save it in a secure place. Remove the sensor from the encoder strip so that you can
remove the encoder strip.
10. Move the carriage to the far right of the printer. The illustration shows the view from the rear.

11. Remove the scan-axis encoder protector sheet.
12. Note the location of the MH3 nuts for the encoder protectors removed for the carriage encoder set.
13. Remove the remaining three encoder protectors (22 hand-removable nuts) as with the carriage encoder
set.
ENWW Impelling 597

14. Remove the three hand-removable nuts that secure each encoder protector sheet and foams.
NOTE: All the protector sheets, as shown above, are small and have three nuts.
15. Remove the encoder strip from the pins and carefully remove the encoder strip from the printer.
CAUTION: The encoder strip is very sharp. Use protective gloves to avoid cutting yourself.
Installation
1. When you reinstall the encoder strip, start on the right side, place the carriage in the UNCAP on the left
side.
2. The encoder strip service part comes as a roll. Place it on the pins one at a time, without unrolling the
encoder strip all at once. Secure the encoder strip with the nuts as you go from left to right (without
securing the protector, and without applying any pressure, to avoid the encoder falling). The illustration
shows the view from the rear.
3. Pass the encoder under the encoder reader while the carriage is on the left side.

4. Make sure the strip is secure on each pin. It must be positioned precisely.
5. Make sure the foams are correctly placed between the encoder strip and protector sheet.
6. Remove the nuts and install the protector sheets one at a time.
7. Reinstall the carriage encoder assembly. See Carriage encoder assembly on page 435.
Impelling carriage belt assembly

Removal
2. Remove the ink system compartment. See Ink system compartment on page 687.
3. Remove the tension nut and washer from the holder.
4. Screw the tension nut and washer onto the scan-axis belt tensioner to reduce the tension. Continue
5. Use a marker to make a mark on the belt where it meets the edge of the clamp.
ENWW Impelling 599

6. Remove the four T-20 screws that secure both belt clamps, and remove the clamps.
NOTE: The four screws and second belt clamp are not shown in the graphic.
NOTE: If the carriage is in the capping position, access the right clamp from the top cover window.
7. Remove the scan-axis impelling belt.
Installation
1. Put the new belt side by side with the old belt.
2. Transfer the mark you made from the old belt to the new belt. If there is too much extra belt, you can
cut it with a hacksaw (metal-cutting saw).
3. Route the new belt through the side plates and around the scan-axis belt tensioner and scan-axis
motor, so that the belt is ready to be attached to the carriage.
4. Use a belt clamp to secure the side of the belt that was even with the old belt to the carriage.
5. Pull on the loose end of the belt to bring the belt into position. Make sure the belt engages the motor
and tensioner correctly at each end.
6. Line up the belt clamp with the mark you made on the new belt, and secure it with the screws.
7. Remove the tensioner nut from the scan-axis belt tensioner to set the tension.
8. Check the tensioning limit marks on the central screw of the scan-axis belt tensioner. This will indicate if
the belt must be lengthened or shortened by adjusting the clamp secured to the carriage.

9. If the tension is out of limits, use the tension nut to release the tension on the scan-axis belt tensioner,
and then adjust the belt inside the clamp to make it longer or shorter.
NOTE: One tooth of the belt = 4 mm of adjustment on the belt tensioner.
10. Repeat this process until the tension is correct.
11. Remove the tension nut and washer and return them to the holder.
Impelling tensioner assembly

Removal
3. Screw the tension nut and washer onto the scan-axis belt tensioner to loosen the tension. Continue
4. Use a marker to make a mark on the belt where it meets the edge of the clamp.
5. Remove the four T-20 screws that secure the belt clamp, and remove the clamp. You need to remove
only the clamp.
6. Remove the two circlips that secure the scan-axis belt tensioner, and remove the tensioner.
ENWW Impelling 601

Installation
▲ When reinstalling the left belt with the carriage, line up the belt clamp with the mark that you made
when removing it, and secure it with screws.
NOTE: Adjust the belt when you replace the scan-axis belt tensioner. See the installation procedure.
SAX motor power cables kit

NOTE: This service part assembly includes the following part numbers: CZ056-50130, CZ056-50131 and
CZ056-50142.
Removal
4. Remove the eight pointed MH4 screws and the breaking resistor enclosure.
5. Disconnect the SAX motor power cable from the breaking resistor and the SAX motor.
NOTE: In the picture above, the power connector is circled in yellow, the uncovered breaking resistor
is circled in red, and the SAX motor data cable connector is circled in blue.
NOTE: It is important to cover all the breaking resistor correctly, since in case it breaks it can injure its
surrounding parts.
NOTE: Do not disconnect the cables by pulling them because you may break the connector. Hold the
connector of the cable when removing it.

6. Disconnect the power cable from both the e-cabinet (SAX connector) and the breaking resistor.
7. Unroute both power cables. Cut the flanges if necessary.
Installation
1. Replace the cables. While rerouting the cables, replace the cut flanges.
NOTE: Be careful to leave enough free loop (at least a 15 cm loop), so that the carriage beam will be
able to reach the substrate load position.
2. Route both power cables.
3. Connect back the power cable to both the e-cabinet (SAX connector) and the breaking resistor.
4. Connect the SAX motor power cable to both the breaking resistor and the SAX motor.
5. Screw back the breaking resistor enclosure with its eight pointed MH4 screws.
SAX motor data cable (CZ056-50045)

Removal
4. Disconnect the data cable from the SAX motor.
NOTE: In the picture above, the power connector is circled in yellow, the uncovered breaking resistor
is circled in red, and the SAX motor data cable connector is circled in blue.
ENWW Impelling 603

5. Disconnect the SAX motor power cable from the e-box interconnect PCA (J_101 connector).
6. Cut the flanges and unroute the data cable. If necessary, carefully pull the e-box out (take care not to
break the fiber-optic cable loop).
Installation
1. Replace the SAX motor data cable and the cut flanges.
NOTE: Be careful to leave enough free loop (at least a 15 cm loop), so that the carriage beam will be
able to reach the substrate load position.
2. Put back the flanges after routing back the data cable. If needed, carefully pull out the e-box (take care
of the fiber-optic cable loop in order not to break it).
3. Connect back to the e-box interconnect PCA (J_101 connector) the SAX motor data cable.
NOTE: Be careful when connecting the data cable. Place it orthogonally, ensuring that the pins will
match correctly, and then screw it to connect the cable to the motor.
NOTE: Do not disconnect the cables by pulling them because you may break the connector. Hold the
connector of the cable when removing it.
4. Reconnect the data cable to the SAX motor.
Impelling Igus chain ink tubes and cables

The list below indicates the steps to follow for a general replacement of the Igus chain ink tubes and cables:
● Impelling Igus chain removal
◦ Impelling fiber-optic cable removal
◦ Impelling trailing cables and ink tubes removal
● Impelling Igus chain installation
◦ Impelling trailing cables and ink tubes installation
◦ Impelling fiber-optic cable installation
The following table indicates the impelling Igus chain content and the terminal for each part.
Service part Part number Qty Igus chain Ref.
From To
Ink tubes — 7 Quick connector Carriage A
Impelling PE cable CZ056-50150 2 Scan-axis beam Carriage tower B

Service part Part number Qty Igus chain Ref.
From To
Impelling drying CZ056-50044 1 E-box interconnect Drying PCA UP C

data cable PCA
Impelling drying AC CZ056-50065 2 E-cabinet Drying PCA DOWN D

cable
Impelling 12V CZ056-50066 1 E-cabinet PCA Drying PCAs (UP & E

power cable DOWN)
Impelling 42V CZ056-50063 1 E-cabinet PCA Carriage F

power cable interconnect PCAs
(UP & DOWN)
Impelling fiber- CZ056-50255 1 Fiber-optics PCA (e- Fiber-optics PCA G

optic trailing cable box) (carriage)
See the figures below for the impelling Igus chain cables and ink tubes routing:
Figure 7-1 Igus chain carriage end section
Figure 7-2 Igus chain scan-axis end section
See the photograph below with the impelling Igus chain cables and ink tubes clamp routing (carriage end
section shown).
ENWW Impelling 605

Impelling Igus chain removal
Perform the following steps before following the specific procedure, depending on which part has to be
replaced:
6. From the center covers, remove the rear center cover PC sheets, so you can reach the entire Igus chain
routing. See Rear center-right PC sheet cover on page 649.
7. Remove the three pointed screws and remove the scan-axis cables and tubes Igus chain end protector
cover.
8. Disconnect both cable ends and unroute it up to both ends of the Igus chain.
CAUTION: If the fiber-optic cable is being replaced, it is strongly recommended that you read the
replacement instructions before proceeding with its removal and installation, and follow steps
described in the correct order.
NOTE: Unroute the trailing cables all the way to the base of the carriage chain assembly by pulling out
the trailing cables and tubes from the cable protectors from the top of the rear scan-axis beam.
CAUTION: Be careful when routing or unrouting the fiber-optic cable not to twist or tighten it
excessively.
9. Perform the specific replacement procedure, described below, depending on which part has to be
replaced:

Service part Part number Qty Specific procedure
Ink tubes — 7
Impelling PE cable CZ056-50150 2
Impelling drying data cable CZ056-50044 1

Impelling trailing cables and
ink tubes removal
Impelling drying AC cable CZ056-50065 2
Impelling 12V power cable CZ056-50066 1
Impelling 42V power cable CZ056-50063 1
Impelling fiber-optic trailing Impelling fiber-optic cable

CZ056-50255 1
cable removal
NOTE: For this procedure it is strongly recommended to follow steps described in the correct order, so
that the fiber-optic cable does not break.
Impelling fiber-optic cable removal

1. Disconnect all cables from the fiber-optics PCA, except for the fiber-optic cable connector.
2. Remove the pointed screws and disconnect the fiber-optics PCA from the fiber-optic cable connector by
sliding it out when removing it.
3. Once the fiber-optics PCA is removed and disconnected from the fiber-optic cable connector, remove
the two screws and the fiber-optic clamp.
4. Remove the four T-20 screws and remove the upper closing sheet, under the carriage top sheet.
5. Unroute the fiber-optic cable from the fiber-optics duct and slide the fiber-optic cable through the
carriage top sheet hole.
TIP: The fiber-optic cable can be unrouted without releasing the Igus chain. In this case, it is important
to follow these recommendations, to reduce the risk of breaking the fiber-optic cable:
● Move the carriage to completely to the left.
● Disconnect the fiber-optic cable from the fiber-optics PCA.
● Start to unroute the fiber-optic cable from the carriage along the Igus chain until the Igus chain
starts to turn.
● Carefully loosen the fiber-optic cable in a secure routing together with the Igus chain and move
the carriage to the repair position.
● Unroute the fiber-optic cable Igus from the rest of the Igus chain.
Impelling trailing cables and ink tubes removal
1. Perform the Impelling fiber-optic cable removal procedure, so that the cover clamp is free from the
fiber-optic cable and the Igus chain can be removed without breaking or excessively tightening the
fiber-optic cable.
2. For each ink tube line, flush the TRS ink line from the carriage to the barnacle panel and cut the thin
tube (about 5 cm from the elbow fitting).
NOTE: Before flushing and cutting the ink tube line, ensure that it is correctly labeled on both sides of
the cut.
3. Remove the two T-20 screws and remove the cables and tubes cover clamp.
ENWW Impelling 607

4. Remove the four screws and remove the cables and tubes clamp from the Igus chain end, and release
the chain from the carriage tower and the scan axis self support (at both ends of the carriage chain).
5. Remove the tubes and cable clamps (at both ends of the carriage chain).
6. Label on both sides and flush each of the ink tubes before cutting them on the carriage top, so that the
Igus chain can be released. It is strongly recommended to cut the thinner tube, at least 2 cm away from
the elbow fitting.
7. Remove the four screws that fix the Igus chain end to the carriage top sheet and carefully release the
Igus chain on top of the scan-axis beam.
8. Once the chain is completely released, place it on top of the scan-axis beam.
9. Remove the carriage chain links by inserting a flat screwdriver deep into the slot and turning it.
NOTE: Ensure the head of the screwdriver is between 4 and 5 mm wide, otherwise it cannot be
inserted correctly and can damage the carriage link when turning.
WARNING! Never use a broken link in the chain as it could fall during printer operation and cause
severe damage to the printer.

10. Once all links are removed, unroute the trailing cable from the chain and remove the cable from the
cable protector to release it completely from the printer.
Impelling Igus chain installation

Before performing the Impelling Igus chain installation ensure that the impelling trailing cable is correctly
routed and the Igus chain is ready to be installed.
Perform the Impelling trailing cables and ink tubes installation procedure.
1. Before inserting a new trailing cable, mark it with the same distances as the one that was removed.
Use the connector that goes on the printhead interconnect side as reference (angled connector).
The following table indicates the length of each trailing cable at the carriage end and its reference to
measure it, starting from the carriage clamp:
Service part Part number Qty Length (mm) Length measurement
From Igus chain to end

Ink tubes — 7 120
of connector
From Igus chain to end

Impelling PE cable CZ056-50150 2 120
of connector
Impelling drying data From Igus chain to end

CZ056-50044 1 660
cable of connector
Impelling drying AC From Igus chain to end

CZ056-50065 2 660
cable of connector
The split of the cable

Impelling 12V power
CZ056-50066 1 - starts at the exit of the
cable
Igus chain
The split of the cable

Impelling 42V power starts 90 mm away
CZ056-50063 1 -
cable from the exit of the
Igus chain
Impelling fiber-optic From Igus chain to

CZ056-50255 1 120
trailing cable beginning of connector
NOTE: If the new replacement service part is longer than the part removed, put the excess cable into a
loop shape at the end of the printer routing.
ENWW Impelling 609

2. Route the new cable into the chain, use the marks as reference for cable location.
3. Place all cables back in the approximately correct positions using the cable and tube marks.
4. Ensure all separators are put back in a central position.
5. Put the chain links back by putting one side into position and gently hitting the other side until the
complete link latches. Use a plastic-head hammer to prevent link damage.
WARNING! Never use a broken link in the chain as it could fail during printer operation and cause
severe damage to the printer.

6. Perform a double check to ensure all of the cables are back in position, pull slightly first from one end
and then the other to ensure there are no tubes or cables crossed or pinched by the chain links.
CAUTION: Ensure no cables or tubes are crossed when placing them in the clamp holder.
7. Put back the tubes and cables.
8. Match both ink tube sides with their corresponding fitting and purge each of the ink tubes.
9. Once the ink tube lines are installed, purge the tube routing system all the way.
10. Perform the impelling fiber-optic cable installation procedure.
11. Reroute and reconnect all the cables.
12. Close the carriage-tower cover and the carriage electronics cover.
13. Separate the different routed cables.
14. Put the cables routed to the ink system module together using flanges or tape.
ENWW Impelling 611

15. Put the cables routed along the scan axis to the ink system module back into the cable protector.
Ensure that the cables are neither pinched nor bent all the way.
16. Close all latches to fix the cable protector in position. Perform the same action with the ink tubes
protector.
17. Reroute at the back of both the e-box and the e-cabinet. Place into the scan-axis cable duct protector
and put all the cable ties back.
NOTE: Be careful routing the cables to the e-box (since it includes the fiber-optic cable it is important
not to break it by twisting or tightening it).
18. Adjust the routing loop at the scan-axis Igus chain end and ensure that the cables are neither pinched
nor bent.
19. Leave the appropiate cable loop for the carriage beam scan-axis movement (a minimum of 15 cm loop).

20. Ensure that the cables are neither pinched nor bent all the way.
21. Reconnect all cables to both the e-box and the e-cabinet assemblies.
Once the impelling Igus chain is fixed to the scan axis beam (and all the trailing cables and the ink tubes are
connected to their corresponding printer assemblies) perform fiber-optic cable installation so that all the
trailing cables can be correctly installed and connected to the carriage.
Perform the Impelling fiber-optic cable installation procedure
Impelling fiber-optic cable installation

1. Reroute the fiber-optic cable through the fiber-optics duct and slide it through the carriage top sheet
hole, so that it is correctly located on the carriage top sheet.
2. Screw the four T-20 screws and fix the upper closing sheet under the carriage top sheet.
3. Using its two screws, fix the fiber-optic clamp to the carriage tubes and cables clamp, which holds the
fiber-optic cable.
4. Slide the fiber-optics PCA to its location and connect it to the fiber-optic cable connector.
5. Screw back the fiber-optics PCA to the carriage top sheet.
After performing the installation steps described above, perform the Impelling Igus Chain installation
procedure below and re-connect both the trailing cables and the ink tubes to the carriage assembly
Impelling Igus chain installation

1. Reroute and reconnect all cables to the fiber-optics PCA.
2. Ensure that all the Igus chain trailing cables and the ink tubes are correctly connected to their
corresponding ends.
3. Ensure that all the ink tubes have been correctly purged all the way and check that the quick connector
has been plugged into the ink system module.
4. Reinstall all the rear center cover PC sheets.
5. Screw back the five pointed screws and fix the tower cover to the carriage.
ENWW Impelling 613

Industrial design covers
Buzzer and cable
Removal
3. Locate the buzzer under the right front cover.
4. Disconnect the buzzer from its air connector.
5. Remove the right front cover.
6. Remove the two pointed screws that attach the buzzer to the right front structure and replace it with
the new one.
Bottom right cover

Removal
2. Locate the bottom right side cover, below the e-cabinet.
3. Disconnect the printer from all of its power cords.
CAUTION: Before opening the e-cabinet, turn off the printer using the branch circuit breakers located
in the building's power distribution unit, or by disconnecting the power cord(s) from the mains. Always
check that the grounding cable is correctly installed before powering up and take all necessary
CAUTION: If there is a dedicated single-phase line for the computer, the circuit breakers associated
with this line must also be switched off.

5. Remove the three T-20 screws that attach the bottom right side cover and remove the cover.
6. Slide out the bottom right side cover.
Front lower right cover

Removal
2. Locate the front right cover.
3. Disconnect the Internal Print Server monitor from its cables and remove it.
4. Remove the four pointed T-20 screws.
5. Remove the Internal Print Server monitor metal sheet base support from the front right cover. Save it in
a secure place.
6. Remove the keyboard shelf assembly. See Keyboard shelf assembly on page 621.
ENWW Industrial design covers 615

7. Remove the front top right cover.
8. Open the front door, so that it is easier to reach the hidden screws in the front lower right cover.
9. Open the front right panel assembly, so that it is easier to reach the hidden screws.
10. Remove the four pointed T-20 screws that attach the front lower right cover.
11. Slide down and remove the front lower right cover.
Front right cover

Removal
2. Locate the front right cover.
3. Disconnect the Internal Print Server monitor from its cables and remove it.

4. Remove the four pointed T-20 screws.
5. Remove the Internal Print Server monitor metal sheet base support from the front right cover. Save it in
a secure place.
8. Open the front door, so that it is easier to reach the hidden screws in the front lower right cover.
9. Open the front right panel assembly, so that it is easier to reach the hidden screws.
10. Remove the four pointed T-20 screws that attach the front lower right cover.

11. Slide down and remove the front lower right cover.
12. Remove the two pointed T-20 screws that attach the front right cover.
13. Remove the front right cover.
Rear top right cover

Removal
2. Locate the rear top right cover.
4. Disconnect and unroute all cables routed along the cover (cut the flanges if necessary to free the
cables).

5. Locate the supports that hold the rear top right cover from the inner side and remove the two T-20
screws shown below.
6. Remove the rear top right cover.
Front top right cover

Removal
2. Locate the front top right cover.
3. Open the front right panel assembly.

4. Remove the three T-20 screws that attach the front top right cover.
Rear right internal cover

Removal
2. Locate the rear right internal cover.
3. Remove the rear right panel, so that you can reach the screws that attach the rear right internal cover.
See Rear right panel assembly on page 624.
4. Remove the four pointed T-20 screws that attach the rear right internal cover.

5. Remove the rear right internal cover.
Keyboard shelf assembly

Removal
2. Locate the keyboard shelf assembly.
3. Open the printhead cleaning door (see Printhead cleaning door assembly on page 627) and the front
right panel assembly (see Front right panel assembly on page 623), so that you can reach the hidden
screws attaching the keyboard shelf assembly.
4. Disconnect and remove the keyboard from the printer. Save it in a secure place.
5. Remove the five pointed T-20 screws that attach the keyboard shelf assembly.

6. Remove the keyboard shelf assembly.
Front right corner assembly

Removal
2. Locate the front right corner assembly.
3. Open the front right panel assembly. See Front right panel assembly on page 623.
6. Remove the five pointed T-20 screws that attach the front right corner assembly.
TIP: Alternatively, you can remove the door by removing the hinge supports from the right structure
(two screws for each hinge support).

7. Remove the front right corner assembly.
Front right panel assembly

Removal
2. Locate the front right panel assembly.
3. Remove the two pointed T-20 screws that attach the front right panel assembly.
4. Remove the keyboard shelf assemby. See Keyboard shelf assembly on page 621.
5. Open the front right panel assembly, slide it out from its hinges, and remove it.

Rear right panel assembly
Removal
2. Locate the rear right panel assembly.
3. Remove the two pointed T-20 screws that attach the rear right panel assembly.
4. Remove the rear right panel assembly.
Right panel assembly

Removal
2. Locate the right panel assembly.
3. Remove the two pointed T-20 screws that attach the right panel assembly.

4. Remove the right panel assembly.
Rear right corner assembly

Removal
2. Locate the rear right corner assembly.
4. Remove the right panel assembly. See Right panel assembly on page 624.
5. Remove the four pointed T-20 screws that attach the rear right corner assembly.

6. Remove the rear right corner assembly.
Rear right internal corner assembly

Removal
2. Locate the rear right internal corner assembly.
4. Remove the rear right internal cover.
5. Remove the four pointed T-20 screws that attach the rear right internal corner assembly.

6. Remove the rear right internal corner assembly.
Printhead cleaning door assembly

Removal
2. Locate the printhead cleaning door assembly.
4. Unlock and open the printhead cleaning door assembly.
5. Slide out from its hinges and remove the printhead cleaning door assembly.
Rear right pillar

Removal
2. Locate the rear right pillar.
3. Keep the loading table closed.

4. Remove the four pointed screws that attach the rear right pillar.
5. Remove the rear right internal corner assembly (see Rear right internal corner assembly on page 626),
so that you can remove the rear right pillar.
TIP: It is also possible to remove the rear right pillar if you separate the right structure sufficiently
from the main body structure. See Right structure on page 651.
6. Remove the rear right pillar.
Front right pillar

Removal
2. Locate the front right pillar.
4. Open the curing module assembly to the service position.

6. Remove the front right pillar upper screw.
TIP: The screw may be easiest to remove with an L-shaped key.
7. Close the curing module assembly.
8. Remove the four pointed screws that attach the front right pillar.
9. Remove the front right pillar.
Rear left pillar

Removal
2. Locate the rear left pillar.
3. Keep the loading table closed.
4. Remove the six pointed screws that attach the rear left pillar.
5. Remove the rear left internal corner assembly (see Rear left internal corner assembly on page 638),
so that you can remove the rear left pillar.
TIP: It is also possible to remove the rear left pillar if you separate the ink system compartment
sufficiently from the main body structure. See Ink system compartment on page 687.
6. Remove the rear left pillar.

Front left pillar
Removal
2. Locate the front left pillar.
3. Remove the four pointed screws that attach the front left pillar.
4. Remove the front left internal corner assembly (see Front left internal corner assembly on page 638),
so that you can remove the front left pillar.
TIP: It is also possible to remove the front left pillar if you separate the ink system compartment
sufficiently from the main body structure. See Ink system compartment on page 687.
5. Remove the front left pillar.
Front top left pillar

Removal
2. Locate the front top left pillar.
3. Remove the front left panel.
4. Remove the six pointed screws that attach the front top left pillar.
5. Remove the front top left pillar.

Front left internal cover
Removal
2. Locate the front left internal cover.
3. Remove the front left panel. See Front left panel assembly on page 635.
4. Remove the three pointed screws that attach the front left internal cover.
5. Remove the front left internal cover.
Top left cover

Removal
2. Locate the top left cover.

3. Remove all the top left cover clamps.
4. Disconnect all the ISM cartridge connectors from their cartridges.
5. Remove all the cartridges from the printer and save them in a secure place.
6. Remove the four pointed screws that attach the top left cover to the metal sheet supports.
7. Remove the two screws that match the top left cover with the rear left internal cover, and the two
screws that hold it to the front left internal cover.
8. Remove the two screws that match the top left cover with the top left cover slot plug.
9. Remove the top left cover slot plug.

10. Remove the seven screws that hold the top left cover to the ISM structure top frame, and remove the
cover.
Top left cover clamp and labels

Removal
2. Locate the top left cover clamp and labels.
3. Remove the top left panel assembly. See Top left panel assembly on page 637.
5. Remove the two pointed screws that attach the top left cover clamp and labels.
6. Carefully slide down the top left cover clamp and labels.

7. Disconnect and remove the top left cover clamp and labels.
Left corner assembly

Removal
2. Locate the left corner assembly.
3. Remove the top left panel assembly. See Top left panel assembly on page 637.
4. Remove the bottom left panel assembly. See Bottom left panel assembly on page 636.
5. Remove the front left panel assembly. See Front left panel assembly on page 635.
6. Remove the rear left panel assembly. See Rear left panel assembly on page 636.
7. Remove the five pointed screws that attach each left corner assembly.

8. Remove the two left corner assemblies.
Front left panel assembly

Removal
2. Locate the front left panel assembly.
3. Remove the two pointed screws that attach the front left panel assembly.
4. Remove the front left panel assembly.

Rear left panel assembly
Removal
2. Locate the rear left panel assembly.
3. Remove the four pointed screws that attach the rear left panel assembly.
4. Remove the rear left panel assembly.
Bottom left panel assembly

Removal
2. Locate the bottom left panel assembly.
3. Remove the four pointed screws that attach the bottom left panel assembly.

4. Remove the bottom left panel assembly.
Top left panel assembly

Removal
2. Locate the top left panel assembly.
3. Remove the four pointed screws that attach the top left panel assembly.
4. Remove the top left panel assembly.

Front left internal corner assembly
Removal
2. Locate the front left internal corner assembly.
3. Remove the front left panel assembly. See Front left panel assembly on page 635.
5. Remove the front left panel door. See Front left panel door on page 653.
6. Remove the pointed screws that attach the front left internal corner supports, and the pointed screw
that attaches the front left internal cover to the left internal corner assembly.
7. Remove the front left internal corner assembly.
Rear left internal corner assembly

Removal
2. Locate the rear left internal corner assembly.
4. Remove the rear left internal cover. See Rear left internal cover on page 639.

5. Remove the nine pointed screws that attach the rear left internal corner assembly's supports to the ink
system compartment structure (three screws on each support).
6. Remove the rear left internal corner assembly.
Rear left internal cover

Removal
2. Locate the rear left internal cover.

4. Loosen the flange and remove the vapor removal air-to-blower pipe from the vapor removal exhaust.
CAUTION: All vapor removal parts may contain liquid; therefore, before removing any vapor removal
part, either cover all the surfaces that could get wet, or remove all delicate parts that could be damaged
by liquid (such as the electronic and electrical parts).
TIP: Once the pipe is free, you are recommended to lift the higher end of the pipe slightly before
starting to remove it, so that most of the liquid it contains can run into the waste bottle.
5. Remove the four pointed screws that attach the vapor removal exhaust to the rear left internal cover,
and remove the vapor removal exhaust.
6. Remove the four pointed screws that attach the rear left internal cover.
TIP: It may be easier to remove the rear left internal cover with its supports attached and separate it
from its metal sheet supports once it has been removed.

7. Remove the rear left internal cover.
Installation
1. Install the vapor removal exhaust.
2. Install the vapor removal air-to-blower pipe.
3. Put back all the covers.
Center left cover

Removal
2. Locate the center left cover.
5. Remove the ink system compartment, so that it is easier to reach the center left cover screws. See Ink
system compartment on page 687.

6. Remove the eleven screws that hold the center left cover to the scan axis and to the arch center cover.

7. Remove the center left cover.
Center right cover

Removal
2. Locate the center right cover.
3. Remove the right back panel and the right side panel, so that you can reach all the six screws that hold
the center right cover.
4. Remove the six screws that attach the center right cover to the arch center cover.

5. Remove the center right cover.
Front top center cover

Removal
2. Locate the front top center cover.
3. Remove the two pointed screws that attach the front top center cover to the arch center covers.
4. Carefully open the front PC cover, pull out the latches, and remove the front top center cover with the
new one.
Rear top center cover

Removal
2. Locate the rear top center cover.

3. Remove the seven pointed screws that hold the rear top center cover.
4. Remove the rear top center cover.
Arch center cover

Removal
2. Locate the arch center cover.
3. Remove the top center covers and the rear PC sheets to reach the arch center cover.
4. Remove the eight pointed screws (four on each side) that attach the arch center cover to the printer’s
scan-axis structure.
5. Remove the arch center cover.

Front PC sheet
Removal
2. Locate the front PC sheet.
3. Remove the four pointed screws that attach the front PC cover to the arch center covers.
4. Carefully open the front PC cover, pull out the latches, and remove the front PC cover.

5. Remove the pointed screws and the front PC sheet.
Window PC sheet
Removal
2. Locate the window PC sheet.
3. Remove the center window.
4. Remove the handle and the two key latches from the window PC sheet.

5. Remove the pointed screws.
6. Remove the window PC sheet.
Rear PC sheet
Removal
2. Locate the rear PC sheet.

3. Remove the screws that hold the rear PC sheet to the top center cover band.
4. While holding the rear PC sheet, remove the pointed screws that attach it.
5. Remove the rear PC sheet, moving it down and then out.
Rear center-right PC sheet cover

Removal
2. Locate the rear center-right PC sheet cover.

4. While holding the rear center-right PC sheet cover, remove the pointed screws that attach it.
5. Remove the rear center-right PC sheet cover.
TIP: There is a gap through which the sheet can slide. Move it down and then to the left.
CAUTION: When sliding the sheet cover, be careful not to pinch or tighten any cable.
Window gas spring

Removal
2. Locate the window gas spring.
3. Open the center window.

4. Remove the two screws that hold the window gas spring to the center window and the arch center
cover.
CAUTION: Be careful with the washers when removing the gas springs.
5. Remove the window gas spring.
Right structure
Removal
2. Locate the right structure.
5. Remove all the right structure panels, so that you have free access to all the routed cables.
6. Disconnect and unroute all the cables routed from the right structure to the center and left printer
structure and assemblies, so that the right structure is free from cables that route to the scan axis.
7. Remove the vacuum pipe.
8. Disconnect and unroute all the cables connected to the e-box or the e-cabinet that are routed out of the
right structure (that is, those that are routed to the scan axis, the substrate path, and the ink system
module assemblies). See Subsystem block diagrams on page 61.
TIP: You are strongly recommended to unroute from the right structure to the rest of the printer, so
that the right structure remains free from routed cables.
CAUTION: Be careful when unrouting the e-box cables not to twist or tighten the fiber-optic cable
excessively.
9. Locate and remove the two pins that hold together the right structure and the scan-axis structure.
10. Remove the right structure from the printer.
TIP: When removing the right structure, you can move the printhead cleaning module guide to avoid
interference with the right structure.
CAUTION: Be careful when removing the right structure from the printer, because it is very heavy.

Installation
1. Remove all the right structure remaining assemblies and parts, such as the e-cabinet, the e-box, and
the vacuum pump, and attach them to the new right structure.
2. Put the right structure into the printer and attach it with the two pins.
3. Reinstall the vacuum pipe.
4. Reroute all the cables in an orderly manner to the various right structure assemblies and parts. See
5. Reinstall all the covers and close the printhead cleaning door.
Front door
Removal
3. Remove the gas springs from the front door.
4. Hold the front door while removing the two pointed screws from each hinge.
CAUTION: The front door is large and heavy. At least two people are recommended for this operation.

5. Remove the front door.
Front left panel door

Removal
2. Remove the front left panel.
3. Open the front left panel door and slide it up to remove it from its hinges.
4. Remove the front left panel door.
Center window
Removal
2. Locate the center window.
3. Open the center window key latches and open the window.

4. Remove the two screws that hold the window gas spring to both arch center covers.
CAUTION: Be careful with the window gas spring washers when removing them.
5. Pull out the two center window hinges while holding the center window.
6. Remove the center window.
Cover supports
Removal
2. Locate the cover support that you want to remove.
3. Remove panels as needed to reach the cover support and free it from all the panels to which it is
attached. See Service parts and diagrams on page 378.

4. Remove the screws that hold the cover support.
5. Remove the cover support.
Interlock
Removal
3. Remove the crossed screw and the interlock connector cover.

4. Disconnect the cables from the interlock.
5. Remove the screws that attach each part of the interlock.
6. Remove the interlock.

Installation
1. Screw the interlock connector to the printer front beam structure.
3. Reconnect the cables to the interlock connector.
4. Screw the interlock jumper to the front door rib.
5. Carefully move the front door to the closed position, without closing it completely, and ensure that the
interlock connector perfectly matches the interlock jumper, so that it will not bend or break the
interlock pins. Adjust its position if necessary.
The illustration below shows the clearance that allows you to put the interlock connector in the best
position to match the corresponding jumper.
CAUTION: Take care to follow the procedure as described, to avoid bending or breaking the interlock
pins when closing the front door.
6. The interlock finger can be adjusted to ensure the proper activation of the interlock when the door is
closed. The activation of the interlock can be heard when closing the door. If you hear no sound, or if
there is a marginal activation (the interlock is activated only when pushing down on the right side of the
front door), you may consider adjusting the position of the interlock finger.
Loosen the four screws attaching the support part for the interlock finger so that it can move freely.
Adjust its position and check that it activates the interlock properly when closing the door. It can be
easily done through the front door window (only in the new design).
7. Once the position has been adjusted, tighten the screws.
8. Ensure that the interlock finger can go into the interlock opening without crashing against the interlock
body.
9. Open the front door and tighten the interlock connector screws.

10. Perform the check interlocks procedure.
11. Perform the safety circuit procedure.

Ink system module
ISM pressure sensor assembly
Removal
1. Remove the top left panel. See Top left panel assembly on page 637.
2. Remove the bottom left panel. See Bottom left panel assembly on page 636.
3. Turn off the printer and the power-enable switch (so the ink circuit will not be pressurized).
4. Disconnect the ink sensors cable (CZ056-50034) from the ink-sensor PCA and the ISM PCA (J4 or J26
connector).
5. Remove two T-10 screws that secure the ink-sensor PCA to the metal support part.
ENWW Ink system module 659

6. Disconnect the ink-sensor PCA from the ink-cartridge connectors.
NOTE: The ink-sensor boards should be matched. Make sure that each board is replaced where it was
originally installed.
Installation
1. Make a note of the new pressure sensor PCA values, as they are needed for the pressure sensor
calibration.
2. Replace the pressure sensor with the new service part.
3. Connect the ink sensors cable to the pressure sensor.
4. Connect the ink cartridge connector.
5. Calibrate the ink pressure sensor.
When reconnecting the ink tubes to the pressure sensor board, ensure that both pressure values in all ink
lines connected to that pressure sensor board are near to a maximum of 10% error (compared to the initial
pressures). If any ink pressure value is lower than 10% from the initial value, purge the air from the ink line.
ISM cartridge connector with tube (K, Y, C, M, LC, LM, or PT ink)

Removal
2. Open the front left panel door.
5. Flush the affected line.

6. Disconnect the appropriate Acumen cable (the cables that exit from the bottom of the cable protector)
from its corresponding ISS PCA; it can be either A or B, depending on each Acumen cable. See Subsystem
Label: Moby Acumen, JX connector, where X = 7, 6, or 40 for PCA A, and X = 7, 6, 40, or 29 for PCA B
Route: Ink Cartridge Connector to ISS PCA
IMPORTANT: Keep track of the connector placement, because it is possible to mismatch connections
between ink supplies.

7. Disconnect the appropriate switch cable from its corresponding air connector (the red and black cables
that exit from the bottom of the cable protector).
The air connector red cables are labeled. See Subsystem block diagrams on page 61.
8. Disconnect the ink cartridge connector from the ink cartridge.

9. Remove the top cover clamp.
10. Use the tube cutter to cut the ink connector tube about 10 to 20 cm above the first fitting.
NOTE: Use a rag to avoid spilling ink. Before you remove the ink cartridge connector, let all the ink run
out.
11. Pull the ink cartridge connector set out of the printer.

Installation
The ink cartridge connector set comes with a tube equal to the full length of the original tube installed on the
machine, and a connector fitting to connect the new tube to the old tube. Find the connector fitting before
starting the installation.
1. Put the new ink cartridge connector set side by side with the old set.
2. Cut the new tube so that it is the same length as the old tube, using the specific cutter provided in the
ISM repair kit.
3. Install the new ink cartridge connector set, and join the lower tube to the upper tube using the
connector fitting. Make sure that the upper and lower tubes are pushed completely onto the connector.
CAUTION: As you insert them, make sure that you use a pushing motion, and not a twisting motion, as
this can damage the tubes.
4. Connect the Acumen data cable and switch cable, taking care not to mismatch them.
5. Purge the tubes.
● Purge supply OP for optimizer ink.
● Purge supply K for black ink.
● Purge supply Y for yellow ink.
● Purge supply M for magenta ink.
● Purge supply C for cyan ink.
● Purge supply LM for light magenta ink.
● Purge supply LC for light cyan ink.

ISM ink pressure sensor mount assembly
Removal
2. Remove the ISM pressure sensor assembly.
3. Remove the four T-10 screws that secure the metal support part to the printer, and pull out the
assembly.
4. Press on a latch that secures the ink pressure sensor mount to the metal support part, and slide out the
ink pressure sensor mount.
5. For the tube going to the cartridge, flush the tube, cut it as close as possible to the ink pressure sensor
mount, and reconnect this tube to the new ink pressure sensor mount (without screwing it).
6. For the tube going to the main electrovalve, follow the same procedure as explained for the
electrovalve replacement (ISM repair kit).
Installation
1. Replace the ink pressure sensor mount with the new one and connect back the ink tubes.
2. Open the ink cartridge and, using a syringe, remove 40 ml of ink from the cartridge.
3. Place the empty waste bags onto the connectors.
4. Place a piece of cloth under the purging port to avoid ink spills.
5. Inject 40 ml of ink into the purging port. The ink will flow into two paths, up to the empty bag and down
the tubes, passing the four-way valve.
6. After 40 ml, check that the ink has reached the waste bag (if not, inject more ink), then quickly
disconnect the waste bag, to continue introducing the remaining ink from the syringe while the syringe

is still in place and while still maintaining a slight positive pressure on the syringe. This generates
additional pressure pushing the ink down the tubes and will ensure that the column of ink from the
purging port to the supply is completely full.
CAUTION: Never hit the syringe with the hand using a hammer motion, this will damage the ink
pressure sensor board.
ISM repair kit

Removal
5. Remove the ink cartridge and intermediate tanks.
6. Disconnect the quick connector before starting the ink valves assembly replacement.
7. Flush the affected line.
Shown below are the seven different ink tube lines routed from the ink pressure sensors to the quick
connector, through both the two electrovalves and the four-way valve.

8. Remove three T-10 screws that secure the four-way valve.
9. Disconnect the electrovalves.
10. Remove the four T-10 screws that hold the two electrovalves (two for each electrovalve).

11. Cut the two indicated tubes at least 10 cm away from the four-way valve and the two indicated tubes 3–
4 cm away from the electrovalves.
12. Remove the four-way valve and the electrovalves.
Installation
1. Join the tubes from the new valves assembly to the existing tubes using the connector fittings. Make
sure that the tubes are pushed completely onto the connector.
CAUTION: When installing the tubes, never twist the tubes, this will damage them. Always push/slide
the tubes until they are completely installed onto the fitting.
2. Before ending the installing procedure and reconnecting the quick connector, make sure to purge the
ink line that has been replaced.

ISM wheel
Removal
2. Use a jack to raise the ink system compartment so that you have enough free space to remove the ISM
wheel.
Removal
1. Install the new ISM wheel.
2. Lower the ink system compartment and remove the jack from the printer.
3. Reinstall the ink system compartment.
ISM quick connector M&F assembly

Removal
5. Disconnect the quick connector in order to separate both the ISM and the TRS assemblies.
6. For quick connector male and female valves, label each ink line further enough—it is recommended to
label them at least 20 cm away from the quick connector valve—that they will be correctly identified
when cutting the ink tubes and replacing both quick connector valves.
IMPORTANT: Do not mismatch the ink tube positions on the quick connector. Otherwise the printer
will not work properly because ink circuits could be mismatched between the ISM and the TRS
assemblies. You are strongly recommended to label the matching female and male quick connector
tubes, so there will be no confusion while replacing them.
7. For each ink line, flush the ink tube approximately 15 cm and cut at least 10 cm away from the quick
connector valve, before the ink tube label.
8. Connect the tube to the new quick connector ink tube using the proper fitting from the tube repair kit.

9. Purge the line until ink reaches the quick connector on both the female and the male quick connector
valves using the purge kit.
10. After repeating the above three steps for each ink line on both female and male quick connector valves,
reconnect the quick connector.
ISM intermediate tank

You will need to replace an intermediate tank if the bag breaks.
Prepare to replace an intermediate tank

1. Ensure that you have the Intermediate Tank Kit (CZ056-67073), which is included in the Standard
Replace an intermediate tank
1. Unscrew the pointed screws and remove the cover to access the intermediate tanks.

2. Remove the intermediate tank with the broken bag.
3. Put a piece of cloth in its place.
4. Unplug the air tube from each bottle shown below.
5. From the air tube, inject air (using the air pressure gun, for example) to clean the interior of the tube.
The ink accumulated in the interior of the tube should be ejected onto the piece of cloth that you have
put in place of the intermediate tank.
6. If air is not enough to clean it, use water, and then air again to remove the water and dry the tube.
7. Remove the cloth.
8. Plug in the air tubes.
9. Insert the new intermediate tank.
10. Put back the cover and screw in the screws.

Finish off after replacing an intermediate tank
2. Run a diagnostic test to refill the intermediate tank.
ISM intermediate tank set

In order to replace an intermediate tank set (which means the 14 intermediate tanks), use the Intermediate
Tank Change process in Diagnostic mode (see Table 5-10 Ink delivery system on page 362). The intermediate
ink tanks should be changed according to service needs and preventive maintenance. After replacing the
intermediate tanks (see ISM intermediate tank on page 670), perform the reset procedure (for all tanks) or
use the individual reset procedures applicable to the replaced tanks.
ISM air circuit

Removal
Before proceeding, you are recommended to look at the air pump lifecycle in order to decide whether you
need to change only one or all air circuits.
5. Disconnect the two air pump cables and the relief valve cable from the corresponding ISS PCA (J17, J22,
and J21 connectors for ISS PCA A, and J19, J41, and J13 connectors for ISS PCA B).

6. Unscrew the bottle from the bottle cap by turning the bottle. Do not try to turn the cap.
7. Remove the bottle.
8. Remove the cap of the bottle. The new part comes with a cap, six tubes for the air going to the
intermediate tank, and the fittings. Cut each of the air tubes halfway between the intermediate tank
and the bottle cap.

9. Remove the T-10 screw that secures the air pump, and remove the pump. Repeat for all the air pumps.
10. Remove the pumps and all the air tubes connected to the pumps.
Installation
1. Install the air pumps, and connect the air pump and relief valve cables.
2. Install the bottle and its cap.
3. Connect the air tube to the bottle cap. Cut each of the air tubes halfway between the intermediate tank
and the bottle cap.

4. Use the six fittings to reconnect the six air tubes coming from the bottle cap to the six tubes going to
the intermediate tanks.
5. Perform the air pressure system diagnostic test to check that it works correctly.
ISM ink circuit module

Removal
5. Disconnect all the cables from the ink circuit module assembly and unroute them, so that the ink tray is
free from cables: mostly, the e-valves and four-way valve cables that connect to both ISS PCAs (A and
B).
6. Disconnect all seven ink cartridge connectors.
7. Carefully remove all of the 14 intermediate ink tanks.
CAUTION: Store the intermediate ink tanks vertically. Failure to store them vertically can cause a
broken bag.

8. Release and disconnect the quick connector. Use a cloth to prevent ink spits or leaks when
disconnecting.
9. Flush all the ink circuit module lines.
10. For all the colors, disconnect the tubes from the ink pressure sensor mount by using the tube cutter to
cut off the end of the tube (at least 1 cm from the end). When the new part is installed, the end of the
tube will be OK for reconnecting.
NOTE: The cartridge connector ink tubes will have been already disconnected, so ink may run out of
the ink tubes when cutting the ink tubes from the pressure sensor.
11. Unscrew the bottles from the bottle caps by turning the bottles. Do not try to turn the caps.
TIP: When removing the ink circuit module assembly, you are recommended to remove the air tubes
with their bottle caps from the printer and then reuse the bottle caps for the installation, as it is easier
to cut and install the air tubes out of the Ink System Module assembly.

12. Remove the ISM pressure assembly (see ISM pressure sensor assembly on page 659) and save it in a
secure place: you will need it later.
13. Unroute the air tube cables so that the ink circuit module can be removed from the Ink System Module.
14. Disconnect the ink leakage detector cable and unroute it enough to free the ink circuit module
assembly.
15. Remove the two T-20 screws that secure the ink circuit module.
16. Remove the quick connector from its panel support and carefully hold it while removing the ISM ink
circuit tray from the ISM assembly.

17. Remove the ink circuit module.
TIP: You will need at least two people.
18. Disconnect the air tubes from the intermediate ink tanks housing.
Installation
1. Place the quick connector on its panel support.
2. Screw the ISM ink circuit tray to the ISM structure.
3. Route back and connect the ink leakage detector cable.
4. Route back and connect all the cables from both ISS PCAs (A and B) to their correct places.
5. For each color, install the tube coming from the ink cartridge connector to the ink pressure mount
assembly.
CAUTION: When connecting the tubes, use a pushing motion, do not twist the tubes into place as this
can cause damage to the tubes, subsequently causing air leaks.
If an ink pressure board is already installed, remove it, as it does not have ink pressure calibration
values. Put back the previous ink pressure sensor PCAs, making sure you do not mismatch them.

6. When you reconnect the air tubes, use this illustration as a guide to see which tubes should be
connected to which bottles.
7. Place each intermediate ink tank into its housing.
8. Reconnect each cartridge connector to its cartridge.
9. Screw the ISM ink circuit tray to the ISM structure.
10. Purge the tubes.
11. Connect the quick connector to the TRS assembly.
12. Calibrate the ink pressure sensor.
NOTE: You are recommended to take note of the new pressure sensor PCA values, as they are needed
for the pressure sensor calibration.
13. When reconnecting the ink tubes to the pressure sensor board, ensure that both pressure values in all
ink lines connected to that pressure sensor board are within a maximum of 10% error (compared to the
initial pressures). If any ink pressure value is further than 10% from the initial value, purge the air from
the ink line using the purge kit.
14. Perform the air pressure system diagnostic test to check that it works correctly.
● Purge supply OP for optimizer ink.
● Purge supply K for black ink.
● Purge supply Y for yellow ink.
● Purge supply M for magenta ink.
● Purge supply C for cyan ink.
● Purge supply LM for light magenta ink.
● Purge supply LC for light cyan ink.
ISM pump and relief valve

Removal
4. Remove the left panel.

5. Disconnect the two air tubes.
6. Disconnect the pump cable and the relief valve cable.
7. Remove the T-10 screw that secures the ink system pressurization pump and relief valve.
8. Remove the pump.

Installation
▲ Perform the air pressure system diagnostic test to verify that it works correctly.
ISM cables kit

Removal
5. Disconnect the cables as described for each cable below.
24V IDS cable (CZ056-50071)
2. Disconnect the 24V IDS cable from the e-cabinet (IDS connector) and the ISS air connector (located at
the quick connector panel support).
NOTE: You are strongly recommended to follow the original cable routing.
IDS 12C data cable (CZ056-50053)

2. Disconnect the IDS 12C cable from the e-box (I2C (J_241) connector) and the ISS air connector (located
at the quick connector panel support).
ISM power cable split to air tray PCA (CZ056-50262)

1. Disconnect the ISM power cable split to air tray PCA from the ISS air connector (located at the quick
connector panel support) and both ISS PCAs (J35 connector for both A and B PCAs).
ISM LAN cable split to air tray PCA (CZ056-50263)

1. Disconnect the ISM LAN cable split to air tray PCA from the ISS air connector (located at the quick
connector panel support) and ISS PCA A (connector 1).

ISM daisy chain cable (CZ056-50250)
1. Disconnect the ISM daisy chain cable from both ISS PCAs (two connectors for PCA A and one connector
for PCA B).
ISS termination cable (CZ056-50217)

▲ Disconnect the ISS termination cable from the ISS PCA B (P4 connector).
Intermediate tanks cable (CZ056-50031)

1. Disconnect the intermediate tanks cable from the ISS intermediate tanks interconnect PCA and the ISS
PCA: either A (J14 connector) or B (J14 or J15 connector).
ISM actuators cable lite (CZ056-50030)

1. Disconnect the intermediate tanks cable from the ISS PCA A (connector 4).
2. Disconnect the ISM actuators cable lite from the electrovalves (green cables), the leakage detector
sensor (blue cables), the UI PCA (UI_X connector, where X=4 to 6, yellow cables), and the switch cable air
connector (S_X connector, where X=4 to 6, red cables).
ISM actuators cable 3 (CZ056-50182)
1. Disconnect the intermediate tanks cable from the ISS PCA A (connector 3).
2. Disconnect the ISM actuators cable 3 from the electrovalves (green cables), the UI PCA (UI_7 connector,
yellow cable), and the switch cable air connector (S_7 connector, red cable).
ISM actuators cable (CZ056-50029)
1. Disconnect the intermediate tanks cable from the ISS PCA B (connector 4).
2. Disconnect the ISM actuators cable from the electrovalves (green cables), the leakage detector sensor
(blue cables), the UI PCA (UI_X connector, where X=1 to 3, yellow cables), and the switch cable air
connector (S_X connector, where X=1 to 3, red cables).

ISS PCA
Removal
5. Disconnect all electrical cables and air tubes connected to the ISS PCA that needs to be replaced. For a
complete diagram, see Subsystem block diagrams on page 61.
6. Remove the four T-20 screws that secure the cover of the ISS PCA.
NOTE: Three ground cables are connected to two of the four T-20 screws that hold the ISS PCA.
7. Remove the PCA assembly.

8. Remove the six T-10 screws that secure the top and the bottom covers, and remove the covers, so that
the ISS PCA can be removed.
Installation
1. Screw back the ISS PCA top and bottom covers with the six T-10 screws.
2. Screw back the ISS PCA with the four T-20 screws, remembering to reconnect the three ground cables to
the correct two T-20 screws.
CAUTION: It is important to reconnect the three ground cables to avoid a short circuit.
3. Connect all cables and air tubes connected to the replaced ISS PCA. See Subsystem block diagrams
on page 61.
Ink cartridges PCA

Removal
2. Remove either the top left or the rear left panel.

3. Unscrew and remove the top cover clamp.
4. Disconnect the ink system LED interface board cable.
5. Disconnect the ink cartridge connector from the ink cartridge.
6. Remove the two T-10 screws that secure the ink cartridges PCA.

7. Remove the ink cartridges PCA.
Installation
▲ After installation, perform the ink cartridge LEDs diagnostic test to check that the new service part
works correctly.
ISS intermediate tanks interconnect PCA

Removal
4. Disconnect the intermediate tanks cable.
5. Remove the two T-10 screws that secure the ISS intermediate tanks interconnect PCA and remove the
PCA.
Installation
▲ Insert the new PCA, taking care not to tighten any ink tube or break the ink tube circuit.
ISM ink leakage detector

Removal
3. Clean the ink leakage detector surface and ensure there are no ink tube leakages.
If necessary, use the tube repair kit to fix the ink leak.
4. Disconnect the ink leakage detector from its air connector and unroute its cable. The ink leakage
detectors are located on each side of the ink circuit module.
5. Remove the T-20 screw that holds the ink leakage support and remove it.
6. Remove the ink linkage detector.
If an ink leakage is detected

1. Disconnect the ink leakage sensor cables on both sides and unroute enough of them to free the ink tray.

2. Remove the T-15 screw on each side.
3. Remove the screws that hold the clamps to the structure, and free the seven clamps from the ink
cartridge connector tubes.
4. Rotate the ink tray so that the outer side is raised about 5 to 7 cm. Keep the ink tray raised in that
position by using an object to wedge it.
5. Clean the ink leakage using the cleaning kit.
6. Remove the wedge and reverse all the preceding steps.
Ink system compartment

The ink system compartment must be removed in order to service some components of the scan axis.
Removal
4. Disconnect the quick connector.

5. Disconnect the vapor removal exchanger box to curing pipe from the curing assembly. See Vapor
removal exchanger box to curing pipe on page 877.
6. Disconnect the power and data cables attaching the ISM to the printer from their air connectors, located
at the quick connector panel support.
7. Remove the two pins that secure the ink system compartment.
8. Remove the four TXYZ screws that secure the ink system compartment to the frame.

9. Roll the ink system compartment away from the printer (it has wheels).

Internal Print Server computer installation and setup
The following sections describe how to install and configure these components:
● Computer BIOS settings
● Windows 7 operating system
● Loading ripped files as sample prints for printer setup and troubleshooting
● The Internal Print Server software
● Call Me @HP and Camera software
● Symantec antivirus software
BIOS configuration
1. When starting the computer, press the Esc button repeatedly until the BIOS setup window appears.
2. Press F10 to enter Computer Setup.

3. Select Power-On Options from the Advanced tab.
4. Set the After Power Loss option to Power On.
5. Save changes and exit.
Operating system configuration

During the operating system installation, when prompted:
1. Create a user account with the username hplatex and no password. The customer should set a
password, but should not change the username.
2. Give the computer the hostname hplatex-IPS. If the customer has more than one HP Latex printer, use
hostnames hplatex-IPS00, hplatex-IPS01, and so on.
ENWW Internal Print Server computer installation and setup 691

Configuring Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise
1. Log in with the hplatex username.
2. Go to Control Panel > User Accounts and Family Safety > User Accounts > Change User Account
Control settings, and move the slider to Never notify, which disables User Access Control.
3. Configure the LAN cards as follows:
a. Go to the Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center > Change adapter
settings.

b. Right-click Intel® 82579LM Gigabit Network Connection and click Rename. Set the name of the
connection to HP Latex 3000 Printer.
c. Right-click the HP Latex 3000 Printer icon and click Properties.
d. Uncheck all boxes except Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4).
e. Click the Properties button for Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4).

f. Set the static IP address to 172.22.22.23 for the computer (172.22.22.22 is used for the printer),
and set the subnet mask to 255.255.255.0.
g. Click OK to accept the changes.
h. In some cases LAN cards may not be correctly configured for high speed. Check that these values
are correct and, if not, change them.
● Go to the start menu, right-click Computer and select Manage.
● Select Device Manager in the left column and open the Network adapters subsection.

● Right-click each network adapter and select Properties.
● From the Advanced tab, select the Link Speed & Duplex property (called Speed & Duplex in
some cases). Ensure that the value is set to Auto Negotiation.

4. To update the computer’s performance rating, right-click Computer, then click Properties, then
Windows Experience Index.
You should see something like this:

5. Go to Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options.
6. Select High performance and Change plan settings.
7. Disable sleep mode by setting Put the computer to sleep to Never.

8. Right-click on the desktop, then select Personalize > Screen Saver.
9. Set the screen saver to Blank to avoid potential performance problems.

10. From the start menu, right-click Computer, then click Manage > Device Manager > Disk drives. Select
the hard disk drive, then Properties > Policies, and check the box Enable write caching on the device.
11. From the start menu, right-click Computer, then click Manage > Disk Management. Right-click C:, then
click Properties.

12. On the Tools tab, press the Defragment now button.
13. Press the Configure schedule button.
14. Set the disk defragmenter to run weekly.

15. From the start menu, click Control Panel > System and Security > System > Advanced system
settings.
16. On the Advanced tab, press the Settings button in the Performance section.
17. On the Visual Effects tab, select Custom, then check the following boxes and uncheck the others:
● Enable Desktop composition
● Enable transparent glass
● Smooth edges of screen fonts
● Use visual styles on windows and buttons

18. In Internet Explorer, select Internet Options from the Tools menu.

19. On the Connections tab, press the LAN settings button. Then check the box By-pass proxy server for
local addresses, if needed.
20. Ensure that the computer is connected to the Internet, and has access to
http://windowsupdate.microsoft.com/.
21. From the start menu, select All programs > Windows update > Check for updates.

22. Click the important updates, and ensure that they are all checked. Click OK.
23. Press the Install updates button. Some updates may require you to restart the computer.

24. Click View update history to check that everything was installed successfully. Then click OK.
25. On the Windows Update main page, change the setting to Never check for updates.
Print Care installation

1. Insert the Print Care disc.
2. Run PrintCareSetup.exe.

3. Print Care installs some prerequisites. Follow the instructions on the screen.

4. Continue following the instructions on the screen.
5. It is now time to install Print Care. Select Print Care (not Print Care Calibrations), check the I agree box,
then press Next.

6. Do not install the HP Scanjet G4000 series application.
7. Set Latex3000 as the machine type, and enter the printer’s serial number.
8. The installation proceeds automatically. Restart the computer when prompted.
9. When Print Care has been installed, run PrintCareUpdate.exe to update the software to the latest
version. You may need to restart the computer after updating.
Ripped files
Copy the following ripped files from the disc to the following locations on the computer’s hard disk:
● C:\Users\hplatex\Documents\HP IPS\Test Plot\ripped Photorealistic
● C:\Users\hplatex\Documents\HP IPS\Test Plot\ripped SAV Gloss
Internal Print Server installation

1. Log on to the computer with the username hplatex.
2. Download the *.msi and setup.exe files and copy them to the computer’s desktop.
3. Run the setup.exe file and click the Next buttons until the message IPS was installed
successfully appears.
4. When the Internal Print Server has been successfully installed, you can delete the *.msi and setup.exe
files from the desktop.

Proxy Service installation
2. Download the ProxyService.msi and setup.exe files and copy them to the computer’s desktop.
3. Run the setup.exe file and click the Next buttons until the message ProxyService has been
installed successfully appears.
4. When the proxy has been successfully installed, you can delete the ProxyService.msi and setup.exe
files from the desktop.
Symantec antivirus installation

2. Insert the Symantec Endpoint Protection Small Business Edition DVD.
3. The setup.exe file is run automatically. When the following window appears, select Install an
unmanaged client.
4. In the following window, press the Yes button to perform standalone installation.
5. Press Next to continue.

6. Accept the license agreement, and press Next to continue.
7. Select Unmanaged client, and press Next to continue.
8. Uncheck Custom, and press Next to continue.
9. Select Virus Email Protection, and press Next to continue.

10. Ensure that all three boxes are checked, and press Next to continue.
11. Press Install to install the software.
12. Press Finish to finish the installation.
13. When the software has been installed, right-click the golden shield icon near the right-hand end of the
taskbar, and click Open Symantec Endpoint Protection Small Business Edition.

14. Click LiveUpdate on the left side of the window, and follow the instructions on the screen to update the
software.
15. When the software update has finished, click Change settings on the left, then press the Configure
Settings button on the Client Management row.
16. In the Scheduled Updates tab, enable automatic daily updates, then press OK.

17. Click Scan for threats on the left, then Create a New Scan.
18. Select Full Scan, and press Next to continue.
19. Select All types, and press Next to continue.

20. Select At specified times, and press Next to continue.
21. Select Weekly, and press Next to continue.
22. Enter Weekly Scan in the scan name field, and Full Scan for the entire IPS PC in the
scan description field, ensure that the Enable the scan box is checked, then press Finish.

23. Check that the Weekly Scan is shown as enabled in the Scan for threats window.
After installation
Ensure that the printer is connected to the Internet, and run the IsMachineCanSync program.
If it says that The Machine Cannot Sync, send the file C:\Temp
\HPScitex.Updater.IsMachineCanSync.txt to GBU CA to resolve the problem.
If there is an IP address conflict between the customer’s network and the Internal-Print-Server-to-printer
network, unzip ipchangetool.zip and run IpChangeTool.exe, following the instructions on the screen to
change the IP addresses.

PPS front left and rear right assembly
Removal
1. From the Internal Print Server, navigate to Carriage beam position > Move to home position to lower
the carriage beam all the way. If you cannot start the printer in the normal way due to failure, use
diagnostic mode.
PPS front left assembly removal

2. For easier access to all the PPS parts, remove the front left pillar top cover.
5. Remove the PPS motor assembly and save it. See PPS motor assembly on page 719.
6. Remove the PPS screw assembly. See PPS screw assembly on page 721.
7. Remove the PPS motor mount assembly. See PPS motor mount assembly on page 717.
PPS rear right assembly removal

2. Remove the rear PC sheet so that it is easier to access the PPS assembly.
3. Open the pinch.

PPS front right and rear left assembly
Removal
diagnostic mode.
PPS front right assembly removal
2. For easier access to all the PPS parts, open the door on the right.
PPS rear left assembly removal

2. Remove the rear PC sheet so that it is easier to access the PPS assembly.
3. Open the pinch.
PPS motor mount assembly

Removal
diagnostic mode.

3. Remove the PPS motor assembly. See PPS motor assembly on page 719.
5. Remove the necessary curing module if you are removing a front PPS motor mount assembly.
6. Remove the two T-20 screws that secure the holder.
7. Remove the PPS motor mount assembly.
NOTE: When you put back the nut, it may have a bit of play.
Mechanical switch
Removal
1. Move the scan axis to the substrate load position to raise the carriage beam all the way. If you cannot
start the printer in the normal way due to failure, use diagnostic mode.

3. Disconnect the PPS switch cable.
4. Remove the two taptite screws that secure the PPS low switch, and remove the switch.
PPS motor assembly

The PPS motor assembly service part comes with a new differential encoder PCA, which is positioned
differently for each PPS motor assembly, but is always secured with two TXYZ screws. To locate the
differential encoder PCA, you can always follow the encoder cable from the motor.
Removal
diagnostic mode.
3. Disconnect the power cable from the motor (motor drive PCA to motor).

4. Disconnect the cable that connects the motor drive PCA to the differential encoder PCA.
5. Disconnect the cable that connects the motor drive PCA to the PPS motor.
NOTE: You can leave the cables connected to the motor drive PCA.
6. Remove the two T-20 screws that secure the PPS motor, and remove the motor.
Installation
Install the new motor and check that it works. If not:
1. Remove the two T-20 screws that secure the differential encoder PCA.

2. Remove the two T-20 screws that secure the PPS motor, and remove the motor.
3. Install the new differential encoder PCA that comes with the service part.
PPS screw assembly

Removal
diagnostic mode.
3. Remove the PPS motor assembly.
4. Loosen the A6 locking screw about two full revolutions.
NOTE: Access the screw through the hole in the mount and use an L-shaped key.
5. Position the lower part of the motor mount so that you can insert the screwdriver.

6. Insert the screwdriver. This will prevent the mount from moving; so that, when you turn the PPS screw,
it will come out.
7. Remove the pipe 17 bolt (in green) that secures the PPS screw.
8. Remove the PPS screw, fixing the green screw to the screwdriver with Loctite.
Motor drive PCA

If you need to look at any of the four motor drive PCA ID addresses, see Subsystem block diagrams
on page 61.
Removal
diagnostic mode.
3. Remove the appropriate trim.
4. Follow the instructions in the table below to reach a particular motor drive PCA.
Motor drive PCA ID Physical location Panel to remove
1 Rear right Remove the rear right panel (Rear right panel assembly on page 624).
2 Front right Open the right cover door.
For easier access, you can also open the printhead cleaning door.
3 Front left Remove the front left panel (Front left panel assembly on page 635).
For easier access, you can also remove the front left pillar top cover.
4 Rear left Remove the rear left panel (Rear left panel assembly on page 636).

5. Disconnect all cables from the motor drive PCA.
6. Remove the two T-8 screws from the supports that hold the motor drive PCA, and remove the PCA.
Installation
1. Insert the new motor drive PCA.
2. Reconnect all cables to the new PCA.
3. One of the motor drive PCAs has only one LAN connection. Make sure to connect it to the right connector
when you install the new service part.
4. Ensure that there is an RJ45 jumper (CZ056-50028) connected to the data-out connector (P2) on the
last daisy-chain PCA, so that the daisy-chain end is correctly set (if necessary, reuse the RJ45 jumper).
a. LAN data cable (J1)
b. LAN data cable (P2)

c. 24 V power cable (J3)
Route: Main interconnect board to remote controller board
d. PPS motor power cable (J3)
Route: Motor drive PCA to PPS motor
e. Encoder and switch cable (J4)
Route: Encoder and switch to motor drive PCA
5. If the ending daisy chain motor drive PCA has been replaced, ensure that there is an RJ45 jumper
(CZ056-50028) connected to the P2 connector.
6. Ensure that there is no jumper connected to the P1 connector.
PPS cables kit

Removal
diagnostic mode.
3. Remove the central cover.
4. Remove top right cover.
6. Remove the PPS column cap from the top of the scan beam face.
E-cabinet to PPS power cable (CZ056-50072)

2. Disconnect the e-cabinet to PPS power cable from the e-cabinet PCA.
3. Disconnect the e-cabinet to PPS power cable from the air connector.
4. Unroute the cable from the air connector to the e-cabinet.
PPS power in T cable (CZ056-50151)

2. Disconnect the air connectors: the one that connects to the e-cabinet to PPS power cable, and the four
that connect to each PPS power cable.
3. Unroute the cable from each PPS power cable connector to the e-cabinet to PPS power cable connector.
Short PPS data bridge cable (×2) (CZ056-50178)

1. Access motor drive PCAs 1 and 2, or 3 and 4.
2. Disconnect the short PPS data bridge cable from both motor drive PCAs (P2 connector for PCAs 1 and 4,
J1 connector for PCAs 2 and 3).
3. Unroute the short PPS data bridge cable through the printer structure.

Long PPS data bridge cable (CZ056-50177)
1. Access motor drive PCAs 2 and 4.
2. Disconnect the long PPS data bridge cable from both motor drive PCAs (P2 connector for PCA 2, J1
connector for PCA 4).
3. Remove rear sheets as needed to reach the entire cable routing.
4. Unroute the long PPS data bridge cable through the printer structure and beams.
TUR Luna to PPS cable (CZ056-50052)

2. Open the right cover door. For easier access, you can also open the printhead cleaning system door.
3. Disconnect the e-box interconnect PCA (MICCI2 (J_251) connector).
4. Disconnect the motor drive PCA 1 (J1 connector).
5. Unroute the cable from each PPS power cable connector to the e-cabinet to PPS power cable connector.
NOTE: When rerouting the cable, be careful to leave enough free (looped) so that the PPS can reach
the substrate load position.
Differential encoder PCA to encoder cable (CZ056-50035)
1. Access the motor drive PCA.
2. Disconnect the the differential encoder PCA to encoder cable from the differential encoder PCA and the
motor assembly.
Differential encoder PCA to motor drive PCA cable (CZ056-50146)

2. Disconnect the the differential encoder PCA to motor drive PCA cable from the motor drive PCA (J4
connector) and the differential encoder PCA.
NOTE: When replacing the differential encoder PCA to motor drive PCA cable, it is important to cut the
jumper cables of the motor drive PCA connector following the described jumper addresses (see the
illustration below):

XY guide assembly
The parts referred to here are not service parts; but, in case of failure, the replacement procedure is
documented, and the parts can be obtained through an official request sent to the HP support team, with a
detailed explanation of the problem faced by the customer.
The procedure described here is for replacing the main guidance of the PPS system, the PPS column, and the
bushing XY and Y.
PPS column and XY bushing removal


5. Remove the top right cover.
6. Remove the rear top right panel.
9. Using a 6 mm Allen key, loosen the locking screw a few turns.
NOTE: Some Loctite has probably been added to the top screw and washer of the PPS screw in order
to be able to change the PPS screw with the SAX in the lower position.

10. Push the PPS column upwards, until it is accessible from the top.
NOTE: If the PPS column is blocked against the bushing, the bushing can be removed by using a steel
bar and a nylon hammer. Put the steel bar in vertical position in contact with the bottom face of the
column and knock carefully with the hammer. Repeat until the column has been released from the top
part of the scan beam.
11. Remove the PPS column.
12. From inside the scan beam, remove four T-20 screws from the bushing XY, which can be accessed with a
long screwdriver.

13. Remove the XY bushing.
The underside without the bushing looks like this:
Installation
▲ When installing a new PPS column, use grease to lubricate the surface.
PPS column and Y bushing removal

5. Remove the top left cover.

8. Using a 6 mm Allen key and a spanner or adjustable spanner (shown here), loosen the locking screw (A)
a few turns (B).

9. Push the PPS column upwards, until it is accessible from the top.
NOTE: If the PPS column is blocked against the bushing, the bushing can be removed by using a steel
bar and a plastic-headed hammer. Put the steel bar in vertical position in contact with the bottom face
of the column and knock carefully with the hammer. Repeat until the column has been released from
the top part of the scan beam.
10. Remove the PPS column.
11. From inside the scan beam, remove four T-20 screws from the bushing Y, which can be accessed with an
L-shaped wrench.

12. Remove the Y bushing.
13. Remove eight taptite screws from both sides of the bushing Y holder, and remove the bushing holder.
Installation
1. Install the bushing holder on to the new replacement Y bushing using eight taptite screws.
2. When installing the new Y bushing, use the location pins on the underside of the scan beam to position
the part correctly in place.
PPS motor cable kit

Removal

4. Remove the top right cover.
Motor drive PCA to PPS motor cable (CZ056-50035)
1. Remove panels so that you can reach the differential encoder PCA and the encoder.
2. Disconnect the motor drive PCA to PPS motor cable from the encoder and the differential encoder PCA.
Motor drive PCA to differential encoder PCA cable (CZ056-50146)

1. Remove panels so that you can reach the motor drive PCA and the differential encoder PCA.
2. Disconnect the motor drive PCA (J4 connector) and the differential encoder PCA.
Differential encoder PCA (Q6703-60195)

1. Remove panels so that you can reach the differential encoder PCA.
2. Disconnect all cables from the differential encoder PCA.
3. Remove the two T-20 screws that attach the PCA, and remove the PCA.

PPS power in T extensor cable (CZ056-50149)
1. Remove panels so that you can reach the motor drive PCA, the PPS motor, and the air connector cable.
2. Disconnect the air connector, the motor drive PCA (J3 connector), and the PPS motor.
CAUTION: When rerouting the cable, be careful to leave enough free that the carriage beam can reach
the substrate load position. Otherwise the printer may break the cables, and therefore shut down.
Mechanical switch—short cable (CZ056-50169)

1. Remove panels so that you can reach the motor drive PCA and the mechanical switch.
2. Disconnect the air connector and the motor drive PCA (J4 connector).

Printhead cleaning transmission box
Removal
diagnostic mode.
3. Remove the printhead cleaning module assembly. See Printhead cleaning module on page 750.
4. Disconnect the DC motor from both power and encoder cables.
5. Remove the T-25 screws that secure the gearbox base.
NOTE: If you are changing the MA transmission box, you will first need to unscrew and remove the end
stop contact support in order to be able to remove the MA gearbox base screws.

Gearbox inversor removal
The gearbox inversor includes the transmission box exit gear.
1. Take out the roll-free hub and remove the roll from the printhead cleaning assembly.
NOTE: To remove the MA gearbox inversor, you must first remove the central cage assembly.
NOTE: The MZ transmission does not have a gearbox inversor, so you need only to remove the exit
gear from the transmission box.
2. Unscrew the gearbox inversor support and remove the gearbox inversor.
Installation
1. Install the gearbox inversor with its two gears on each side of the structure baseplate. Screw the
gearbox inversor support to the baseplate.
NOTE: To install the MA gearbox inversor you must remove and then reinstalll the central cage
assembly.
NOTE: The MZ transmission does not have a gearbox inversor, so you need only add an exit gear to
the transmission box (it can be taken from the gearbox inversor assembly).

2. Put the roll into the printhead cleaning assembly and insert the roll-free hub to fix input and output
rolls.
3. Fit the exit gear with the transmission box and screw its gearbox base to the baseplate.
NOTE: When changing the MA transmission box you will need to screw the end stop contact support
after replacing the MA transmission box.
4. Connect the power and encoder cables to the transmission box.
5. Insert the printhead cleaning module assembly into the printer.

Printhead cleaning roll axis with structure
Removal
diagnostic mode.
3. Remove the printhead cleaning roll assembly/
4. Remove the four printhead cleaning transmission boxes/
5. Disconnect all the encoder and power cables from the PCAs. Remove the four PCAs from the printhead
cleaning base plate.
6. Remove the T-25 screws that hold the base plate to both the central cage base and the T-30 screws
that hold the base plate to the slide-mount upper support.
7. Remove the roll-axis structure.
Installation
▲ After installation, perform the printhead cleaner height calibration and check.

Printhead cleaning rubber hub
Removal
diagnostic mode.
3. Pull out the printhead cleaning module.
4. Remove the printhead cleaning roll-free hub.
5. Remove the rubber from the roll transmission hub.

Printhead cleaning roll pinch assembly
Removal
diagnostic mode.
3. Remove the printhead cleaning module, disconnecting the cables as you remove it.

4. Pull the black knob to open the pinch assembly.
5. Unscrew the hinge from the printhead cleaning roll pinch.
NOTE: Be careful not to lose the pinch hinge spacer when removing the hinge from the printhead
cleaning roll pinch.
6. Remove the printhead cleaning roll pinch assembly.
Installation
1. Insert the new printhead cleaning roll pinch assembly.

2. Add the pinch hinge spacer between the pinch assembly and the printhead cleaning assembly, and
screw in the pinch hinge.
Printhead cleaning blade assembly

Prepare to replace the rubber blade
1. Ensure that you have the Printhead Cleaning Roll Rubber Blade Kit (CZ056-67046), which is included in
the Printer Maintenance Kit (CZ056-67391) but can also be purchased separately.

3. Unlock and open the printhead cleaning roll door.
4. Pull out the printhead cleaning roll carriage.
5. Put on gloves to protect your hands.

6. Open the pinchwheel (pull out and rotate the black plastic knob).
7. Move the printhead cleaning material aside in order to uncover the rubber blade.
Replace the rubber blade
1. Move the rubber blade to the replacement position.

2. Use a flat screwdriver to remove the two screws shown below. While you unscrew them, you must hold
the two spacers shown on the right (otherwise, they will fall and might get lost).
3. Remove the spacers.
4. Remove the rubber blade and place the new one in position.
5. Replace the screws. Screw them in with one hand while holding the spacer in place.
Finish off after replacing the rubber blade

1. Push the printhead cleaning material back into place and close the pinchwheel (using the black plastic
knob).
2. Carefully push the printhead cleaning roll carriage back into its working position.
3. Close and lock the door.
4. Perform the printhead cleaner height calibration and check.

Printhead cleaning drive roller
Removal
diagnostic mode.
3. Remove the central cage assembly from the base plate structure.
4. Remove the c-clip from the driver roller.
5. Remove the driver roller bearing.
6. Remove the web-drive gear from the driver roller.

7. Remove the c-clip from the drive roller and the bearing that it holds.
8. Remove the drive roller.
Printhead cleaning central cage top cover

Removal
diagnostic mode.
3. Remove the printhead cleaning module from the guide. See Printhead cleaning module on page 750.
4. Remove the central cage assembly from the base plate structure.
5. Remove the drive roller’s c-clip and bearing.

6. Remove the two T-30 and the two T-25 screws from the handle cover base and remove it.
7. Remove the six T-25 screws from the central cage base (three screws on each side).
8. Remove the three T-25 screws from the rear cover.
9. Remove the four T-25 screws from the central cage base.

10. Remove the central cage.
Installation
1. Before installing the central cage top cover, ensure that the pointed corners are correctly sealed with
silicone to prevent small ink leaks.
NOTE: If it is necessary to seal a corner, do not apply too much sealant, as it will overflow to the back
of the central cage (wipe clean the overflow). You are strongly recommended to let it dry for about 15
minutes before continuing the installation. Otherwise, it may escape and stain other parts of the cage.
2. Insert the new central cage and screw it to the central cage base on both sides and at the bottom, and
also to the rear cover.
3. Screw the central cage cover to the base plate structure and install it into the guide.
Printhead cleaning gear kit

diagnostic mode.

Gear replacement
1. Remove either the transmission box or the gear inversor.
2. Replace the broken gear with the new one.
NOTE: When installing the new gear, make sure that the gear is correctly installed onto the shaft. First
align both flat surfaces and then push until it is completely inserted. You will have to use significant
force. Make sure that both vertical surfaces are aligned as much as possible.
3. Reinstall the transmission box or the gear inversor that you removed earlier.
Web-drive gear replacement

1. Remove the central cage from the structure baseplate.
2. Remove the web-drive gear from the drive roller.
NOTE: When installing the new gear, make sure that the gear is correctly installed onto the shaft. First
align both flat surfaces and then push until it is completely inserted. You will have to use significant
force. Make sure that both vertical surfaces are aligned as much as possible.
3. Reinstall the central cage cover and screw it to the structure baseplate.
Roll transmission hub (gear and rubber) replacement
1. Remove the central cage from the structure baseplate.
2. Remove the roll-free hub.
3. Remove the roll transmission hub from the drive roll.
NOTE: When removing the roll transmission hub, check that the bushings do not need to be replaced.
If they are worn or broken, replace them with two new bushings.
4. Place the new roll transmission hub on the drive roll-free hub and install the assembly on the structure
baseplate.
NOTE: When installing either new bushings or hub gears, make sure they are correctly installed onto
the drive roller shaft. First align both hub or bushing with drive roller surfaces, and then push until they
are completely inserted. You will have to use significant force. Make sure that both vertical surfaces are
aligned as much as possible.
5. Reinstall the central cage cover and screw it to the structure baseplate.
Printhead cleaning module

Removal
This procedure should be used only if other repair procedures have failed.
diagnostic mode.

3. Remove the printhead cleaning roll.
NOTE: You are recommended to unload the printhead cleaning roll to avoid damaging the assembly.
CAUTION: When working with the printhead cleaning module out of the roller, leave it on the working
surface. It is important not to let the roll axis or output diverter touch the ground.
4. Disconnect all data and power cables that connect the printhead cleaning module to the rest of the
printer. This means disconnecting the LAN cable connected to the PCA daisy chain and unplugging the
male connector of the power cable from the air connection.
NOTE: These cables are located on the rear right of the assembly.

5. Remove the five T-20 screws that secure the end plate, and remove the end plate.
6. Remove the T-20 screw stop from the roller, and remove the roller.
7. Completely remove the entire printhead cleaning assembly.
Installation
▲ After installation, perform the printhead cleaner height calibration and check.
Motor drive PCA

Removal
diagnostic mode.

3. Open the printhead cleaning roll door.
5. Disconnect all cables from each motor drive PCA: that is, for each PCA, the two data cables (one data
cable and a RJ45 jumper at the daisy chain’s end PCA chain), the encoder cable, and the power cable.
6. Remove the four T-8 screws and the motor drive PCA enclosure cover.
7. Remove the two left T-8 screws that attach the motor drive PCA to its enclosure.
8. Remove the motor drive PCA.
Installation
1. Insert the new motor drive PCA and screw in the two T-8 screws to attach it to its enclosure.
2. Screw back the PCA enclosure cover.

3. Connect all the cables to the PCA, and put back the daisy-chain end jumper if replacing the last PCA of
the daisy chain. Ensure that the cables properly connected.
NOTE: The daisy chain follows the order in the illustration and table above, so that the daisy-chain
ending PCA is the MO PCA (daisy-chain path from e-box to MO PCA: E-Box interconnect PCA – Z PCA – MI
PCA – MA PCA – MO PCA).
The connections to the motor drive PCA are shown below.
Connector Cable Part number
P2 Data cable between motor drive PCAs, e-box to WW cable for Z Q6703-50031 or CZ056-50157
motor drive PCA (J1, data-in connector)
J1 Data cable, RJ45 jumper for MO motor drive PCA (J2, data-out Q6703-50031 or CZ056–50028
connector)
J4 Motor encoder cable CZ056-50116
J3 WW power in T cable CZ056-50161
NOTE: One of the motor drive PCAs will have only one LAN connection. Make sure to connect it to the
right connector when you install the new service part.
Printhead cleaning shims calibration

NOTE: By default, the printhead cleaning system comes with one shim located on each slide mount (front
and rear).
NOTE: It is important to follow the steps described in order. These are the procedures required to calibrate
and shim a printhead cleaning module assembly:
● Printhead cleaner height check
● Printhead cleaner tilt check
● Printhead cleaner calibration
● Printhead cleaner shimming procedure
1. Check that the calibration and shims have been correctly set. Perform both the printhead cleaner height
check and printhead cleaner tilt check (in the list above).
2. If any of the printhead cleaner check procedures do not complete correctly, perform printhead cleaner
calibration and, if necessary, the printhead cleaner shimming procedure (in the list above) to correct the
printhead cleaner height and tilt.
3. Repeat the printhead cleaner height and tilt check procedures.

Height and tilt check and calibration test
NOTE: The following diagnostic tests are available in Print Care only when logged in as an Engineer.
Printhead cleaner height check

This check is to find the operational height of the pressure roller of the printhead cleaning system. The check
is made while wiping the printheads (either servicing or dynamic printhead wipes).
Perform this check whenever the printhead cleaning system is replaced or repaired, or if you see a very fast
degradation of printhead life.
The printhead cleaner roll height check requires that you use the diagnostics tests; they are accessible
through the Print Care Diagnostics tab.
Diagnostic availability can change depending on the role logged in Print Care and printer boot mode. This of
diagnostic is accessible at any user and printer boot modes login.
Printhead cleaner Z calibration check process:
1. From the Internal Print Server’s main screen, select TOOLS > PRINT CARE > DIAGNOSTIC.
2. From the Diagnostic screen select WEB WIPE.

3. From the Diagnostic Web Wipe screen, select PRINTHEAD CLEANING Z CALIBRATION > RUN.
4. The printer starts up the electronics and the various subsystems involved in the calibration.

5. When all the subsystems are initialized, the IPS screen displays a message describing the process and
objectives of the test:
Follow the instructions given by Print Care.
6. Perform the printhead cleaner check procedure. See Table 5-15 Printhead cleaning on page 368.
7. Then select CONTINUE.
While the printhead cleaner check procedure is performed, The carriage starts doing several dynamic
wipes at different heights of the rubber blade. After each dynamic wipe, the printhead cleaning
subsystem makes one controlled advance.
The different heights of the wipes are defined:
● 0 - Two wipes at h = +4.00 mm reference
● 1 - One wipe at h = −1.17 mm
● 5 - Two wipes at h = +4.00 mm reference
● 6 - One wipe at h = +0.17 mm
As you can see, the delta between wipers is 0.33 mm. This distance is the minimum height that we can
adjust when one module has tilt. The Δ of 0.33 mm corresponds to about 235 e.u. of the engage motor
(MZ).
8. When the test is completed, pull the printhead cleaning module out of the printer and take a look at the
marks left on the cloth.

The test will have generated some marks on the cloth, similar to the following:
These marks are to be interpreted in the following way:
As we can see the test has 2 strong marks: one at the beginning and the other at the middle of the test.
The test performs 4 wipes before the middle mark and 4 wipes after the middle mark (8 light lines in
total). The printhead cleaning module is best calibrated when lines 5 to 8 are visible and lines 1 to 4 are
not seen.
Height Calibration assessment:
● BAD: line #1 not visible (other lines: 2 to 8 are visible)
● ADMISSIBLE: lines 1 &2 not visible and other lines (3 to 8) are visible
● BEST:
◦ Lines 1 to 3 not visible and lines 4 to 8 are visible
● ADMISSIBLE: lines 1 to 6 not visible, lines 7 & 8 visible
● BAD: line 1 to7 not visible, line 8 visible
● VERY BAD: Lines 1 to 8 not visible at all.
Summary:

Example #1:
This next image shows a module with the two last lines that are not dark enough (lines 1 to 6 not visible
at all). Note that even line 7 is still very weak. This means the module is too low and needs to be
recalibrated.
Example #2:
The following picture shows a module that we can see all the lines (line 1 to 8). This means the module
is too high (excessive interference with printhead). The module needs to be recalibrated.

Example #3:
This picture shows a module perfectly calibrated (lines 1 to 4 not visible and lines 5 to 8 are visible).
When the test is finished, the diagnostic screen shows at the right the diferential values of the e.u.of the
each mark. The interference value between the roller blade and the printheads (h +4 mm) is defined
from the top line, this value is in the internal memory of the printer (NVM), and the screen show it as
“Printhead cleaning engage offset for fly-by wipe:”.
The normal range of this value is between 10500 & 13500 e.u. The e.u. units of each line is in the screen
show it as “Printing line corresponding to offset:” This offset is 0.33 mm or 238 e.u. from the
interference value.

If you select NEXT the test is finished. The Diagnostic tool shows the following screen:
Printhead cleaner tilt check
Besides looking at the height calibration of the module we also have to look how tilted the module is. In this
case what we will see is that the line marks do not start with all printheads touching the wipe at the same
position but starting with one single color. We consider that the tilt of a module is acceptable if the number of
incomplete marks (the ones that don’t extend the full length to cover all heads less than or equal to two. If

there are 3 non-complete lines, then we recommend to add a shim on the side where we first start to see the
marks (adding a shim on one side moves the module down on that side, thus reducing wiping interference
with the printhead). After which we can return to adjust the height.
▲ Tilt assessment:
● GOOD: 0 or 1 incomplete lines
● 1 SHIM NEEDED: 2, 3, or 4 incomplete lines
NOTE: By default, the printhead cleaning system comes with one shim located on each slide mount (front
and rear).
In the next image we can see a totally miscalibrated module. We count 6 incomplete marks (lines 1 to 6, is
still not 100% complete either). This module requires height calibration and one more shim.
Printhead cleaner calibration

This calibration is to adjust the height of the pressure roller of the printhead cleaning system. The user must
generate this calibration after having performed Printhead cleaner check.
The printhead cleaner roll height calibration requires that you use the Diagnostics tests that are accessible
through Print Care. The process to access the printhead cleaner diagnostic screen is described under
printhead cleaner check.
1. From following screen select the tab Set printhead cleaning Z cal:

Once you select Next in the Diagnostic tool, the following screen will be displayed:
This screen shows the follow message:
Enter the number of visible single lines fully printed on the cleaning material in the printhead
cleaning Z calibration check
In this moment the user should introduce the number the lines that he can see on the wipe, after having
performed Printhead cleaner check.
The maximum number of lines is eight and the minimum is zero.
Once the number the lines is selected, the tool will amend the interference value between the roller
blade and the printheads (h +4 mm), and it will adjust the e.u. if necessary. The e.u. value will be defined
for each increment of 0.33 mm between lines. This new value is loaded in the internal memory of the
printer (NVM).

The diagnostic screen shows:
“Current nominal position is (in e.u.): XXXXX”
“Setting nominal position to (in e.u.): YYYYY”
“Diagnostic finished OK”
Once the new value is loaded in the NVM, the calibration is done.
2. Select Next to leave the calibration screen.
After calibration, our recommendation is to repeat the printhead cleaner check to verify that the values
changed have been correctly modified.
Printhead cleaner shimming procedure

To install the shims in order to adjust the tilt on the printhead cleaner follow the following process:
1. From the Internal Print Server, navigate to Carriage beam position and Move to home position to lower
diagnostic mode.

3. Open the printhead cleaning roll door and remove the subsystem.
4. Pull out the printhead cleaning roll carriage, and remove the front screws of the side wipe guide
assembly as shown in the following picture.

5. Remove the printhead cleaner assembly from the side wipe guide assembly.
The printhead cleaner assembly has by default a shim of 0.5 mm in both sides (front and rear), these
shims have been installed in the top line. It is possible that some module has not installed any shim
somewhere, this due to the top line shimming process.
When we remove a shim from one side of the printhead cleaner assembly, the assembly goes up on this
side; if we add a shim on one side, the assembly goes down on this side.
The following pictures illustrate the above topics.

6. Loosen the 5 screws T-20, as shown below, that support the slide mount.
The side that we must loosen depends on the results of the tilt check. Do not remove the screws.
7. Slide up the slide mount assembly. Insert or remove a shim, depending on the tilt check and calibration
procedure, between the central cage and the slide mount, as indicated below.
8. Repeat the Printhead cleaner check to check that the shimming process and height have been correctly
set.
Printhead cleaning cables kit

Removal
diagnostic mode.
The following cables are located on the rear right of the printhead cleaning assembly.

Capping power in T extensor cable (×4) (CZ056-50156)
NOTE: Notice that this cable is used also in other subassemblies such as the service station.
1. Disconnect the capping in T extensor power cable from the air connector, the motor drive PCA (J3
connector), and the motor drive (MA, MZ, MI, or MO motor). See Subsystem block diagrams on page 61.
2. Unroute and remove the cable. Cut the flanges if necessary.
3. Replace the cables with the new ones.
4. Push in and store back the printhead cleaning module.
IMPORTANT: When installing new cables, leave some free loops of cable to allow the printhead cleaning
assembly to move along the guide without tightening the cables.
CAUTION: When installing new cables, do not stretch the flanges too much, to avoid breaking the cables.
Printhead cleaning power in T cable (CZ056-50161)
1. Disconnect the printhead cleaning power in T cable. See Subsystem block diagrams on page 61.
TIP: You are recommended to label the cables to avoid swapping or wrongly connecting the air
connectors when reconnecting them later.
2. Unroute and remove the cable. Cut the flanges if necessary.
3. Replace the cables with the new ones.
4. Push in and store back the printhead cleaning module.
IMPORTANT: When installing the new cable, leave some free loops of cable to allow the printhead cleaning
assembly to move along the guide without tightening the cable.
CAUTION: When installing the new cable, do not stretch the flanges too much, to avoid breaking the cable.
Data cable between motor drive PCAs (×3) (Q6703-50031)
1. Disconnect the data cables between the motor drive PCAs.
2. Unroute and remove the cables.
NOTE: The LAN cables are connected between the motor drive PCAs from 1 to 4 in a daisy chain.
CAUTION: When installing new cables, do not stretch the flanges too much, to avoid breaking the cables.
Micci2 termination (CZ056-50028)

▲ Replace the Micci2 termination from the MO motor drive PCA (P2 connector).

E-box to printhead cleaning cable (CZ056-50157) —Removal
2. Disconnect and unroute the e-box to printhead cleaning cable connected to motor drive PCA 1 (J1).
E-box to printhead cleaning cable (CZ056-50157) —Installation

2. Pull out the e-box assembly.
3. Pull out the printhead cleaning module as far as it will go.
4. Route the cable to leave a free loop that is not too large.
CAUTION: When installing the new cable, do not stretch the flanges too much, to avoid breaking the
cable.
5. Push the e-box back to its vertical position and push the printhead cleaning module back into the
printer.
6. Ensure that the free loop does not interfere with any other element, such as the beam. If necessary,
readjust the free loop so that the cable can extend fully without tightening when pulling out the
printhead cleaning module.
E-cabinet to printhead cleaning power cable (CZ056-50076): Removal
2. Disconnect and unroute the e-cabinet to printhead cleaning power cable connected to the printhead
cleaning power in T cable and power in T cable connectors.
E-cabinet to printhead cleaning power cable (CZ056-50076): Installation

2. Pull out the e-box assembly.
3. Pull out the printhead cleaning module as far as it will go.
4. Route the cable to leave a free loop that is not too large.
CAUTION: When installing the new cable, do not stretch the flanges too much, to avoid breaking the
cable.
5. Push the e-box back to its vertical position and push the printhead cleaning module back into the
printer.
6. Ensure that the free loop does not interfere with any other element, such as the beam. If necessary,
readjust the free loop so that the cable can extend fully without tightening when pulling out the
printhead cleaning module.
Motor encoder cable (×4) (CZ056-50116)
2. Disconnect the motor encoder cable from the motor drive PCA and the motor assembly (J4 connector).

3. Unroute and remove the motor encoder cable.
CAUTION: This cable brings within the motor drive PCA address, so it is important when connecting the
cable to cut the jumper cables (see the illustration below) in order to assign the jumper addresses
correctly to each motor drive PCA.
NOTE: The illustration below is an example of a motor drive PCA address assignment. The red jumper
is cut, so it is a MI motor drive PCA.
Service station: capping and drop detector

Motor kit
Removal

3. Disconnect both power and encoder cables from the motor.
4. Remove the two T-20 screws that secure the motor to the plate.
5. Remove the motor.
TIP: If it is difficult to remove, you can loosen the transmission screws so that it will be easier to
release the motor gear.
Installation
1. Take care not to confuse the T-20 screws from the plate with the T-20 screws from the motor. The
screws for the motor are longer and with smaller washers.
2. The motor is referenced in the V of the hole.
CAUTION: Make sure that the V holds the motor's neck to position the motor accurately.
3. Make sure that the gears engage correctly.
4. Before securing the motor with the screws, make sure that it enters the V support perfectly. The motor
should be fitted so that it is held only by the screws and not by the V support.
Switch
NOTE: Before starting to remove the capping module switch, it is important to send the printheads to their
replacement position in order to have good access to the platform.
NOTE: If you need to remove the drop-detector module switch, you must move the drop-detector module
to the center.
NOTE: Whenever you need to have the carriage out of the capping station while replacing parts of the
service assembly, you are recommended to remove the printheads from the carriage and cap them before
removing and installing the service station parts.
ENWW Service station: capping and drop detector 771

Removal
4. Remove all printheads from carriage and store them in their caps.
6. Disconnect the switch.
7. Remove the two T-8 screws and remove the switch.
Installation
▲ Install the new switch on each module (either capping or drop-detector modules).

Encoder strip
Removal
2. Open the front right panel. See Front right panel assembly on page 623.
4. Apply pressure to the encoder strip bracket and pull the encoder strip away and then over.
WARNING! The encoder strip is very sharp. Be careful that you do not cut yourself. If possible, wear
protective gloves.
5. Remove the two T-20 screws that secure the encoder sensor, and remove the sensor.
Installation
1. Place the encoder strip correctly through the pin in the encoder strip holder.

2. Once the encoder strip is correctly placed, fit the two T-20 screws.
3. Make sure that the encoder strip goes through the optical encoder reader.
4. Place the encoder strip spring in one of the encoder strip holes (only one fits).
Encoder sensor and support

Removal

4. Disconnect the encoder cable.
5. Unroute the encoder cable down through the hole to free the drop-detector shuttle.
6. Remove the encoder strip from the spring and leave it loose. See Encoder strip on page 773.
7. Remove the two T-10 screws that secure the encoder sensor, and remove the sensor.
Installation
1. Assemble the new encoder holder and sensor with the two T-10 screws.
2. Route the encoder sensor cable to the top of the drop-detector shuttle and connect it to the encoder
cable (CZ056-50021).

3. Fix the encoder strip to the spring.
Caps kit
Prepare to replace a service station cap
1. Ensure that you have the Service Station Caps Kit (CZ056-67036), which is included in the Standard
Replace a service station cap
1. Unscrew and remove the cover as shown below, to access the capping station.

2. Remove the service station cap, using three movements as shown below.

3. Remove the spring that holds the cap from below.
4. Attach the spring to the new service station cap and place it in position.
Finish off after replacing a service station cap
1. Put back the cover and screw it into place.
Drop-detector kit
Removal

6. Disconnect the drop detector.
7. Remove the two T-10 screws and the vertical locator that secure the drop detector.
NOTE: Do not lose the vertical locator and screws.
8. Remove the drop detector.
Installation
1. Place the new drop detector and attach it with two T-10 screws.
2. Perform the drop-detector shuttle reset procedure. See How to run a diagnostic test on page 341.
3. Calibrate the drop detector.
4. Check that the printheads are in good condition, check the printhead alignment, and check the section
that shows the health of the nozzles.

Capping transmission assembly
Removal
7. Move the capping and drop-detector modules manually to a more central position, so that the rods on
both ends are accessible.
8. Remove the two T-20 screws that secure the housing transmission.
9. Remove and save the four T-10 screws that hold the two service transmission retainers that secure the
capping transmission assembly to both bearing plates.
10. Remove the capping transmission assembly.
Installation
1. Reinstall the transmission, being careful to seat the gear transmission and the bearing correctly into
their locations.
2. Screw back the housing transmission.

Drop-detector transmission assembly
Removal
7. Move the capping and drop-detector modules manually to a more central position, so that the rods on
both ends are accessible.
8. Remove the two T-20 screws that secure the housing transmission.
9. Remove and save the four T-10 screws that hold the two service transmission retainers that secure the
drop-detector transmission assembly to both bearing plates.
10. Remove the drop-detector transmission assembly.
Installation
1. Reinstall the transmission, being careful to seat the gear transmission and the bearing correctly into
their locations.
2. Screw both transmission retainers to secure the bearings to their plates.
3. Screw back the housing transmission.
4. Perform the following calibrations:
● Drop-detector shuttle calibration XY.
● Drop-detector backslack and elasticity.
● Drop-detector calibration.
Capping module
Removal

7. Move the capping shuttle to the most external position, so that the switch is activated.
8. In order to be able to remove the capping station, remove:
● Two T-20 screws that secure the shuttle retainer
● The shoulder screw
9. Remove the capping station.
Installation
1. Place the shuttle on the rods.
2. Move the capping station along the rods, until you can tighten the shoulder screw to the transmission
nut (this will define the shuttle position on the Y axis).
3. Place the shuttle retainer and tighten the two T-20 screws.
Drop-detector module
Removal

7. Move the capping shuttle to the most external position, so that the switch is activated.
8. In order to be able to remove the capping station, remove:
● Two T-20 screws that secure the shuttle retainer
● The shoulder screw
● The drop-detector Mux covers
● Four flat multicolored cables from the drop-detector Mux PCAs
● The drop-detector grounding braid, lossening two T-10 screws
● The encoder strip from the spring, which gives it the correct tension
9. Remove the drop-detector station.
Installation
1. Place the shuttle on the rods.
2. Move the drop detector along the rods, until you can tighten the shoulder screw to the transmission nut
(this will define the shuttle position on the Y axis).
3. Reroute and connect the multicolored flat cables to each drop-detector Mux PCA. See Subsystem block
diagrams on page 61 and the labels on the cables to find the correct connections.
4. Place the drop-detector grounding braid, tightening two T-10 screws.
5. Place the shuttle retainer and tighten the two T-20 screws.
6. Place the encoder strip on the spring.
7. Assemble the drop-detector Mux covers.
8. Tighten the two T-20 screws that secure the shuttle retainer.
9. Check that the printheads are in good condition: perform the printhead alignment check, and check the
section that shows the health of the nozzles.
10. Perform the following calibrations (see Table 5-14 Drop detector/capping station on page 366):
● Drop-detector shuttle calibration XY
● Drop-detector backslack and elasticity
● Drop-detector calibration
Drop-detector Mux PCA

Removal

6. Move the drop-detector module manually outwards from the printer, so that the top end of the shuttle
is more accessible.

7. For drop-detector Mux PCA 1, remove the four T-10 screws and the drop-detector Mux cover.
For the other drop-detector Mux PCAs (2, 3 and 4), remove the eight T-10 screws and DropMux large
protector cover. Use an L-shaped key to reach the top screws if necessary.
8. Disconnect the four cables connected to the drop-detector Mux PCA that needs to be replaced. The
following picture shows the connections to the drop-detector Mux PCA.

Ref. Drop-detector Mux PCA connector Cable Part number
A Serial extender Drop-detector Mux PCA cable CZ056-50112
B Encoder Drop-detector daisy-chain cable CZ056-50021
C CH1
Drop-detector short extensor, CZ056-50175, CZ056-50069,
extensor, and long extensor CZ056-50176
D CH2
CAUTION: Avoid mismatching the drop-detector cables. Keep track of which cable is connected in
which position, and make labels if necessary. Labels are added to each cable for this purpose.
9. Remove the three T-10 screws that secure the drop-detector Mux PCA enclosure.
10. Remove the enclosure.

11. Remove the two T-10 screws that secure the drop-detector Mux PCA.
12. Remove the drop-detector Mux PCA.
Motor drive PCA

Removal
6. Move the capping module manually to a more central position, so that the motor drive PCAs are
accessible.

7. Disconnect the four motor drive PCA cables. The connections are shown below:
P2 Data cable, RJ45 jumper for drop-detector motor drive PCA Q6703-50031 or CZ056-50028
J1 Data cable between CAP motor drive PCA and either e-box Q6703-50054 or CZ056-50028
interconnect PCA or drop-detector motor drive PCA
J4 Motor encoder cable CZ056-50116
J3 WW power in T cable CZ056-50161
NOTE: One of the motor drive PCAs has only one LAN connection. Make sure to connect it to the right
connector when you install the new PCA.
8. Remove either the two T-10 screws that hold the motor drive PCA supports to the console or the two
T-8 screws that hold the PCA enclosure to its supports, and remove the motor drive assembly.

Drop-detector cable kit
Removal
7. Move the drop-detector module manually outwards from the printer, so that the top end of the shuttle
is more accessible.
NOTE: Before continuing with the following steps, look at the EE schemes to see what routing you
need to follow in order to remove the drop-detector cables that connect to it, and hence which drop-
detector Mux PCA cover must be removed. See Subsystem block diagrams on page 61.
The connections between drop-detector assemblies and drop-detector PCAs are shown below:
PCA 1 PCA 2 PCA 3 PCA 4
Drop-detector 2 and 3 6 and 7 4 and 5 1

assembly

8. For DD1, DD4, DD5, DD6, and DD7, remove the eight T-10 screws and remove the large drop-detector
Mux PCA cover to reach drop-detector Mux PCAs 2, 3, and 4.
9. For DD2 and DD3, remove the four T-10 screws, and remove the drop-detector Mux PCA cover to reach
drop-detector Mux PCA 1.
10. Disconnect the cable from the drop-detector Mux PCA, and unroute the cable all the way to the drop
detector, carefully freeing each cable from any routing clips.
CAUTION: Avoid mismatching the drop-detector cables. Keep track of which cable is connected in
which position, and make labels if necessary.
11. For drop-detector Mux PCA 1, remove the four T-10 screws and the cover. For the other PCAs (2, 3, and
4), remove the eight T-10 screws and cover. Use an L-shaped key to reach the top screws if needed.
12. Disconnect the cables connected to the drop-detector Mux PCA with the following steps.
Drop-detector short extensor cable (CZ056-50175)

1. Disconnect the short extensor cable from the DD3 drop detector and the drop-detector Mux PCA (CH1
connector).
2. Unroute the cable along the path of the drop-detector shuttle (unclip the cable carefully).

When routing the new cable, follow exactly the same route, otherwise there could be signal errors; and be
careful not to pinch the cable with the clips.
Drop-detector extensor cable (CZ056-50069)

1. Disconnect the long extensor cable from the drop detector and the corresponding drop-detector Mux
PCA (CH1 or CH2 connector).
Drop-detector long extensor cable (CZ056-50176)

1. Disconnect the long extensor cable from the DD7 drop detector and the drop-detector Mux PCA (CH1
connector).
Drop-detector Mux PCA cable (CZ056-50112)

1. Disconnect the cable from the e-box interconnect PCA (ODD (J_X31) connector, where X = 1, 2, 3, or 4)
to the drop-detector Mux PCA (serial extender connector).
2. Unroute the cable along the path of the drop-detector shuttle (unclip the cable carefully), the L profiles
(cut the flanges if necessary), and the freely looped route to the e-box interconnect PCA.
When routing the new cable, follow exactly the same route along the drop-detector shuttle path, otherwise
there could be signal errors; and be careful not to pinch the cable with the clips.
Drop-detector daisy chain cable (CZ056-50021)

1. Disconnect the cable from the drop-detector Mux PCAs (encoder connector).
When routing the new cable, follow exactly the same route along the drop-detector shuttle path, otherwise
there could be signal errors; and be careful not to pinch the cable with the clips.
Cable kit
Removal

6. Move the capping module manually to a more central position, so that the motor drive PCAs are
accessible.
7. Disconnect the cables connected to the motor drive PCA with the following steps.
Capping power in T extensor cable (×2) (CZ056-50156)
1. Disconnect the capping power in T extensor cable from its air connector, from the motor, and from the
motor drive PCA (J3 connector).
Capping power in T cable (CZ056-50160)

1. Disconnect the capping power in T cable from its air connector and from the service station power cable
air connectors.
After routing the new cable, there will be an air connector that is not connected to anything. Ensure that this
connector is isolated, or tape it.
Data cable between motor drive PCAs (Q6703-50031)

1. Disconnect the cable from the motor drive PCAs (P2 connector for PCA 1 and J1 connector for PCA 2).
Micci2 termination (CZ056-50028)

▲ Disconnect the Micci2 termination from the motor drive PCA 2 (P2 connector).
Printer capping station motor drive PCA cable (CZ056-50054)

1. Disconnect the cable from the e-box interconnect PCA (J_152 MICCI2 connector) and the motor drive
PCA 1 (J1 connector).

Service station power cable (CZ056-50077)
1. Disconnect the cable from the capping power in T cable air connector and the e-cabinet PCA (SVS
connector).
Motor encoder cable (CZ056-50116)

1. Disconnect the cable from the motor assembly and the motor drv PCA (J4 connector).
Motor encoder cable installation

1. Route and connect the new cable.
2. When connecting the cable, it is important to cut the jumper cables (see the picture below) in order to
assign the correct jumper addresses to each motor drive PCA.
The following illustration gives an example of a drop-detector motor drive PCA address assignment (the
red jumper is cut).

Substrate path
Vacuum pump
Removal
2. Open the front right panel door.
5. Disconnect the vacuum-pump cables.

6. Remove the six A5 screws and remove the blower inlet connector from the pump.
7. Loosen the two A5 screws and remove the grounding strip from the vacuum-pump support.
8. Remove the four T-25 screws that hold the vacuum-pump support to the structure through the four
silent blocks.

9. Remove the vacuum pump with its support from the printer structure. Keep the silent blocks in a safe
place.
10. Remove the four A5 screws that hold the vacuum pump to its support, and remove the pump.
Vacuum pipe
Removal


6. Remove the six T-20 screws that hold the vacuum pipe to the beam, and remove the vacuum pipe from
the printer.
Installation
1. Install the new vacuum pipe.
2. Secure the blower inlet connector to the blower and the sidewall output to the beam.
Vacuum pump cable kit

Removal
1. Unload the substrate so that it is easy to reach the vacuum control PCA and the OMAS controller PCA.
6. Disconnect the cables connected to the vacuum pump, as described below.
Vacuum control PCA to vacuum pump cable (CZ056-50037)
1. Remove the OMAS cable cover.

2. Disconnect the vacuum control PCA to vacuum pump cable from both the vacuum pump and the vacuum
control PCA: the VAC PUMP (P5) connector.
Vacuum pump power cable (CZ056-50114)


2. Disconnect the vacuum pump power cable from the e-cabinet (VAC Platen connector) and the vacuum
pump.
OMAS and vacuum cables kit

3. Disconnect the cables as described below.
Vacuum supply PCA cable (CZ056-50057)

4. Disconnect the vacuum supply PCA cable from both the vacuum control PCA (P4 connector) and the e-
box interconnect PCA (J_371 PWR connector).
Vacuum pump control cable (CZ056-50050)

4. Disconnect the vacuum pump control cable from the vacuum control PCA (J2 connector) and the e-box
interconnect PCA (J_381 CAN* connector).
Vacuum control to OMAS encoder cable (CZ056-50038)

1. Remove the OMAS and vacuum PCA lid.
2. Disconnect the vacuum control to OMAS encoder cable from the vacuum control PCA (ENCODER (J3)
connector) and the OMAS controller PCA (ENCODER (P4) connector).
CAUTION: Do not disconnect an encoder cable by pulling the cable because it will break the connector.
Hold the connector of the encoder cable when removing it.
Vacuum control to OMAS CAN cable (CZ056-50039)
2. Disconnect the vacuum control to OMAS CAN cable from the vacuum control PCA (CAN (P3) connector)
and the OMAS controller PCA (CAN (P2) connector).
Vacuum control to OMAS power cable (CZ056-50040)

2. Disconnect the vacuum control to OMAS power cable from the vacuum control PCA (P1 connector) and
the OMAS controller PCA (POWER (P7) connector).
OMAS controller to sensor cable (CZ056-50202)
2. Disconnect the OMAS temperature sensor cable from the vacuum control PCA (<NAME> connector), and
the OMAS controller to sensor cable from the OMAS controller PCA (nameless connector).
4. Remove the twenty-four T-10 screws from the OMAS platen.
5. Open the pinch so that you can reach the OMAS sensor under the platen.

6. Pull out the platen, being careful with the OMAS temperature sensor cable and the OMAS controller to
sensor cable, and turn it in order to leave the platen upside down.
7. Unroute the OMAS controller to sensor cable, passing it through the beam structure hole.
OMAS controller PCA and vacuum control PCA

Removal
3. Remove the three T-10 and the four T-20 screws and remove the OMAS cable cover and the OMAS and
vacuum PCA lid.

4. Disconnect the cables from the vacuum control PCA.
5. Remove the screws that attach the OMAS and vacuum PCA box and remove the box.

6. Disconnect the cable.
7. Unscrew and remove the PCA support with the PCAs.
Installation
1. Install the new OMAS and vacuum PCA box.
3. Reconnect the cables to the vacuum control PCA.
4. Re-attach the OMAS and vacuum PCA lid.

OMAS platen assembly
Removal
1. Move the scan axis to the substrate load position to raise the carriage beam all the way.
If you cannot start the printer in the normal way due to some failure, use diagnostic mode.
2. Unload the substrate so that you can reach the OMAS platen assembly.
4. Unscrew and remove the OMAS cable cover.
5. Disconnect the OMAS controller to sensor cable from the OMAS controller PCA (nameless connector).

7. Remove the twenty-four T-10 screws from the OMAS platen.
8. Open the pinch so that you can reach the OMAS sensor under the platen.

9. Pull out the platen, being careful with the OMAS controller to sensor cable, and turn it in order to leave
the platen upside down.
10. Unroute the OMAS controller to sensor cable, passing it through the beam structure hole.
11. Remove the OMAS platen assembly.
Installation
1. Install the new OMAS platen assembly.
2. Route and reconnect the OMAS controller to sensor cable.
3. Screw back the OMAS platen assembly.
4. Perform OMAS manual calibration.
5. Perform drive roller calibration.
6. Perform the drive roller check.
Platen assembly
Removal

4. Open the pinch.
5. Remove the substrate edge holders and unload the substrate.
6. Remove the twenty-four T-10 screws from the platen assembly to be removed.
7. Remove the platen assembly.
Installation
1. Install the new platen assembly.
2. Screw back the platen assembly.
4. Close the pinch.

Platen extra assembly
Removal
4. Open the pinch.
5. Remove the substrate edge holders and unload the substrate.
6. Remove the six pointed screws from the platen extra assembly to be removed.
7. Pull out the platen extra assembly.

Installation
1. Install the new platen extra assembly.
2. Screw back the platen extra assembly.
4. Close the pinch.
MA motor
Removal
1. Unload the substrate so that it is easy to reach the MA motor.
3. Open the pinch.
4. Disconnect the MA motor cables.

5. Remove the screws that hold the MA motor and remove the motor.
NOTE: If the motor coupling spider comes away with the MA motor, remove the coupling spider from
the MA motor coupling and save it.
6. Loosen the screws that fix the motor coupling to the MA motor and remove the coupling.

Installation
1. Install the motor coupling to the new MA motor and screw it back to the shaft. Ensure that one of the
coupling screws is screwed against the flat surface of the shaft.
2. Reinstall the MA motor, ensuring that the coupling matches the transmission, and screw it to its
support. Ensure that the coupling spider is correctly located between the motor and the transmission
couplings.
3. Connect the MA motor cables.
4. Perform analog encoder calibration.
MA data cable (CZ056-50236)

Removal
4. Open the pinch.
5. Disconnect the MA data cable from the MA motor and the e-box interconnect PCA (J_301 connector).
Installation
▲ Route and reconnect the new cable, carefully. Place it orthogonally, ensuring that the pins will match
correctly, and then screw it to connect the cable to the motor.
MA power cable (CZ056-50118)

Removal
4. Open the pinch.
5. Disconnect the MA power cable from the MA motor and the e-cabinet (MA connector).
MA motor encoder cable (CZ056-50036)

Although the function of this cable is related to the MA motor, it does not connect directly to the MA motor.
Instead, it connects the vacuum control PCA to the drive roller encoder PCA. Therefore, if you look for it in the
block diagrams, you will find it in the OMAS controller PCA and vacuum control PCA diagram.
Removal
2. Unload the substrate so that you can easily reach the vacuum control PCA.

3. Ensure that the carriage beam is in the substrate load position—that is, raised all the way—because of
the free loop left for the encoder sensor cable.
5. Open the pinch.
6. Disconnect the MA motor encoder cable from the drive roller encoder sensor PCA and the vacuum
control PCA (ENCODER (J1) connector).
CAUTION: Do not disconnect an encoder cable by pulling the cable, because it will break the
connector. Hold the connector of the encoder cable when removing it.
8. Remove the two T-20 screws that hold the encoder sensor support.
9. Remove the encoder sensor support by pulling the pins outwards and sliding it carefully down the
encoder sensor until it gets past the encoder disc.
Installation
▲ Route and connect the new cable. Be careful when routing the cable to leave enough free (looped) that
the carriage beam can reach the substrate load position.
Drive roller encoder disc and PCA

Removal
3. Open the pinch.
4. Unload the substrate.
Removing the drive roller encoder sensor PCA

1. Disconnect the MA motor encoder cable from the drive roller encoder sensor PCA.

2. Remove the two T-20 screws that hold the drive roller encoder sensor PCA support.
3. Remove the drive roller encoder sensor PCA support by pulling out the pins and carefully sliding the
encoder sensor straight down until it gets past the encoder disc.
4. Remove the drive roller encoder sensor PCA.
Installing the drive roller encoder sensor PCA

1. Reinstall the drive roller encoder sensor PCA.
Removing the drive roller encoder disc

1. Remove the drive roller encoder sensor PCA.

2. Remove the two screws that hold the codewheel cover, and remove the cover.
3. Loosen the T-8 screw that fixes the encoder hub to the drive roller.
4. Remove the encoder disc with its hub from the drive roller.

Installing the drive roller encoder disc
1. Install the new encoder disc with its hub onto the drive roller.
2. Tighten the T-8 screw to fix the encoder disc hub to the drive roller.
3. Carefully reinstall the drive roller encoder sensor PCA.
4. Screw back the codewheel cover.
Substrate drive roller transmission assembly

Removal
3. Open the pinch.
5. Remove the MA motor.
6. Remove the drive roller encoder disc and PCA.
7. Remove the three pointed screws that attach the right bearing L-shaped metal sheet support, and
remove the support.

8. Remove the pointed screws that hold the transmission mount, and remove the transmission mount.
Installation
1. Install the new transmission mount.
2. Screw back the right bearing L-shaped metal sheet support.
3. Install the substrate drive encoder disc and the substrate drive encoder PCA.
4. Install the MA motor.
Drive roller motor coupling

Removal
1. Remove the MA motor.
2. Remove the motor coupling spider.

3. Loosen the screws that attach the motor coupling to the MA motor.
4. Remove the MA motor coupling from the MA motor.
5. Loosen the screws that attach the drive roller transmission coupling to the drive roller transmission.
6. Remove the drive roller transmission coupling from the drive roller transmission.

Installation
1. Attach the new MA motor coupling to the MA motor. Ensure that one of the coupling screws is screwed
against the flat surface of the shaft.
2. Attach the new drive roller transmission coupling to the drive roller transmission. Ensure that one of the
coupling screws is screwed against the flat surface of the shaft.
3. Reinstall the MA motor, ensuring the three coupling parts match correctly, and screw the MA motor to
its support. Ensure that the coupling spider is correctly placed between the MA motor and the driver
roller transmission couplings.
4. Connect the MA motor cables.
Drive roller support bearings

This service part includes both the end and the central drive roller support bearings.
Removal
3. Open the pinch.
5. Remove the substrate drive roller transmission assembly.
6. Remove the KM-nut and the drive roller worm gear. Save them both in a secure place.

7. Remove the two pointed screws that attach the left bearing L-shaped metal sheet support, and remove
the support.
8. Remove the substrate drive roller assembly from the printer and save it in a secure place.
CAUTION: This part is very heavy, so you are strongly recommended to perform this operation with at
least two people.

9. Remove the drive roller assembly so that you can reach the six central support bearings (four at the
front, two at the rear).
10. For each bearing, remove the circlip carefully and remove the bearing.
Installation
1. At each end of the substrate drive roller, remove the retaining ring and replace the bearing with the new
one.
2. Install the six new central bearings.
3. Reinstall the rear drive roller assembly and screw in its left end support bearing.
4. Reinstall the substrate drive transmission assembly.
Ensure that the worm screw, the worm gear, and the encoder assembly are correctly assembled.
5. Screw in the right end support bearing.
6. Reinstall the encoder disc and its cover.
7. Reinstall the encoder PCA.
MI motor
Removal

4. Disconnect the MI motor power, data, and encoder cables.
5. Remove the screws that hold the MI motor and remove the motor.
Installation
1. Install the new MI motor and attach it with the screws.
2. Connect the MI motor power, data, and encoder cables.
3. Remove the MI spindle.
4. Perform MI-MO-MF calibration.

MO motor
Removal
4. Disconnect the MO motor power, data, and encoder cables.
5. Remove the screws that hold the MO motor, and remove the motor.
Installation
1. Install the new MO motor and attach it with the screws.
2. Connect the MO motor power, data, and encoder cables.

3. Remove the MO spindle.
MF motor
Removal
3. Disconnect the MF motor power, data, and encoder cables.
4. Remove the screws that hold the MF motor and remove the motor.
Installation
1. Remove the R2FF spindle.

MI power cable kit (CZ056-50225, CZ056-50130, CZ056-50226)
Removal
4. Disconnect the MI power cables from both the MI motor and the e-cabinet (MI connector).
5. Remove the ten T-20 screws and the braking resistor enclosure.
6. Disconnect the MI resistor at both ends.
7. Remove the four screws that hold the MI resistor to the resistors plate, and remove the MI resistor.
8. Unroute both MI power cables from the MI resistor to the MI motor and the e-cabinet (cut the flanges if
necessary).
Installation
1. Connect the new MI resistor to the resistors plate with the four screws.
2. Route the new MI power cables from the MI resistor to the MI motor and the e-cabinet, and reconnect
them.
MI data cable (CZ056-50046)

Removal
4. Disconnect the MI data cable from the MI motor and the e-box interconnect PCA (J_302 connector).
Installation
▲ Route and carefully connect the new cable. Place it orthogonally, ensuring that the pins will match
MI encoder cable (CZ056-50058)

Removal

4. Disconnect the MI encoder cable from the MI motor and the e-box interconnect PCA (ENC J2_321
connector).
MI left support spindle plate

Removal
4. Remove the three pointed screws that hold the MI left support spindle plate to the rear left pillar.
5. Remove the five pointed screws that hold the MI left support spindle plate to the structure.

6. Remove the MI left support spindle plate.
Installation
1. Install the new MI left support spindle plate.
2. Screw back the five pointed screws that hold the support MI left support spindle plate to the structure.
3. Screw back the three pointed screws that hold the MI left support spindle plate to the rear left pillar.
MI right support spindle plate

Removal
5. Remove the MI motor from the support spindle.
6. Remove the three pointed screws that hold the MI right support spindle plate to the rear right pillar.

7. Remove the five pointed screws that hold the MI right support spindle plate to the structure.
8. Remove the MI right support spindle plate.
Installation
1. Install the new MI right support spindle plate.
2. Screw back the five pointed screws that hold the support MI right support spindle plate to the structure.
3. Screw back the three pointed screws that hold the MI right support spindle plate to the rear right pillar.
Spindle latch type A

Removal
3. Remove either the MO spindle or the R2FF roller.
4. Follow the steps below for either the MO left spindle latch or the MO right spindle latch.
Removing the MO right spindle latch


2. Remove the spring from the latch lever tab.
3. Remove the latch circlips from both lever pivot ends.
4. Remove the latch lever pivot sufficiently that the latch lever can be removed.
Removing the MO left spindle latch


4. Remove the latch lever pivot sufficiently that the latch lever can be replaced with the new one.
Removing the R2FF right roller latch



Removing the R2FF left roller latch
Installation
1. Reinsert the lever pivot through the support spindle plate, the latch lever, and the bearing plate, and fix
its ends with the circlips.
2. Put back the spring on the latch lever tab.
TIP: You are recommended to use a flange through the latch lever tab hole to help to tighten the
spring, so that it is easier to place the spring end at the latch lever tab.

Spindle latch type B
Removal
4. Follow the steps below for either the MI left spindle latch or the MI right spindle latch.
Removing the MI right spindle latch
3. Remove the latch circlips from the bearing plate end.

4. Remove the pointed screws and the bearing plate.
5. Remove the latch from the pivot.
Installing the MI right spindle latch

1. Install the new latch.
TIP: When installing the new latch through the pivot, you are recommended to remove the three T-25
screws and the MI transmission cover, so that the pivot can be pushed from the transmission side while
installing the latch.
its end with the circlip.

Removing the MI left spindle latch
Installing the MI left spindle latch
1. Install the new latch.
its ends with the circlips.

MO power cable kit (CZ056-50227, CZ056-50130, CZ056-50228)
Removal
5. Disconnect the MO power cables from both the MO motor and the e-cabinet (MO connector).
7. Disconnect the MO resistor at both ends.
8. Remove the four screws that hold the MO resistor to the resistors plate, and remove the resistor.
9. Unroute the MO power cables from the MO resistor to the MO motor and the e-cabinet (cut the flanges if
necessary).
Installation
1. Attach the new MO resistor to the resistors plate with the four screws.
2. Route and reconnect the new cables.
MO data cable (CZ056-50237)

Removal
5. Disconnect the MO data cable from the MO motor and the e-box interconnect PCA (J_303 connector).
6. Unroute and remove the cable (cut the flanges if necessary).
Installation
▲ Route and carefully reconnect the new cable. Place it orthogonally, ensuring that the pins will match
MO encoder cable (CZ056-50059)

Removal

5. Disconnect the MO encoder cable from the MO motor and the e-box interconnect PCA (ENC J2_322
connector).
MO left support spindle plate

Removal
3. Remove the MO spindle from the MO spindle plates.
5. Remove both pins by hitting them from the rear (use pliers if necessary).
6. Remove the four pointed screws from the cover.

NOTE: The indicated screw is screwed on the reverse side. The screw circled in yellow can be removed
by hand.
8. If necessary, loosen the pointed screw, so that the MO left support spindle plate is not strongly attached
to the R2FF side plate.
9. Remove the screws that attach the MO left support spindle plate to the bracket.

10. Remove the MO left support spindle plate.
Installation
1. Slide the MO left support spindle plate horizontally until it matches its screw holes with the R2FF side
plate ones.
2. Put back the two pins (use pliers if necessary).

3. While holding the MO left support spindle plate in this position, screw back the pointed screws, and also
screw back the loosened screws into the R2FF side plate.
NOTE: The indicated screw is screwed on the reverse side. The screw circled in yellow can be screwed
by hand.
5. If necessary, tighten the pointed screw, so the MO left support spindle plate is strongly attached to the
R2FF side plate.
6. Screw back the cover onto the MO left support spindle plate.
MO right support spindle plate

Removal
3. Remove the MO spindle from the MO spindle plates.
5. Remove both pins (use pliers if necessary).
6. Disconnect the MO motor power, data, and encoder cables, and remove the motor.

7. Remove the three pointed screws from the cover.
8. Remove the pointed screw from the top of the cover, and remove the cover from the MO right support
spindle plate.
TIP: You are recommended to use an L-shaped key in order to have enough space to unscrew and
remove the pointed screw.

by hand.
10. If necessary, loosen the pointed screws, so that the MO right support spindle plate is not strongly
attached to the R2FF side plate.
11. Remove the screw that holds the MO right support spindle plate to the bracket.

12. Remove the MO right support spindle plate.
Installation
1. Slide the MO right support spindle plate horizontally until it matches its screw holes with the R2FF side
plate ones.
2. Put back the two pins (use pliers if necessary).

3. While holding the MO right support spindle plate in this position, screw back the pointed screws, and
also screw back the loosened screws into the R2FF side plate.
by hand.
5. Screw the MO motor back to the MO right support spindle plate.
NOTE: The motor position must be as shown in the illustration.
6. Screw back the cover onto the MO right support spindle plate.
7. Screw back the upper cover hole.
MF power cable kit (CZ056-50229, CZ056-50130, CZ056-50230)

Removal
5. Disconnect the MF power cables from the MF motor and the e-cabinet (MF connector).
7. Disconnect the MF resistor at both ends.
8. Remove the four screws that hold the MF resistor to the resistors plate, and remove the resistor.
9. Unroute the MF power cables from the MF resistor to the MF motor and the e-cabinet (cut the flanges if
necessary).
Installation
1. Attach the new MF resistor to the resistors plate with the four screws.
2. Route and reconnect the new cables.

MF data cable (CZ056-50048)
Removal
5. Disconnect the MF data cable from the MF motor and the e-box interconnect PCA (J_304 connector).
Installation
▲ Route and carefully reconnect the new cable. Place it orthogonally, ensuring that the pins will match
MF encoder cable (CZ056-50060)

Removal
5. Disconnect the MF encoder cable from the MF motor and the e-box interconnect PCA (ENC J2_323
connector).
R2FF pinch mechanical assembly

Removal
4. Remove the R2FF roller.
7. Disconnect and unroute from the R2FF pinch beam all the cables routed along it, from the take-up-reel
sensor to the R2FF side plate, so that the R2FF pinch beam is free of cables routed to any other printer
parts.

8. Remove the four pointed Allen 6 screws that hold the R2FF pinch mech assembly supports to the
corresponding R2FF side plate on both sides (two screws on each side).
CAUTION: Before removing the screws and the pins, use a jack to keep the pinch mech assembly
raised, so that it will not fall down when you remove the support screws and pins.
9. Remove the R2FF pinch mech assembly by pulling down the left part until you can pull out the entire
assembly.
CAUTION: When moving the R2FF pinch mech assembly, be careful not to break the take-up-reel
assembly, which is located at the bottom, below the assembly.and pins.
Installation
1. Remove the pinch mech assembly supports from each end of the R2FF pinch mech assembly and screw
them to the new part. Tighten the screws that hold the supports to both ends.
NOTE: It is necessary to tighten the screws before installing the R2FF pinch assembly into the printer.
Otherwise there is not enough space between the R2FF pinch mech assembly and the R2FF latches.
2. Install the new pinch mech assembly and screw both supports to their corresponding R2FF side plates.

3. Reinstall the R2FF roller and the MO spindle.
4. Route back through the R2FF pinch beam all the cables routed along it and reconnect them.
R2FF pinch lever kit

Removal
3. Disconnect the pinch lever assembly.
4. Remove the two pointed screws from under the pinch lever assembly.
5. Lift up the pinch lever assembly and remove it.

R2FF damper
Removal
3. Remove the two T-20 screws from the damper support.
4. Remove the R2FF damper.
R2FF switch cable

Removal
3. Disconnect the switch cable from the motor drive PCA (J4 connector), and unroute it.
4. Remove the two T-8 screws that hold the switch, and remove the switch.
R2FF pinch hinge outer

Removal

3. Remove two T-20 screws from the sides of the pinch assembly.
4. Remove four T-20 screws from the front of the pinch assembly, and pull the assembly forwards.
5. Lift up and remove the pinch assembly.

R2FF side plates
Removal
5. Remove the R2FF pinch mech assembly.
6. Perform the steps described below to remove each R2FF side plate.
Removing the R2FF left side plate

1. Remove the two pointed pins that fix the MO side plate position (use pliers if necessary).
by hand.

3. Remove the pointed screws and the R2FF left side plate.
Installing the R2FF left side plate

1. Screw back the new R2FF left side plate to the MO side plate.
by hand.
2. Install the two pointed pins that fix the MO side plate position (use pliers if necessary).

3. Screw back the pointed screws.
4. Reinstall the R2FF pinch mech assembly.
Removing the R2FF right side plate
1. Remove the MF motor.
by hand.
3. Remove the two pointed pins that fix the MO side plate position (use pliers if necessary).

4. Remove the pointed screws and the R2FF right side plate.
Installing the R2FF right side plate

1. Screw back the new R2FF right side plate to the MO side plate.
by hand.
2. Install the two pointed pins that fix the MO side plate position (use pliers if necessary).

3. Screw back the pointed screws.
4. Reinstall the R2FF pinch mech assembly.
R2FF pinch hinge inner

Removal
3. Remove the MO spindle, the R2FF roller, and the MI spindle.
4. Remove two T-20 screws from the sides of the pinch aAssembly.

5. Remove two T-20 screws from the front of the pinch assembly, and pull the assembly forwards.
6. Lift up and remove the pinch assembly.
Roll-to-floor timing belt

Removal

6. Loosen the pointed T-30 screw.
7. Loosen the roll-to-floor timing belt by pulling out the R2FF tensioner assembly.
8. Remove the roll-to-floor timing belt.

Installation
1. Install the new roll-to-floor timing belt.
2. Tighten the belt and screw back the T-30 screw to fix the R2FF tensioner assembly.
3. Reinstall the R2FF roller and the MO spindle.
R2FF take-up-reel assembly

This service part includes one each of the following: take-up-reel assembly with its support, RJ45 jumper
(CZ056-50028), e-box to take-up-reel PCA cable (CZ056-50163), take-up-reel power cable (CZ056-50180),
take-up reel sensor in T cable (CZ056-50170), take-up reel sensor single cable (CZ056-50203), and take-up
reel sensor long cable (CZ056-50210).
Removal
3. Disconnect the take-up-reel assembly cables from the motor drive PCA. See Subsystem block diagrams
on page 61.
P2 RJ45 jumper (P2, data-out connector) CZ056-50028
J1 E-box interconnect PCA to take-up-reel PCA cable (J1, data-in connector) CZ056-50163
J4 Take-up-reel sensor in T cable CZ056-50170
J3 Take-up-reel power cable CZ056-50180
4. Remove the two T-20 screws and remove the take-up-reel cover.
5. Ensure that all the free air connectors from the power cables that do not connect to the PCA are
isolated; if not, use insulating tape to secure them. See Subsystem block diagrams on page 61.
6. Unroute the take-up-reel cables.
7. Remove the four T-20 screws and the take-up-reel assembly.
8. Remove the four T-20 screws and the take-up-reel-cable support.

Installation
1. Install the new take-up-reel assembly and attach it with the four screws.
2. Install the new take-up-reel-cable support and attach it with the four screws.
3. Route and reconnect the take-up-reel cables to the motor drive PCA. See Subsystem block diagrams
on page 61.
4. Ensure that the take-up-reel PCA has the RJ45 jumper connected (J2 connector).
5. Ensure that the take-up-reel PCA has the address jumper cable correctly set on its cable connector (J4
connector).
The following table shows the scheme for its address: how the jumper cables should be cut off the take-
up reel sensor in T cable (CZ056-50170) in order to get the corresponding motor drive PCA address.
Motor drive PCA

Removal
3. Remove the take-up-reel motor drive PCA plastic cover, so that you can reach it.
4. Disconnect the take-up-reel assembly cables from the motor drive PCA. See Subsystem block diagrams
on page 61.
P2 RJ45 jumper (P2, data-out connector) CZ056-50028
J1 E-box interconnect PCA to take-up-reel PCA cable (J1, data-in connector) CZ056-50163
J4 Take-up-reel sensor in T cable CZ056-50170
J3 Take-up-reel power cable CZ056-50180
5. Remove the take-up-reel motor drive PCA.

Installation
1. Install the new take-up-reel motor drive PCA.
2. Connect the take-up-reel assembly cables to the motor drive PCA.
3. Close the motor drive PCA’s plastic cover.
R2FF roller
Removal
3. Ensure that both MO spindle latches are closed.
4. Pull down the R2FF pinch lever.
5. Remove the hand-removable screw from each R2FF side plate.
6. Open the R2FF right and left roller latches.
Installation
1. Install the new R2FF roller.
2. Close the R2FF right and left roller latches.
3. Reinstall the hand-removable screw on each R2FFside plate.
4. Pull up the R2FF pinch lever.

Diverter top module
Removal
4. Open both curing-module assembly latches.
6. Locate the diverter module that needs to be replaced.
7. Perform the following steps, depending on the diverter module design. There are two different designs
for the diverter module (supports & wheels):
NOTE: Due to the necessary removal of both the entire bottom diverter structure and the
bottom plate assembly, the top diverter design 1 does not include its corresponding service part.
Therefore, it is necessary to follow the upgrade instructions for both the diverter and the bottom
module assemblies. If you have an affected top diverter module that belongs to design 1, see the
diverter and bottom plate upgrade kit.
November 2013)
Removal (design 2)
1. Remove all the diverter module wheels.
2. Remove the two T-10 screws that hold the diverter module plastic base.
TIP: If you cannot free the diverter module plastic base because there is not enough clearance, you
can remove the wheels and the two T-10 screws that hold the following diverter module.
3. Unclip and remove the diverter module plastic base from the diverter metal sheet base.
IMPORTANT: Do not remove or unfix the diverter metal sheet base, as it is an structural part of the
printer, which determines the position of the diverter module plastic base. If you move or remove it, the
diverter may not work properly.

1. Clip the diverter module plastic base to the diverter metal sheet base.
2. Install the diverter wheels back onto the diverter module plastic base.
3. Screw the diverter module plastic base to the diverter metal sheet base.
Diverter bottom module

Removal
6. Locate the diverter module that needs to be replaced.
7. Perform the following steps, depending on the diverter module design. There are two different designs
for the diverter module (supports & wheels):
November 2013)
Removal (design 1)
1. Remove the interwheels and all the diverter module wheels.
2. Remove the four T-10 screws that hold the diverter module base.
NOTE: If you are removing an end diverter bottom module, you will also have to disconnect a
grounding cable.
TIP: If you cannot free the diverter module base because there is not enough clearance, you can
remove the wheels and the four T-10 screws that hold the following diverter module.

1. Place the diverter module base in a centered position, so that the distance to its neighbors, one on each
side, looks the same.
NOTE: This helps to ensure that there will be no problem when installing the interwheels after
installling the diverter module.
2. Screw the diverter module to the plastic isolators.
IMPORTANT: Ensure beforehand that both plane surfaces match correctly. Otherwise you could cause
some marks or irregularities on the plastic isolator surface.
3. If you are installing an end diverter bottom module, do not forget to reconnect the grounding cable.
Removal (design 2)
1. Remove all the diverter module wheels.
2. Remove the four T-10 screws that hold the diverter module plastic base.
TIP: If you cannot free the diverter module plastic base because there is not enough clearance, you
can remove the wheels and the four T-10 screws that hold the following diverter module.
3. Unclip and remove the diverter module plastic base from the diverter metal sheet base.
IMPORTANT: Do not remove or unfix the diverter metal sheet base, as it is an structural part of the
printer, which determines the position of the diverter module plastic base. If you move or remove it, the
diverter may not work properly.
1. Clip the diverter module plastic base to the diverter metal sheet base.
2. Install the diverter wheels back onto the diverter module plastic base.
3. Screw the diverter module plastic base to the diverter metal sheet base.
Diverter wheel
Removal

6. Locate the diverter wheel that needs to be replaced.
7. Remove the interwheels from both ends of the diverter wheel.
Installation
1. Install the new diverter wheel.
2. If you have diffficulty in replacing the diverter wheel, try the following suggestions, depending on the
diverter module design. There are two different designs for the diverter module (supports & wheels):
November 2013)
TIP: Design 2 does not need the plastic interwheels parts that may include this service part (they
are needed only for design 1).
▲ To give yourself more room in which to operate, you can remove all the interwheels and the screws that
attach the diverter module. If you still have difficulty, you can also remove the interwheels and screws
from the neighboring diverter module.
▲ To give yourself more room in which to operate, you can remove the screws that attach the diverter
module. If you still have difficulty, you can also remove the screws from the neighboring diverter
module.
NOTE: Interwheels are used only in design 1.
Pinch assembly
Removal
3. Remove the pinch cover of the affected pinch assembly.
TIP: Before removing the screws that attach the pinch cover, you are strongly recommended to use a
marker to indicate the positions of the screws for when you will need to reinstall the cover, or to
measure and record the distances between the screws. Notice that the slot blocks can slide along the
pinch beam.
4. Remove the screws that attach the pinchwheel submodule.
5. Remove the submodule.
Installation
1. Install the new submodule and attach it with the screws.
2. Put back the cover and attach it with the screws.
3. Close the loading table.

Pinch switch assembly
This service part includes one pinch sensor cable (CZ056-50127) and one mechanical switch - short cable
(CZ056-50169).
Removal
3. Locate the pinch switch sensor, inside the pinch clamp retainer.
4. Open the pinch clamps and pull out the pinch assembly.
5. Disconnect and unroute the pinch sensor cable.
6. Remove the two pointed screws and remove the switch assembly with its metal sheet support.
7. Remove the pinch switch.
Installation
1. Install the new pinch switch.
2. Screw back the pinch switch assembly to the clamp retainer.
3. Route the switch cable, ensuring that it will not get pinched by the pinch assembly, but leaving enough
free (looped) to open the pinch assembly without interference.
4. Connect the switch cable and the pinch switch assembly.
6. Perform the safety interlock procedure.
Pinch clamp
Removal
2. Locate the pinch clamp to be replaced and open it.
3. Remove the four T-30 screws and the pinch clamp.
Installation
1. Install the new pinch clamp and attach it with the screws.
Interlock
Removal
3. Open the loading table.

4. Locate the interlock to be replaced.
6. Disconnect the interlock from its cables.
7. Remove the screws that attach each part of the interlock.
8. Remove the interlock.
Installation
1. Install the new interlock.
2. Add the interlock connector and screw it to the pinch side plate support.
4. Connect the Interlock connector to its cables.
5. Screw the interlock jumper to the pinch mechanical bracket support.
6. Carefully move the pinch to the closed position, without closing it, and ensure that the interlock
connector perfectly matches the interlock jumper, so that it cannot bend or break the interlock pins. If
necessary, adjust the interlock connector position to match the interlock jumper perfectly.
CAUTION: Be careful to follow the correct procedure when installing the interlocks, to avoid breaking
or bending the interlock pins when closing the pinch assembly.
The following illustration shows the clearance that allows you to place the interlock connector in the
best position to match the jumper.
7. Open the pinch assembly and tighten the interlock connector screws.
Pinch front cover

Removal
4. Locate the pinchwheel submodule to be replaced.
5. Remove the six screws shown below.
pinch beam.
6. Remove the pinchwheel cover.

Pinch front cover right
Removal
5. Remove the five screws shown below.
pinch beam.
Pinch front cover left

Removal
5. Remove the five screws shown below.
pinch beam.
Spindle air valve

Prepare to replace a spindle valve
1. Ensure that you have the Spindle Air Valve (Q6702-67025), which is included in the Standard Uptime Kit
(D4J02A).
2. Ensure that you have an 11 mm (7/16 inch) tube wrench key and the pneumatic gun.
4. Press the valve to deflate the spindle.
Replace a spindle valve
1. Remove the spindle valve with the tube wrench key.

NOTE: Remember that the dual-roll spindle has two valves; identify the one that needs replacement.
2. Insert the new valve and tighten it. The valve must be well seated in position and firm, but do not force
it with the key.
Finish off replacing a spindle valve

▲ Test the new valve by inflating and deflating the spindle.

TRS FI tower assembly
Removal before purging
5. Remove the five pointed screws and the carriage-tower cover.
NOTE: Before replacing the PT FI tower assembly, you are recommended to remove the printhead
interconnect PCA assembly, to give free access to the FI tower assembly screws.
6. Remove one T-10 screw from the FI holder.
ENWW Tube Routing System (TRS) 869

7. Carefully disassemble the FI cover.
8. The FI cover has two snap-fit parts.
Removal after purging
The FI tower should be removed before purging the ink whenever possible. However, you can also remove
the FI tower after purging the tube, as follows:
1. Turn off the printer and the power-enable switch in order to ensure that there is no ink pressure within
the ink system. If in doubt, before opening the support of the FI tower, you can insert a syringe (with
piston in place) within the FI tower to ensure that there is really no ink pressure: the piston does not
move when there is no ink pressure.
2. Use a cloth to absorb any drops of ink.
After remounting the FI tower, you do not need to remove the small bubble of air: the air bubble that can be
accepted by the printhead without any problem is up to 20 cm (8 in) in the tube.
Installation
1. Disassemble the new FI tower.
CAUTION: Do not remove the ink tube from the bottom of the FI tower.

2. Replace the FI tower with the new ones provided. The elbow with the fitting attached must remain
attached to the tubes.

3. Install the FI towers inside the FI holder. At this point it is important to remember the position of the
colors.
The orientation of the FI tower is very important. The flat edges must go together.
4. Assemble the FI cover by snapping it together.
5. Install the FI holder into the carriage assembly and secure it with a T-10 screw.

TRS barnacle kit
Removal
2. Remove the ink system module.
4. Remove the four rear central panels in order to reach the entire ink-chain tubes routing.
5. Use the flush kit to empty the ink tube of the specific color that you want.
6. After flushing, cut the tube at the input and at the output of the valve.
7. Unclip the valve by rotating it counterclockwise.
Installation
1. Clip the new valve.
2. Use the tube repair kit to connect the new barnacle ink tubes to the ink tubes that come from the Igus
chain side and the ISM side.
3. Install the air purgers provided and refill the tubes using the procedure in diagnostics.
IMPORTANT: Purge from the trailing chain tubes to the TRS barnacle quick connector, so there will be
no air bubble left along the ink tube circuit.

Vapor removal
Vapor removal pipes
NOTE: Use the cleaning kit and use gloves, coat, clothes, and other materials in order not to wet yourself
and the printer or the floor when replacing any vapor removal part.
CAUTION: All vapor removal parts can contain liquid, so it is important before removing any vapor removal
part to cover all the surfaces or remove all the delicate parts that can be damaged by liquid (such as the
electronic and electrical parts).
Vapor removal air-to-blower pipe

Removal
3. Remove the flanges that attach the pipe.
4. Prepare to remove the pipe.
CAUTION: All vapor removal parts can contain liquid, so it is important before removing any vapor
removal part to cover all the surfaces or remove all the delicate parts that can be damaged by liquid
(such as the electronic and electrical parts).
NOTE: Once the pipe is free, you are recommended to lift the pipe slightly at its higher end before
starting to remove it, so that most of the liquid it contains can drain into the condensation collector
bottle.
5. Loosen the metal flanges from both pipe ends and remove the vapor removal air to blower pipe from
both the vapor removal exhaust and the blower fixer.

Installation
1. Route the vapor removal air to blower pipe along the ink system module and attach it with flanges to
the ink system module, ensuring that from the air exhaust to the blower the pipe always descends, so
that all liquid drains into the condensation collector bottle and none remains in the pipe.
2. Tighten the metal flanges at both ends of the pipe and ensure that it is airtight, otherwise the vapor
removal will not work correctly.
Vapor removal blower to exchanger-box pipe

Removal

bottle.
6. Loosen the metal flanges from both ends of the pipe and remove the vapor removal blower to
exchanger box pipe from both the vapor removal blower and the vapor removal exchanger box.
Installation
1. Route the vapor removal blower to exchanger box pipe along the ink system module and attach it with
flanges to the ink system module, ensuring that from the blower to the exchanger box the pipe always
descends, so that all liquid drains into the condensation collector bottle and none remains in the pipe.
CAUTION: Be careful with the metal sheet supports, as the metal sheet is very sharp and can rip the
pipe.

2. Tighten the metal flanges around the pipe and ensure that it is airtight, otherwise the vapor removal
will not work correctly.
Vapor removal exchanger box to curing pipe

Removal
bottle.

5. Loosen the metal flanges at both ends of the pipe and remove the vapor removal exchanger box to
curing pipe from both the vapor removal exchanger box and the sidewall output.
Installation
1. Route the vapor removal exchanger box to curing pipe along the ink system module and attach it with
flanges to the ink system module, ensuring that from the exchanger box to the sidewall output the pipe
always descends, so that all liquid drains into the condensation collector bottle and none remains in the
pipe.

2. Tighten the metal flanges at both ends of the pipe and ensure that it is airtight, otherwise the vapor
removal will not work correctly.
CAUTION: Be careful with the sidewall output pipe connection, as it is hard to be sure that the inner
side is airtight.
Vapor removal blower to drainage pipe

Removal
bottle.

6. Loosen the two T-20 screws that attach the vapor removal fitting bracket support and remove the end
of the vapor removal blower to drainage pipe’s tapered fitting from the fitting bracket support.
7. Unroute the pipe carefully, so as not to lower too much the pipe’s tapered fitting.
8. Remove the pipe by pulling the pipe’s drainage end slightly upwards.
Installation
1. Route the vapor removal blower to drainage pipe along the ink system module and attach it to the ink
system module, ensuring that from the exchanger box to the sidewall output the pipe gradually
descends, so that all liquid drains into the condensation collector bottle and none remains in the pipe.

2. Install the pipe’s tapered fitting to the vapor removal fitting bracket support and tighten the two T-20
screws that attach the fitting bracket support.
3. Pull the pipe fitting outwards as far as possible, so that the pipe is centered within the support’s
bracket, so that no liquid will fall out of the pipe.
If there is any drainage out of the pipe, you are strongly recommended to remove the vapor removal
blower to drainage pipe, remove the vapor removal fitting bracket and clean all liquid out of it, so that
the fitting will not slide along the fitting bracket support.

4. Reinstall the end of the drainage pipe into the vapor removal end collector hole and place it as low as
you can into its bracket.
Vapor removal drainage

Removal
2. Open the front door
5. Perform the described steps to replace the following vapor removal drainage parts.
Vapor removal intermediate drainage collectors

TIP: You can reach the components more easily if you remove the front left panel. See Front left panel
assembly on page 635.
Removal
1. Remove the four T-20 screws that attach the large intermediate drainage collector, and remove it.

2. Remove the four T-20 screws that attach the intermediate drainage collector to the collector box, and
remove it.
Installation
1. Screw back the intermediate collector to the collector box.
2. Screw back the large intermediate drainage collector.
Ensure that the large intermediate drainage collector slopes downwards, so that it will drain properly.
Vapor removal drainage end collector

TIP: You can reach the components more easily if you remove the front left panel. See Front left panel
assembly on page 635.
Removal
2. Cut all the flanges attached to the drainage end collector.

3. Remove the drainage pipe end of the vapor removal blower to drainage pipe from the drainage end
collector.
CAUTION: Be careful, because the pipe contains liquid. See the vapor removal blower to drainage pipe
removal procedure and follow its recommendations before removing the drainage end from the
drainage end collector.

4. Remove the six T-20 screws that hold the drainage end collector and remove it.
TIP: When removing the drainage end collector from the printer, slope it so that all the liquid will fall
through its bracket into the condensation collector bottle.
Installation
1. Screw back the drainage end collector.
2. Connect the drainage pipe end of the vapor removal blower to drainage pipe to the drainage end
collector.
3. Attach all the parts attached to the drainage end collector with flanges.
Vapor removal drainage main holder
Removal
2. Remove the large intermediate drainage collector.

3. Remove the drainage end collector.
4. Remove the vapor removal exchanger box.
5. Remove the three T-20 screws that hold the vapor removal drainage main holder, and remove it.
Installation
1. Screw back the vapor removal drainage main holder to the ink system module structure.
2. Install the vapor removal exchanger box.
3. Install the drainage end collector.
4. Install the large intermediate drainage collector.
Vapor removal drainage condensation collector bottle container
Removal
1. Remove the vapor removal condensation collector bottle.

2. Remove the screws that attach the condensation collector bottle container and remove the container.
NOTE: You are recommended to clean the surface before reinstalling the condensation collector bottle.
Vapor removal crossflow exchanger

Removal
3. Prepare to remove the vapor removal crossflow exchanger.

4. Remove the vapor removal crossflow exchanger.
TIP: Use a flat screwdriver to pull the crossflow exchanger on both sides enough that you can remove
the part from the vapor removal exchanger by pulling it by hand.
CAUTION: Do not try to clean the crossflow exchanger with compressed air, since it will break its
sheets.
NOTE: Do not try to turn around the crossflow exchanger to reuse the part. If you do this, the
electronics will receive the dust.
Installation
▲ Carefully insert the new crossflow exchanger by sliding it into the vapor removal exchanger box.
CAUTION: The vapor removal crossflow exchanger is a delicate part and can easily be deformed,
which prevents it from working properly.

Vapor removal fan
Removal
1. Perform the vapor fans array test.
NOTE: This procedure will not be available until November 2013. The exact date will be provided in a
service newsletter, around November 2013.
3. Locate the broken fan.
5. Disconnect the vapor removal fan from its air connector. Unroute the cable until you reach the fan.
6. Remove the four T-20 screws that hold the vapor removal fan, and remove the fan.
Installation
1. Screw the vapor removal fan back to the vapor removal exchanger box.

2. Route the fan cable as shown, and reconnect the fan.
NOTE: The four fans are connected in two arrays, as the following picture shows. It is important to
follow the cable routing shown below, so that there will no problems with the fan cable lengths.
3. Perform the following procedures:
● Vapor fan arrays test
● Vapor fans PCA connectivity
● Vapor fan PCA voltages
NOTE: These procedures will not be available until November 2013. The exact date will be provided in
a service newsletter, around November 2013.
Vapor removal impactor

Removal
2. Remove the vapor removal crossflow exchanger.
3. Remove the vapor removal impactor from the vapor removal exchanger box.

Installation
1. Clean all the vapor removal crossflow exchanger inside surface from condensated liquids.
TIP: Ensuring that all the points are sealed, except for the draining one (on the image it is circled),
either with aluminium tape or silicone will avoid possible draining problems.
2. Install the new vapor removal impactor to its housing.
3. Install back the vapor removal crossflow exchanger.
Vapor removal exchanger box

Removal
5. Remove the vapor removal fans.
6. Remove the two T-30 screws from the left side support.
7. Remove the three T-30 screws from the right side support.

8. Carefully remove the vapor removal exchanger box.
NOTE: The vapor removal exchanger box has on its base a drainage tube which is very fragile. Be
careful when removing or installing it, and also when placing the vapor removal exchanger box in a safe
place.
Vacuum pump
Removal
3. Disconnect the pump cables. See Vapor removal pump cable kit on page 897.

5. Remove the four A5 screws that hold the vacuum pump to its support and remove the pump.

Installation
1. Insert the new vacuum pump.
2. Screw back the six A5 screws and connect the blower inlet connector to the pump, ensuring that it is
airtight.
3. Reconnect all the pump cables. See Vapor removal pump cable kit on page 897.
4. Perform the following procedures:
● Vapor blower pump test
● Vapor blower PCA connectivity
NOTE: These procedures will not be available until November 2013. The exact date will be provided in
a service newsletter, around November 2013.
Vapor removal condensation collector bottle

TIP: You are recommended to wear gloves for this operation. The condensation collector bottle is stored
behind the left cover at the front of the printer. You can see the level of liquid in the bottle through a narrow
window at the bottom of the cover.
The bottle should be emptied before it is full, which will typically be after about 60–70 liters of ink have been
used. You should check the bottle periodically, depending on your usage of the printer.
Empty the bottle

1. To remove the bottle, first open the two locks on the left, then open the cover; the hinges are on the
right.

2. Remove the bottle.
3. Empty the bottle.
NOTE: The condensates are a mix of ink additives and water. Dispose of the condensates according to
local regulations. Find the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) of the ink in .

4. Put back the empty bottle.
NOTE: You are recommended to clean the condensation collector bottle container before reinstalling
the condensation collector bottle.
5. Take care that the mouth of the bottle is well positioned to receive the liquid falling from above.
6. Close the door.
Vapor removal curing box

Removal

5. Prepare to remove the vapor removal curing box.
6. Remove the four pointed T-20 screws and the vapor removal mobile collector.
7. Remove the six pointed screws and remove the vapor removal motion curing box.
Installation
NOTE: Before installing the vapor removal curing box, ensure that all the sheet points are sealed with
silicone.
1. Locate with the two pins and screw back the vapor removal motion curing box to the curing assembly.
NOTE: Ensure that the curing box foams make the assembly airtight, except for the draining point. If it
is not airtight, replace the curing foams.
2. Install the vapor removal mobile collector.
Vapor removal pump cable kit

2. Follow the described steps to replace the cables listed below:
Vapor removal cable data split to blower (CZ056-50260)

2. Disconnect the vapor removal cable data split to blower from both the vacuum pump and the ISM quick
connector (VR PUMP CONTROL connectors).
Vapor removal cable power 230V split to blower (CZ056-50261)

2. Disconnect the vapor removal cable data split to blower from both the vacuum pump and the ISM quick
connector (VR PUMP CONTROL connectors).
Vapor removal pump control cable (CZ056-50247)

1. Unload the substrate so that it is easy to reach the vapor removal’s vacuum control PCA.
3. Remove the vapor removal’s vacuum control PCA cable cover.
4. Disconnect the vapor removal pump control cable from both the ISM quick connector and the vacuum
control PCA (VAC PUMP (P5) connector).

E-box interconnect PCA to vapor removal vacuum power cable (CZ056-50239)
3. Disconnect the e-box interconnect PCA to vapor removal vacuum power cable from the e-box
interconnect PCA (J_471 PWR connector), the vapor removal vacuum control PCA (P4 connector), and
the buzzer’s air connector.
NOTE: Notice that this routing is dispersed to different parts of the printer, so it is illustrated in more
than one block diagram (see Subsystem block diagrams on page 61), including e-box, vapor removal,
and take-up reel diagrams
TIP: Locate all the T-cable ends and follow the routing accurately before starting to replace the T-
cable.
E-box interconnect PCA to vapor removal vacuum LAN cable (CZ056-50238)
3. Disconnect the e-box interconnect PCA to vapor removal vacuum LAN cable from the e-box interconnect
PCA (J481 CAN* connector) and the vacuum control PCA (J2 connector).
Vapor removal fans power cable (CZ056-50248)
1. Unload the substrate so that it is easier to unroute the cable along the printer structure.
4. Disconnect the vapor removal fans power cable from the ISM quick connector and the e-cabinet PCA
(VAC VR connector).
Vapor removal fans power cable kit

2. Follow the steps below to replace the each cable.
Vapor removal fans cable (CZ056-50242)

2. Disconnect the vapor removal fans cable from the vapor removal fans and the curing PCA (J13
24V_FAN_CURING connector).

4. Replace the cable with the new one.
5. Cut the jumpers following the corresponding address. See Subsystem block diagrams on page 61.
When cutting the cable jumpers to give the address, follow these criteria on the connector:
1 2 3
ADDR2 ADDR1 ADDR0 LSB
where cable = 0, no cable = 1
The following table shows the scheme for the vapor removal PCA address: how the jumper cables
should be cut in order to get the address.
ADDR Jumper cable scheme
(1,1,1)
6. Connect the fan cable to the curing PCA connector.
Vapor removal pump power cable (CZ056-50246)

1. Unload the substrate, so that it is easier to unroute the cable along the printer structure.
4. Disconnect the vapor removal pump power cable from both the ISM quick connector and the e-cabinet
PCA (VPCA VR connector).
Vapor removal fans PCA data cable (CZ056-50249)

1. Unload the substrate so that it is easier to unroute the cable along the printer structure.
4. Disconnect the vapor removal fans PCA data cable from both the ISM quick connector and the e-box
interconnect PCA (J_262 CAN connector).

Vapor removal cable power 24V split to curing PCA (CZ056-50258)
2. Remove the left top panel.
3. Disconnect the vapor removal cable power 24V split to curing PCA from both the ISM quick connector
(VR SPLIT connector) and the curing PCA (24V_IN J11 connector).
Vapor removal cable LAN split to curing PCA (CZ056-50259)

2. Remove the left top panel.
3. Disconnect the vapor removal cable LAN split to curing PCA from both the ISM quick connector (VR LAN
connector) and the curing PCA (J12 connector).
OMAS controller PCA and vacuum control PCA

NOTE: The printer has two vacuum control PCAs. The first one is related to the vacuum and OMAS systems,
while the second one controls some aspects of the vapor removal system. In both cases the service part used
is the same, although in the second case the OMAS controller PCA is not needed, since it is not related to the
vapor removal system. Because of that, the original vapor removal vacuum control PCA’s enclosure comes
without the OMAS controller PCA, and its enclosure may be slightly different. The service part enclosure
should not be opened nor modified, and the removal and installation should be done with the service part as
it comes (that is, with the OMAS controller PCA and vacuum control PCA).
Vapor removal vacuum control PCA: Removal

1. Unload the substrate so that it is easy to reach the vapor removal’s vacuum control PCA.
2. Locate the vapor removal’s vacuum control PCA on the right, looking from the rear of the printer.

4. Remove the three T-20 screws and the vacuum control PCA cable cover.
5. Disconnect all cables from the vapor removal’s vacuum control PCA.

6. Remove the four T-20 screws that hold the vapor removal’s vacuum control PCA, and remove the PCA.
Vapor removal vacuum control PCA: Installation
1. Use the four T-20 screws to attach the new vapor removal’s vacuum control PCA.
2. Connect all cables to the vapor removal’s vacuum control PCA.
3. Screw back the vacuum control PCA cable cover.
Curing and vapor removal PCA

Removal
3. Disconnect all the vapor removal PCA cables.

4. Remove the six T-10 screws and remove the vapor removal PCA cover.
5. Remove the eight T-10 screws and remove the vapor removal PCA.

Installation
1. Install the new vapor removal PCA and secure it with screws.
2. Screw the vapor removal PCA cover.
3. Reconnect the vapor removal PCA cables.
NOTE: Ensure that the fan cable connector has the corresponding jumper address.
NOTE: When replacing the vapor removal PCA, ensure that there is a jumper at the CAN TERM
connection (if there is no jumper, take it from the old PCA).

8 Call Me @HP
Call Me @HP is a remote troubleshooting tool embedded in the Print Care software, which enables customers
to obtain support remotely without the need of a service visit.
Using Call Me @HP

Call Me @HP can be used in two different scenarios:
● The customer opens a case at the HP Call Center (available only if the customer is supported by HP).
● The customer calls for support and is asked by a remote agent to open a Call Me @HP session in order to
resolve the problem more quickly.
NOTE: If the customer is supported by an HP-authorized partner, the reseller engineer needs to be on site
and logged in as ‘Engineer’ in Print Care to open a Call Me @HP session.
Once the Call Me @HP session is started, remote agents can use the following tools:
● Chat from printer
● Send/receive files to/from the built-in computer
● Videostreaming
● Remote desktop view and control
Call Me @HP can be used for remote troubleshooting in many different ways. Here are some examples:
● Check and extract the service plot.
● Check the substrate presets.
● Check the maintenance status.
● Upgrade the firmware remotely.
● View diagnostic test results while they are being executed.
IMPORTANT: For safety reasons, diagnostic tests cannot be printed or launched remotely. The front door
must be open to take full control of the built-in computer remotely.
ENWW Using Call Me @HP 905

Troubleshooting Call Me @HP
The Call Me @HP button is not available in Print Care
Remember that the Call Me @HP button is available only to customers supported directly by HP. If the
customer is supported directly by HP and the button is not available, check the following:
1. Is Call Me @HP configured correctly?
Call Me @HP must be configured during printer installation. The default configuration done at the
factory is for customers supported by a channel partner. This mode allows the creation of a Call Me@HP
session, but only if the HP-authorized representative is at the customer site and logged in as ‘Engineer’
in Print Care.
If the customer is supported by HP directly, a specific configuration must be done during printer
installation, by running a software application provided with the service documentation at the end of
the printer’s technical training course.
NOTE: For the changes to take effect, the Internal Print Server must be restarted after running the
Call Me @HP configuration tool.
NOTE: If the HP-authorized partner can prove remote capabilities and is interested in providing
remote support with Call Me @HP, this can be done only on request, and special approval, training, and
setup from HP is needed. Contact your HP partner manager if you would like to have further information
about this option.
NOTE: Remember that a Call Me @HP functionality test is mandatory during printer installation.
2. Is the remote assistance option enabled?
Go to the Internal Print Server, select Tools > Preferences, and check that the remote assistance option
is enabled.
NOTE: To enable remote assistance, the customer must accept a Data Transfer Agreement with HP.
A Call Me @HP session cannot be started

If the session cannot be started, or remote control or videostreaming is not working, check the following:
1. Are the network settings correct?
Specific network settings are needed for Print Care and Call Me @HP. If a Call Me @HP session cannot be
started, the most likely reason is that the network settings are not correct. The requirements are as
follows:
906 Chapter 8 Call Me @HP ENWW

● Print Care networking (including Call Me @HP) requires an outbound connection to all the
following addresses without a proxy. This means that an open Internet connection allowing traffic
through ports 80, 443, and 21 is needed.
URL HTTPS 443 HTTP 80 FTP 21 Purpose
hp.com X X
Print Care / Production Analyzer
https://spcastweb01p.saas.hp.com X X
Content and data connectivity
http://spcw01.saas.hp.com X
http://h50203.www5.hp.com X X Call Me @HP chat
G5w2114g.atlanta.hp.com X Call Me @HP video streaming
http://15.192.17.253 X
http://15.192.17.254 X
http://15.192.17.255 X
http://15.193.0.102 X
http://15.193.0.103 X Call Me @HP remote control
http://15.193.0.104 X
http://15.193.0.169 X
http://15.193.0.170 X
http://15.193.0.171 X
NOTE: If necessary, advise the customer to create routing rules that route around the proxy for
these addresses.
● ActiveX must be installed on the computer. Install ActiveX if requested to do so.
● Antivirus software must be configured not to block ActiveX controls.
● ActiveX must be enabled in Internet Explorer: select Tools > Internet Options > Security tab. Then
select the Internet zone and click Custom Level. Under ActiveX controls and plug-ins:
◦ Allow previously unused ActiveX controls to run without prompting.
◦ Enable automatic prompting for ActiveX controls.
● A minimum upload speed of 256 bps is required.
Check that you have access to the addresses in the above table.
ENWW Troubleshooting Call Me @HP 907

2. Is the User Account Control setting correct?
Ensure that User Account Control is set to low or disabled. In the Control Panel, select System and
Security > Change User Account Control settings and set UAC to Never notify.
908 Chapter 8 Call Me @HP ENWW

9 Moving the printer
● Introduction
● Manpower required
● Tools required for repacking
● A: Move the printer to a new site (transport temperature below 5°C/41°F)
● B. Move the printer to a new site (transport temperature above 5°C/41°F)
● C. Move the printer to the same site (with ramps or steps)
● D. Move the printer to the same site (no ramps, no steps)
Introduction
Before moving, make sure the new site is ready. To prepare the new installation site, see the site preparation
guide. To mount and reinstall the printer, see the installation guide.
There are four possible scenarios for moving the printer:
● A: Move the printer to a new site (transport temperature below 5°C/41°F) on page 911 In this case,
before switching off the printer, the ink must be removed from the tubes. You need the ink system
cleaning tubes and 5 liters of distilled water.
● B. Move the printer to a new site (transport temperature above 5°C/41°F) on page 935 If you need to
move the printer to a new site, the printer must be fixed to a pallet. If the temperature will not drop
below 5°C/41°F, follow these instructions. Failure to follow these instructions could cause the ink to
freeze, which would damage the ink system and require heavy repair.
● C. Move the printer to the same site (with ramps or steps) on page 936 If you need to move the printer
within the same site but there are ramps or steps on the route, you will need to lift the printer with a
forklift or a crane.
● D. Move the printer to the same site (no ramps, no steps) on page 937 If you wish to move the printer
a short distance on the same site, across a horizontal floor with no steps and no slopes, read the
instructions.
In any case, some preparations must be made before the printer can be moved, and failure to follow these
steps could cause irreversible damage to the printer.
This repacking guide provides you with step-by-step procedures for the repacking process. This guide is
organized in chronological order and should be followed from beginning to end.
NOTE: After moving the printer, you may in some cases need an electrician to reconnect the power cables.
You may also need to reconfigure the network, from the HP Internal Print Server computer, and from the RIP
computer. See the installation guide for more details.
ENWW Introduction 909

NOTE: If the printer is moved to a different customer, the Print Care software must be reinstalled to
generate a new customer ID. Then, a service call must be made to HP so that the printer’s serial number is
associated with the new customer ID.
Manpower required
Repacking of your printer requires the following manpower:
● HP specialist
● Customer
● Certified electrician
● Moving specialist
IMPORTANT: The printer must be moved by trained and qualified personnel only.
Tools required for repacking

TIP: Without a heavy-duty electric screwdriver, it could take up to two hours just to reassemble the crate.
Repacking of your printer requires the following tools:
● Step ladder
● Cable Ties
● Heavy-duty adhesive tape
● Heavy-duty electric screwdriver with two batteries
● Phillips screwdrivers
● T-8, T-10, T-15, T-20, T-25, and T-30 Torx screwdrivers
● Long Torx extension pins that have a diameter of approximately 2–3 mm and are more than 15 cm in
length to be able to access all screws
● Two flat head screwdrivers (two sizes)
● 30 mm socket wrench, extension, and 17 mm socket
● 7 mm, 15 mm, and two 30 mm open-ended wrenches
910 Chapter 9 Moving the printer ENWW

A: Move the printer to a new site (transport temperature below
5°C/41°F)
1. Remove the covers
Manpower Tools Time
1 person T15, T20, T25, and T30 screwdrivers 30 minutes
NOTE: You are recommended to wear gloves when removing the covers.
On the left-hand side
1. Center left cover on page 641 (eleven T-20 black screws) (9)
TIP: It may be easier to remove covers 4, 6, and 9 once the ISM is moved aside.
2. Top left panel assembly on page 637 (four T-20 screws) and Bottom left panel assembly on page 636
(four T-20 screws) (8)
3. Rear left panel assembly on page 636 (four T-20 screws) (7)
4. Rear left pillar on page 629 (five T-15 screws and one T-30 screw) (6): move the ISM a few millimeters
first
5. Front left panel assembly on page 635 (two T-20 screws) (5)
6. Front left internal cover on page 631 (three T-20 screws: two M5 and one M4) (4)
7. Front left panel door on page 653 (no screws) (3)
8. Front internal corner and supportsFront left internal corner assembly on page 638 (nine T-20 screws)
(2)
9. Front top left pillar on page 630 (four T-15 screws and one T-25) (1)
ENWW A: Move the printer to a new site (transport temperature below 5°C/41°F) 911
On the right-hand side
1. Rear right panel assembly on page 624 (two T-20 screws) (2)
2. Front right door and hinges (six T-20 screws) (1)
Wrap all the covers and keep the screws.
2. Prepare the printer

Remove the printheads, intermediate tanks, ink cartridges, printhead cleaning roll, and aerosol filters.
Initial steps
1. Remove the printheads and store them in their caps. See the user’s guide.
3. Remove the ink cartridge. See the user’s guide.
4. Restart the printer in diagnostic boot mode and force-fill the intermediate ink tanks to prevent broken
bags.
5. Carefully remove the intermediate tanks. See ISM intermediate tank set on page 672.
NOTE: Store the intermediate ink tanks vertically. Failure to store them vertically can cause a broken
bag.
Remove the printhead cleaning roll

1. In order to replace the printhead cleaning roll, unlock and open the door on the front right of the printer.

2. Grip the handle and pull the whole printhead cleaning roll assembly out through the door.
3. You can cut the material, removing the used material of the lower core. Dispose of the roll with the used
cleaning material according to the instructions provided with the new roll.
TIP: Keep the empty core to use as a take-up core.
4. Grip the handle and push the whole printhead cleaning roll assembly back into the printer.
5. Close the door with the key.
Remove the aerosol filters

4. Open one latch on the left side of each aerosol filter module.

5. Open the lid of each filter.
6. Remove the two aerosol filters, using their handles.
7. Close the lids.
8. Close the latches.
3. ISM flush and clean a single ink system line

Flushing the ink lines with distilled water and then with air removes the ink from the tubes, which enables
you to remove and replace parts of the ink system. The flushing procedure is done one ink line at a time.
1. Place the flushing tool in the space left when the ink cartridge was removed, and connect the ink
connector to the connection port of the tool.
2. Connect the cable from the flushing tool to J17 (AIR PUMP 11) on the left side (close to the substrate
input).
3. Go to the Diagnostic menu and select Ink System menu 4.0 > Flushing procedure> Activate flushing
tool pump.
4. Open the entry electrovalve of the color you are flushing Ink System menu 4.0 > Flushing procedure>
Operate entry electrovalve>Color to flush.
5. Unscrew the top of the cleaning tool and fill the bottle with 0.5 l of distilled water.
6. Insert a needle into the tube coming from a waste bottle.
7. Insert the needle into both (if possible) printhead ink connectors of the carriage assembly. Ensure that
you insert it into the correct color.
8. Ensure that the path switch is in the horizontal position.
9. Turn on the flushing tool with the switch located on top. The cleaning tool slowly pumps the distilled
water into the tubes and ink system of the color you are cleaning. The pumping action cleans ink out of
the tubes and into the draining bottle.
10. When the level of distilled water is half finished:
a. Install the new empty intermediate flushing tank (that came with the flushing kit) into the left
intermediate slot, wait 10 seconds for the ink to be cleaned from this area, then remove the tank.
b. Install the intermediate flushing tank into the right intermediate slot, wait 10 seconds for the ink
to be cleaned from this area, then remove the tank.
11. When the ink system has been cleaned of ink and the flushing tool is empty of water, the pump of the
cleaning tool then pushes air into the ink system tubes, which pushes the water out into the draining
bottle of the quick connector flushing tool. This process lasts for approximately 5 minutes.
12. When 5 minutes have passed:
a. Install the intermediate flushing tank (that came with the flushing kit) into the left intermediate
slot, wait 10 seconds for the water to be removed from this area, then remove the tank.
b. Install the intermediate flushing tank into the right intermediate slot, wait 10 seconds for the
water to be removed from this area, then remove the tank.
13. When the ink system has been cleaned of ink and the flushing tool is empty of water, the pump of the
cleaning tool then pushes air into the ink system tubes, which pushes the water out into the draining
bottle of the quick connector flushing tool. This process lasts for approximately 5 minutes.
NOTE: If the distilled water in the cleaning tool bottle becomes low before the ink system has been
cleaned of ink, you must refill the bottle with more water. You must stop the flushing tool to add more
water.
4. Unplug the electrical system

Requirements
An electrician is required for unplugging the electrical system used to power the printer. Make sure that your
electrician is appropriately certified according to local regulations and supplied with all the information
regarding the electrical configuration.
Remember that you are required to follow the local laws, regulations, and standards that pertain to the
electrical installation of your printer.
Unplug power cables
Turn off the printer, using both Branch Circuit Breakers located in the building's Power Distribution Unit
(PDU).
Unplug both power cords (including the PE terminal) and un-route them

Disconnecting the main power cord:
1. Disconnect first the PE conductor to the PE M8 pillar terminal (it is close to the Protective Earth (PE)
terminal mark, which is located to the left in the cabinet as shown below)
Protective Earth (PE) terminal mark:
2. Disconnect the lines (and neutral if used) conductors from the installation terminal block TB-1 (L1, L2,
L3 and N contacts).
3. Loosen the cable gland and pull the cable to un-route it.
Disconnecting the computer’s power cord (if installed)

1. Disconnect first the PE conductor to the PE M4 pillar terminal.
Protective Earth (PE) terminal mark:
2. Disconnect the line and neutral conductors to the installation terminal block TB-1 (L0, N0 contacts)
3. Loosen the cable gland and pull the cable to un-route it.
5. Remove the computer, monitor, keyboard, and mouse

Manpower Tools Time
1 person T-20, T-30 Phillips screwdriver 30 minutes
Monitor removal
1. Unplug and unroute the monitor, keyboard, and mouse cables through the hole in the front cover.
2. Use a T-20 screwdriver to remove the monitor holder from the printer.
3. Remove the holder from the monitor by unscrewing the 4 Phillips screws. Keep them and store the
monitor properly.
4. Re-attach the holder to the printer with the four T-20 screws.

5. Unplug the computer cables (including the LAN).
6. Remove the computer from the electrical compartment and store it properly.
7. Un-route the customer LAN cable
Webcam removal
▲ Disconnect the webcam from the printer's built-in computer and store it properly
Remove the air supply

▲ Disconnect the airgun from the customer's air supply and store it properly
6. Set up the printer

Manpower Tools Time
1 person Cutting pliers, Allen keys, T-20 and T-25 35 minutes

screwdrivers
Remove ink supplies clamps with two screws

1. Remove the five ink-supply clamps on the side of the printer with two screws securing the connectors.
2. Remove the ink-supply connectors and fix them on the ISM frame.
3. Replace the five ink-supply clamps on the side of the printer with two screws securing the connectors.
NOTE: Be careful not to flatten or pull hard on the cables.
Clean the condensation collector box
1. Wear gloves, and cover the area to protect the floor.
3. Remove the front left panel door. See Front left panel door on page 653.
4. Open the front left cover.
5. Remove the frame by unscrewing six M4 screws.
6. Remove the heat exchanger. Use a flat screwdriver as a lever, then you will be able to slide it out.

7. From the side, remove the screws (four M4) and nuts (four M4) shown below.
8. Free the condensation collector box, but leave it inside for a moment to drain inside the case.
9. Clean the condensation collector box, the case, and any ink leaks in the area.
10. Put back the condensation collector box (with its screws and nuts), the heat exchanger, and the covers.
Collapse the ISM module (left side)
1. Remove the condensation collector bottle for easy access. See Vapor removal condensation collector
bottle on page 894.
2. Remove the metal sheet shown in the picture (four screws).
3. Disconnect the tube (with the clamps). Be careful: there could be some condensation inside.
4. There are two sets of three cables each. Unplug and un-route the upper set. Unplug and un-route the
lower set; two of them are LAN plugs, but marked as VR and ISS.
5. Unscrew the grounding strip and store the screws and plate properly.
6. Disconnect the quick connector by pressing the button.
7. Remove two pins and clips (one at the front and the other at the rear).
8. Collapse the module about 250 mm.
9. Place two clips and pins in transport position.

Remove the tensioner
TIP: The ISM can be moved aside for easier access.
1. Take the nut from the parking lot and place it on the tensioner screw.
2. Remove the four screws from the frame.
3. Turn the frame horizontally so it can be passed through the hole.
4. Place the belt over the platen and fix it with heavy-duty adhesive tape.
7. Insert additional packaging

Manpower Tools Time
1 person Cutting pliers, Allen keys, T-20 and T-25 10 minutes

screwdrivers
1. Open the printer's window and secure the carriage in the travel position with the T-25 screw.
2. Secure the scan axis to the printer chassis with the eight T-20 screws.
3. Secure the printhead cleaning assembly with two T-20 screws.
4. Add straps, protective foams, cable ties, and orange tapes to fix windows, doors, the curing module, the
loading table, and the service station.
5. Add the foams in between the ISM and the Scan axis.
6. Add the strap holding the e-cabinet.
NOTE: The strap should be loose or have very little tension during transportation.
7. Place the forklift in transport position. Remove 10 screws, rotate them 90º, and replace the screws in
the same place.
8. With a flat screwdriver rotate the drop-detector platform screw to leave it in the transport position (9
cm from the console, as shown below). The screw can be accessed from the front of the service station.
9. Move the capping station platform to leave it 2 mm from the drop detector. Attach the two platforms
with a cable tie.

8. Raise the feet
1. Use a 30 mm wrench to unlock the nut at the top of the foot.
2. Rotate the nut manually down the bolt. Leave about 2 cm (0.8 in) clearance at the bottom between nut
and the foot.
3. Use a 15 mm wrench to rotate the foot upwards. Use the flat faces at the bottom of the bolt to fit the
wrench.
4. Raise the foot as far as the bolt allows.
5. Use the 30 mm wrench to tighten the nut.
CAUTION: Take care to raise the feet as high as you can. They may break if they touch the ground
while the printer is in motion.
9. Set up the printer in the final position

At this point, normally you would push the printer to the final location. However, if you need to remove the
printer from a second floor, a crane will be needed to lift the printer.
Lift the printer from a second floor using a crane

1. If possible, the printer can be lifted by the crane without removing the crate. If the loading area for the
crate has enough space to reassemble the crate safely, this situation is ideal.
If it is not possible to move with the crate, the same guides used to lift the printer with a forklift should
be used to lift the printer with a crane. To do so, lifting bars must be inserted into the forklift guides.
The lifting cables can either be attached to a spreader beam or directly to the crane.
NOTE: The lifting bars, spreader beam and any other crane attachment must be supplied by the
customer. For the exact specifications of the crane attachments, see the Site Preparation Guide.
WARNING! When lifting the printer with a crane, extra caution should be taken to ensure that the
cables do not apply pressure to the center covers or carriage beam.
CAUTION: The printer weight is not evenly distributed, and it may tilt to the right side.
NOTE: The printer will bend as you lift it.
2. The following graphic illustrates how to lift the printer using lifting bars.
If you use a spreader beam to lift the printer, make sure that the spreader beam and lifting bars are
wide enough so the lifting cables do not touch the center covers or carriage beam. The following graphic
illustrates how to lift the printer with a spreader beam.
10. How to push the printer

Manpower Time
2 people Varies
NOTE: When you set the printer on the floor, the printer wheels allow you to roll the printer easily. Push the
printer only from the outside corners of the top covers on either side.

1. Locate the forklift guides underneath the printer and make sure that the forks on the forklift are spaced
1.3 m apart (A).
2. Move the forklift into position to engage with the printer. You can approach the printer from either side,
whichever is more convenient for you.
3. Carefully lift the printer with the forklift.
11. Replace the printer on the pallet

Manpower Tools Time
1 person Two M30 sockets, M17 socket wrench, cutter, 40 minutes

forklift
1. Remove the four bolts that secure the foot blocks to the pallet (16 total) and remove them.
2. To attach the foot block to the printer foot, remove the 30 mm bolt.
3. Lift the printer 30 cm from the floor with the forklift.
4. Position the block and replace the 30 mm bolt so that it is attached to the printer foot.
5. Fix the two e-cabinet cushion holders onto the right side of the shipping pallet.
6. Install ISM supports and trays onto the right side of the shipping pallet.
7. Place the printer on the pallet. Leave the four foot blocks as close as possible to the original position.
8. Tighten the two 30 mm bolts attaching the left side of the printer to the foot blocks. A socket wrench is
recommended for this step.
9. Tighten the two 30 mm bolts attaching the right side of the printer to the foot blocks. The front one is
hidden behind the printhead cleaning roll door. You may need the key to open the door for accessing
that bolt
10. Secure each foot block to the pallet with the four bolts removed earlier. New holes in the pallet may be
required to secure them.
11. Add flanges on the ISM structure to attach it to the cushion blocks
CAUTION: Ensure that the e-cabinet is secure, and ISM foams are in place and not broken.

12. Install the boxes and covers that were inside the crate.
13. Secure the box onto the pallet. The shipment should include the following items:
● Introductory information document
● Documentation CD including the legal information, limited warranty, site preparation guide,
installation guide, and user's guide
● Pneumatic gun
● 2 spindles supports
● 4 substrate edge holders
● 1 HP Internal Print Server computer (includes keyboard, mouse, and power cord)
● 1 flat-screen monitor (includes power cord)
● Electrical configuration kit, including cabinet keys
● 1 key for the e-cabinet
● Dual-roll intermediate support
● Printer cleaning kit
● 1 cleaning roll and 2 aerosol filters
● 14 intermediate tanks
● 1 cleaning roll core
● 1 webcam with a 5 m USB cable extension
● Printheads:
◦ Yellow/Magenta Printhead 2
◦ Cyan/Black Scitex Printhead 2
◦ Lt Magenta/Lt Cyan Scitex Printhead 2
◦ Latex Optimizer Printhead 1
CAUTION: Ensure that the box containing the computer is in an upright position and secured with
straps.
14. Place the ID covers on to the pallet.
15. Use strapping to secure the covers, but not too tight.
16. Install the spindle supporter with four bolts each.
17. Secure the substrate drive input, substrate drive output, and dual-roll spindles to the pallet using the
spindle supports.
18. Attach the lid and the screws from the spindle supporter.

19. Tape the key for the lockable covers onto the front scan beam with heavy-duty adhesive tape.
20. Wrap the complete printer with 3D VCI bag as shown below. Make sure the printer is fully covered, and
sealed using packing tape.
12. Replace the crate packaging

Manpower Tools Time
2 people M17 socket wrench, Phillips screwdriver, pliers, 20 minutes

ladder
In some cases, it may be necessary to leave the printer inside the crate packaging to go up ramps or make
second-story deliveries. Plan accordingly. You will need at least 3 m (10ft) of space on each side of the crate.
The crate is attached together by 16 lag bolts and 128 wood screws.
The panel numbers are shown below.
1. Lift one end of the crate slightly and pull it in to the printer. You will need space of 3 m (10 ft) in order to
attach the crate to the printer.
2. Install the other end of the crate in the same way.
TIP: Alternatively, you can mount the crate; first side panels and then the top panel.
3. Insert the bolts shown below from panels 1, 3, 12, 4, 2, and 9.

4. Insert panels 5, 6, and 7; and, while someone holds them to prevent them from falling, attach their
bolts.
5. Insert eight Phillips screws from panel 6 and 4 screws from panel 5, the central rear panels.
6. Remove sixteen screws from panel 7, the central front panel.
7. Add the two top cross-pieces.
8. Insert panel 10.
9. Using a ladder to reach the top of the crate, insert 16 top screws from panel 10, the central top panel.
WARNING! Do not stand on top of the crate.
10. Wrap the complete package with a plastic sheet.
11. Cover the package in heavy-duty wrapping and shrink-wrap.
13. Move the crate
Manpower Tools Time
2 people Forklift, skates 15 minutes
WARNING! The crate must be lifted with a forklift from the front side of the crate. The front side of the
crate is marked Front. This is important because of the weight distribution inside the crate.
WARNING! Do not stand on top of the crate.
Weight Fork Length Inner distance between

forks
Forklift 6000 kg (13228 lb) 2 m (79 in) 1.3 m (51 in)
1. To move the crate with a forklift, insert the forks in the designated slots in the crate. Always lift the
crate from the front and center.
2. You can also use skates to maneuver the crate around tight corners or to move the crate laterally.
Move the printer over ramps
WARNING! Do not exceed the maximum incline if you must move the printer up or down a ramp. Failure to
respect the maximum incline could damage the printer.
WARNING! Slopes steeper than 5% may cause serious damage to the printer.

B. Move the printer to a new site (transport temperature above
5°C/41°F)
1. Remove the covers: see 1. Remove the covers on page 911.
2. Prepare the printer by removing the printheads, intermediate tanks, ink cartridges, printhead cleaning
roll, and aerosol filters: see 2. Prepare the printer on page 912.
3. Unplug the electrical system: see 4. Unplug the electrical system on page 916.
4. Remove the computer, monitor, keyboard, and mouse: see 5. Remove the computer, monitor,
keyboard, and mouse on page 918.
5. Set up the printer: see 6. Set up the printer on page 919.
6. Insert additional packaging: see 7. Insert additional packaging on page 923.
7. Raise the feet: see 8. Raise the feet on page 925.
8. Set up the printer in the final position: see 9. Set up the printer in the final position on page 925.
9. Replace the printer on the pallet: see 11. Replace the printer on the pallet on page 927.
10. Replace the crate packaging: see 12. Replace the crate packaging on page 931.
11. Move the crate: see 13. Move the crate on page 934.
ENWW B. Move the printer to a new site (transport temperature above 5°C/41°F) 935
C. Move the printer to the same site (with ramps or steps)
1. Remove covers on the left-hand side.
● Rear left panel assembly on page 636 (four T-20 screws)
● Bottom left panel assembly on page 636 (four T-20 screws)
2. Remove covers on the right-hand side.
● Rear right panel assembly on page 624 (two T-20 screws)
● Front right door + hinges (six T-20 screws)
3. Prepare the printer by removing the printheads, intermediate tanks, ink cartridges, printhead cleaning
roll, and aerosol filters: see 2. Prepare the printer on page 912.
5. Remove the computer, monitor, keyboard, and mouse: see 5. Remove the computer, monitor,
keyboard, and mouse on page 918.
6. Clean the condensation collector bottle: see Clean the condensation collector box on page 920.
7. Unplug the ink quick connector and the cables from the printer side and unroute them, so that they are
not attached to the ISM structure.
8. Remove the condensation collector tube with clamps. Be careful: it may have condensation in it.
9. Remove the ISM.
10. Insert additional packaging: see 7. Insert additional packaging on page 923.
11. Set up the printer in the final position: see 9. Set up the printer in the final position on page 925.

D. Move the printer to the same site (no ramps, no steps)
ISM flush and clean a single ink system line
1. On the right-hand side, open the Front right panel assembly on page 623 (two T-20 screws).
3. Close the right front panel (two T-20 screws).
4. Raise the feet: see 8. Raise the feet on page 925.
5. Push the printer from the outside corners of the top covers.
ENWW D. Move the printer to the same site (no ramps, no steps) 937
A Cables
This appendix contains a chapter from another manual, describing the printer cables in detail. See the table
of contents on the next page.
938 Appendix A Cables ENWW

8 Cables
CZ056-50001 – Engine PCA 1 to Engine Adaptor PCA 1. ............................................................................... 5
CZ056-50002 - Engine PCA 2 to Engine Adaptor PCA 2. ............................................................................... 6
CZ056-50003- Engine Adaptor PCA Power Cable. PSU to Engine Adaptor PCA. ......................................... 9
CZ056-50004 -Am80 CS Data Cable. Carriage Sensor PCA to PH Interconnect 2. ..................................... 10
CZ056-50005 -Am80 Carriage Encoder Cable. PH Interconnect 2 to Carriage Encoder. .......................... 11
CZ056-50006 - Am80 CS_P Power Cable. Carriage Sensor PCA to PH Interconnect 2. ............................. 12
CZ056-50186 - Am80 CS_P Power Cable Short. Carriage Sensor PCA to PH interconnect 2. ................... 13
CZ056-50187 - Am80 CS_P Power Cable Long. Carriage Sensor PCA to PH interconnect 1. .................... 14
CZ056-50007 - Am80 Sensor Box Cable. Sensors Interconnect PCA to Carriage Sensors PCA. ............... 15
CZ056-50008 - Am80 Pens Prime Cable. Carriage Sensors PCA to Pens Primer....................................... 16
CZ056-50143 – Pen Primer Extension Cable. Pens Primer Cable to Carriage Sensors PCA. ..................... 17
CZ056-50188 –Primer Extension Cable Long. Pens Primer Cable to Carriage Sensors PCA..................... 18
CZ056-50189 –Primer extension cable short. Pens primer cable to Carriage Sensors PCA. .................... 19
CZ056-50010 –Am80 Tetris Cable. Tetris to Carriage Sensors PCA. .......................................................... 20
CZ056-50011 –Am80 Spray to Spray Cable. PH interconnect 1 to PH interconnect 1. ............................. 21
CZ056-50137 – Curing Encoder Daisy Chain Cab......................................................................................... 22
CZ056-50013 – Drying Left Module Cable. Drying Module Left to Drying PCA. ......................................... 23
CZ056-50016 – LAN Drying PCA to Drying PCA. Drying PCA to Drying PCA................................................ 24
CZ056-50144 – Smear Sensor Cable. Smear Sensor to Drying PCA. .......................................................... 25
CZ056-50167 – Drying Harness. .................................................................................................................. 26
CZ056-50205 – Drying Right Module Cable. Drying Module Right to Drying PCA. .................................... 27
CZ056-50208 – Drying Fan Harness. Drying Harness to Drying Fans. ....................................................... 28
CZ056-50183 – Temp Extension Curing. ..................................................................................................... 29
CZ056-50019 – Am80 LAN Curing PCA to Curing. Curing PCA to Curing PCA. ............................................ 30
CZ056-50120 –Fan Cable. Curing PCA to Fan Assy...................................................................................... 31
CZ056-50124 – Ground Strip. Curing PCA to Scan Beam. ........................................................................... 32
CZ056-50121 – Heater Cable. Curing PCA to Heater Assy. ......................................................................... 33
Chapter 8 Cables 1

CZ056-50021 – DD Daisy Chain Cable. DD Encoder Cable to DD Mux PCA. ................................................ 34

CZ056-50115 – DD Encoder Cable. DD Encoder to DD Daisy Chain Cable. ............................................... 35+
CZ056-50116 – Capping Motor Encoder Cable. PCA_Motor drv.J4 to Motor 17W.Encoder. ..................... 36
CZ056-50156 – Capping Power in T Extensor Ca. Capping Power in T Cable to DC Rail-PCA_Motor drv.J3.37
CZ056-50069 – DD Extensor. (DD Connector) DD Cable Assy to DD Mux PCA. .......................................... 38
CZ056-50175 – DD Extensor Short. (DD Connector) DD Cable Assy to DD Mux PCA. ................................ 38
CZ056-50176 – DD Extensor Long. (DD Connector) DD Cable Assy to DD Mux PCA. ................................. 40
CZ056-60301 – Bump Sensor Assy. ............................................................................................................. 41
CZ056-50029 – Ism Actuators Cable. ISS PCA n to Ink Valves & UI PCA n. ................................................. 42
CZ056-50030 – Ism Actuators Cable Lite. ISS PCA n to Ink Valves & UI PCA n. .......................................... 43
CZ056-50031 – Intermediate Tanks Cable. ISS PCA to ISS PCA. ................................................................ 44
CZ056-50032 – Ink Cartridge Cable. UI PCA to ISS PCA. .............................................................................. 45
CZ056-50033 – Supply Engagement Cable. ISS PCA to Ink Supply Connector. ......................................... 46
CZ056-50034 – Ink Sensors Cable. Ink Sensors PCA to ISS PCA. ................................................................ 47
CZ056-50182 – Ism Actuators Cable 3. ISS PCA n to Ink Valves & UI PCA n. .............................................. 48
CZ056-50177 – Long PPS Data Bridge Cable. PCA_Motor drv.J1 to PCA_Motor drv.J1. ........................... 49
CZ056-50178 – Short PPS Data Bridge Cable. PCA_Motor drv.J1 to PCA_Motor drv.J1. .......................... 50
CZ056-50035 – Am80_Motor drv PPS Motor Cable. RS485 PCA to 55 W PPS Motor. ............................... 51
CZ056-50146 –Motor drv.J4 to RS485 PCA. Motor DRV to RS485 PCA. ..................................................... 52
CZ056-50149 –PPS Power in T Extensor Cable. PPS Power in T Cable to DC ral-PCA Motor drv.J3. ........ 53
CZ056-50169 –Mechanical Switch-Short Cable. Motor drv.J4 to RS485 PCA. ........................................... 54
CZ056-50036 – Am80_MA Encoder Cable. Ma Encoder to OMAS PCA........................................................ 55
CZ056-50037 – Am80 Vacuum PCA to Vacuum Pump. Vacuum PCA to Vacuum Pump. ........................... 56
CZ056-50038 – Am80 Vacuum ctrl to OMAS Encoder. OMAS Controller PCA to Vacuum PCA. ................. 57
CZ056-50039 – Am80 Vacuum ctrl -- OMAS ctrl. OMAS Controller PCA to Vacuum PCA. ......................... 58
CZ056-50040 – Am80 Vacuum Control to OMAS PO. OMAS Controller PCA to Vacuum PCA. ................... 59
CZ056-50127 – Pinch Sensor Cable. ............................................................................................................ 60
CZ056-50179 – Short Pinch Sensor Cable. .................................................................................................. 60
CZ056-50041 – IPS to e-Box LAN Cable. IPS to e-Box. ............................................................................... 61
CZ056-50044 – Am80 Drying Data Cable. Ebox Interconnect PCA to Drying PCA. .................................... 62
CZ056-50045 – Am80 Scan Axis Motor Data. Ebox Interconnect PCA to Scan Axis Brushless Motor. ..... 63
CZ056-50046 – Am80 MI Motor Data. Ebox Interconnect PCA to MI Motor. .............................................. 64
CZ056-50048 – Am80 MA Motor Data. Ebox Interconnect PCA to MAMOMF Motor. ................................. 65
Chapter 8 Cables 2

CZ056-50050 – Am80 Vacuum Pump Control. Ebox Interconnect PCA to Vacuum PCA. .......................... 66
CZ056-50051 – Am80 Curing Data Cable. Ebox Interconnect PCA to Curing PCA. .................................... 67
CZ056-50052 – TUR Motor drv to PP Cable. Ebox to PPS Motor drv. J1. ................................................... 68
CZ056-50053 – Ids i2c Data. Ebox Interconnect PCA to ISS PCA. ............................................................... 69
CZ056-50054 – Am80 Capping Station Motor drv PCA. Ebox Interconnect PCA to SVS.Capping. ............ 70
CZ056-50112 – Cable Drop Mux PPA. Ebox Interconnect PCA to DDU MUX PCA. ...................................... 71
CZ056-50056 – Am80 Delta Drying Control. Ebox Interconnect PCA to Delta PWM ctrl. .......................... 72
CZ056-50138 – E-box to E-Cabinet PCA Cable. Ebox Interconnect PCA to e-Cab PCA. ............................. 73
CZ056-50057 – Am80 Vacuum Supply PCA. Ebox Interconnect PCA to Vacuum PCA. .............................. 74
CZ056-50058 – Mi Encoder Cable. Ebox Interconnect PCA to Mi Motor. .................................................... 75
CZ056-50059 – Mo Encoder Cable. Ebox Interconnect PCA to Mo Motor. ................................................. 76
CZ056-50060 – R2ff Encoder Cable. Ebox Interconnect PCA to MF Motor. ............................................... 77
CZ056-50157 – E-box to WW Cable. Ebox Interconnect PCA to SVS.WW. ................................................. 78
CZ056-50063 – Am80 42 V Trailing Cable. 42V PSU#1 to Carriage Sensors PCA. ..................................... 79
CZ056-50065 – Am80 Power Trailing Cable. Delta to Drying Module........................................................ 80
CZ056-50066 – Am80 24V Drying Carriage. 24V PSU#1 to Drying PCA. .................................................... 81
CZ056-50067 – Am80 Curing Power. Delta to Curing Module. ................................................................... 82
CZ056-50068 – Am80 24V Curing PCA. 24V PSU#1 to Curing PCA............................................................. 83
CZ056-50142 – Sax Power Cable. Braking Resistor Enclosure to Scan Axis Motor................................... 84
CZ056-50118 – Ma Motor Power Cable. 42V PSU#2 to MIMAMF Motor. .................................................... 85
CZ056-50114 – Vacuum Pump Power. Power Transformer to Vacuum Pump. ........................................ 86
CZ056-50071 – 24V IDS e-Cabinet. E-Cabinet to ISS PCA. .......................................................................... 87
CZ056-50072 – E-Cabinet to PPS Power Cable. E-Cabinet to PPS. ............................................................ 88
CZ056-50180 – TUR Power Cable. E-Cabinet to Media Floor Motor drv. ................................................... 89
CZ056-50076 – E-Cabinet to WW Power Cable. E-Cabinet to SVS.WW. ..................................................... 90
CZ056-50077 – Service Station Power Cable. E-Cabinet to SVS.Capping. ................................................. 91
CZ056-50139 – Emergency Stop Buttons to SR c. Stop Buttons to SR Assembly. ................................... 92
CZ056-50132 – Interlock to SR Cable. SR Assembly to Interlocks. ........................................................... 92
CZ056-50140 – Interlock to Interlock Cable. Interlocks to Interlocks. ..................................................... 93
CZ056-50141 – Interlock to e-Cabinet PCA Cable. Interlocks to e-Cabinet PCA. ...................................... 93
CZ056-50130 – Braking Resistor Enclosure Assy. Braking Resistor Enclosure Input to Output. ............ 94
CZ056-50131 – Braking Resistor Enclosure Power. 42V PSU#1 to Braking Resistor Enclosure. ............ 95
CZ056-50150 – PE Trailing Cable. Delta Sinewave to Drying PCA. ............................................................ 95
Chapter 8 Cables 3

CZ056-50160 – Capping Power in T Cable. E-Cabinet to SVS.Capping....................................................... 96

CZ056-50151 – PPS Power in T cable. PPS to PPS. ..................................................................................... 97
CZ056-50161 – WW Power in T Cable. E-Cabinet to SVS.WW. .................................................................... 98
CZ056-50125 – Curing Ground. E-Cabinet to Curing. .................................................................................. 99
CZ056-50170 – TUR Sensor Cable. Motor DRV PCA to Optical Sensors. .................................................. 100
CZ056-50163 – Ebox to Motor drv TUR Cable. Ebox Interconnect PCA to Media Floor Motor drv.J1. .... 101
CZ056-50198 – Am80 Slinky to Color PH Board. Slinky to Color PH Board. ............................................ 102
CZ056-50199 – Am80 Slinky to PT PH Board Data. Slinky to PT PH Board. ............................................ 103
CZ056-50202 – OMAS Controller to Sensor Cable. OMAS Controller PCA to OMAS Sensor. ................... 104
CZ056-50203 – TUR Sensor Single Cable. TUR PCA to Motor drv. ............................................................ 105
CZ056-50204 – R2FF Lever Switch Single Cable. Motor drv to Switches Pinch Roll to Floor. ................ 105
CZ056-50210 – TUR Sensor Cable Long. TUR Sensor to TUR Sensor PCA. .............................................. 106
CZ056-50250 – ISS Daisy Chain Cable. IDS1 to IDS2. ................................................................................ 107
CZ056-50255 – Fiberoptics Monolayer Tube. ........................................................................................... 108
CZ056-50217 – ISS Termination Cable. ..................................................................................................... 109
CZ056-50213 – Ground Strip Short. ........................................................................................................... 110
CZ056-50218 – AC Curing to Curing. Curing PCA to Curing. ...................................................................... 111
CZ056-50219 – DC Curing to Curing. Curing PCA to Curing. ...................................................................... 112
CZ056-50225 – E-Cab-Mi Resistor Power Cable. E-Cabinet to Mi Resistor. ............................................ 113
CZ056-50226 – Mi Resistor-Mi Motor Power Cable. Mi Resistor to Mi motor. ......................................... 114
CZ056-50227 – E-Cab-Mo Resistor Power Cable. E-Cabinet to Mo Resistor. .......................................... 115
CZ056-50228 –Mo Resistor-Mo Motor Power. Mo Resistor to Mo Motor. ............................................... 116
CZ056-50229 –E-Cab-Mf Resistor Power Cable. E-Cabinet to MF resistor.............................................. 117
CZ056-50230 –Mf Resistor-Mf Motor Power Cable. MF Resistor to MF Motor. ....................................... 118
CZ056-50220 –Engine PCA-Slinky Long. Engine PCA to Slinky. ............................................................... 119
CZ056-50221 –ATX to Slinky Power Cable. ATX to Slinky. ....................................................................... 120
CZ056-50222 –Formatter Output Data Cable. Alba to E-box. .................................................................. 121
Chapter 8 Cables 4

CZ056‐50001 – Engine PCA 1 to Engine Adaptor PCA 1.
Subsystem: E-BOX ASSEMBLY. Quantity: 2x printer.
Included in the following service parts:

 CZ056-67083 (Ebox cables kit serv).

Chapter 8 Cables 5

CZ056-50002 - Engine PCA 2 to Engine Adaptor PCA 2.


 CZ056-67083 (Ebox cables kit serv).
Chapter 8 Cables 6



 CZ056-67083(EBOX cables KIT SERV) .
Chapter 8 Cables 7



 CZ056-67083 (EBOX cables KIT SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 8

CZ056-50003- Engine Adaptor PCA Power Cable. PSU to Engine Adaptor PCA.

Chapter 8 Cables 9

CZ056-50004 -Am80 CS Data Cable. Carriage Sensor PCA to PH Interconnect 2.

Subsystem: CARRIAGE. Quantity: 3x printer.

 CZ056-67015 (Carriage cables KIT SERV).
 CZ056-67020 (Carriage assy SERV) .
Chapter 8 Cables 10

CZ056-50005 -Am80 Carriage Encoder Cable. PH Interconnect 2 to Carriage Encoder.

Subsystem: CARRIAGE. Quantity: 1x printer.

 CZ056-67010 (Carriage encoder assy SERV).
 CZ056-67020 (Carriage assy SERV).
 CZ056-67392 (Extended Uptime kit for HP Latex).
Chapter 8 Cables 11

CZ056-50006 - Am80 CS_P Power Cable. Carriage Sensor PCA to PH Interconnect 2.

Subsystem: CARRIAGE. Quantity: 2 x printer.

 CZ056-67015(Carriage cables KIT SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 12

CZ056-50186 - Am80 CS_P Power Cable Short. Carriage Sensor PCA to PH interconnect 2.

Chapter 8 Cables 13

CZ056-50187 - Am80 CS_P Power Cable Long. Carriage Sensor PCA to PH interconnect 1.

Chapter 8 Cables 14

CZ056-50007 - Am80 Sensor Box Cable. Sensors Interconnect PCA to Carriage Sensors PCA.

 CZ056-67007 (SOL mechanism SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 15

CZ056-50008 - Am80 Pens Prime Cable. Carriage Sensors PCA to Pens Primer.
Subsystem: PRIMER. Quantity: 7 x printer.

 CZ056-67396 (Primer and latch SERV).
 CZ056-67310 (Service Maintenance Kit).
Chapter 8 Cables 16

CZ056-50143 – Pen Primer Extension Cable. Pens Primer Cable to Carriage Sensors PCA.

Chapter 8 Cables 17

CZ056-50188 –Primer Extension Cable Long. Pens Primer Cable to Carriage Sensors PCA.

CZ056-67020 (Carriage assy SERV).
CZ056-67310 (Service Maintenance Kit).
CZ056-67396 (Primer and latch SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 18

CZ056-50189 –Primer extension cable short. Pens primer cable to Carriage Sensors PCA.
Subsystem: Carriage. Quantity: 2 x printer.

Chapter 8 Cables 19

CZ056-50010 –Am80 Tetris Cable. Tetris to Carriage Sensors PCA.


 CZ056-67006 (Line sensor SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 20

CZ056-50011 –Am80 Spray to Spray Cable. PH interconnect 1 to PH interconnect 1.


Chapter 8 Cables 21

CZ056-50137 – Curing Encoder Daisy Chain Cab.

Subsystem: MEDIA DRYING. Quantity: 1 x printer.

Chapter 8 Cables 22

CZ056-50013 – Drying Left Module Cable. Drying Module Left to Drying PCA.

 CZ056-67027 (Drying cable left SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 23

CZ056-50016 – LAN Drying PCA to Drying PCA. Drying PCA to Drying PCA.

Chapter 8 Cables 24

CZ056-50144 – Smear Sensor Cable. Smear Sensor to Drying PCA.


Chapter 8 Cables 25

CZ056-50167 – Drying Harness.


 CZ056-67028 (Drying module right SERV).
 CZ056-67029 (Drying module left SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 26

CZ056-50205 – Drying Right Module Cable. Drying Module Right to Drying PCA.

CZ056-67020 (Carriage assy SERV).
CZ056-67026 (Drying cable right SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 27

CZ056-50208 – Drying Fan Harness. Drying Harness to Drying Fans.


 CZ056-67023 (Drying fan case right SERV).
 CZ056-67024 (Drying fan case left SERV).
 CZ056-67028 (Drying module right SERV).
 CZ056-67029 (Drying module left SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 28

CZ056-50183 – Temp Extension Curing.

Subsystem: CURING. Quantity: 2 x printer.

 CZ056-67055 (Curing temperature sensor kit).
 CZ056-67056 (Curing left module SERV).
 CZ056-67057 (Curing right module SERV).
 CZ056-67058 (Curing general module SERV).
 CZ056-67223 (Curing assy SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 29

CZ056-50019 – Am80 LAN Curing PCA to Curing. Curing PCA to Curing PCA.

 CZ056-67314 (Curing cables KIT SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 30

CZ056-50120 –Fan Cable. Curing PCA to Fan Assy.


 CZ056-67056 (Curing left mdule SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 31

CZ056-50124 – Ground Strip. Curing PCA to Scan Beam.



Chapter 8 Cables 32

CZ056-50121 – Heater Cable. Curing PCA to Heater Assy.


Chapter 8 Cables 33

CZ056-50021 – DD Daisy Chain Cable. DD Encoder Cable to DD Mux PCA.

Subsystem: SERVICE STATION. Quantity: 1 x printer.

 CZ056-67041 (SVS drop detector module SERV).
 CZ056-67042 (SVS assy SERV).
 CZ056-67043 (SVS DD cable KIT SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 34

CZ056-50115 – DD Encoder Cable. DD Encoder to DD Daisy Chain Cable.


 CZ056-67034 (SVS encoder sensor and support).
Chapter 8 Cables 35

CZ056-50116 – Capping Motor Encoder Cable. PCA_Motor drv.J4 to Motor 17W.Encoder.


 CZ056-67312 (SVS cables KIT SERV).
 CZ056-67313 (Web Wipe cables KIT SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 36

CZ056-50156 – Capping Power in T Cable to DC Rail-PCA_Motor drv.J3.


Chapter 8 Cables 37

CZ056-50069 – DD Extensor. (DD Connector) DD Cable Assy to DD Mux PCA.


CZ056-50175 – DD Extensor Short. (DD Connector) DD Cable Assy to DD Mux PCA.
Chapter 8 Cables 38


Chapter 8 Cables 39

CZ056-50176 – DD Extensor Long. (DD Connector) DD Cable Assy to DD Mux PCA.


Chapter 8 Cables 40

CZ056-60301 – Bump Sensor Assy.


 CZ056-67033 (SVS switch SERV).
 CZ056-67392 (Extended Uptime kit for HP Lat).
Chapter 8 Cables 41

CZ056-50029 – Ism Actuators Cable. ISS PCA n to Ink Valves & UI PCA n.
Subsystem: INK DELIVERY SYSTEM. Quantity: 1 x printer.

 CZ056-67075 (ISM cables KIT SERV).

Chapter 8 Cables 42

CZ056-50030 – Ism Actuators Cable Lite. ISS PCA n to Ink Valves & UI PCA n.


Chapter 8 Cables 43

CZ056-50031 – Intermediate Tanks Cable. ISS PCA to ISS PCA.


 CZ056-67078 (ISM ink circuit module SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 44

CZ056-50032 – Ink Cartridge Cable. UI PCA to ISS PCA.


 CZ056-67299 (ISM K cartridge connector w tu).
 CZ056-67300 (ISM Y cartridge connector w tu).
 CZ056-67301 (ISM C cartridge connector w tu).
 CZ056-67302 (ISM M cartridge connector w tu).
 CZ056-67303 (ISM LC cartridge connector w t).
 CZ056-67304 (ISM LM cartridge connector w t).
 CZ056-67305 (ISM PT cartridge connector w t).
Chapter 8 Cables 45

CZ056-50033 – Supply Engagement Cable. ISS PCA to Ink Supply Connector.


 CZ056-67299 (ISM K cartridge connector w tu).
 CZ056-67300 (ISM Y cartridge connector w tu).
 CZ056-67301 (ISM C cartridge connector w tu).
 CZ056-67302 (ISM M cartridge connector w tu).
 CZ056-67303 (ISM LC cartridge connector w t).
 CZ056-67304 (ISM LM cartridge connector w t).
 CZ056-67305 (ISM PT cartridge connector w t) .
Chapter 8 Cables 46

CZ056-50034 – Ink Sensors Cable. Ink Sensors PCA to ISS PCA.


 CZ056-67070 (ISM pressure sensor assy SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 47

CZ056-50182 – Ism Actuators Cable 3. ISS PCA n to Ink Valves & UI PCA n.


Chapter 8 Cables 48

CZ056-50177 – Long PPS Data Bridge Cable. PCA_Motor drv.J1 to PCA_Motor drv.J1.
Subsystem: PPS. Quantity: 1 x printer.

 CZ056-67068 (PPS power cables set SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 49

CZ056-50178 – Short PPS Data Bridge Cable. PCA_Motor drv.J1 to PCA_Motor drv.J1.

Chapter 8 Cables 50

CZ056-50035 – Am80_Motor drv PPS Motor Cable. RS485 PCA to 55 W PPS Motor.

 CZ056-67069 (PPS encoder cables set SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 51

CZ056-50146 –Motor drv.J4 to RS485 PCA. Motor DRV to RS485 PCA.


 CZ056-67069 (PPS encoder cables KIT SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 52

CZ056-50149 –PPS Power in T Extensor Cable. PPS Power in T Cable to DC ral-PCA Motor drv.J3.

Chapter 8 Cables 53

CZ056-50169 –Mechanical Switch-Short Cable. Motor drv.J4 to RS485 PCA.


 CZ056-67065 (Mechanical switch SERV).
 CZ056-67318 (Pinch switch assy SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 54

CZ056-50036 – Am80_MA Encoder Cable. Ma Encoder to OMAS PCA.

Subsystem: CABLES KIT. Quantity: 1 x printer.

 CZ056-67094 (MA motor encoder cable SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 55

CZ056-50037 – Am80 Vacuum PCA to Vacuum Pump. Vacuum PCA to Vacuum Pump.

 CZ056-67109 (Vacuum pump cable KIT SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 56

CZ056-50038 – Am80 Vacuum ctrl to OMAS Encoder. OMAS Controller PCA to Vacuum PCA.
Subsystem: OMAS EE. Quantity: 1 x printer.

 CZ056-67316 (OMAS and Vacuum cables KIT SER).
 CZ056-67321 (OMAS and Vacuum PCA SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 57

CZ056-50039 – Am80 Vacuum ctrl -- OMAS ctrl. OMAS Controller PCA to Vacuum PCA.

Chapter 8 Cables 58

CZ056-50040 – Am80 Vacuum Control to OMAS PO. OMAS Controller PCA to Vacuum PCA.

Chapter 8 Cables 59

CZ056-50127 – Pinch Sensor Cable.

Subsystem: PINCH MECH. Quantity: 3 x printer.

 CZ056-67198 (ISS PCA SERV).
 CZ056-67392 (Extende uptime kit for HP Lat).
CZ056-50179 – Short Pinch Sensor Cable.

Subsystem: PINCH MECH. Quantity: 1 x printer.

Chapter 8 Cables 60

CZ056-50041 – IPS to e-Box LAN Cable. IPS to e-Box.


 CZ056-67266 (eBox LAN cable to IPS SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 61

CZ056-50044 – Am80 Drying Data Cable. Ebox Interconnect PCA to Drying PCA.
Subsystem: IMPELLING SYSTEM. Quantity: 1 x printer.

 CZ056-67150 (Impelling drying data cable SE).
 CZ056-67319 (Complete chain and tubes SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 62

CZ056-50045 – Am80 Scan Axis Motor Data. Ebox Interconnect PCA to Scan Axis Brushless Motor.

 CZ056-67368 (SAX motor data cable SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 63

CZ056-50046 – Am80 MI Motor Data. Ebox Interconnect PCA to MI Motor.


 CZ056-67274 (MI data cable SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 64

CZ056-50048 – Am80 MA Motor Data. Ebox Interconnect PCA to MAMOMF Motor.


 CZ056-67280 (MF data cable SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 65

CZ056-50050 – Am80 Vacuum Pump Control. Ebox Interconnect PCA to Vacuum PCA.

Chapter 8 Cables 66

CZ056-50051 – Am80 Curing Data Cable. Ebox Interconnect PCA to Curing PCA.

Chapter 8 Cables 67

CZ056-50052 – TUR Motor drv to PP Cable. Ebox to PPS Motor drv. J1.

Chapter 8 Cables 68

CZ056-50053 – Ids i2c Data. Ebox Interconnect PCA to ISS PCA.


Chapter 8 Cables 69

CZ056-50054 – Am80 Capping Station Motor drv PCA. Ebox Interconnect PCA to SVS.Capping.

Chapter 8 Cables 70

CZ056-50112 – Cable Drop Mux PPA. Ebox Interconnect PCA to DDU MUX PCA.

Chapter 8 Cables 71

CZ056-50056 – Am80 Delta Drying Control. Ebox Interconnect PCA to Delta PWM ctrl.

 CZ056-67030 (Drying AC/AC converter control).
Chapter 8 Cables 72

CZ056-50138 – E-box to E-Cabinet PCA Cable. Ebox Interconnect PCA to e-Cab PCA.

Chapter 8 Cables 73

CZ056-50057 – Am80 Vacuum Supply PCA. Ebox Interconnect PCA to Vacuum PCA.

Chapter 8 Cables 74

CZ056-50058 – Mi Encoder Cable. Ebox Interconnect PCA to Mi Motor.


 CZ056-67275 (MI Encoder cable SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 75

CZ056-50059 – Mo Encoder Cable. Ebox Interconnect PCA to Mo Motor.


 CZ056-67278 (MO Encoder cable SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 76

CZ056-50060 – R2ff Encoder Cable. Ebox Interconnect PCA to MF Motor.


 CZ056-67281 (MF encoder cable SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 77

CZ056-50157 – E-box to WW Cable. Ebox Interconnect PCA to SVS.WW.


Chapter 8 Cables 78

CZ056-50063 – Am80 42 V Trailing Cable. 42V PSU#1 to Carriage Sensors PCA.


 CZ056-67146 (Impelling 42V power cable SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 79

CZ056-50065 – Am80 Power Trailing Cable. Delta to Drying Module.


 CZ056-67145 (Impelling drying AC cable SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 80

CZ056-50066 – Am80 24V Drying Carriage. 24V PSU#1 to Drying PCA.


 CZ056-67148 (Impelling 12V power cable SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 81

CZ056-50067 – Am80 Curing Power. Delta to Curing Module.


 CZ056-67259 (Curing power input AC cables K).
Chapter 8 Cables 82

CZ056-50068 – Am80 24V Curing PCA. 24V PSU#1 to Curing PCA.


 CZ056-67256 (Curing power input DC cables K).

Chapter 8 Cables 83

CZ056-50142 – Sax Power Cable. Braking Resistor Enclosure to Scan Axis Motor.

 CZ056-67367 (SAX motor power cables KIT SER).
Chapter 8 Cables 84

CZ056-50118 – Ma Motor Power Cable. 42V PSU#2 to MIMAMF Motor.


 CZ056-67271 (MA power cable SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 85

CZ056-50114 – Vacuum Pump Power. Power Transformer to Vacuum Pump.


 CZ056-67109 (Vacuum pump cable KIT SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 86

CZ056-50071 – 24V IDS e-Cabinet. E-Cabinet to ISS PCA.


Chapter 8 Cables 87

CZ056-50072 – E-Cabinet to PPS Power Cable. E-Cabinet to PPS.


Chapter 8 Cables 88

CZ056-50180 – TUR Power Cable. E-Cabinet to Media Floor Motor drv.


 CZ056-67224 (R2FF TUR assy SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 89

CZ056-50076 – E-Cabinet to WW Power Cable. E-Cabinet to SVS.WW.


Chapter 8 Cables 90

CZ056-50077 – Service Station Power Cable. E-Cabinet to SVS.Capping.


Chapter 8 Cables 91

CZ056-50139 – Emergency Stop Buttons to SR c. Stop Buttons to SR Assembly.

CZ056-50132 – Interlock to SR Cable. SR Assembly to Interlocks.


 CZ056‐67405 (Safety interlock SERV).
 CZ056‐67392 (Extended Uptime Kit for HP Lat).

Chapter 8 Cables 92

CZ056-50140 – Interlock to Interlock Cable. Interlocks to Interlocks.


 CZ056-67405 (Safety interlock SERV).
 CZ056-67392 (Extended Uptime Kit for HP Lat).
CZ056-50141 – Interlock to e-Cabinet PCA Cable. Interlocks to e-Cabinet PCA.


 CZ056-67405 (Safety interlock SERV).
 CZ056-67392 (Extended Uptime Kit for HP Lat).
Chapter 8 Cables 93

CZ056-50130 – Braking Resistor Enclosure Assy. Braking Resistor Enclosure Input to Output.

 CZ056-67273 (MI power cable KIT SERV).
 CZ056-67276 (MO power cable KIT SERV).
 CZ056-67279 (MF power cable KIT SERV).
 CZ056-67367 (SAX motor power cables KIT SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 94

CZ056-50131 – Braking Resistor Enclosure Power. 42V PSU#1 to Braking Resistor Enclosure.

 CZ056-67367 (SAX motor power cables KIT SERV).
CZ056-50150 – PE Trailing Cable. Delta Sinewave to Drying PCA.


 CZ056-67149 (Impelling PE cable SERV).
Chapter 8 Cables 95

CZ056-50160 – Capping Power in T Cable. E-Cabinet to SVS.Capping.


 CZ056-67312 (SVS Cables KIT SERV).

Chapter 8 Cables 96

CZ056-50151 – PPS Power in T cable. PPS to PPS.


Chapter 8 Cables 97

CZ056-50161 – WW Power in T Cable. E-Cabinet to SVS.WW.

Subsystem: WEB WIPE. Quantity: 1 x printer.

Chapter 8 Cables 98

CZ056-50125 – Curing Ground. E-Cabinet to Curing.



Chapter 8 Cables 99

CZ056-50170 – TUR Sensor Cable. Motor DRV PCA to Optical Sensors.


Chapter 8 Cables 100

CZ056-50163 – Ebox to Motor drv TUR Cable. Ebox Interconnect PCA to Media Floor Motor drv.J1.


CZ056-50198 – Am80 Slinky to Color PH Board. Slinky to Color PH Board.



CZ056-50199 – Am80 Slinky to PT PH Board Data. Slinky to PT PH Board.



CZ056-50202 – OMAS Controller to Sensor Cable. OMAS Controller PCA to OMAS Sensor.

 CZ056-67316 (OMAS and Vacuum cable KIT SER).

CZ056-50203 – TUR Sensor Single Cable. TUR PCA to Motor drv.

Subsystem: ROLL TO FLOOR. Quantity: 1 x printer.

 CZ056-67172 (R2FF Pinch Mech. Assy SERV).
CZ056-50204 – R2FF Lever Switch Single Cable. Motor drv to Switches Pinch Roll to Floor.

 CZ056-67172 (R2FF Pinch Mech. Assy SERV).

CZ056-50210 – TUR Sensor Cable Long. TUR Sensor to TUR Sensor PCA.

 CZ056-67172 (R2FF pinch mech. assy SERV).


CZ056-50250 – ISS Daisy Chain Cable. IDS1 to IDS2.



CZ056-50255 – Fiberoptics Monolayer Tube.


 CZ056-67366 (Fiber optics trailing cable SERV).

CZ056-50217 – ISS Termination Cable.



CZ056-50213 – Ground Strip Short.




CZ056-50218 – AC Curing to Curing. Curing PCA to Curing.



CZ056-50219 – DC Curing to Curing. Curing PCA to Curing.



CZ056-50225 – E-Cab-Mi Resistor Power Cable. E-Cabinet to Mi Resistor.


 CZ056-67273 (MI Power cable KIT SERV).

CZ056-50226 – Mi Resistor-Mi Motor Power Cable. Mi Resistor to Mi motor.


 CZ056-67273 (MI power cable KIT SERV).

CZ056-50227 – E-Cab-Mo Resistor Power Cable. E-Cabinet to Mo Resistor.



CZ056-50228 –Mo Resistor-Mo Motor Power. Mo Resistor to Mo Motor.



CZ056-50229 –E-Cab-Mf Resistor Power Cable. E-Cabinet to MF resistor.



CZ056-50230 –Mf Resistor-Mf Motor Power Cable. MF Resistor to MF Motor.



CZ056-50220 –Engine PCA-Slinky Long. Engine PCA to Slinky.

Subsystem: E-BOX ASSEMBLY. Quantity: 7 x printer.


CZ056-50221 –ATX to Slinky Power Cable. ATX to Slinky.



CZ056-50222 –Formatter Output Data Cable. Alba to E-box.


 CZ056-67266 (e-Box LAN cable to IPS SERV).

Index
S 10.02.00:21 112 10.04.42:15 136

System error codes 10.02.00:41 113 10.04.51:15 137
01.01.00:01 89 10.03.01:01 113 10.04.52:15 137
01.02.01:02 89 10.03.01:18 114 10.04.61:15 138
01.02.01:76 90 10.03.01:19 115 10.04.62:15 138
01.02.02:02 90 10.03.02:01 115 10.04.71:15 139
01.02.02:76 91 10.03.02:10 116 10.04.72:15 139
01.02.03:02 92 10.03.02:18 116 10.05.11:40 140
01.02.03:76 92 10.03.02:19 117 10.05.12:40 140
01.02.04:02 93 10.03.03:01 118 10.05.13:40 141
01.02.04:76 93 10.03.03:10 118 10.05.14:40 141
01.06.01:04 94 10.03.03:18 119 10.05.15:40 142
01.06.01:09 95 10.03.03:19 119 10.05.21:40 142
01.06.01:10 95 10.03.04:01 120 10.05.22:40 143
01.06.02:04 96 10.03.04:10 121 10.05.31:40 143
01.06.02:09 96 10.03.04:18 121 10.05.32:40 144
01.06.02:10 97 10.03.04:19 122 10.05.33:40 144
01.06.03:04 98 10.03.05:01 122 10.05.34:40 145
01.06.03:09 98 10.03.05:10 123 10.05.41:40 146
01.06.03:10 99 10.03.05:18 124 10.05.42:40 146
01.06.04:04 100 10.03.05:19 124 10.05.51:40 147
01.06.04:09 100 10.03.06:01 125 10.05.52:40 147
01.06.04:10 101 10.03.06:10 126 10.05.62:40 148
01.50.00:20 101 10.03.06:18 126 10.05.72:40 148
01.50.00:21 102 10.03.06:19 127 10.06.09:40 149
01.51.00:01 103 10.03.07:01 127 10.07.07:40 149
01.60.00:01 103 10.03.07:10 128 10.08.00:01 149
01.60.00:03 104 10.03.07:18 128 10.09.00:01 150
01.60.00:75 104 10.03.07:19 129 10.10.01:01 150
01.60.01:03 105 10.04.11:15 130 10.10.01:40 151
01.60.02:03 105 10.04.12:15 130 10.10.01:41 151
01.60.03:03 106 10.04.13:15 131 10.10.01:42 152
10.01.01:01 106 10.04.14:15 131 10.10.01:43 152
10.01.02:01 107 10.04.15:15 132 10.10.01:96 153
10.01.03:01 107 10.04.21:15 132 10.10.02:01 150
10.01.04:01 108 10.04.22:15 133 10.10.02:40 151
10.02.00:01 108 10.04.31:15 133 10.10.02:41 151
10.02.00:03 109 10.04.32:15 134 10.10.02:42 152
10.02.00:04 109 10.04.33:15 134 10.10.02:43 152
10.02.00:11 110 10.04.34:15 135 10.10.02:96 153
10.02.00:13 110 10.04.35:15 135 11.01.01:01 153
10.02.00:15 111 10.04.35:40 145 11.01.01:04 154
10.02.00:20 112 10.04.41:15 136 11.02.01:09 154
ENWW Index 939

11.03.01:04 155 15.09.01:01 166 16.14.01:15 178
11.04.01:09 155 15.09.01:92 167 16.14.02:15 178
11.04.02:09 155 15.09.02:01 168 16.14.03:15 178
11.04.03:09 155 15.09.02:92 168 16.14.04:15 178
11.04.04:09 155 15.09.03:01 169 16.14.05:15 178
11.04.05:09 155 15.09.04:01 169 16.14.06:15 178
11.04.06:09 155 16.01.00:86 170 16.15.01:01 179
11.04.07:09 155 16.01.01:01 170 16.15.02:01 179
11.05.01:01 156 16.01.01:02 171 16.15.03:01 179
11.05.01:04 156 16.01.01:03 171 16.15.04:01 179
11.05.02:01 156 16.01.01:04 172 16.15.05:01 179
11.05.02:04 156 16.01.01:05 172 16.15.06:01 179
11.05.03:01 156 16.01.01:09 173 16.20.01:20 179
11.05.03:04 156 16.01.01:10 173 16.20.02:20 179
11.05.04:01 156 16.01.01:41 174 16.20.03:20 179
11.05.04:04 156 16.01.02:01 170 16.20.04:20 179
11.05.05:01 156 16.01.02:02 171 16.20.05:20 179
11.05.05:04 156 16.01.02:03 171 16.20.06:20 179
11.05.06:01 156 16.01.02:04 172 16.21.01:01 180
11.05.06:04 156 16.01.02:05 172 16.21.02:01 180
11.05.07:01 156 16.01.02:09 173 16.21.03:01 180
11.05.07:04 156 16.01.02:10 173 16.21.04:01 180
15.01.01:01 157 16.01.02:41 174 16.21.05:01 180
15.01.01:02 157 16.01.03:41 174 16.21.06:01 180
15.01.01:03 158 16.01.04:41 174 16.23.01:01 180
15.01.01:05 158 16.01.05:41 174 16.23.02:01 180
15.01.01:09 159 16.01.06:41 174 16.23.03:01 180
15.01.01:86 159 16.02.01:01 175 16.23.04:01 180
15.01.01:94 160 16.02.01:04 175 16.23.05:01 180
15.01.01:95 160 16.02.01:10 175 16.23.06:01 180
15.01.02:01 157 16.02.01:21 176 16.24.01:15 181
15.01.02:02 157 16.02.02:01 175 16.24.02:15 181
15.01.02:03 158 16.02.02:04 175 16.24.03:15 181
15.01.02:05 158 16.02.02:10 175 16.24.04:15 181
15.01.02:09 159 16.02.02:21 176 16.24.05:15 181
15.01.02:86 159 16.03.00:03 177 16.24.06:15 181
15.01.02:94 161 16.10.01:20 177 16.25.01:01 181
15.01.02:95 161 16.10.02:20 177 16.25.02:01 181
15.02.01:01 162 16.10.03:20 177 16.25.03:01 181
15.02.02:01 162 16.10.04:20 177 16.25.04:01 181
15.03.01:01 162 16.10.05:20 177 16.25.05:01 181
15.03.01:42 162 16.10.06:20 177 16.25.06:01 181
15.03.02:01 162 16.11.01:01 177 16.33.01:01 182
15.03.02:42 162 16.11.02:01 177 16.33.01:09 182
15.06.01:01 163 16.11.03:01 177 16.33.02:01 182
15.06.02:01 163 16.11.04:01 177 16.33.02:09 182
15.07.01:01 163 16.11.05:01 177 16.33.03:01 182
15.07.01:93 164 16.11.06:01 177 16.33.03:09 182
15.07.02:01 163 16.13.01:01 178 16.33.04:01 182
15.07.02:93 164 16.13.02:01 178 16.33.04:09 182
15.08.01:15 165 16.13.03:01 178 16.33.05:01 182
15.08.02:15 165 16.13.04:01 178 16.33.05:09 182
15.08.03:15 166 16.13.05:01 178 16.33.06:01 182
15.08.04:15 166 16.13.06:01 178 16.33.06:09 182
940 Index ENWW

16.91.01:01 183 22.04.07:71 188 41.04.00:21 208
16.91.02:01 183 22.04.07:72 189 41.04.00:51 208
16.91.03:01 183 22.05.01:30 189 41.04.00:60 209
16.91.04:01 183 22.05.01:83 190 41.04.00:61 209
16.91.05:01 183 22.05.02:30 189 41.05.00:01 209, 210
16.91.06:01 183 22.05.02:83 190 41.05.00:18 210
21.01.00:08 183 22.05.03:30 189 41.05.00:21 211
21.02.00:01 184 22.05.03:83 190 41.05.00:60 211
21.02.00:02 184 22.05.04:30 189 41.05.00:61 212
21.02.00:91 185 22.05.04:83 190 41.07.00:51 212
21.05.11:04 185 22.05.05:30 189 41.10.01:08 213
22.00.00:73 186 22.05.05:83 190 43.01.00:01 213
22.01.01:76 187 22.05.06:30 189 43.02.00:04 213
22.01.02:06 186 22.05.06:83 190 43.03.00:04 214
22.02.11:06 187 22.05.07:30 189 43.03.00:30 214
22.02.11:07 188 22.05.07:83 190 43.03.00:83 215
22.02.12:06 187 22.06.00:06 191 46.00.01:83 215
22.02.12:07 188 22.07.01:01 191 46.01.01:01 216
22.02.21:06 187 22.07.01:04 192 46.01.02:01 216
22.02.21:07 188 22.07.02:01 191 46.01.03:01 216
22.02.22:06 187 22.07.02:04 192 46.01.04:01 216
22.02.22:07 188 22.10.01:30 192 46.01.05:01 216
22.02.31:06 187 22.10.01:31 193 46.01.06:01 216
22.02.31:07 188 22.10.01:32 194 46.01.07:01 216
22.02.32:06 187 22.10.01:83 195 46.02.01:06 216
22.02.32:07 188 22.10.01:86 195 46.02.02:06 216
22.02.41:06 187 22.10.01:87 195 46.02.03:06 216
22.02.41:07 188 22.10.01:88 196 46.02.04:06 216
22.02.42:06 187 22.10.01:95 197 46.02.05:06 216
22.02.42:07 188 22.10.02:30 192 46.02.06:06 216
22.02.51:06 187 22.10.02:32 194 46.02.07:06 216
22.02.51:07 188 22.11.01:01 197 46.03.01:04 217
22.02.52:06 187 22.11.01:96 198 46.03.02:04 217
22.02.52:07 188 22.11.02:01 197 47.00.00:50 217
22.02.61:06 187 41.00.00:62 198 47.00.00:80 218
22.02.61:07 188 41.00.00:85 198 47.00.00:82 218
22.02.62:06 187 41.00.01:62 199 47.01.01:01 218
22.02.62:07 188 41.01.00:01 199, 200 47.01.01:02 219
22.02.71:06 187 41.01.00:18 200 47.01.02:01 220
22.02.71:07 188 41.01.00:21 200 47.01.02:02 221
22.02.72:06 187 41.01.00:51 201 47.01.04:01 221
22.02.72:07 188 41.01.00:60 201 47.01.04:02 222
22.04.01:71 188 41.01.00:61 202 47.01.05:01 223
22.04.01:72 189 41.02.00:01 202, 203 47.01.05:02 224
22.04.02:71 188 41.02.00:08 203 47.04.00:01 224
22.04.02:72 189 41.02.00:18 203 47.05.11:04 224
22.04.03:71 188 41.02.00:21 204 47.05.12:04 225
22.04.03:72 189 41.02.00:60 205 47.05.14:04 225
22.04.04:71 188 41.02.00:61 205 47.05.15:04 226
22.04.04:72 189 41.02.00:83 206 48.00.00:01 226
22.04.05:71 188 41.02.00:84 206 48.01.01:01 227
22.04.05:72 189 41.02.00:85 206 48.01.01:02 228
22.04.06:71 188 41.04.00:01 207 48.01.02:01 227
22.04.06:72 189 41.04.00:18 207 48.01.02:02 228
ENWW Index 941

48.01.03:01 227 52.02.01:11 249
48.01.03:02 228 52.02.01:12 249
48.01.04:01 227 52.02.02:11 249
48.01.04:02 228 52.02.02:12 249
48.02.01:40 229 52.02.03:11 249
48.02.02:40 229 52.02.03:12 249
48.02.03:40 229 52.02.04:11 249
48.02.04:40 229 52.02.04:12 249
49.01.01:01 230 52.03.00:01 250
49.01.02:01 230 52.04.00:02 251
49.02.01:02 231 52.04.00:08 251
49.02.01:07 232 52.05.12:04 252
49.02.01:09 232 55.00.00:02 253
49.02.02:02 233 55.01.00:83 253
49.02.02:07 233 55.02.00:83 254
49.02.02:09 233 58.00.00:01 254
49.03.01:09 234 58.00.00:02 255
49.03.01:31 234 58.00.00:75 255
49.03.01:32 235 58.00.00:85 256
49.03.01:33 235 58.02.00:02 256
49.03.02:09 236 58.03.00:04 256
49.03.02:31 236 58.03.00:84 257
49.03.02:32 237 58.03.00:85 257
49.03.02:33 237 61.01.00:85 258
50.00.01:00 238 61.02.00:01 258
50.00.01:89 239 61.09.00:04 259
50.01.01:00 239 79.03 260
50.01.01:01 240 79.04 260
50.01.01:77 240 79.04.00:00 261
50.03.01:01 241 79.X:04 260
50.03.01:03 242 86.00.00:02 261
50.07.01:04 242 86.01.00:01 262
51.01.00:92 243 86.01.00:02 263
51.02.00:92 244 86.03.01:92 263
51.03.00:92 244 86.03.02:92 263
51.04.00:92 245 86.04.00:08 264
52.00.00:01 245
52.00.00:83 246
52.00.00:91 246
52.01.01:01 246
52.01.01:83 247
52.01.02:01 246
52.01.02:83 247
52.01.03:01 246
52.01.03:83 247
52.01.04:01 246
52.01.04:83 247
52.01.05:01 246
52.01.05:83 247
52.01.06:01 246
52.01.06:83 247
52.01.07:01 246
52.01.07:83 247
52.02.00:83 248
942 Index ENWW

HP Latex 3000 Printer SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HP Latex 3000 Printer SM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HP Latex 3000 Printer SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Latex 3000 Printer

Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for errors

The Warning symbol calls attention to a

The Caution symbol calls attention to an

1 Using this manual .......................................................................................................................................... 1

2 Printer systems ............................................................................................................................................. 3

3 Safety requirements .................................................................................................................................... 76

6 Service parts and diagrams ........................................................................................................................ 378

7 Removal and installation ........................................................................................................................... 419

8 Call Me @HP .............................................................................................................................................. 905

9 Moving the printer ..................................................................................................................................... 909

Appendix A Cables ........................................................................................................................................ 938

Index ........................................................................................................................................................... 939

Some diagnostic tests or calibrations must be performed after removing a component.

6: Service parts and diagrams

● Official service part names

● Illustrations of the service parts

Use this chapter whenever you need to order a service part.

7: Removal and installation

9: Move the printer

● Within the same site, over flat ground

● To a different site, with no possibility of freezing

2 Chapter 1 Using this manual ENWW

● Electrical system: E-cabinet

● Print to Paper Space (PPS)

● Service station: capping and drop detection

● Printhead cleaning system

● Subsystem block diagrams

The e-cabinet has 2 input AC power lines:

● The IPS power line (single phase)

L1-N, L2-N, L3-N

● Low line voltage: a 200–240 V line-to-line system separated into:

L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1

● High current single- or bi-phase at 240 V line-to-line separated into:

L1-L2, L1-L2, L1-L2

The picture below shows an example of the terminal block configured:

4 Chapter 2 Printer systems ENWW

ENWW Electrical system: E-cabinet 5

F1..6 AC PSU Drying

Chapter 2 Printer systems

ACB-8 24V eCabinet

Main switch and PC switch

AC protections: ACBs and RCDs (GFIs)

● 1 line for the e-box, with ACB protection

Safety circuit and contacts

Power jumper and power transformer

DC power and the e-cabinet PCA

ENWW Electrical system: E-cabinet 7

Detailed electrical diagram

8 Chapter 2 Printer systems ENWW

NOT ACB-2 L-LF3 3 4 L3-CUR

L-PSU2 L-PSU6 Curing

IEC-3 [2.5mm2] TWISTED PAIRS Interconnect

240V CTRL PSU2

DC-12AWG [4mm2] motor

PSU1 Brushless Brushless

Safety Relay subassembly PSU-1 motor

TB-5 DC-22AWG DC-22AWG DC-12AWG [4mm2]

TWISTED DC-22AWG [0.34mm2] PSU5 PCA #1 PCA #2